![Instruction Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Control Panel [PDF]](https://pdfs.asia/img/200x200/instruction-operation-and-maintenance-manual-unit-control-panel.jpg)
10 0 50 MB
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone
INSTRUCTION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR BCL 456/A, STEAM TURBINE SNC 1-3)
Volume VII Unit Control Panel
NUOVO PIGNONE JOBS N.P. SERIAL NUMBERS CUSTOMER
: : :
SERVICE PLANT LOCATION
: :
PLANT ITEM N°
: :
MANUFACTURER
:
110.2313/190.0533 C13466 – V01694 COLT ENGINEERING FOR SUNCOR ENERGY RECYCLE GAS COMPRESSOR NORTH OF FORT McMURRAY, ALBERTA (CANADA) VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATERS 207K-300
GE Oil & Gas Nuovo Pignone
Via F. Matteucci, 2 50127 Florence - Italy Telephone (055) 423211 Telefax (055) 4232800
10-08-E MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 01/01
110.2313/190.0533
P. 1-1
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL Status and description of the revisions
Stato di revisione
Data
Eseguito
Controllato
Approvato
Descrizione della revisione
Revision Status
Date
Prepared
Checked
Approved
Description of the revisions
00
05.10.08
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone Palma Pedrazzi E. Paoletti S.
01
13.01.08
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone Pedrazzi E. Paoletti S. Palma
02
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone 02.11.09 Pedrazzi E Paoletti S Palma
03
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone 24.05.10 Pedrazzi E Paoletti S Palma
04
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone 08.07.10 Pedrazzi E Paoletti S Palma
05
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone 05.08.10 Pedrazzi E Paoletti S Palma
06
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone 25.06.12 Pedrazzi E Paoletti S Palma
07
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone 22.03.13 Pedrazzi E Paoletti S Palma
FIRST ISSUE – O.&M.M. REVISED VOLUME VI ACCORDING TO INSTRUMENT LIST SOS 9954140 SECOND ISSUE- O.& M.M. (ACCORDING TO CUSTOMER COMMENTS) THIRD ISSUE- O.& M.M. (ACCORDING TO CUSTOMER COMMENTS) FOURTH ISSUE- O.& M.M. (ACCORDING TO CUSTOMER COMMENTS) FIFTH ISSUE- O.& M.M. (ACCORDING TO CUSTOMER COMMENTS) SIXTH ISSUE- O.& M.M. (ACCORDING TO CUSTOMER COMMENTS) CERTIFIED FINAL MANUAL
This Operating and Maintenance Manual is and contains confidential and proprietary information of Nuovo Pignone S.r.l, as properly indicated which shall not be used or disclosed to others, except with the written permission of Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. Within this Manual, subsections of sub supplier documentation are present as originally received.
DATE: 05-10-2008 MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 01/01
N.P. JOB: 110.2313/190.0533
P. 1-1
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone After Sales Service
Introduction to Nuovo Pignone after-sales service Nuovo Pignone organization is structured in such a way as to guarantee a comprehensive and effective after-sales service for its machinery. Here is briefly described the organization of the company, manufacturer and on a continuos effort to meet customers needs.
based on its experience as a
Being aware of the importance of maintenance in all operational activities, Nuovo Pignone deals with its various aspects from the design stage, through: - the use of design criteria that enhance maintainability, - the continuos research of innovative solutions to improve availability, - the selection of components and advanced technologies to enhance equipment maintenance, - the inspection procedures and topics, to be used in connection with a detailed schedule of maintenance operations, - the choice of the spare parts to be kept in stock, optimizing investment cost vs plant downtime. In late years Nuovo Pignone after-sales service has also been brought up-to-date to guarantee the best support to its customers. In more details: - worldwide, where Nuovo Pignone has been operating for tens of years, the structure consists of a service network which is the natural expansion of the "Customer Service Division" in Florence. There are localized Service Units and authorized Service Shops at strategic points of the world, to cover areas where plants with Nuovo Pignone machinery are located. - in Florence, ( Headquarters) specialized depts. which are active from the receipt of the enquiry, to the issue of the offer and, in case of an order, to the management of all activities connected with the job, up to its completion. This organization, available for all customers, ensures a qualified interface to refer to for any requirements in connection with operation/maintenance of machinery. The names and address for localized Service Units and authorized Service Shops are available at GE POWER SYSTEM WEB SITE (URL: http://www.gepower.com) selecting from its home page the following choices: Business sites/GE Nuovo Pignone/Sales Organization (complete URL: http://www.gepower.com/geoilandgas/oil_gasbrands/nuovo_pignone/sales_org.html). In the section “Service” of this page are available the names and addresses of localized Service Units divided into geographical areas. In the above indicated web site, in the section “New Units” are available the names and addresses of the Branch Offices Abroad divided into geographical areas.
06-01-E MOD. INPR/SVIL/D.L./P.F. 06/01
After-Sales Service
P. 1-2
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone After Sales Service
Nuovo Pignone has been managing for many years special after sales "Support Packages". These packages typically include: - diagnostic analysis of machines in operation - consultancy in scheduling maintenance based on operational requirements - field maintenance - refurbishing of worn components - original spare parts supplies - technical expertise in updating machines Product engineering departments are staffed with experts in analysing machinery operating data, who provide users with technical consulting services aimed at optimizing use of equipment. The entire service organization guarantees users get the most suitable maintenance to restore original design conditions and the total information relevant to all technological innovations introduced in Nuovo Pignone's products as applicable to the installed machinery. Full flexibility allows us to adapt each maintenance contract upon User's needs.Service Agreements in force today, range from "On call" basis to "Global Service"
06-01-E MOD. INPR/SVIL/D.L./P.F. 06/01
After-Sales Service
P. 2-2
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone
VOLUMES INDEX
The complete instructions of the compressor unit are subdivided into ten Volumes as follows:
- DESCRIPTION & OPERATION - CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR
Volume I
- COMPRESSOR DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST
Volume II
- DESCRIPTION & OPERATION - STEAM TURBINE
Volume III
- TURBINE DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST
Volume IV
- AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Volume V
- INSTRUMENTATION
Volume VI
- UNIT CONTROL PANEL
Volume VII
- PLC CONTROL SYSTEM
Volume VIII
- OVERSPEED MONITORING SYSTEM
Volume IX
- VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM
Volume X
Each Volume is subdivided into Sections. Each Section can be subdivided into Paragraphs and/or Parts.
10-08-E MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00
.2313/.0533
P. 1-1
g GE Oil & Gas
Volume VII
Nuovo Pignone
N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533
UNIT CONTROL PANEL MAIN INDEX
The included documentation proper of this instructions manual is subdivided into two sections as follows:
NAME
SECTION
DRAWINGS
A
MANUALS
B
10-08-E MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00
.2313/.0533
P. 1-1
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone Volume VII
Section A
N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533
DRAWINGS
POS.
NAME
DRAWING N°
1
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
SOS 9971645/4 (VP207-K-3029-1)
2
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
SOS 9971994/3 (VP207-K-3056-1)
3
CONTROL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
SOS 9971568/3 (VP207-K-3009-1)
4
CONTROL SYSTEM I/O LIST
SOS 9972092/3 (VP207-K-3039-1)
5
FUNCTIONAL LOGIC DIAGRAM
SOS 9971642/4 (VP207-K-3037-1)
6
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM LAYOUT AND MAIN COMPONENTS LIST
SOS 9971691/3 (VP207-K-3016-1)
7
CAUSE/EFFECT DIAGRAM
SOS 9971591/3 (VP207-K-3012-1)
8
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP DIAGRAM
SOS 9972157/3 (VP207-K-3057-1)
9
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL LAYOUT
SOS 9971701/3 (VP207-K-3014-1)
10
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
11
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL WIRING DIAGRAM
10-08-E MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00
.2313/.0533
SOS 9971995/3 SOS 9972008/3 (VP207-K-3056-1)
P. 1-1
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone Volume VII
POS.
Section A
NAME
DRAWING N°
12
STEAM TURBINE GOVERNOR CONFIGURATION WORK SHEET
SOL 45717/4
13
HMI VIDEO PAGES
10-08-E MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00
SOS 9971996/3 (VP207-K-3075-1)
.2313/.0533
P. 1-1
INDEX: 1. SCOPE .................................................................................................................4 2. CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL DESCRIPTION............................................ 4 3. MACHINERY PREPARATION FOR START-UP............................................ 6 3.1 AUXILIARIES START-UP PROCEDURE ............................................................................................6 3.2 LUBE OIL TANK HEATERS ............................................................................................................6 3.3 MAIN & STAND-BY LUBE OIL PUMPS ..........................................................................................7 3.3.1 Lube Oil Stand-by pump - Manual procedure......................................................................7 3.3.2 Lube Oil Stand-by pump - Automatic procedure..................................................................7 3.4 RUN DOWN / COOL DOWN TANK ....................................................................................................................8 3.5 LUBE OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL...................................................................................................................8 3.6 ELECTRIC TURNING GEAR ................................................................................................................................9
4. SEAL GAS SYSTEM CONTROL....................................................................... 10 4.1 FILTERED GAS SUPPLY (SEAL GAS) .............................................................................................10 4.2 SEALS LEAKAGE MONITORING ....................................................................................................10 4.3 NITROGEN INJECTION (SEPARATION GAS)...................................................................................11 4.4 SECONDARY SEAL GAS (PURGE GAS) ..........................................................................................11 4.5 SEAL GAS CONDITIONING SKID ..................................................................................................11
5. STEAM TURBINE OPERATING PROCEDURE ............................................ 13 5.1 TURBINE STEAM VALVE CONTROL ..............................................................................................13 5.2 TEST BEFORE START-UP ..............................................................................................................16 5.3 START-UP PROCEDURE ...............................................................................................................18 5.3.1 Semiautomatic Start-up procedure .....................................................................................19 5.3.2 Automatic Start-up..............................................................................................................21 5.3.3 Sequence after Start-up.......................................................................................................23 5.4 CONTROLLED STOP ....................................................................................................................23 5.5 OVER-SPEED TEST ......................................................................................................................24
6. EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN ............................................................................. 25 6.1 MACHINE SHUT DOWN ...............................................................................................................25 6.2 ISOLATION AND BLOWDOWN VALVES SEQUENCE DURING SHUTDOWN .......................................26 6.3 TRIP SOLENOID VALVES AUTOMATIC TEST ................................................................................27
7. OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM ........................................................... 29 8. BENTLY NEVADA MACHINE MONITORING SYSTEM............................ 29 9. PROCESS GAS CIRCUIT VALVE SEQUENCE ............................................. 30 9.1 GENERAL FEATURES ..................................................................................................................30 9.2 PERFORMANCE CONTROLLER .....................................................................................................31 9.3 PRESSURE OVERRIDE CONTROLLER (POC)................................................................................32
10. COMPRESSOR SUCTION & DISCHARGE ISOLATION VALVES ......... 33
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
2 of 63
11. GE O&G CONTROLLERS DESCRIPTION .................................................. 34 11.1 PROCESS CONTROL............................................................................................................34 11.1.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................34 11.1.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW....................................................................................................35 11.1.2.1 Process Controller.........................................................................................................36 11.1.2.2 Pressure Override Control ............................................................................................38 11.1.2.3 Coupling Control ...........................................................................................................38 Selection Logic.........................................................................................................................................................................38 Start/Stop sequence...................................................................................................................................................................41 Valve Repositioning .................................................................................................................................................................42
11.2 ANTISURGE CONTROL ..............................................................................................................44 11.2.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................44 11.2.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW....................................................................................................46 11.2.2.1 Antisurge Control Law ..................................................................................................49 11.3 STEAM TURBINE GOVERNOR ....................................................................................................53 11.3.1 Steam Turbine (Note 1).....................................................................................................53 11.3.1.1 Operation Mode.............................................................................................................53 Turbine Start.............................................................................................................................................................................54 Normal Stop..............................................................................................................................................................................57 Emergency Shutdown...............................................................................................................................................................59
11.3.1.2 Controllers.....................................................................................................................60 Speed Controll ..........................................................................................................................................................................60 Cascade Control........................................................................................................................................................................62
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
3 of 63
1. SCOPE The present document outlines the Operating and Control Philosophy of a gas compressor Set, driven by a Steam Turbine SNC1 3 model. 2. CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL DESCRIPTION The following main parts compose the Control System: 1. Distributed Control System (DCS) (supplied by customer)
2. 3. 4. 5.
Motor Control Center (MCC) (supplied by customer) Unit Control Panel (UCP) (supplied by N.P.) Local Control Panel (LCP) (supplied by N.P.) Safety Instrumented System (SIS) (supplied by customer)
The Unit Control Panel consists of the following major components: 1. PLC Triconex TMR for all logic sequences, Antisurge and Performance Controllers, Steam Turbine Speed Controller. 3. Bently Nevada (3500 series) monitoring system for Radial Vibration, Axial Displacement, Temperatures. 4. Turbine Overspeed System Bently Nevada 3500 Series. 5. Personal Computer System with monitor, keyboard and printer (REMOTE HMI). Video pages are developed with Wonderware software.
NOTES:
The Bently Nevada System transmits data to PLC system in serial link and trip signals to PLC in hardwired mode.
The auxiliary Equipment sequences (pumps, motors, etc.) commads are managed by LOC.HMI and REM.HMI.
A selection “LOC.HMI/REM.HMI mode” (HS 3200) located on local and remote HMI enables the operator to select whether to perform the auxiliares control from LOC.HMI or REM.HMI.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
4 of 63
The LCP Panel (installed off skid, near the compressor train) is provided with the following instrumentation:
- Compressor Start/Stop (HS 3118, HS 3084) ESD (XHS 3120) and ESD reset Push Button (HS 3085).
- Compressor Running (XL 3314), Permissive OK (XL 3313), Common Alarm (XL 3312) and Trip Indications (XL 3311). - Suction valve open/close push button (XHSO 3030, XHSC 3030). - Discharge valve open/close push button (XHSO 3031, XHSC 3031). - Suction valve open/close indication (XZLO 3030, XZLC 3030). - Discharge valve open/close indication (XZLO 3031, XZLC 3031). - Suction/Discharge pressure indication (PI 3095B, PI 3096B). - Suction flow indication (FI 3290B). - Lube oil, control oil pressure indication (PI 3403E, PI 3471B). - Seal gas diff. pressure indication (PDI 3461B). - A/S valve position indication (UZI 3293B). - Turbine speed indication (SI 3049E). STEAM TURBINE SPEED CONTROL - Maint. By-pass enable (XHS 3316) - Lube Oil Tank Heater ON/OFF (NCR 3741) - Open Steam Turbine trip valve (XHSO 3315) pushbutton - Turbine starting sequence auto/semi (HS 3117) selector switch - Turbine speed control local/remote (SHS 3116) enable process controller selector switch - Minimum Governor Speed / Load (HS 3115) selector switch - Autostart sequence Halt (HS 3113) pushbutton - Autostart sequence continue (HS 3114) pushbutton - Speed setpoint raise (SHS 3111) pushbutton - Speed setpoint lower (SHS 3112) pushbutton - Turning gear auto/off (HS 3126) selector switch - Lamp Test (HS 3111) - Operator Interface Terminal (LOCAL HMI) – GE Wolverine Panel PC with Wonderware software for Video pages. - Emergency shutdown (XHS 3120) pullbutton – red mushroom type
Maintenance By-Pass Switches can only be operated from DCS. The Speed Controller commands are managed by LCP, LOC/REM. HMI and DCS. The time remaining on all timers are shown on HMI video pages.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
5 of 63
3. MACHINERY PREPARATION FOR START-UP 3.1 Auxiliaries start-up procedure
The auxiliary equipments shall be started-up as follow; A) Lube oil Tank Electric heaters B) Main lube oil pump C) Turbine barring gear D) Seal Gas system conditioning skid auxiliaries startup E) Turbine seals system steam NOTE: All auxiliaries are under PLC control. The auxiliaries start-up sequence is relative to the first machine start-up; during following start-ups, all auxiliaries start-up may not be needed because not strictly mandatory or already running. TC 3740 must be put to Auto Mode with 122° F setpoint before auxiliary Start-up sequence. 3.2 Lube Oil Tank Heaters
The lube oil tank heaters are managed by the ON/OFF hand selector installed on LCP (NCR 3741).HS 3200 LOC/REM must be in LOC position to operate from LCP or LOC.HMT. When “OFF” mode is selected the heaters are OFF. When “ON mode” is selected, the heaters are controlled by TE 3744, TSHH 3745A, TSHH 3745B and LT 3404 as follows : - TSL 3744
Lube Oil Reservoir Temperature Low causes the activation of the heaters. (Temperature 77°F)
- TSH 3744
Lube Oil Reservoir Temperature High causes the deactivation of the heaters. (Temperature > 104°F)
If one of following condition occurs the heater must be CUT-OUT .
- TSHH 3745A/B - LSL 3404
Lube Oil Heater cut-out switch (Temperature>185°F)(MCC) for 207RM- 330A/B Lube oil reservoir low level
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
6 of 63
3.3 Main & Stand-by Lube Oil Pumps
There are two lube oil pumps, KG 330A and KG 330B. electric pump and KG 330A is a pump driven by a turbine.
3 REVISED > KG WHERE 330B is 50°F); - PSL 3449 Compr. seal gas (N2) inlet not low pressure (press. > 65 Psig). Stand-by lube oil pump (KG 330B) can be manually started from LOC.HMI, REM.HMI by relevant Start command (NCR 3201 on LOC/REM.HMI). Stand-by oil pump can be manually stopped from LOC.HMI, REM.HMI, DCS by relevant stop commands (NCS 3201B on LOC/REM.HMI, NCS 3201A on DCS). 3.3.2 Lube Oil Stand-by pump - Automatic procedure Lube oil stand-by pump starts automatically when turbine speed is not zero (SSLL 3101) and one of the following conditions occur: - PSL 3411 - PSL 3403
Lube oil delivery pumps low pressure (press. < 116 Psig); Lube oil header low pressure (press. < 23.21 Psig);
NOTE: 1. The stand-by pump keeps on running until an action is taken by the operator 2. The stand-by pump can only be stopped if both pressures are normal or the turbine is stopped.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
7 of 63
3.4 Run Down / Cool Down Tank
The Run Down / Cool Down Tank is a system that guarantees a safe amount of oil to the machine during its deceleration after the detection of lube oil system trip caused by both pump failures. Three phases must be described in order to define the behaviour of the Run Down Tank: o The filling-up phase:
during which the tank is quickly filled up of oil through valve XV 3302. In detail LT-3401 controls the XV 3302 valve according to following indications:
LSL 3401=0
Run Down Tank low level is detected, then XV-3302 is
opened (solenoid energized). LSL 3401=1
o
o
Run Down Tank low level is not detected, then XV 3302 is closed (solenoid de-energized).
The feeding phase:
during which the tank is kept filled with a small stream of oil through the orifice FO 3702. This is done to maintain the tank oil temperature close to the lube oil system temperature.
The emptying phase: o
during which the tank is emptied to the machines. This event will occur only in case of an emergency shutdown for loss of lube oil pressure.
3.5 Lube Oil Temperature Control
The lube oil control temperature is performed by mixing two streams of oil at different temperatures: the cold one from lube oil coolers and the warm one directly from lube oil pumps delivery. TC 3740 on PLC regulates the warm oil flow through TV 3740 in order to maintain the resulting mixed lube at the desired set point (122 °F).
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
8 of 63
3.6 Electric Turning Gear
Turning Gear can be enabled manually by actuating the Turning gear auto/off (HS 3126) selector switch on LCP. ETG must be enabled (switched in AUTO HS 3126) during machine operation in order for it to be ready to perform steam turbine cooldown phase in case of a TRIP or a normal shutdown . Upon detection of ZEROSPEED condition the ETG will be started from the PLC automatically. A soft start-stop panel (supplied by GENP and installed in auxiliary electrical room) will provide electric power to the turning gear increasing its speed gradually up to the full speed. Electric Turning Gear is automatically stopped if at least one of the following conditions occurs: -
Turbine speed higher than 300rpm. Low low L.O. Pressure PSLL 3403. Turbine start command HS 3126 is turned to OFF position on the LCP (directly to ETG Panel)
Alarm functions are provided on the control system for: - TURNING GEAR STOPPED DURING COOLDOWN PHASE - XA 3238 - TURNING GEAR DISENGAGED – XA 3237 - TURNING GEAR NOT STARTED – XA 3239 Once stopped, ETG disengages automatically due to the mechanical clutch operation when steam turbine speed is higher than turning gear speed.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
9 of 63
4. SEAL GAS SYSTEM CONTROL The dry gas seal system, is composed by 3 different parts: the 1st one has the scope to inject filtered seal gas to the seals, the 2nd one is to monitor the gas leakage and the proper working of seals, the 3rd one has the scope to inject a separation gas (N2) for a safe and certain separation between the seals area and the lube oil area. 4.1 Filtered gas supply (seal gas)
Seal gas is taken from compressor discharge. It is connected by piping to the panel where it is filtered by a special compact design double filter. Filters condition is monitored by a differential pressure transmitter (PDT 3465) with high differential pressure alarm set at 21.8 Psi and by a local differential pressure gauge (PDG 3464). The control valve PDV 3461 controlled by a PDC (seals-suction diff. pressure and balancing line diff. pressure) (PDC 3461), controls filtered buffer gas in order to have a constant flow injection on both seals at each side of the compressor. This assures that gas seals work with filtered gas only. The controlled differential pressure and the balancing drum pressure are monitored by Differential Pressure Transmitter (PDT 3461) with high differential pressure alarm set at 65.3 Psi (PDAH 3461). 4.2 Seals leakage monitoring
The leakages passing through the primary seals are connected by piping to the seal gas panel, where an orifice (FO 3772 and FO 3773) on each side is tuned to maintain a differential pressure of 4.35 Psi with normal leakage and under normal operating condition. This differential pressure across the orifices is needed in order to have a certain flow passing through the secondary seals in order to properly cool the secondary seal ring. Across each orifice there are pressure differential transmitters with relevant PDAL and PDAH alarms. If primary seal leakage increases, an alarm shall be activated by PDT 3453 and PDT 3454). In case of first seal face damage, a shutdown signal is activated by a high high pressure trip detected by (PT 3455A,B,C and PT 3460A,B,C) (2oo3system) set at 72.52 Psig. A shutdown with compressor depressurization will occur (see Depressurization Sequence - Chapter 11). The monitoring of the secondary seal’s condition is carried out with the transmitters on the primary vent lines. A low PDAL alarm shall be generated using the pressure differential transmitter signals. This alarm indicates that secondary seal leakage has increased. The secondary vent lines are simply connected to an atmospheric vent on safe location, directly from the compressor connections.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
10 of 63
4.3 Nitrogen injection (separation gas)
Purpose of nitrogen injection is to keep the lube oil separated from process gas on tertiary seal ring. The nitrogen flow is controlled by a pressure regulator (PCV 3448) and injected on both sides of compressor. Nitrogen to be injected as separation gas is taken from the plant network. Separation gas for tertiary seal always needs filtration. For this purpose a double filter, with two transfer valves (3 ways) inlet and outlet, is installed inside the panel. Filter condition is monitored by a differential pressure transmitter (PDT 3447) . The injection is carried out adjusting the pressure with a regulating valve PCV 3448 on the N2 inlet header. The correct injection on each side is guaranteed by (FO 3768 and FO 3769). With low signal of the pressure transmitter (PT 3449) Lube Oil Pump is prohibited to start-up (press. < 65 Psig). Pressure transmitter PT 3451 is installed on the separation gas header. On detection of low low pressure on separation gas header (press. < 44 Psig) an alarm is activated and a shutdown of compressor is activated.
4.4 Secondary seal gas (purge gas)
Purpose of the intermediate nitrogen injection is to avoid the process gas passing through the secondary ring from the primary one, reaching the secondary vent and, consequently, the atmosphere. 4.5 Seal Gas conditioning Skid
The seal gas conditioning system is designed to remove liquids in a gas stream and then heat the gas stream above the dew point. The intent is to remove liquids that may be present at discharge temperature and pressure, and raise the temperature high enough to avoid any additional liquid from condensing in the dry gas seal control panel, the dry gas seal, or anywhere in-between. A provision is also included to boost seal gas flow during times when the compressor discharge pressure is not enough to supply sufficient flow to the seals, such as during startup, shutdown, and recycle. Hydrogen is taken from compressor discharge at discharge pressure and temperature and enters the seal gas conditioning package at connection TP 160 (see SOS8628460 sh. 1). Hydrogen enters the Cleanpac seal gas liquid separator (KV 302). Stage one of liquid separation is accomplished by passing the gas through a vane type separator where bulk liquid will be removed from the gas stream and fall to the bottom of the lower liquid holding chamber. Stage two of separation is through a coalescing filter element that will remove fine aerosol mists, and particulate down to 3 micron. Coalesced liquid will gather in the upper liquid holding chamber.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
11 of 63
Liquid levels are monitored using level transmitters (LT 3490A and LT 3490B). Differential pressure across the Cleanpac is measured using PDT 3442. An alarm set at 10 Psi will signal maintenance is required. Gas exits the top of the vessel, free of liquids and particulate larger than 3 microns. If the compressor is generating less than 72.5 Psid of differential pressure (using PT 3096 and PT 3095), the Ampliflow seal gas intensifier (K 301) will be activated by the control system opening the XY 3303 solenoid valve which will open an air actuated block valve (XV 3303). Drive gas from connection TP 165 will then be regulated (PCV 3440), and enter the Ampliflow seal gas intensifier drive piston. The Ampliflow will then cycle. Seal gas from the outlet of the Cleanpac will enter the driven or process side of the Ampliflow where the reciprocating action will boost seal gas flow through the system. If the compressor is generating more than 72.5 Psi of differential pressure, the Hydrogen will bypass the Ampliflow through a check valve.
After exiting, or bypassing, the Ampliflow the seal gas enters an electric seal gas heater (207RM 334). Here, the seal gas temperature will be increased above the dew point of the gas. The heater outlet temperature is controlled using a SCR type temperature controller mounted in a separate heater control panel (installed in auxiliary electrical room). The heater control panel receives seal gas temperature from TT 3765. This signal is used for control of the heater. TT 3763 is mounted to the heater element and the signal TSHH 3763 is used by the heater control panel to shut down the heater in the event of a heater element over temperature condition (901°F). TT 3764 is mounted to the heater vessel and is used to shut down the heater in the event of a heater shell over temperature condition (TSHH 3764 set at 380°F). All 3 temperature transmitters (TT 3765,TT 3763,TT 3764) are wired directly to the heater control panel and then 4-20mA signals are repeated to the PLC. Alarms and permissive to start interlock for low seal gas temperature TSL 3765 will be provided inside the PLC and shown in LOCAL HMI, REMOTE HMI and DCS. A remote setpoint from PLC to heater control panel is sent as a 4-20mA signal. The seal gas temperature setpoint can be adjusted from LOCAL/REMOTE HMI, only in ENG mode.
Dry, pre-filtered, and heated Hydrogen seal gas then exits the dry gas seal conditioning system and enters the dry gas seal control panel.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
12 of 63
5. STEAM TURBINE OPERATING PROCEDURE 5.1 Turbine steam valve control
The Operator shall follow the following procedure to prepare the Steam Turbine Start-up: A)
Check that no Trip condition are active; PALL 3403 PALL 3451 XHS 3044 XHS 3318 XS 3048 XHS 3120 PAHH 3455 PAHH 3460 VAHH 3107A ZAHH 3004 SAHH 3052 PAHH 3422 PDAHH 3426 XS 3047A TSHH 3296 UALL 3102 PAHH 3215 XZSO 3030 XZSO 3031
LUBE OIL HEADER LOW LOW PRESSURE N2 TO TERTIARY SEALS INLET LOW LOW PRESSURE EMERGENCY STOP FROM VCCR (VIA PLANT SIS) EMERGENCY STOP (ON UCP) EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR EMERGENCY STOP (ON LCP) COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT HIGH HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT HIGH HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR TRAIN COMMON HIGH HIGH RADIAL VIBRATION TRIP COMPRESSOR TRAIN COMMON AXIAL DISPLACEMENT TRIP STEAM TURBINE HIGH HIGH SPEED STEAM INLET HIGH HIGH PRESSURE STEAM TURBINE WHEEL CHAMBER HIGH HIGH DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE EXTERNAL EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN (PLANT ESD) COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE HIGH HIGH TEMPERATURE TRIP FOR LOW STEAM QUALITY COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE HIGH HIGH PRESSURE (COMMON FOR PSHH 3215 AND PSHH 3216) ISOLATION VALVE XV 3030 FULLY OPEN POSITION ISOLATION VALVE XV 3031 FULLY OPEN POSITION
TRIP VALVE START UP FAILURE XS 3214 STEAM TURBINE UNDER SPEED TRIP SSLL 3049A MAX TIME EXCEEDED IN CRITICAL BAND SSLL 3049B GOVERNOR FAILURE XS 3211 Other signal from customer/process
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
13 of 63
B)
Check that all Permissive to start conditions are active; PAL 3403 LAL 3401 TAL 3746 PDAL 3461 PAL 3401 PAL 3430 UZSO 3293 XZSO 3030 XZSO 3031 NA 3201 UAL 3101 TAL 3765 XS 3049
LUBE OIL HEADER LOW PRESSURE RUN-DOWN TANK LOW LEVEL LUBE OIL HEADER LOW TEMPERATURE COMPR. SEAL GAS/BAL. LINE LOW DIFF PRESS. CONTROL OIL HEADER LOW PRESSURE STEAM TURBINE EXHAUST LOW PRESSURE UV-3293 ANTISURGE VALVE OPEN COMPRESSOR SUCTION ISOLATION VALVE FULLY OPEN COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE ISOLATION VALVE FULLY OPEN PLC CONTROL AVAILABLE STEAM INLET INSUFFICIENT QUALITY (WET STEAM) SEAL GAS LOW TEMPERATURE PERMISSIVE TO START FROM SIS
If all above permissives are met, permissives OK signals lamp on LCP (XL 3313) goes ON and HMI shows “Permissive to Start”. C)
Press. “ESD Reset” pushbutton on LCP (HS 3085), LOC/REM HMI or SIS (XS 3046) to generate the following actions: C1) Set Clear Command to speed governor (PLC) C2) Inhibit “trip has occurred” from PALL 3471 (Control Oil Pressure);
D)
Press “Trip valve open” command on LCP (XHSO 3315), LOC/REM HMI to generate the following actions: D1) Activate XY 3052 (Steam Turbine Preloading Solenoid valve); D2) after 30 seconds activate XY 3306, XY 3307 (Steam Turbine Trip Sol. Valves CLOSED);
E)
On receiving Steam Inlet Trip Valve Open (XZSO 3052, XSZO 3305) the following actions shall be taken: E1) “Ready to Start” indication on Speed Control graphic page goes on; E2) Operator selects to perform the Turbine start-up in an automatic (see 5.2.3), or semiautomatic (see 5.2.1) mode by means of relevant selector on LCP (HS 3117); E3) Press “Unit Start” (HS 3118) on LCP; E4) Run Command to speed governor (PLC) is set;
See flow chart Fig.01 for more details.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
14 of 63
PERMISSIVE TO START ACTIVE AUTO OPERATION
RESET S/D MANUAL OPERATION
TRIP VALVE OPEN COMMAND
DECISION
DELAY
ENERGIZE PRELOAD SOLENOID VALVE
DISPLAY
DELAY 30"
CONNECTOR
ENERGIZE TRIP SOLENOID VALVE RESET EXTERNAL TRIP SIGNAL
ENABLE I/H CONVERTERS POWER SUPPLY
DELAY 60"
DELAY 30"
DISABLE OVERRIDE TRIP
DE-ENERGIZE PRELOAD SOLENOID VALVE
READY TO START
TRIP VALVE OPEN
START-UP SEQUENCE SELECTOR (AUTO/SEMIAUTO)
TURBINE START
HS 3117 (ON LCP)
1
2
AUTO
SEMIAUTO
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
15 of 63
5.2 Test before start-up
The objective of this test is to verify the capability of TRIP oil system (with only one branch) to reach a correct depressurization that permit the closure of TRIP Valves XV 3052 and XV 3305. Automatic test Procedure: 1. Override automatically PSLL 3471 2. Valve XY 3052 in preload condition (ENERGIZED) 3. Delay 30 sec 4. The trip solenoid valves XY 3306 and 3307 are energized 5. CPC I/H converter not fed (SY 3049) 6. De energize solenoid XY 3306 7. Delay 5 sec 8. Verify following conditions for 60 s PT 3471 under 11.60 psig Relevant limit switch (XZSO 3306) to show OPEN position PT 3476 under 7.25 psig Delay 10 sec 9. Energize solenoid XY 3306 10. Verify following conditions for 60 sec PT 3471 above LL threshold
Relevant limit switch (XZSO 3306 not active) to show NOT-OPEN position
11. De energize solenoid XY 3307 12. Delay 5 sec 13. Verify following conditions for 60 sec PT 3471 under 11.60 psig Relevant limit switch (XZSO 3307) to show OPEN position PT 3477 under 7.25 psig Delay 10 sec 14. Energize solenoid XY 3307 15. Verify following conditions for 60 sec PT 3471 above LL threshold Relevant limit switch (XZSO 3307 not active) to show NOT-OPEN position
16. Sequence continues if all previous steps are satisfied otherwise start-up abort occurs and alarm XA 3214 is generated (see Note 1) 17. As per step 2 the solenoid valve XY 3052 is still energized 18. Sequence continues by deenergizing the preload solenoid XY 3052 which opens the TRIP valves XV 3052 and XV 3305
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
16 of 63
General Note The limit switches installed on solenoid valves XY 3306 and XY 3307 are used in following criteria: Energized solenoid: XZSO not active (NOT-OPEN) Denergized solenoid XZSO active (OPEN) Note 1:
Problem must be resolved and then start procedure must commence again at Section 5.1
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
17 of 63
5.3 Start-up Procedure
The Steam Turbine start-up is performed from 0 rpm to minimum control speed (7100 rpm) from LCP. Then the control is performed from LCP or from LOC/REM HMI. On LCP, the “semiautomatic-automatic” selector (HS 3117) allows the operator to choose either automatic or semiautomatic startup procedures. The two startup procedures are configured inside the speed controller (Triconex PLC) and guarantee the correct operation of the steam turbine against operator’s possible mistakes. Once turbine speed exceeds 300 rpm, XL 3314 on LCP (Compressor Running) will be lit. All ramp rates and hold times are programmable for both hot and cold start-up conditions. For commissioning only the control differentiates between hot and cold starts by using an hours-since-trip timer. This timer starts when a shutdown has occurred and turbine speed has decreased below the idle speed setting (1500 rpm). If the time elapsed from the latest shutdown is longer than the time before which the turbine is hot and shorter than the time after which the turbine is considered cold, an interpolation between the two reference values is carried out. The “speed control LOC/REM” selector (SHS 3116) enables the “speed raise” and “speed lower” pushbuttons softswitches or the Performance Controller set-point to be cascaded to the Speed Controller respectively. Electric Turning Gear must be enabled from selector switch on LCP (HS 3126 switched in AUTO) in order to be ready for cooldown phase in case of a trip on normal shutdown.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
18 of 63
5.3.1 Semiautomatic Start-up procedure When the semi-automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in semiautomatic mode and consists of the following steps: 1. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm up speed value (1500 rpm). (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by means of parameter Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold). At the same time the operator must manually increase the VALVE LIMITER SETPOINT value from the local HMI (using “valve limiter setpoint raise” HS 3655 and “valve limiter setpoint lower” HS 3656 soft pushbuttons). Operator must increase valve limiter set-point in less then 30 seconds after pressing START button, or machine will trip on zero-speed as it excepts to see some speed after 30 seconds. This time cannot be changed. By increasing the valve limiter the speed of the turbine increases up to the 1st warm speed of 1500 rpm. The operator may now set the valve limiter setpoint to 100%. 2. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops. After the warmup time the sequence may be resumed only upon a manual action of the operator through “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3222) or DCS (HS 3224) (provided the necessary warm up time had elapsed). 3. The speed set point (the slope of its ramp) increases according to the slope set on Rate to target hot/cold in the turbine controller parameters.
During this phase the operator will be able to stop the turbine acceleration by the pressing the “Auostart sequence Halt” pushbutton HS 3113 on LCP or from the equivalent soft pushbutton on the LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3225), or DCS (HS 3227). If the turbine speed is in critical band and a halt signal is detected, it will be stored by the system until the speed is no longer in the critical band, then becomes operative. To restore the automatic sequence of the turbine speed governor, it is necessary to actuate the “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3222) or DCS (HS 3224). During start-up one critical speed band range (6650÷7050 rpm) is provided and the ramp slope is increased automatically.
See flow chart Fig.02 for more details.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
3 REVISED WHERE
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
19 of 63
2 VALVE LIMITER SETPOINT INCREASE
AUTO OPERATION
SPEED SET-POINT RAMP TO 1st WARM-UP
NO
MANUAL OPERATION
DECISION IDLE SPEED REACHED? YES
DELAY
IDLE SPEED REACHED (1500 rpm)
DISPLAY
START WARM-UP TIMER
CONNECTO R CONTINUE COMMAND HS-3114
SPEED CRITICAL RANGE?
NO
SPEED SET-POINT RAMP TO MIN. OPER. SPEED
YES
HALT COMMAND? HS 3113
YES
NO
NO
SPEED START-UP SEQUENCE HALTED
AUTOMATIC SPEED SET-POINT INCREASE
CONTINUE COMMAND HS 3114
MIN. OPER. SPEED REACHED? YES
MIN. CONTROL SPEED REACHED (7100 rpm)
ANTISURGE & PERFORMANCE CONTROL ENABLE
Fig.02 – Semiautomatic Start-up Procedure
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
20 of 63
5.3.2 Automatic Start-up When the automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in automatic mode, which consists of the following steps: 1. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm up speed value. (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by means of parameter Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold). If during this phase, the turbine speed should increase over the pre-established set-point ramp slope, the automatic sequence must be immediately aborted with operator intervention and the turbine consequently stopped.
2. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops; when the 1st warm up time is elapsed (900 sec. on cold-start) the speed set point starts to increase automatically to reach the target set-point (minimum operating speed) (7100 rpm). The warm-up time will be automatically calculated, considering the length of time the unit was shut-down according to the Start-up diagram. 3. During this phase the operator will be able to stop the turbine acceleration by the “Halt” command on LCP(HS 3113), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3225), DCS (HS 3227). In case the turbine is in critical speed range, stop command is held by the system and becomes effective automatically only when the turbine comes out of critical speed range. To restore the automatic sequence of the turbine speed governor, it is required to actuate the “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3222), DCS (HS 3224). While the turbine is going through critical speed band range, the ramp slope is increased automatically for this time.
See flow chart Fig.03 for more details.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
21 of 63
NO
1
AUTO OPERATION
SPEED SET-POINT RAMP TO 1st WARM-UP
MANUAL OPERATION
DECISION IDLE SPEED REACHED? YES
DELAY
IDLE SPEED REACHED (1500 rpm)
DISPLAY START WARM-UP TIMER CONNECTOR
SPEED SET-POINT RAMP TO MIN. OPER. SPEED NO
HALT COMMAND? HS 3113
SPEED CRITICAL RANGE? YES
YES
SPEED START-UP SEQUENCE HALTED
NO
AUTOMATIC SPEED SET-POINT INCREASE
CONTINUE COMMAND HS 3114
NO
MIN. MIN. OPER. OPER. SPEED SPEED REACHED? YES
MIN. CONTROL. SPEED REACHED (7100 rpm)
Fig.03
ANTISURGE & PERFORMANCE CONTROL ENABLE
Fig.03 – Automatic Start-up Procedure
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
22 of 63
5.3.3 Sequence after Start-up As soon as the turbine reaches the minimum operating speed, the Antisurge and Performance controller could be enabled either manually and automatically by relevant selector on LCP. The operator can increase or decrease the speed by manual operation through the speed set point Raise / Lower command on LCP (SHS 3111, SHS 3112), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3218, HS 3219) and DCS (SHS 3113, SHS 3114). Train speed can be automatically increased by the coupled action of performance and antisurge controllers until the operating point is reached. To enable this feature the selector SPEED CONTROL LOCAL/REMOTES HS 3116 must be switched to “remote” position and the antisurge controller activated from the LCP. Once the MIN.GOV SPEED / LOAD HS 3115 selector is switched to the “load” position, the compressor working point will be brought up to reach the desired discharge pressure by the combined action of the antisurge valve closing and turbine speed increase.
5.4 Controlled Stop
The operator may decide to stop the turbo compressor through the Stop command on LCP (HS 3084), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3228), DCS (HS 3230). The steam turbine is gradually brought back to the min. operating speed (7100 rpm); Antisurge controller opens the Antisurge valve until it is fully open. Then the turbine speed will decrease gradually to the idle value according to the slope rate on start-up diagram. Then the turbine will be stopped closing both the steam turbine trip valves (XY 3312, XY 3313, XY 3306, XY 3307). The Controlled Stop sequence can be interrupted by the operator, actuating the “Raise/lower” speed set point command on LCP (SHS 3111, SHS 3112), LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3220, HS 3221); in this case, the governor will begin controlling the turbine speed, interrupting the deceleration ramp (only if outside of the critical speed band). Operating the “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3222), DCS (HS 3224), the normal stop sequence will be re-enabled. The controller STOP procedure can be paused with the “AUTOSTART SEQUENCE HALT” pushbutton on LCP (SHS 3113) when speed is below minimum control speed (7100 rpm). In case of operator wants to cancel the stopping sequence after interrupting it with RAISE pushbutton (SHS 3111), the speed set-point must be raised manually above the minimum control speed (7100 rpm) by action of RAISE button.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
23 of 63
5.5 Over-speed Test
When the “Over-speed Test” pushbutton on LOC/REM/HMI is actuated, it is possible to verify the over-speed functions trip; an alarm message is displayed on videopages during this test. The overspeed test function allows the operator to raise the turbine speed above the overspeed value, actuating the speed set point “Raise” command and “Raise” HP limiter command, in order to check the protections. After shut-down the overspeed test will be automatically disabled.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
24 of 63
6. EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN 6.1 Machine Shut down
The steam turbine trip logic will be managed by the PLC system, which will control the trip signals coming from the plant, as well as all trip signals coming from the N.P steam turbine skid, except for the overspeed trip that will be managed directly by the B.N.3500 Overspeed System. The emergency shut-down pushbutton will be present on LCP (XHS 3120), UCP (XHS 3318), DCS (HS 3208). Automatic EXTERNAL EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN can be initiated by plant SIS interlocks (XS 3047 A/B/C - triplicated NC contacts). In case of trip, (except for overspeed trip SSHH 3052 and H.H. Radial Vibration Trip VSHH 3107B/C) the PLC logic deenergises the Trip solenoid valves XY 3306, XY 3307 causing immediate stop of the turbo-compressor due to closure of the trip steam inlet valves, (XV 3052, XV 3305) and the immediate opening of the Antisurge valve UV 3293 by means of the solenoid valve UY 3293. At the same time the Emergency Antisurge valve UV 3294 (quick opening type, installed in parallel to Antisurge valve) will be opened by means of its solenoid valve UY 3294. Quick opening of the Emergency antisurge valve will avoid surging phenomenon during machine coast down. At the same time, PLC disables the antisurge, performance and speed controller functions. This action will force the governor valve SV 3049 to move into closed position. In case of trip for overspeed or high high radial vibration, the relative system (Bently Nevada 3500) sends a redundant signal to a safety relay installed in the compressor control panel, in order to de-energize trip, antisurge and emergency antisurge solenoid valves directly. An additional trip signal is still repeated in hardwired mode to PLC (SAHH 3052 and VAHH 3107A).
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
25 of 63
6.2 Isolation and blowdown valves sequence during shutdown
Upon detection of zerospeed condition SLL 3101 the PLC will wait 1 minute before initiating the automatic closure of compressor suction isolation valve XV 3030 and compressor discharge isolation valve XV 3031. During this delay time the Operator can manually close the isolation valves by pressing the relevant pushbuttons XHSC 3030 and XHSC 3031 (on LCP). In case of shutdown for primary seals rupture (high high primary vent pressure PSHH 3455 or PSHH 3460) it’s necessary to immediately depressurize the machinery. This procedure will be performed automatically by the PLC system with the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12)
TRIP the steam turbine by closing XV 3052 and XV 3005. OPEN antisurge valve UV 3293 OPEN emergency antisurge valve UV 3294 CLOSE SV 3049 by action of steam turbine governor WAIT TIME (up to complete stop) Detection of zerospeed SLL 3101 START Electric Turning Gear GM 332 CLOSE XV 3030 CLOSE XV 3031 Dection of isolation valve XV 3030 position fully closed (XZLC 3030) Detection of isolation valve XV 3031 position fully closed (XZLC 3031) OPEN blowdown valve XV 3027
The blowdown valve will be closed automatically upon pressure of BLOWDOWN circuit reset softswitches (LOC/REM HMI) if the trip condition is resolved. When the compressor is stopped and isolation valves are closed the blowdown valve XV 3027 can be manually opened for testing or maintenance thanks to a dedicated pushbutton on the local HMI.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
26 of 63
6.3 Trip solenoid valves Automatic Test
The system consists of 4 solenoid valves divided in 2 branches. One branch is capable to initiate the trip of the machine. Each solenoid has 1 limit switch (Fully open position) The solenoids valves XY 3312 and XY 3313 (upstream respect to PT 3476 and PT 3477) are normally open (normally de-energized), and act as test valves The solenoids valves XY 3306 and XY 3307 (installed downstream respect to PT 3476 and PT 3477) are normally closed (normally energized) and act as trip valves.
6.3.1 Automatic On-Line Test (Made each 15 days)
GE NP STRONGLY RECOMMEND TO EXECUTE THIS TEST EVERY 15 DAYS The online test is activated automatically from the local HMI and consists of the following steps, applicable for each branch: Initial condition The test solenoid valves XY 3312 and XY 3313 (upstream respect to PT 3476 and PT 3477) are normally open (normally de-energized). The trip solenoid valves XY 3306 and XY 3307 (downstream respect to PT 3476 and PT 3477) are normally closed (normally energized).
Test Sequence Energize test solenoid valve Verify by limit switch the complete closure of test solenoid valve (XZSO not active) De-energize the trip solenoid valve Verify by limit switch the opening of trip solenoid valve after 5 sec (XZSO active) Verify by pressure transmitter the depressurization of line (under 7.25 psig) within 3 sec. Energize to close the trip solenoid valve Verify by limit switch the complete closure of trip solenoid valve after 5 sec. (XZSO not active) De-Energize test solenoid Verify by limit switch the opening of test solenoid after 5 sec (XZSO active) Verify by pressure transmitter the pressurization of line (oil pressare between the two valves higher than 90% oil trip pressure) within 3 sec. If the result of test is not Ok the logic will lead the actions showed in following C&E matrix. In case of trip during the test the logic will de-enerigize all 4 solenoids. During normal operation in case of loss of limit switch the logic will lead the actions showed in C&E matrix.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
27 of 63
On Line test conditions Failure Test during start-up Failure Test during running machine (1st branch Not Ok ) Succesful test during running machine (Ok) Failure Test during running machine (2nd branch Not Ok with Ok 1st branch) Failure Test during running machine (2nd branch Not Ok with Not Ok 1st branch) Failure Test during running machine (2nd branch Ok with Not Ok 1st branch)
Test after failure limit switch installed in 1st branch
Test after failure limit switch installed in 2nd branch
Test 2nd brach
Special Procedure
Normal Stop
PERMISSIVE to machine start
Alarm
6.3.2 C&E matrix
X X X X X
X X X X X
On line test definition Contions for OK De-energized Solenoid valves Relevant PT 3476 / PT3477 under 0.5 barg
6.3.3 Special procedure
The failure of both tests on the two branches means that the machine cannot be normally stopped by means of the automatic system. It is required that the operator shuts down the machine by mean of the manual TRIP valve HV 3102 and proceed with the needed maintenance to the TRIP solenoid valves and associated instrumentation or materials.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
28 of 63
7. OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM Triple redundant “Overspeed protection system” will be realized in the B.N.3500 System. In case a turbine overspeed should occur, the overspeed protection system must immediately generate the compressor train shut-down. The turbine solenoid trip valves XY 3306, XY 3307, directly connected to this system to avoid delay in the loop response by means of the safety relay, shall be de-energized and the Antisurge controller output shall be forced to the minimum signal.
8. BENTLY NEVADA MACHINE MONITORING SYSTEM
The compressor steam turbine radial vibration, axial displacement and temperature probes are connected by means of the Proximitors to the Bently Nevada monitor series 3500, placed inside UCP cabinet. To perform the Trip function on PLC, the B.N. monitor transmits triplicated common trip digital signals. The machine axial displacement trip is performed in 2oo2 voting logic in each B.N. axial displacement card. The machine radial vibration trip is performed in 1oo2 voting logic in each B.N. radial vibration card. The Keyphasor probe (VT 3101), provide a precise timing measurement. In case of any fault of B.N. system, the monitor sends “B.N. monitor failure” hardwired signal to the logic to perform Alarm function. Note:
1) In order to avoid false trip, B.N. monitor will automatically by-pass the fault channel. A LED indication on bypassed B.N. card informs the operator about the fault channel.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
29 of 63
9. PROCESS GAS CIRCUIT VALVE SEQUENCE 9.1 General Features
For each compressor speed, it’s possible to determine, on the plane SUCTION FLOW – COMPRESSION RATIO, a curve that describes all compressor operating points. Each obtained curve meets its limits on the surge point, corresponding to the maximum polytropic head. All surge points, defined for different speeds, represent the limit line, on the left of this line (called SURGE LIMIT LINE “SLL”), the compressor operates in an unstable area. The purpose of the “ANTISURGE CONTROL SYSTEM” is to avoid that the operating point “A” reaches the “SLL”. To achieve this objective, it’s defined, on the right of the “SLL”, a protection line where (point “B”) the control system will operate opening the Antisurge valve. This line is called “SURGE CONTROL LINE” (“SCL”). The opening of the Antisurge valve increases the suction flow moving the operating point along the speed characteristic curve, from the critical condition to the stable operating area (Fig. 04).
(Fig.04)
The Antisurge regulator avoids that the compressor working point moves to surge zone. For this reason, inside the Antisurge regulator, the surge curve SLL is set. The compressor shows instability phenomena on the left side of SLL. This SLL curve, moved rightward by the multiplication factor Kb (flow margin, normally 10%), represents the SCL protection curve. On this base, the Antisurge regulator set-point is defined. When the compressor working point moves at the left side of the SCL the regulator will intervene by opening the Antisurge valve, increasing the flow at compressor suction. At this point, the compressor work point will return in the safe zone (right side of SCL curve). CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
30 of 63
During the start-up phase, the Antisurge solenoid valves are energized as a consequence of pushing “trip valve open” button on LCP (XHSO 3315). Energizing the solenoid valve, the 4-20mA signal to Valve Positioner is enabled and the ASV is kept fully open. Antisurge and Performance Controllers are disabled, during this phase. They can be enabled either manually or automatically when the minimum control speed is reached. If enabled, the Antisurge Controller closes gradually the Antisurge Valve following a preset ramp while the Performance Control increases the speed until the working point has been reached. In the event of a machine trip or deviation to left of the surge limit line for more than 10 seconds, both solenoid valves on the antisurge, UV 3293 and parallel A/S valve (quick opening) UV 3294, are de-energized. 9.2 Performance controller
The performance controller function is to keep constant the compressor Discharge Pressure. The TRICONEX PLC will receive as inputs the following signals: - PT 3096: compressor discharge pressure
The process controller will measure the discharge pressure PT 3096 and will send a speed demand to the speed governor in order to meet a pressure setpoint. The process controller will implement a proportional-integral-derivative PID controller which will increase or decrease the turbine speed in case the measured discharge pressure is lower or higher than a remote discharge pressure set point signal between the DCS and the process controller (sent by serial communication). During the startup sequence the performance controller will be activated to ramp the compressor up to the desired discharge pressure. Once the minimum operating speed has been reached the PIC demand signal will be diverted to the antisurge valve in order to close it and have the operating point reach the process control line (PCL) in the pressure ratio/flow diagram. Once the PCL has been reached, the demand will be switched to the turbine control valve to increase the speed. The working point will follow the plant resistance and move rightwards up to when the controller limit line (CLL) is reached.
When the LCP switch (SHS 3116) is in the REMOTE position, the PC 3096 output is cascaded to the speed controller (SIC 3049) set point. This LCP switch is the cascade enable/disable coupling between the pressure controller and speed controller. When the LCP switch (SHS 3116) is in the LOCAL position, the turbine speed can be manually increased/decreased from the LCP, LOC/REM HMI or DCS (see 5.3.3).
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
31 of 63
From this point the switchover between antisurge valve closure and speed raise is repeated until the pressure set point is reached and the working point moves to the operating point (Fig. 05).
(Fig.05)
SLL=Surge Limit Line SCL=Surge Control Line PCL=Performance Control Line CLL=Control Limit Line
9.3 Pressure Override Controller (POC)
In order to prevent downstream over-pressure a PRESSURE OVERRIDE CONTROLLER (POC) functionality is provided integrated with the process controller. In case PT 3096 overcomes a pre-defined threshold (2169 psig), the POC will open the antisurge valve that the compressor downstream pressure is reduced. The POC and antisurge control actions are not conflicting since the controllers outputs are sent to a common minimum selector before the command is given to the antisurge valve. In the event of an insufficient control action of the POC an over-pressure trip function (1oo2) is provided by means of the two transmitters PT 3215 and PT 3216.
MAWP E-306: 2293 psia / 2278 psig High High Pressure Trip (PAHH): 2293 psia / 2278 psig POC/ Alarm (Pressure override control): 2184 psia / 2169 psig Max operating pressure (acc. NP): 2080 psia / 2066 psig Remarks: The pressure transmitters for PAHH are located near to the compressor, PAHH trip set point is the MAWP. The pressure drop between the compressor and exchanger allow the compressor to trip before the overpressure reaches the MAWP of E 306. The maximum operating pressure are based on the NP compressor datasheet latest issue. CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
32 of 63
10. COMPRESSOR SUCTION & DISCHARGE ISOLATION VALVES The compressor suction/discharge valve XV 3030 & XV 3031 have the following instruments and commands: -
XZSC 3030 suction valve close limit switch XZSO 3030 A/B/C suction valve open limit switch XZSC 3031 discharge valve close limit switch XZSO 3031 A/B/C discharge valve open limit switch XHSC 3030 suction valve close manual command XHSO 3030 suction valve open manual command XHSC 3031 discharge valve close manual command XHSO 3031 discharge valve open manual command XZLC 3030 suction valve close signalling XZLO 3030 suction valve open signalling XZLC 3031 discharge valve close signalling XZLO 3031 discharge valve open signalling
The above open limit switches are permissive to start commands. These valves, after a trip command or a controlled stop, close automatically upon reaching zerospeed signal. Operator can also close the valves with the closing manual command. The close manual commands, however, are disabled during normal operation.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
33 of 63
11. GE O&G CONTROLLERS DESCRIPTION The following sections explain general features at the GE O&G antisurge, process and steam turbine governor controllers. The description is generic and not specifically related to this implementation. It is included here for client and operator knowledge. 11.1 PROCESS CONTROL
11.1.1 INTRODUCTION Compressor control system is a framework containing different features. Some types of control can be used separately such as Process Control and Load Sharing but others need to be implemented to couple the above-mentioned devices to other flow internal control FIC elements, such as Antisurge and Pressure Override control POC.
Fig. 1-1 shows the compressor control flow chart, where is depicted the framework in which are inserted the dedicated digital controller, listed below. PROCESS CONTROLLER LOAD SHARING COUPLING CONTROL ANTISURGE POC A compressor train consisting of two or more unit working in parallel needs a load sharing Controller to distribute equally among the compressors, not necessary be identical machines.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
34 of 63
11.1.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW Axial and centrifugal compressors require a control loops to manipulate the speed,inlet valve, or guide vanes to match compressor performance to process demand. Moreover, the Process Controller system is designed to drive the compressor out of the surge area in the start up phase. If surge phenomenon is encountered, the Antisurge controller will override the Process Controller.
Fig. 2-1 shows a control schematic where the Process Controller is highlighted and the recycling valve open/close command coming from Process Controller is processed by the interconnected FIC control.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
35 of 63
11.1.2.1 Process Controller Compressor suction and discharge pressure are the main process variables to be controlled. This purpose is brought by the Process Controller, which input is the either the suction than the discharge pressure transmitter signals coming from the field.
Process Controller PIC generates demand signal acting on either the compressor anti-surge valve position than the engine speed in order to modify the compressor load to match the set point and the measured values. Process Control features are all based on PID, Proportional-Integrative-Derivative controller, that is a type of feedback controller whose output, a control variable (CV), is generally based on the error (e) between some user-defined set point (SP) and some measured process variable (PV). The PID controller computations are addressed in cutting the error down and anticipating the system response. The PID implemented grant bumpless control mode transfer, avoiding unwanted disturbance in the control loop. The characteristic of PID controller: o Proportional control; reduces the rise time and reduces, but never eliminate, the steadystate error. o Integral control; eliminates the steady-state error, worsening the transient response. o Derivative control; increases the stability of the system, reducing the overshoot, and improving the transient response. The PID controller is provided of tracking Anti-Windup, in order to avoid any limit cycling or even instability, that integrator windup may cause. The Process Controller is automatically enabled after a settable delay since the compressor has reached the minimum operating speed. Process Control maintains the pressure conditions also when any change of flow is required by the plant or caused by a disturbance. In Fig. 2-3 the flow change occurs keeping the speed constant and than the Process Control takes over, reducing the speed in order to keep the pressure constant. CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
36 of 63
If the flow reduction request continues, the Process Control lowers compressor speed until the Process Control Line (PCL) is met. From this point the flow control switches from process to antisurge control. The latter controller increases flow, increasing the compressor speed, in order to avoid any surge occurrence. Both control are independent one from the other and the coupling control, see chapter 2.3, avoids any disturbance that may be caused by the concurrent action of both antisurge and process control. Refer to section 2.3.1: SELECTION LOGIC of page 9 for the switching logic from antisurge to process control and the other way round. In case that the compressor train consists of two or more compressors working in parallel, as shown in Fig. 2-4, the Process Control is unique for all the process, while an Anti-surge and Load Sharing device control each single compressor.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
37 of 63
11.1.2.2 Pressure Override Control Compressor working in series shares the same gas line so that the discharge for a compressor is the inlet for the next one. It is extremely important to control the pressure in between two attached stages. In order not to exceed the compressor maximum suction pressure a Pressure Override Controller POC compare the signalled pressure to a set-point; whenever happens a pressure surplus the POC acts, through process control and anti-surge, opening the recycle valve so to decrease the discharge pressure and restore the operating conditions. This type of control is shown in fig. 2-5.
The POC can be used any time a safety protection on a discharge line is needed with the compressor provided of an anti-surge valve. 11.1.2.3 Coupling Control Coupling Control is necessary whenever the examined control is to be integrated to other controls, like antisurge controller or POC. The control provides automatic sequencing of compressor start-up and shutdown and a repositioning valve control. The control defines the Process Control PCL and Control Limit CLL lines and in between the Coupling control feeds forward antisurge valve opening in order to freeze speed decrease demand. This way the two main compressor controller, speed and antisurge work unambiguously avoiding the risk of speed control saturation. Selection Logic The Selection Logic block switches the control from antisurge action to flow demand controller, that can act on the throttling valve or the speed controller or the IGV and vice versa and compressor operating point contingent conditions determine the control choice.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
38 of 63
Two curves are added to SLL and SCL, in the operating plane, as shown in Fig. 2-6 and according to the position of compressor operating point in the Pressure Ratio- Flow plane is activate the selection logic.
PCL = Process Control Line, evaluated as a 3% distance in flow to the right of SCL. CLL = Compressor Control Line, 5% in flow distance to the right of SCL.
The movement of compressor operating point in the Pressure Ratio- Flow plane, as detected by the antisurge controller, is notified to the Process Controller by the logic signal OPCAL, operating point crossing antisurge valves. The signal is processed according to the following rules also illustrated in Fig. 2-7:
If compressor operating point crosses the PCL line leftward, the OPCAL signal is set to TRUE (red).
If compressor operating point crosses the CCL line from left to right, the OPCAL signal is reset to FALSE (blue).
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
39 of 63
The Process Controller demand is switched on antisurge valve if, at least, one of the following conditions is verified:
Close antisurge valve if the Process Controller increases demand (UP) and operating point on the CLL right side.
Open antisurge valve if the Process Controller decreases demand (DOWN) and operating point on the PCL left side or flow demand controller on minimum operating position.
The demand is switched to the flow demand controller if at least one of the following conditions is verified:
Open flow demand controller if the Process Controller increases demand (UP) and operating point on the PCL left side or antisurge valve closed.
Close flow demand controller if the Process Controller decreases demand (DOWN) and operating point on the CCL right side.
Table 2-1 summarises the selection logic. A final remark on signal to be done is that the flow demand controller position remains frozen, when the antisurge valve acts to open the antisurge valve while, acting to open the flow demand controller the antisurge valve is kept frozen.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
40 of 63
Start/Stop sequence The Start/Stop sequence regards the operations applied after reaching the compressors minimum operative speed MOS. At speed lower than MOS, during the start-up and normal stop phases, the antisurge controller is disabled so that the recycling valve is completely opened. There is no difference between Start and Stop sequence, apart their initial conditions. Before the Start sequence acts, the compression train is stopped; therefore the antisurge control valves are forced to be open by de-energising the antisurge solenoid valves. During the gas compression process start up phase, the antisurge solenoid valves are energised. This action enables the antisurge controller signal output, but the antisurge controller is still disabled, forcing the recycling to open until the minimum operating speed is reached. The Start sequence truly begins when the antisurge regulator is enabled after MOS is achieved and its output reaches 100%, recycling valve closed position, with a pre-set time. At the same time, the Process Control regulator output is activated and slowly increase its value with a pre-set ramp. The antisurge and PIC outputs constitute the control variables for the start sequence. The Stop sequence begins with the operating point already placed in the design point, with antisurge control activated and in fact covers backward the path done by the Start sequence until the MOS is encountered.
The start sequence is illustrated in Fig. 2-8 and begins at point 1, where MOS is reached. From this point on, the gradual antisurge valve closing action causes the compression ratio to increase and therefore a decrease in the demand signal. The operating point moves leftward until reaches the Process Control Line PCL, point 2 of the figure. From now on, the Process Control regulator freezes the output towards the valves and starts to increase compressor speed. The operating point starts moving rightwards following the plant resistant curve, represented by the antisurge valve characteristic until the CLL is reached, point 3 of Fig. 28. Again, the output signal is diverted towards the antisurge valves and the operating point moves toward the PCL. CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
41 of 63
The sequence continues as just described until the Process Control set-point is reached; therefore the compressor gets on line, by reaching the design operating point required by the plant. From this point on the master controllers take compressors performances under control. Fig. 2-9 reports the flow chart for Start sequence.
Fig. 2-10 illustrates the Stop sequence flow chart, that basically covers the Start Up procedure backward. Starting from the operating point placed in the design configuration, with the antisurge valve completely close, the Stop sequence goes along again towards the PCL, with the Process Controller reducing speed, point 8of figure 2-8. Fig. 2-8. The antisurge controller open the valve increasing the flow at speed constant until the CCL is encountered, point 7. This procedure continues until MOS is reached and only than the Normal Stop sequence shuts down the compressor.
Valve Repositioning The repositioning logic is used to set the compressor working at the appropriate operating point if any disturbance occurs. New steady states can be possible after the any disturbing event, possibly leaving the compressor under avoidable and even dangerous conditions. Repositioning valve logic operates with slow actions, in order to avoid instability in the process and once activated and terminates after the proper conditions are recovered.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
42 of 63
The unwanted disturbance can dangerously leave the operating point in the surge area, between SLL and SCL with the recycling valve closed, point A in Fig. 11. In this case the repositioning logic will slowly open the antisurge valve to obtain the proper safety conditions. Another undesirable condition leaves the operating point in the safety area, after the SCL, but with the recycling valve open, see point B. This occurrence lowers compressor efficiency and is recovered slowly closing the antisurge valve. If this condition persists longer than a fixed time, typically 60 seconds, and the start sequence is terminated, the repositioning logic is enabled. Repositioning valve logic terminates after the antisurge valve has reached the correct opening position, with the working point placed in the surge zone, otherwise if the recycle valve closes completely if the operating point is in the safe area. The actions taken by the repositioning valve logic, while activated, are the following:
Close Antisurge valve if compressor operative point is far from surge line, to the CLL right, and Engine speed set-point is not at the minimum. If the speed setpoint is at its minimum value, the repositioning logic is not active. As a consequence, the compressor discharge pressure increases and the Process Controller reacts decreasing the action on speed.
Open Antisurge valve if compressor operative point is close to surge line, to the PCL left. This time, the compressor discharge pressure decreases and the Process Controller reacts increasing the speed set point.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
43 of 63
11.2 Antisurge Control
11.2.1 INTRODUCTION Compressor surge is a low-flow phenomenon known to exist in dynamics, i.e. centrifugal and axial compressors found in petrochemical plants, liquefied natural gas (LNG) facilities and pipeline compressor stations. A simplified definition would describe surge as a series of rapidly occurring reversals of the pressurized gas flow. Transient surge vibration will develop when the steady state fluid velocity is suddenly altered, increasing and forward flow through the compressor can no longer be maintained. Fig. 1-1 shows how control surge is done in a 4:1 pressure ratio centrifugal compressor, operating at 80 percent of design speed.
A simple description of the surge phenomenon can be given, having a look at the flow differential pressure plane, as shown in Fig. 1-2 Centrifugal-compressor performance curve, where is illustrated a compressor curve for a constant speed.
Suppose there is a steady state at point A and there comes a sudden decrease in gas demand, experienced by the compressor as a differential pressure increase. Since speed changes of heavy rotating mass as compressors, require a great lag time such as several minutes. Therefore, on a shorter term, speed may be considered constant.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
44 of 63
At a constant speed the compressor cannot keep up as much flow against a higher pressure, so flow goes down toward the SCL to point B, as reflected in the curve and called surge point. The locus of the surge points for all compressor speeds, above and below the characteristic curve, is then called surge limit line. The flow here has fallen to the least the impeller can handle without losing grip on the gas. From the surge line on, any further decrease in downstream demand no longer result in increased differential pressure. Instead, the impeller suddenly loses its effectiveness as a motive element and immediately the gas begins spinning around with the impeller. As the pipeline gas coasts to a stop, the operating point falls to zero flow at point C. Gas begins leaking backwards as a flow reversal and is shown in the picture Fig. 1-2 as a continuation of the jump past point C to point D, lying on a theoretical extension of the normal characteristic (point B) into negative flow. Then, within a short time the differential pressure goes down to the minimum the impeller, decoupled by the gas, can maintain with centrifugal force only, point E. There, the impeller suddenly gains grip on the gas and push it forward to point F on the normal characteristic curve. If line flow is still restricted below the surge point for the given speed, the described cycle B-C-D-E-F repeats at regular intervals, typical on the order of one second. The consequences of surge are severe. Surge is a powerful process disturbance that can disrupt or trip the process. It can also damage the compressor. Damage to seals and bearings are common. Seal clearances will be increased as a result of surge, lowering compressor output and efficiency. Even one cycle can have unwanted consequences in terms of compromise operations, altering internal clearances and overstressing seals. The costs alone of replacing the compressor seals are in order of €20K to €50K, thus applying a suitable and effective control strategy must prevent surge. Catastrophic surge incidents can result in complete destruction of the rotor. In order to prevent such economic losses an effective antisurge control system is required, for every turbo-compressor. Fig. 1-3 shows a piping and instruments schematic, where is depicted the dedicated digital controller which is the heart of an advanced antisurge control system.
In typical antisurge systems, a quick-acting valve recycles a portion of the compressor discharge flow, back to the compressor suction. Sufficient gas volume, to ensure forward flow of the gas, is thus always provided to the compressor. CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
45 of 63
11.2.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW The preventive antisurge action is provided by a dedicated surge-control system that is separate from the compressor’s other controls because of response speed requirements. The other compressor controls attempt to stay reasonably clear of the surge line, but only on a relatively long time horizon. Surge events tend to be transient disturbances. It would be both impractical and inefficient to slow and then accelerate a large turbine-driven compressor as every potential surge comes and goes. If the compressor has variable inlet vanes, the control system typically manipulates them to optimise fuel efficiency, not to avoid every threat of a surge. Instead, the action provided by the surge-control system is to open the recycle valve to an appropriate degree. The past dominant strategy was to begin opening the recycle valve well before the operating point reached the surge line. This approach led to long operation times with a consequent and appreciable waste of compressor fuel as well as capacity. Nowadays antisurge control philosophy is to avoid opening the recycle valve until absolutely necessary, move away from surge as quickly as possible and then shut the valve again.
The piping and instrument diagram shown in, represents a compressor provided of antisurge valve. The energy produced by a turbine or an engine moves compressors shaft and process gas sucked up in the inlet. Finally the line users shared out the gas, compressed to the desired pressure ratio.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
46 of 63
The outlet gas is also feed-backed to the antisurge valve. If the recycle valve is not closed, the process gas is allowed to get back to the compressor inlet, reducing the compression ratio. In a system of this type, the dedicated digital controller, heart of an advanced surgecontrol system, receives inputs: Inlet pressure Temperature Flow Head across the compressor Compressor speed. If gas composition is subject to appreciable change, an indication of that variable, such as density, may be included. Characteristic curves for various temperatures and various inlet pressures and compositions are available to the control algorithm as equations or look-up tables, see chapter 2. The advanced controller’s reaction time may be well under 50 milliseconds. The algorithm attempts to duplicate the action of an experienced human operator having an eye on the instruments, a hand on the manual valve control and a wish to minimize energy waste resulting from prolonged recycling. This requires a combination of closed-loop (feedback) and open-loop (prearranged) control. The system keeps the recycle valve closed as long as the operating point is well away from the known surge line. As the operating point approaches the surge line, the control algorithm becomes more sensitive to its motion. Getting too close or moving too suddenly toward the line causes the valve to open by an appropriate amount to halt progress toward surge smoothly without triggering control oscillations. Should extraneous circumstances continue to force the operating point toward the surge line, the recycle valve opens all the way. If a load reduction persists, then after a relatively long time (perhaps a few minutes), speed typically is reduced by the compressor control system. Consequently, unless the reduced flow is beneath the capability of the compressor, the operating point and the surge point move away from each other, and the surge controller gradually shuts the recycle valve. The compressor has kept a firm grip on the gas. The control features are all based on PID, Proportional-Integrative-Derivative controller, that is a type of feedback controller whose output, a control variable (CV), is generally based on the error (e) between some user-defined set point (SP) and some measured process variable (PV). The PID controller computations are addressed in cutting the error down and anticipating the system response. The PID implemented grant bumpless control mode transfer, avoiding unwanted disturbance in the control loop. The characteristic of PID controller: o Proportional control; reduces the rise time and reduces, but never eliminate, the o steady-state error. o Integral control; eliminates the steady-state error, worsening the transient o response. o Derivative control; increases the stability of the system, reducing the overshoot, o and improving the transient response. The PID controller is provided of tracking Anti-Windup, in order to avoid any limit cycling or even instability, that integrator windup may cause.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
47 of 63
All compressors operating points are described on the suction flow – differential pressure plane. There is a different curve for each speed, altogether forming the compressor’s wheel map (Fig. 2-2). In each line is possible identifying the so-called “surge point”, corresponding to the maximum differential pressure that limits the stable area of the speed constant curves. The locus of surge point for all compressor speeds, above and below the characteristic curve in question, is called surge limit line (SLL). The flow here has fallen to the minimum impeller can handle, without losing its grip on the gas and represents the limit after which corresponds to an unstable behaviour of the compressor. The antisurge control (ASCV) system main goal is to avoid the compressor operating point (A) to reach SLL. This purpose is obtained defining a protection line on the right side of SLL. This safety line is called surge control line (SCL). The ASCV system will act opening the antisurge valve. This action increases the suction flow therefore the operating point moves backwards along the speed characteristic curve, from the critical condition to the stable operating area.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
48 of 63
11.2.2.1 Antisurge Control Law Considering a mono-stage centrifugal compressor, it is possible to verify the followings relations for each surge point, varying the compressor speed N, where Qs is the suction volumetric flow and Hp the polytropic head:
From Eq. 2-1, Eq. 2-2 we obtain
Where
Since polytropic head Hp is defined as:
From Eq. 2-3, Eq. 2-4 we obtain
If QS is measured through a calibrated orifice mounted we can express it related to the measured Δp
Eq. 2-6 with the perfect gas equation
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
49 of 63
leads to Eq. 2-7
Introducing this equation into Eq. 2-5, Eq. 2-8 is obtained representing all the surge points in function of the orifice differential pressure Δp. It is possible demonstrate how the surge phenomenon is not influenced by the gas condition and composition.
Therefore, for small compression ratios and small n variations, the terms:
The Eq. 2-9 defines the SLL shape, on the plane of compression ratio (ρ) versus flow (Q) and is represented by a parabola which has the minimum located in ρ = 1 and Q = 0, see Fig. 2-3.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
50 of 63
Fig. 2-3 highlights a theoretical wheel map, characteristic for a single stage compressor (one impeller only), while the Fig. 2-4 shows typical multistage compressor behaviour. The multistage compressor surge limit line puts in evidence that the surge control line cannot be realized using a parabola, since this approximation excluding a large part of compressor operating area.
Fig. 2-5 shows the solution to this lost of operability. The SLL is evaluated by a tenbreak lines function generator f(Pd-Ps/Ps) and consequently the relevant SCL, moving the SLL right side of a pre-set percentage margin (K). The following section illustrates the algorithm used to evaluate the surge control line. The control algorithm developed from Eq. 2-9 and used inside the controller requires as process variables, suction, discharge and design pressures and the differential pressure evaluated at a calibrated orifice positioned at compressor suction
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
51 of 63
The controller set point is K2. It represents the deviation margin between “SLL” and “SCL”. In the “Antisurge Control Line configuration sheet”, the margin is expressed in percentage of flow. The algorithm takes in account the ΔP measured across the flow element (indicated by “hs”) that is proportional to square suction flow (hs = Q2). The controller algorithm compensates continuously the hs signal according to the suction pressure variation, taking in account the suction pressure measured and comparing it with the design suction pressure.
NOTE: the same algorithm is applied for pipeline compressors where the flange to eye characteristic instead of a traditional flow element is used.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
52 of 63
11.3 Steam Turbine Governor
11.3.1 Steam Turbine (Note 1) ST Governor is an innovative and complete and easy to use product designed exclusively to control steam turbine, offering all features expected by any type of control required:
SPEED INLET PRESSURE EXTRACTION LOAD CASCADE
The power of this system comes out from its integration capabilities, from dozens of control loops and sequences in the same panel up to a whole co-generation plant. The power of the control system is well managed by the ST Governor which can be completed with HMI system, in order to perform plenty of diagnostic tasks, such as plotting analog/ digital trends, storing events, logging the alarm history. ST Governor platform allows a versatile interface to existing or future Distributed Control System DCS, thanks to the multi standard communication ports. Even with a HMI out of service the plant can be monitored by the DCS, with an obvious increment of the plant efficiency. ST Governor is easy to use, just need to be integrated in the plant control and the programming is reduced to a simple parameter configuration, according to the plant specification. The choice between control types is among the parameters to be defined within the configuration worksheets. Note 1: this manual refers to the ST Governor steam turbine governor version 2.00. For any other version please read the relevant documentation.
11.3.1.1 Operation Mode In automatic mode the speed set point grows according to a ramp with slope equal to the one set through parameters “Rate to 1st warm up hot” or “Rate to 1st warm up cold” according to the time elapsed from the latest shutdown. If the time elapsed from the latest shutdown is longer than the time before which the turbine is to be considered hot and shorter than the time after which the turbine is to be considered cold, an interpolation between the two reference values is carried out. The HP valve limiter assumes a higher limit given by the value set in parameter “1st warm up Limit”.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
53 of 63
Once the 1st warm up is reached, and the time necessary has elapsed (which can be obtained from the start-up diagram of the turbine being considered) the speed set point grows in automatic mode until the target value is reached according to a ramp with slope equal to the value set in “Rate to target hot” or “Rate to target cold” according as to whether a “hot” start-up or a “cold” start-up is carried out (even in this case if the time elapsed from the latest shutdown is longer than the time before which the turbine is to be considered hot and shorter than the time after which the turbine is to be considered cold, an interpolation between the two reference values is carried out). The HP valve limiter assumes a higher limit given by the value set in parameter “Target Limit”. Once target speed is reached, the end of the start-up sequence is signalled to the GCPP (Generator Control Protection Panel) through signal "permissive to synchronize " (only in case of generator drive). The speed set point ramp slope assumes the value set in parameter “Synchro slope”, and this slope is maintained until the generator breaker closure. Obviously, in the case of a turbo-compressor, speed goes from the 1st warm up to MOS (and not to target), but the speed set point ramp slope in this range always follows the one set in “Rate to target”. In many turbines, it is desirable to avoid certain speeds or speed ranges (or to go through them as quickly as possible) due to excessive turbine vibrations or other factors. While programming ST Governor turbine governor, two critical speed ranges can be selected. These two ranges can be any speed range between 1st warm up speed and minimum operating speed. Turbine Start There are three start-up modes available that can be set directly in section Operating Parameters: manual, automatic, semi-automatic. Once the start signal is sent to the turbine, the speed set point (the increase / decrease of its value) and the HP valve limiter are controlled either manually by the operator or automatically, according to the start-up mode selected. Turbine Starts Modes: A. Manual Start-up Mode When the manual mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in a fully manual way and goes through the following steps: 1. A reset signal is sent to the turbine controller to reset all alarms and trips. 2. The turbine speed set point is increased gradually by the operator to reach the 1st warm up speed value. (The rpm per second ramp slope according to which the speed set point changes is set through the Manual Slope parameter.) At the same time, the HP valve limiter opening and closing is changed manually by the operator. (The related ramp slope according to which they change is set in section HP VALVE LIMITER CONTROL, parameter Slope rates). During start-up the low pressure valve (LP) is kept in fully open position.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
54 of 63
3. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops, to resume only upon a manual action of the operator through command “raise speed” (provided the necessary time has elapsed – warm up time). 4. The sequence is continued manually until the target, and the speed set point (the slope of its ramp) increases, still according to the slope set on the manual slope parameter.
Semiautomatic Start-up Mode
When the semi-automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in semiautomatic mode and goes through the following steps: 1. A reset signal is sent to the turbine controller to reset all alarms and trips.
2. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm up speed value. (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by means of parameter “Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold” in section Operating Parameters). At the same time, the operator changes the HP valve limiter opening and closing manually. (The ramp slope according to which the HP valve limiter changes is set in parameter “Slope rates” in section Operating Parameters). During start-up the low pressure valve (LP) is maintained in fully open position . 3. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops, to resume only upon a manual action of the operator through command CONTINUE (provided the necessary time has elapsed – warm up time). 4. The HP valve limiter is controlled manually until target speed, and the speed set point (the slope of its ramp) increases, now according to the slope set on Rate to target hot/cold. Important: in section Operating Parameters, the “Synchrony slope” rpm/sec slope of the speed set point ramp is enabled from the moment minimum governor speed is reached (i.e. when the permissive to synchronize is given) until the generator breaker closes, that is when maximum governor speed is reached.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
55 of 63
Automatic Start-up mode
When the automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in automatic mode and goes through the following steps: 1. A reset signal is sent to the turbine controller to reset all alarms and trips.
2. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm up speed value. (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by means of parameter “Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold” in section Operating Parameters). At the same time automatically the controller open the HP valve limiter to the corrispective limit. (The ramp slope according to which the HP valve limiter changes is set in parameter “Slope rates” in section Operating Parameters). During start-up the low pressure valve (LP) is maintained in fully open position. 3. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops, when the 1st warm up time elapsed the speed set point start to increase automatically to reach the target setpoint). At the same time automatically the controller open the HP valve limiter to the corrispective limit. 4. The HP valve limiter is controlled automatically until target speed, and the speed set point (the slope of its ramp) increases, now according to the slope set on Rate to target hot/cold.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
56 of 63
Normal Stop In addition to the actual shutdown sequence, ST Governor is provided with a NORMAL STOP command that, when enabled, carries out a controlled trip sequence (controlled shutdown). According to the current operating conditions as well as to the system configuration, it is possible to distinguish different sequences, which are reported below. A. Normal Stop (Generator drive configuration) It goes through the following steps: 1. if in inlet steam pressure control, the PID performing the control action on inlet steam
pressure is disabled, and power control (kW) is enabled. 2. if in control of the extraction line by means of the Extraction PID acting on the LP valve, this control is disabled. 3. once the Power PID is enabled, power (kW) decreases until the Minimum Power value is reached according to a ramp whose slope is set through parameter Set Point Slope Target Stop in section kW Control. 4. once the Minimum Power value is reached, the Generator Control panel sends a command to open the Generator Breaker contact. 5. once the Generator Breaker is open, speed control is enabled, and the speed set point value is lowered according to a ramp whose slope is set in parameter Normal Stop in section Start-up Parameters, until the 1st warm up is reached. The speed set point can be frozen by pressing halt command (the continue command restarts the ramp). 6. it is necessary to wait for the necessary time in order to allow speed to actually reach the 1st warm up value, and only then the actual shutdown is performed. a. Normal Stop (mechanical drive configuration)
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
57 of 63
• No Syngas Condition 1. the Cascade controller is disabled.
2. after disabling the Cascade controller, speed control is enabled, and the speed set point value is lowered according to a ramp whose slope is set in parameter Normal Stop in section Start-up Parameters, until the 1st warm up is reached. The speed set point can be frozen by pressing halt command (the continue command restarts the ramp). 3. it is necessary to wait for the necessary time in order to allow speed to actually reach the 1st warm up value, and only then the actual shutdown is performed. • Syngas Condition 1. if in control of the extraction line by means of the Extraction PID acting on the LP valve,
this control is disabled. 2. the low pressure valve (LP valve) is opened completely by reaching 100 % of the LP Valve Limiter value. 3. the speed set point value is lowered according to a ramp whose slope is set in parameter Normal Stop in section Start-up Parameters, until the 1st warm up is reached. The speed set point can be frozen by pressing halt command (the continue command restarts the ramp). 4. it is necessary to wait for the necessary time in order to allow speed to actually reach the 1st warm up value, and only then the actual shutdown is performed
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
58 of 63
NOTE: If the normal stop sequence is being executed and is not over yet, by pressing the Turbine Start command, the normal stop is disabled. Emergency Shutdown When a shutdown condition is detected, both output signals to the HP and LP valve actuators are taken to the value of zero mA. Moreover, shutdown relays are deenergized (in ST Governor system an external redundant hardware relay logic for the steam turbine trip valves is always implemented, too) and the shutdown cause is displayed on the supervision video page. Within the ST Governor logic control sequences, there is a bit dedicated to the shutdown condition; this bit can be associated to any input signal, or any internal bit, representing any trip condition, produced by the system logic. Obviously, since the entire logic is implemented according to a Fail Safe type of philosophy, the shutdown condition is detected when the logic state is zero.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
59 of 63
11.3.1.2 Controllers Speed Controll Speed control receives a turbine speed signal from one or two magnetic pickups or proximity probes. The Speed PID (PID = controller with Proportional, Integral and Derivative action) amplifies and compares this signal with the speed set point in order to generate a signal going to the valve decoupling input. The speed governor, moreover, can receive a droop feedback signal (optional) to increase the system stability, basing on the turbine-generator system load (expressed in kW). The speed set point can be controlled either by means of the HMI Raise/Lower commands, or through remote contacts, or via Modbus. Turbine speed is “picked up” through one or two MPU’s (magnetic pick-up) or proximity probes. In our ST Governor a fundamental parameter that is necessary to configure is the “Number of pulses per round” in section Operating Parameters. This parameter represents the number of pulses per turbine driving shaft revolution. This value is needed to obtain the speed measurement in rpm (after performing the due conversions). The Speed PID (set with the control parameters relating to integration time, to the derivative and the proportionality constant as well as to other additional parameters which shall be dealt with in detail further on) compares this speed signal with a set point. When programmed for application with a generator, the status of generator breaker (GB) contacts and tie-breaker (TB) contacts determines the Speed PID operating mode. More precisely, if the generator breaker is open, the parallel connection with the grid has not been carried out yet, and therefore the Speed PID operates in full turbine speed control mode according to the parameters set by the operator in section Speed Control Parameters. The speed control parameters to be set are reported below: • PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %): It represents the PID controller proportional gain. In case of mere proportional action, the error is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point. This difference is then normalized to the speed measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value set on PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. • IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec): It represents the PID controller integration time. • DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec): It represents the PID controller derivation time (Kd). This constant refers to the formula representing the PID controller, expressed as follows: u(t) = PG e(t) + 1⁄ IT *∫ e(τ)dτ + DT * de(t) / dt
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
60 of 63
• ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm): It represents the dead band error. If the error calculated
as difference between speed and set point, normalized to speed full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, than it has no effect. All the speed control PID parameters explained above can also be configured for the ISLAND mode (ISLAND PARAMETERS): these parameters become effective when the GB is closed and the TB is open, i.e. when the generator is in island mode. NOTE: In case of variable response times due to variations in the system conditions, it is possible to set a parameter that allows the Speed PID to tune in order to get optimal responses. In other words, this parameter is a constant called Dynamics Multiplier Const., the value of which can be entered directly by the operator. More specifically, in generator drive mode, in case of generator breaker opening, the speed control PID parameters are temporary multiplied for the value entered in Dynamic Multiplier Const. to make the controller action more "reactive". In particular, the proportionality constant and the derivative action are multiplied for this value, whereas the integral action is divided for this value. Likewise, in case of a Mechanical Drive turbine, two sets of parameters exist: Parameters referring to a speed below Minimum Operating Speed (M.O.S); Parameters referring to a speed above M.O.S.
Critical Speed Avoidance In many turbines it is desirable to avoid certain speeds or speed ranges (or to go through them as quickly as possible) due to excessive turbine vibrations or other factors. During the ST Governor configuration, two critical speed ranges can be selected. These ranges can be any speed range between warm up speed and minimum operating speed. Within a critical speed range, ST Governor moves the speed set point according to the programmed critical speed slope, and does not allow the speed set point to stop inside the critical range. In case of critical ranges, the system checks that the steam turbine does not operate within the critical region longer than a configurable time interval. This check is inhibited if the actual speed is closer to the relevant set point less than 50 RPM. The consequence is a trip for maximum time in critical region.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
61 of 63
Cascade Control The Cascade control is used inside ST Governor to act on turbine speed so as to control a physical quantity linked to the steam turbine rotation speed. A typical application is the configuration as mechanical drive acting on turbine speed so as to control the discharge pressure of the compressor connected to the turbine. In Cascade mode, two digital inputs external to the ST Governor (e.g. coming from DCS) are made available to raise / lower the speed set point. The set point increase/decrease ramp slope is defined in the section dealing with Cascade Control at parameter Cascade ramp slope [rpm/sec]. Cascade control can be configured to control any system process, in relation to turbine speed. NOTE: It is to be reminded that this control and the related configuration video page can be viewed only if MECHANICAL DRIVE is selected in section Operating Parameters, in submenu General Turbine selection. Typically this controller is configured and used as controller of a compressor discharge pressure. The Cascade controller performs a comparison between a 4-20 mA process signal and a set point, and its control variable directly represents the Speed PID speed set point. When enabled, the Cascade PID can cause the speed set point to change according to a ramp with slope set through parameter Cascade ramp slope, in section CASCADE CONTROL. Furthermore, it is possible to set all the Cascade controller control parameters in real time, simply by changing their values in the Cascade controller configuration page (Cascade Control). However, the Cascade controller enabling occurs only after reaching Minimum Operating Speed, and is automatically disabled in shutdown condition, to be automatically enabled again after a subsequent system start-up. In the ST Governor system the shift to the Cascade controller enabling is bumpless, and if a Cascade type control permissive is lost, or the Cascade control is disabled, the set point value ‘active’ in that moment is freezed. In relation to the type of control action required, the Cascade controller input (the process variable of this PID) can be inverted. For example, if internal Cascade is selected and a decrease in the HP valve opening percentage is requested in order to raise suction steam pressure (inlet steam pressure), the Cascade controller process variable is to be inverted. The cascade control parameters to be set are reported below: • Cascade ramp slope [rpm/sec]: Regardless of the External Cascade Control mode selection - through the corresponding check box on page Operating Parameters in menu General Turbine selection - the SIC (the ST Governor speed governor) shall receive a set point that is always pursued according to a ramp with a slope configurable in Cascade ramp slope (in rpm per second). • Cascade set point slope rate [rpm/sec]: It represents the ramp slope according to which the Cascade PID controller pursues the set point, expressed in rpm per second.
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
62 of 63
External Cascade Control If the corresponding check box is selected, the external CASCADE mode is enabled (valid in the case of mechanical drive). The Cascade is external in case the speed set point to ST Governor is supplied by an external PID controller (a typical case is a PIC controller outside ST Governor located on the compressor discharge, whose control variable is the speed governor set point). It’s important to stress that this mode use must be selected even for any other controller implemented in the same PLC such as an anti surge or performance controller whose output drives the steam turbine speed: all those controllers must be classified as External Cascade Control regardless their implementation. The value shall be converted from 4÷20 mA to normalized (0-1).
The external Cascade – unlike the internal one – is base on a PID controller that is completely external; from governor control system acquires only its control variable (as a 0-100% input which can be acquired either via serial link – e.g. through Modbus protocol via hardwired line – or internal by performance controller); this control variable represents the speed governor set point. This set point grows according to a slope the ramp of which is the cascade ramp slope already dealt with on the previous pages, and is then added to Minimum Operating Speed. Span Selection If the corresponding check box is selected, ST Governor speed governor performs its control actions interpreting the signal coming from the external PID in the following way: 4 mA = 0 RPM; 20 mA = Maximum Continuous Speed. In any case, the governor does not activate any set point lower than Minimum Operating Speed. If the corresponding check box is not selected, ST Governor speed governor performs its control action within the range comprised between Minimum Operating Speed (4 mA) and Maximum Continuous Speed (20 mA).
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TITLE:
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9971645 PAGE MARKER N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1900533
4 SECURITY CODE
N SIZE
4
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
63 of 63
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
2 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
3 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
4 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
5 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
6 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
7 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
8 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
9 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
10 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
11 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
12 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
13 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
14 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
15 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
16 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
17 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
18 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
19 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
20 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
21 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
22 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
23 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
24 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
25 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
26 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
27 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
28 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
29 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
30 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
31 of 32
g
TITLE: GE Oil & Gas
UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST .
REVISION DESCRIPTION: REVISED WHERE SHOWN
DOCUMENT CODE
REVISION
SOS9972092
7
PAGE MARKER
SECURITY CODE
N/A ORIGINAL JOB
1102313
.
N SIZE
3
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LANGUAGE
A SHEET
32 of 32
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
TRIP TRESHOLD 600
PDI XXX (Psig)
500 400 300 200 100 0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
PI 3432 (Psig)
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
©
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
Bernardi A.
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'
Zipoli M.
5 FINAL REVISION Zipoli Elett.stored Elett.stored 12/03/2013
GE NuovoPignone - Electronically Approved Drawing - Checked: Bernardi A.; Approved: Zipoli M. - Internal DT-'N'
E
5
5
SPARE
5
SPARE
5
XHS-3044
5
SPARE
5
SPARE
5
FINAL REVISION
SPARE
5 FINAL REVISION
SPARE
5 FINAL REVISION
XHS-3044
SPARE
5
FINAL REVISION
SPARE
Bernardi A.
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'
Zipoli M.
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
CUSTOMER NAME: PLANT LOCATION: PLANT: N.P. JOB: ITEM:
COLT FOR SUNCOR ENERGY FORT MC MURRAY, ALBERTA (CANADA) VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATER GOHT #3 1102313 / 1900553 207K-300 / 207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
COMM - JOB
1102313 / 1900533
FIRENZE ITEM
207K-300 / 207KT-300
TITOLO - TITLE
NOTE NOTES
3
GENERAL REVISION
2 1 0
GENERAL REVISION, GENERAL REVISION, ADDED SH.20-37 ISSUE
REV. REV.
Bernardi A.
SSE
DESCRIZIONE DESCRIPTION
Visintin F.
SSE SSE SSE ESEG. CONTR. APPR. PREP'D CHK'D APPR'D
09/06/2009 27/01/2009 18/11/2008 12/09/2008 DATA DATE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
DWG NUMBER
SOS 9971995/3 LINGUA - LANG.
A Il presente disegno e' di proprieta' NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto e' riservato
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE . All rights are reserved according to law
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
PAGINA - SHEET
1 / 2
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'
SERIAL LIST
NOTE
Type
: ETHERNET TCP/IP
Protocol
: Modbus
DEVICE IP:
:192.168.1.1
Analog variable type
REAL
MODBUS FUNCTION CODE FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
1
Read Output Status
2
Read Input Status
3
Read Output Register
4
Read Input Register
5
Force Single Coil
6
Preset Single Register
7
Read Status
15
Force Multiple Coils
16
Preset Multiple Registers
Nuovo Pignone 3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FIRENZE
COMM ESSA -
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
2/3
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628432/1
SOS8628432/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628462/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
1
F
READ
TT 3746
rTI 3746
LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE
1
F
READ
PT 3424
rPI 3424
HP STEAM TURBINE CHAMBER
1
F
READ
PT 3471
rPI 3471A
CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE
1
F
READ
1
F
READ
PT 3425
rPI 3425
HP STEAM TURBINE CHAMBER
1
F
READ
TE 3732
rTI 3732
COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE
1
F
READ
PDT 3454
rPDT 3454
SUCTION END PRIMARY VENT DIFF. PRESSURE
1
F
READ
FT 3290
rFI 3290A
COMPRESSOR SUCTION FLOW
1
F
READ
TE 3733
rTI 3733
COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE
1
F
READ
LT 3490 A
rLI 3490A
LEVEL TRANSMITTER SEAL GAS LIQUID SEP.
1
F
READ
LT 3401
rLI 3401
RUN-DOWN TANK LEVEL
1
F
READ
LT 3404
rLI 3404
LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL TRANSMITTER
1
F
READ
1
F
READ
PDT 3408
rPDI 3408
L.O. FILTERS DIFF. PRESSURE
1
F
READ
PDT 3461
rPDI 3461A
SG INLET BALANCING LINE DIFF. PRESS.
1
F
READ
PDT 3447
rPDI 3447
NITROGEN FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE
1
F
READ
PDT 3465
rPDI 3465
SEAL GAS FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE
1
F
READ
PDT 3094
rPDI 3094
COMPRESSOR SUCTION DIFF. PRESSURE
1
F
READ
VT 3102 X
rVT 3102X
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END X RAD.
1
F
READ
PT 3432
rPI 3432
EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE
1
F
READ
PT 3422
rPI 3422
HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE
1
F
READ
PI 3411
rPI 3411
L.O. HEADER PRESS. UP-STREAM COOLERS
1
F
READ
SE 3049 A
rSE 3049_A
STEAM TURBINE SPEED SHAFT
1
F
READ
PDT 3442
rPDI 3442
SEAL GAS LIQUID SEPARATOR DIFF. PRESSURE
1
F
READ
SI 3049A
rSI 3049A
Steam turbine actual speed
1
F
READ
TT 3296A
rTI 3296A
BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
1
F
READ
TT 3296B
rTI 3296B
BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
1
F
READ
TT 3296C
rTI 3296C
BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
1
F
READ
PT 3444
rPI 3444
GAS AMPLIFIED
1
F
READ
PT 3449
rPI 3449
NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS
1
F
READ
PT 3451
rPI 3451
NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS
1
F
READ
PT 3095
rPI 3095A
COMPRESSOR SUCTION PRESSURE
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
32
200
°F
43001
0
800
PSI
43003
0
232
PSIG
43005
43007
PSI
43009
°F
43011
0
800
-50
300
0
36.5
PSI
43013
0
5
PSI
43015
-50
300
°F
43017
0
15
inH2O
43019
0
100
%
43021
0
100
%
43023
43025
0
36.25
PSI
43027
0
145
PSI
43029
0
36.25
PSI
43031
0
36.25
PSI
43033
0
0.035
PSI
43035
0
7.9
MIL
43037
0
145
PSIG
43039
0
1000
PSIG
43041
0
205
PSIG
43043
0
15000
RPM
43045
0
36
PSI
43047
0
15000
RPM
43049
32
400
°F
43051
32
400
°F
43053
32
400
°F
43055
0
15
PSIG
43057
0
120
PSIG
43059
0
120
PSIG
43061
0
2000
PSIG
43063
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
COMM ESSA -
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
3/4
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628462/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628462/1
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
1
F
READ
PT 3096
rPI 3096A
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE
1
F
READ
PT 3476
rPI 3476
CONTROL OIL TRIP HEADER PRESSURE
1
F
READ
TT 3296D
rTI 3296
BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
1
F
READ
VT 3103 X
rVT 3103X
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END X RAD.
1
F
READ
TT 3744
rTI 3744
LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE
1
F
READ
ZT 3002 A
rZT 3002A
COMPRESSOR SHAFT AXIAL
1
F
READ
TIT 3763
rTI 3763
SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - CUT OUT
1
F
READ
VT 3102 Y
rVT 3102Y
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END Y RAD
1
F
READ
TT 3295
rTI 3295
COMPRESSOR SUCTION TEMPERATURE
1
F
READ
VT 3103 Y
rVT 3103Y
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END Y RAD
1
F
READ
VT 3104 X
rVT 3104X
COMPRESSOR SHAFT X RADIAL
1
F
READ
UZAH 3293
rXT 3293
ANTISURGE VALVE POSITION
1
F
READ
1
F
READ
TE 3716
rTI 3716
STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE
1
F
READ
PDT3453
rPDT 3453
DISC. END PRIMARY VENT DIFF.PRESSURE
1
F
READ
TE 3717
rTI 3717
STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE
1
F
READ
TE 3718
rTI 3718
STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE
1
F
READ
TE 3531
rLCP_TEMP
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL INTERNAL TEMPERATURE
2
F
READ
TE 3719
rTI 3719
STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE
2
F
READ
TE 3720
rTI 3720
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING
2
F
READ
VT 3105 X
rVT 3105X
COMPRESSOR SHAFT X RADIAL
2
F
READ
TE 3721
rTI 3721
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING
2
F
READ
TE 3722
rTI 3722
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING
2
F
READ
PT 3401
rPI 3401
CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE
2
F
READ
TE 3723
rTI 3723
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING
2
F
READ
TE 3724
rTI 3724
STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE
2
F
READ
PT 3463
rPI 3463
SEAL GAS INLET BALANCING LINE
2
F
READ
TE 3725
rTI 3725
COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG
2
F
READ
TE 3726
rTI 3726
COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG
2
F
READ
PDT 3472
rPDI 3472
SG INLET BALANCING LINE DIFF. PRESS.
2
F
READ
TE 3727
rTI 3727
COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG
2
F
READ
TE 3728
rTI 3728
COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value Max Value
0
2700
0
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
PSIG
43065
232
PSIG
43067
32
400
°F
43069
0
7.9
MIL
43071
32
320
°F
43073
-0.039
0.039
INC.
43075
32
1200
°F
43077
0
7.9
MIL
43079
32
400
°F
43081
0
7.9
MIL
43083
0
7.9
MIL
43085
0
100
%
43087
43089
°F
43091
PSI
43093
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
-50
300
0
36.5
-50
300
°F
43095
-50
300
°F
43097
-148
140
°F
43099
-50
300
°F
43101
-50
300
°F
43103
0
7.9
MIL
43105
-50
300
°F
43107
-50
300
°F
43109
0
250
PSIG
43111
-50
300
°F
43113
-50
300
°F
43115
0
2000
PSIA
43117
-50
300
°F
43119
-50
300
°F
43121
0
200
PSIG
43123
-50
300
°F
43125
-50
300
°F
43127
Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
COMM ESSA -
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
4/5
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628437/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628437/1
SOS8628460/1
SOS8628431/1
SOS8628450/1
SOS8628460/1
SOS8628460/1
SOS8628460/1
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628431/1
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628450/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
2
F
READ
PT 3477
rPI 3477
CONTROL OIL TRIP HEADER PRESSURE
2
F
READ
TE 3729
rTI 3729
COMPR. THRUST BRG. NON-ACTIVE SIDE
2
F
READ
TE 3730
rTI 3730
COMPR.THRUST BRG.NON-ACT. SIDE
2
F
READ
SE 3049 B
rSE 3049_B
STEAM TURBINE SPEED SHAFT
2
F
READ
TE 3731
rTI 3731
COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE
2
F
READ
VT 3101
rVTI 3101
KEY PHASOR
2
F
READ
SE 3049 C
rSE 3049_C
STEAM TURBINE SPEED SHAFT
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
LT 3490 B
rLI 3490B
LEVEL TRANSMITTER SEAL GAS LIQUID SEP.
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
VT 3104 Y
rVT 3104Y
COMPRESSOR SHAFT Y RADIAL
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
TT 3760
rTI 3760
HP STEAM HEADER TEMPERATURE
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
PT 3403D
rPI 3403
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE
2
F
READ
ZT 3001 A
rZAH 3001A
STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL
2
F
READ
ZT 3001 B
rZAH 3001B
STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL
2
F
READ
VT 3105 Y
rVT 3105Y
COMPRESSOR SHAFT Y RADIAL
2
F
READ
ZT 3002 B
rZT 3002B
COMPRESSOR SHAFT AXIAL
2
F
READ
PI 3460D
rPI 3460
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
2
F
READ
TT 3740
rTI 3740
LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
PT 3403 A
rPI 3403A
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE
2
F
READ
PT 3403 B
rPI 3403B
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE
2
F
READ
PT 3403 C
rPI 3403C
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE
2
F
READ
PT 3423
rPI 3423
HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
TIT 3764
rTI 3764
SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - TEMP. LIMITER
TIT 3765
rTI 3765
SEAL GAS TEMPERATURE
PT 3455D
rPI 3455
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
Service Min Value
Max Value
0
232
-50
300
-50
300
0
15000
-50
300
0
0
0
32
32
32
0
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
PSIG
43129
°F
43131
°F
43133
RPM
43135
°F
43137
-
43139
RPM
43141
43143
43145
43147
43149
43151
43153
43155
43157
43159
43161
43163
43165
43167
15000
15
7.9
800
1200
300
145
inH2O
MIL
°F
°F
°F
PSIG
0
100
PSIG
43169
-0.039
0.039
INC
43171
-0.039
0.039
INC
43173
0
7.9
MIL
43175
-0.039
0.039
INC
43177
0
145
PSIG
43179
32
212
°F
43181
43183
0
100
PSIG
43185
0
100
PSIG
43187
0
100
PSIG
43189
0
1000
PSIG
43191
Nuovo Pignone REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
5/6
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628450/1
SOS8628450/1
SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
2
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
PT 3460 A
rPI 3460A
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
3
F
READ
PT 3460 B
rPI 3460B
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
3
F
READ
PT 3460 C
rPI 3460C
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
3
F
READ
PT 3455 C
rPI 3455C
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
3
F
READ
PT 3455 B
rPI 3455B
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
3
F
READ
PT 3455 A
rPI 3455A
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
FT 3296
rFT 3296
COMPRESSOR SUCTION FLOW
3
F
READ
PT 3215
rPT 3215
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE
3
F
READ
PT 3216
rPT 3216
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
PT 3430
rPI 3430
EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE
TT 3761
rTI 3761
HP STEAM HEADER TEMPERATURE
Service Min Value
Max Value
0
145
32
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
800
PSIG
°F
43193
43195
43197
43199
43201
43203
43205
0
145
PSIG
43207
0
145
PSIG
43209
0
145
PSIG
43211
0
145
PSIG
43213
0
145
PSIG
43215
0
145
PSIG
43217
43219
0
22
PSI
43221
0
2700
PSIG
43223
0
2700
PSIG
43225
43227
43229
43231
43233
43235
43237
43239
43241
43243
43245
43247
43249
43251
43253
43255
Nuovo Pignone REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
6/7
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628431/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
-
rTC_SP
TC - setpoint
3
F
READ
-
rPDIK_SP
PDI - setpoint
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
3
F
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
TT 3747
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
rTI 3747
Service Min Value
RUNDOWN TANK TEMPERATURE
32
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
200
°F
43257
43259
43261
43263
43265
43267
43269
43271
43273
43275
43277
0
100
%
43279
0
100
%
43281
Nuovo Pignone REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
7/8
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628432/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628431/1
SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628431/1
SOS8628437/1
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1
SOS8628437/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/2 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
NSR 3745
eNSR 3745
LUBE OIL HEATER ON
4
I
READ
NSR 3201
eNSR 3201
LUBE OIL PUMP MOTOR RUNNING
4
I
READ
UZSO 3293
eUZSO 3293
ANTISURGE VALVE POSITION FULLY OPEN
4
I
READ
XZSO 3052
eXZSO_ 3052
TRIP VALVE ACTUATOR
4
I
READ
XZSO 3306
eZSH 3306
TRIP VALVE XY-3306 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
NCR 3741
eNCR 3741
ELECTRIC HEATER ON/OFF COMMAND
4
I
READ
XS 3049
eXS 3049
PERMISSIVE TO START FROM SIS
4
I
READ
XHS 3318
eXHS 3318
UCP EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON(NON ESISTE SU I/O)
4
I
READ
SSHH 3052A1
eSSHH 3052A
STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
4
I
READ
XZSO 3305
eXZSO_ 3305
TRIP VALVE ACTUATOR
4
I
READ
NS 3201
eNA 3201
PLC CONTROL AVAILABLE
4
I
READ
VSHH 3107
eVSHH 3107
COMMON RADIAL VIBR. TRIP (PLC.WIRED)
4
I
READ
-
eESDR_ACT
ESD FROM RELAY
4
I
READ
SSHH 3052B1
eSSHH 3052B
STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
4
I
READ
US 3111
eXSF_FAN
FAN FAULT
4
I
READ
TSH 3750
eTSH -3750
BEARINGS TEMPERATURE COMMON ALARM
4
I
READ
XZSC 3030
eXZSC_ 3030
VALVE XV 3030 CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
XZSC 3031
eXZSC_ 3031
VALVE XV3031 CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
XZSO 3030
eXZSO_ 3030
VALVE XV 3030 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
XZSO 3031
eXZSO_ 3031
VALVE XV 3031 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
SSLL 3101
eSSLL 3101
STEAM TURBINE ZERO SPEED
4
I
READ
SSHH 3052C1
eSSHH 3052C
STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
4
I
READ
XHSC 3030
eXHSC 3030
CLOSE SUCTION ISOLATING VALVE
4
I
READ
XHSC 3031
eXHSC 3031
CLOSE DISCHARGE ISOLATING VALVE
4
I
READ
XHSO 3030
eXHSO 3030
OPEN SUCTION ISOLATING VALVE
4
I
READ
XHSO 3031
eXHSO 3031
OPEN DISHARGE ISOLATING VALVE
4
I
READ
XHS 3120
eXHS 3120
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
4
I
READ
SHS 3111
eSHS 3111
RAISE SPEED SET POINT
4
I
READ
SHS 3112
eSHS1112
LOWER SPEED SET POINT
4
I
READ
HS 3113
eHS 3113
HALT AUTO START SEQUENCE
4
I
READ
HS 3114
eHS 3114
CONTINUE AUTO START SEQUENCE
4
I
READ
XHSO 3315
eXHSO 3315
TRIP VALVE OPEN
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40500
1
40500
2
40500
3
40500
4
40500
5
40500
6
40500
7
40500
8
40500
9
40500
10
40500
11
40500
12
40500
13
40500
14
40500
15
40500
16
40501
1
40501
2
40501
3
40501
4
40501
5
40501
6
40501
7
40501
8
40501
9
40501
10
40501
11
40501
12
40501
13
40501
14
40501
15
40501
16
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
8/9
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628437/1
SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
ZSHH 3004
eZSHH 3004
BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLAC. COMMON TRIP
4
I
READ
XHS 3316
eXHS 3316
MAINT. BYPASS ENABLE
4
I
READ
XS 3210
eXS 3210
SEAL GAS HEATER RUNNING
4
I
READ
XS 3234
eXS 3234
SEAL GAS HEATER CUMULATIVE ALARM
4
I
READ
UZSO 3294
eUZSO 3294
EMERGENCY A/S VALVE OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
UZSC 3294
eUZSC 3294
EMERGENCY A/S VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
XZSO 3027
eXZSO_ 3027
BLOWDOWN VALVE OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
XZSC 3027
eXZSC_ 3027
BLOWDOWN VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
HS 3115
eHS 3115
MIN. GOVERNOR SPEED/LOAD
4
I
READ
HS 3117
eHS 3117_A
STARTING SEQUENCE AUTO/SEMI
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
HS 3116_L
eHS 3116_L
SPEED CONTROL LOCAL/REMOTE
4
I
READ
HS 3116_R
eHS 3116_R
Speed Controller Remote Mode Selector LCP
4
I
READ
XS 3047A
eXS 3047A
PLANT ESD
4
I
READ
XZSC 3052
eXZSC 3052
TRIP VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
XZSC 3305
eXZSC 3305
TRIP VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
SS 3049
eSS 3049
I/H Converter fault
4
I
READ
VSH 3106
eVSH 3106
BEARINGS RADIAL VIBRATION COMMON ALARM
4
I
READ
XHS 3085
eXHS 3085
eXHS 3085
4
I
READ
XS 3046
eXS 3046
EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN RESET FROM SIS
4
I
READ
XS 3048
eXS 3048
EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
4
I
READ
XS 3703
eXS 3703
Triconex power suply fault
4
I
READ
XS 3704
eXS 3704
POWER FAULT
4
I
READ
XS 3705
eXS 3705
BN RACK1 fault
4
I
READ
XS 3706
eXS 3706
BN RACK 2 fault
4
I
READ
XS 3707
eXS 3707
ETG RUNNING
4
I
READ
XS 3708
eXS 3708
ETG FAULT
4
I
READ
XS 3709
eXS 3709
ETG Enable/Disable
4
I
READ
XS 3850
eXS 3850
Seal Gas Heater Ground Fault Detected
4
I
READ
XZSO 3307
eXZSO 3307
TRIP VALVE 3307 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
XZSO 3312
eXZSO 3312
TRIP VALVE 3312 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
4
I
READ
XZSO 3313
eXZSO 3313
TRIP VALVE 3313 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40502
1
40502
2
40502
3
40502
4
40502
5
40502
6
40502
7
40502
8
40502
9
40502
10
40502
11
40502
12
40502
13
40502
14
40502
15
40502
16
40503
1
40503
2
40503
3
40503
4
40503
5
40503
6
40503
7
40503
8
40503
9
40503
10
40503
11
40503
12
40503
13
40503
14
40503
15
40503
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
9 / 10
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
ZSH 3003
eZSH 3003
BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLACEMENT COMMON ALARM
40504
1
HS 3118
eHS 3118
Start turbine command (LCP)
40504
2
HS 3084
eHS 3084
Shutdown command (LCP
40504
3
HS 3311_LampTST
eHS 3311_LampTST
Lamp Test (LCP)
40504
4
40504
5
40504
6
40504
7
40504
8
40504
9
40504
10
40504
11
40504
12
40504
13
40504
14
40504
15
40504
16
40505
1
40505
2
40505
3
40505
4
40505
5
40505
6
40505
7
40505
8
40505
9
40505
10
40505
11
40505
12
40505
13
40505
14
40505
15
40505
16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16(Bit 1 is LSB) bit Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
10 / 11
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40506
1
40506
2
40506
3
40506
4
40506
5
40506
6
40506
7
40506
8
40506
9
40506
10
40506
11
40506
12
40506
13
40506
14
40506
15
40506
16
40507
1
40507
2
40507
3
40507
4
40507
5
40507
6
40507
7
40507
8
40507
9
40507
10
40507
11
40507
12
40507
13
40507
14
40507
15
40507
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
11 / 12
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40508
1
40508
2
40508
3
40508
4
40508
5
40508
6
40508
7
40508
8
40508
9
40508
10
40508
11
40508
12
40508
13
40508
14
40508
15
40508
16
40509
1
40509
2
40509
3
40509
4
40509
5
40509
6
40509
7
40509
8
40509
9
40509
10
40509
11
40509
12
40509
13
40509
14
40509
15
40509
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
12 / 13
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628437/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628437/1
SOS8628462/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
XS 3179
qXS 3179
RESET COMMAND
4
I
READ
NCS 3201
qNCS 3201
AUXILIARY OIL PUMP STOP COMMAND
4
I
READ
XL 3313
qXL 3313
PERMISSIVES OK
4
I
READ
XY 3052
qXY 3052
STEAM TURBINE PRELOADING
4
I
READ
XY 3030
qXY 3030
VALVE XV3030 SOLENOID VALVE
4
I
READ
XY 3302
qXY 3302
RUN DOWN FILLING VALVE
4
I
READ
XY 3312
qXY 3312
CONTROL OIL TRIP HEADER
4
I
READ
XY 3030
qXY 3313
VALVE XY 3030 SOLENOID VALVE
4
I
READ
XY 3303
qXY 3303
SOLENOID GAS AMPLIFIER
4
I
READ
XY 3031
qXY 3031
VALVE XY 3031 SOLENOID VALVE
4
I
READ
XY 3306
qXY 3306
CONTROL OIL TRIP HEADER
4
I
READ
XY 3307
qXY 3307
CONTROL OIL TRIP HEADER
4
I
READ
XL 3314
qXL 3314
COMPRESSOR RUNNING
4
I
READ
XL 3312
qXL 3312
COMMON ALARM
4
I
READ
XL 3311
qXL 3311
COMMON TRIP
4
I
READ
UY 3293
qUY 3293
A/S SOLENOID VALVE
4
I
READ
XY 3027
qXV 3027
BLOWDOWN VALVE COMMAND
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40510
1
40510
2
40510
3
40510
4
40510
5
40510
6
40510
7
40510
8
40510
9
40510
10
40510
11
40510
12
40510
13
40510
14
40510
15
40510
16
40511
1
40511
2
40511
3
40511
4
40511
5
40511
6
40511
7
40511
8
40511
9
40511
10
40511
11
40511
12
40511
13
40511
14
40511
15
40511
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
13 / 14
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40512
1
40512
2
40512
3
40512
4
40512
5
40512
6
40512
7
40512
8
40512
9
40512
10
40512
11
40512
12
40512
13
40512
14
40512
15
40512
16
40513
1
40513
2
40513
3
40513
4
40513
5
40513
6
40513
7
40513
8
40513
9
40513
10
40513
11
40513
12
40513
13
40513
14
40513
15
40513
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
14 / 15
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
PT 3455A_Fail
mPI 3455A_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3455B_Fail
mPI 3455B_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3455C_Fail
mPI 3455C_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3460A_Fail
mPI 3460A_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3460B_Fail
mPI 3460B_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3460C_Fail
mPI 3460C_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3097_Fail
mPI 3097_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3423_Fail
mPI 3423_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3403A_Fail
mPI 3403A_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3403B_Fail
mPI 3403B_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3403C_Fail
mPI 3403C_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3296A_Fail
mTI 3296A_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3296B_Fail
mTI 3296B_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3296C_Fail
mTI 3296C_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3430_Fail
mPI 3430_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3432_Fail
mPI 3432_Fail
Transmitter Failure
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40514
1
40514
2
40514
3
40514
4
40514
5
40514
6
40514
7
40514
8
40514
9
40514
10
40514
11
40514
12
40514
13
40514
14
40514
15
40514
16
40515
1
40515
2
40515
3
40515
4
40515
5
40515
6
40515
7
40515
8
40515
9
40515
10
40515
11
40515
12
40515
13
40515
14
40515
15
40515
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
15 / 16
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
PDT 3408_Fail
mPDI 3408_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PDT 3461_Fail
mPDI 3461_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PDT 3447_Fail
mPDI 3447_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PDT 3465_Fail
mPDI 3465_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PDT 3094_Fail
mPDI 3094_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
LT 3401_Fail
mLI 3401_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
LT 3404_Fail
mLI 3404_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3411_Fail
mPI 3411_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3401_Fail
mPI 3401_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3444_Fail
mPI 3444_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3451_Fail
mPI 3451_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3463_Fail
mPI 3463_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3472_Fail
mPI 3472_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3422_Fail
mPI 3422_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3476_Fail
mPI 3476_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3095_Fail
mPI 3095_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3096_Fail
mPI 3096_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3295_Fail
mTI 3295_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3763_Fail
mTI 3763_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3744_Fail
mTI 3744_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
XT 3293_Fail
mXT 3293_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
FT 3290_Fail
mFI 3290_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TE 3531_Fail
mLCP_TEMP_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PDT 3442_Fail
mPDI 3442_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3449_Fail
mPI 3449_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3471_Fail
mPI 3471_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3477_Fail
mPI 3477_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3740_Fail
mTI 3740_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3760_Fail
mTI 3760_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3764_Fail
mTI 3764_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3765_Fail
mTI 3765_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3424_Fail
mPI 3424_Fail
Transmitter Failure
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40516
1
40516
2
40516
3
40516
4
40516
5
40516
6
40516
7
40516
8
40516
9
40516
10
40516
11
40516
12
40516
13
40516
14
40516
15
40516
16
40517
1
40517
2
40517
3
40517
4
40517
5
40517
6
40517
7
40517
8
40517
9
40517
10
40517
11
40517
12
40517
13
40517
14
40517
15
40517
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
16 / 17
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
PT 3425_Fail
mPI 3425_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3761_Fail
mTI 3761_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3476_Fail
mTI 3476_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
TT 3477_Fail
mTI 3477_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
FT 3296_Fail
mFI 3296_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3215_Fail
mPI 3215_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
PT 3216_Fail
mPI 3216_Fail
Transmitter Failure
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
OVPALL 3403
mOVPALL 3403
OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
4
I
READ
OVPAHH 3455
mOVPAHH 3455
OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
4
I
READ
OVPAHH 3460
mOVPAHH 3460
OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
4
I
READ
OVTAHH 3296
mOVTAHH 3296
OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
4
I
READ
OVPAHH 3422
mOVPAHH 3422
OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
4
I
READ
OVPALL 3451
mOVPALL 3451
OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
4
I
READ
OVPAHH 3426
mOVPAHH 3426
OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
4
I
READ
OVPAH 3215
mOVPAH 3215
OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40518
1
40518
2
40518
3
40518
4
40518
5
40518
6
40518
7
40518
8
40518
9
40518
10
40518
11
40518
12
40518
13
40518
14
40518
15
40518
16
40519
1
40519
2
40519
3
40519
4
40519
5
40519
6
40519
7
40519
8
40519
9
40519
10
40519
11
40519
12
40519
13
40519
14
40519
15
40519
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
17 / 18
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628432/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628431/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
LAL 3401
mLAL 3401
RUN-DOWN TANK LEVEL LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
XA 3232
mXA 3232
L.O. AUX.PUMP NOT START.ALARM
4
I
READ
XA 3233
mXA 3233
L.O. AUX.PUMP NOT STOP.ALARM
4
I
READ
LAL 3404
mLAL 3404
LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
PDAH 3094
mPDAH 3094
COMPRESSOR SUCTION DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PDAH 3408
mPDAH 3408
L.O. FILTERS DIFF. PRESSURE LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
PDAH 3447
mPDAH 3447
NITROGEN FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PDAH 3442
mPDAH 3442
SEAL GAS LIQUID SEP. DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PDAH 3465
mPDAH 3465
SEAL GAS FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PAL 3401
mPAL 3401
CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
PAL 3411
mPAL 3411
L.O. HEADER PRESS. UP-STREAM COOLERS LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
PAL 3449
mPAL 3449
NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3449
mPAH 3449
NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3455A
mPAH 3455A
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3455B
mPAH 3455B
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3455C
mPAH 3455C
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PSH 3460A
mPAH 3460A
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3460B
mPAH 3460B
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3460C
mPAH 3460C
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TSH 3740
mTAH 3740
LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
4
I
READ
TAL 3744
mTAL 3744
LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3744
mTAH 3744
LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3763
mTAH 3763
SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - CUT OUT-HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3455
mPAH 3455
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3460
mPAH 3460
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TALL 3744
mTALL 3744
LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE LOW LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
-
mESDR_ACT
ESD SAFETY RELAY ACTIVE
4
I
READ
XA 3705
mXA 3705
BN Rack1 Fault
4
I
READ
XA 3706
mXA 3706
BN Rack2 Fault
4
I
READ
XA 3704
mXA 3704
Power Fault
4
I
READ
XAF_3FAN
mXAF_3FAN
Fan Fault
4
I
READ
XA 3192
mXA 3192
ETG FAULT
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40520
1
40520
2
40520
3
40520
4
40520
5
40520
6
40520
7
40520
8
40520
9
40520
10
40520
11
40520
12
40520
13
40520
14
40520
15
40520
16
40521
1
40521
2
40521
3
40521
4
40521
5
40521
6
40521
7
40521
8
40521
9
40521
10
40521
11
40521
12
40521
13
40521
14
40521
15
40521
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
18 / 19
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628432/1
SOS8628450/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1
SOS8628437/1
SOS8628450/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
PT 3455A_Disc
mPI 3455A_Disc
BCL 456/A COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
4
I
READ
PT 3455B_Disc
mPI 3455B_Disc
BCL 456/B COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
4
I
READ
PT 3455C_Disc
mPI 3455C_Disc
BCL 456/C COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
4
I
READ
PT 3460A_Disc
mPI 3460A_Disc
BCL 456/A COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
4
I
READ
PT 3460B_Disc
mPI 3460B_Disc
BCL 456/B COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
4
I
READ
PT 3460C_Disc
mPI 3460C_Disc
BCL 456/C COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
4
I
READ
PT 3403A_Disc
mPI 3403A_Disc
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER - Di
4
I
READ
PT 3403B_Disc
mPI 3403B_Disc
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER - Di
4
I
READ
PT 3403C_Disc
mPI 3403C_Disc
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER - Di
4
I
READ
TT 3296A_Disc
mTI 3296A_Disc
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITT
4
I
READ
TT 3296B_Disc
mTI 3296B_Disc
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITT
4
I
READ
TT 3296C_Disc
mTI 3296C_Disc
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITT
4
I
READ
PAL 3403
mPAL 3403
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3432
mPAH 3432
EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
XA 3230
mXA 3230
L.O. Heater Not Started Alarm
4
I
READ
XA 3235
mXS 3235
VALVE XY 3030 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY ALARM
4
I
READ
XA 3236
mXS 3236
VALVE XY 3031 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY ALARM
4
I
READ
BRANCHB_FAIL
mBRANCHB_FAIL
Trip valve online test branch B failed
4
I
READ
BRANCHA_FAIL
mBRANCHA_FAIL
Fail from trip valve start-up test
4
I
READ
XA 3208
mXS 3208
Both branches failure special procedure
4
I
READ
UAL 3101
mUSL 3101_P
LOW STEAM QUALITY ALARM
4
I
READ
PAL 3430
mPAL 3430
EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3423
mPAH 3423
HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3444
mPAH 3444
GAS AMPLIFIED HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3760
mTAH 3760
HP STEAM HEADER TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
PDSH 3472
mPDSH 3472
BALANCING LINE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER High
4
I
READ
PAH 3463
mPAH 3463
SEAL GAS BALANCING LINE PRESSURE TRANSMITT
4
I
READ
XS 3235
mXA 3235
VALVE XY1030 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY AL
4
I
READ
XS 3236
mXA 3236
VALVE XY1031 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY AL
4
I
READ
PSL 3471
mPAL 3471
CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER L
4
I
READ
XA 3231
mXA 3231
L.O. Heater Not Stoped Alarm
4
I
READ
TSL 3101
mTAL 3101
HP Steam low temperature
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40522
1
40522
2
40522
3
40522
4
40522
5
40522
6
40522
7
40522
8
40522
9
40522
10
40522
11
40522
12
40522
13
40522
14
40522
15
40522
16
40523
1
40523
2
40523
3
40523
4
40523
5
40523
6
40523
7
40523
8
40523
9
40523
10
40523
11
40523
12
40523
13
40523
14
40523
15
40523
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
REV.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
19 / 20
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1
SOS8628460/1 SOS8628462/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628460/1
SOS8628450/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628432/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
TAH 3765
mTAH 3765
SEAL GAS TEMPERATURE - HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAL 3765
mTAL 3765
SEAL GAS TEMPERATURE - LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
-
mALARM
COMMON ALARMS
4
I
READ
PDAH 3461
mPDAH 3461
COMPR. PRIM. VENT/BAL. LINE DIFF. PRESS. -
4
I
READ
TAH 3296
mTAH 3296
BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE-HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3764
mTAH 3764
SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - TEMP. LIMITER-HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3763
mTAHH 3763
SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - CUT OUT-HIGH HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
XS 3306_Disc
mXS 3306_Disc
TRIP VALVE XY-3306 DISCREPANCY ALARM (0=Alm)
4
I
READ
XS 3307_Disc
mXS 3307_Disc
TRIP VALVE XY-3307 DISCREPANCY ALARM (0=Alm)
4
I
READ
XS 3312_Disc
mXS 3312_Disc
TRIP VALVE XY-3312 DISCREPANCY ALARM (0=Alm)
4
I
READ
XS 3313_Disc
mXS 3313_Disc
TRIP VALVE XY-3313 DISCREPANCY ALARM (0=Alm)
4
I
READ
UAL 3101
mUAL 3101
HP STEAM TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
PDAH 3426
mPDAH 3426
DIF.PRESS.WHEEL CHAMBER TO EXHAUST HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
XA 3745
mXA 3745
L.O. Heater Not Started after command Alarm
4
I
READ
TAHH 3764
mTAHH 3764
SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - TEMP. LIMIT.-HIGH HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3746
mTAH 3746
LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3747
mTAH 3747
RUNDOWN TANK TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAL 3746
mTAL 3746
LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
TAL 3747
mTAL 3747
RUNDOWN TANK TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
4
I
READ
PAH 3215
mPAH 3215
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
-
mPA 3403
Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
4
I
READ
-
mPA 3455
Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
4
I
READ
-
mPA 3460
Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
4
I
READ
-
mTA 3296
Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
4
I
READ
-
mPA 3449
Transmitter Discrepancy 1oo2
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40524
1
40524
2
40524
3
40524
4
40524
5
40524
6
40524
7
40524
8
40524
9
40524
10
40524
11
40524
12
40524
13
40524
14
40524
15
40524
16
40525
1
40525
2
40525
3
40525
4
40525
5
40525
6
40525
7
40525
8
40525
9
40525
10
40525
11
40525
12
40525
13
40525
14
40525
15
40525
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
20 / 21
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
TAH 3716
mTI 3716H
STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3717
mTI 3717H
STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3718
mTI 3718H
STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3719
mTI 3719H
STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3720
mTI 3720H
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3721
mTI 3721H
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING TEMP.HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3724
mTI 3724H
STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3722
mTI 3722H
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3723
mTI 3723H
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3727
mTI 3727H
COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3728
mTI 3728H
COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3729
mTI 3729H
COMPR.THRUST BRG.NON-ACT. SIDE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3730
mTI 3730H
COMPR.THRUST BRG.NON-ACT. SIDE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3731
mTI 3731H
COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3732
mTI 3732H
COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3733
mTI 3733H
COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3725
mTI 3725H
COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAH 3726
mTI 3726H
COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAH 3103Y
mVT 3103Y
STEAM TURB. JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END Y RAD. HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
ZAH 3001B
mZAH 3001BH
STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
ZAH 3001A
mZAH 3001AH
STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAH 3102Y
mVT 3102YH
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END Y RAD. HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAH 3105Y
mVT 3105YH
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAH 3102X
mVT 3102XH
STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END X RAD. HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
ZAH 3002B
mZAH 3002BH
COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAH 3103X
mVT 3103XH
STEAM TURB. JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END X RAD. HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
ZAH 3002A
mZAH 3002AH
COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAH 3105X
mVT 3105XH
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAH 3104X
mVT 3104XH
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAH 3104Y
mVT 3104YH
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40526
1
40526
2
40526
3
40526
4
40526
5
40526
6
40526
7
40526
8
40526
9
40526
10
40526
11
40526
12
40526
13
40526
14
40526
15
40526
16
40527
1
40527
2
40527
3
40527
4
40527
5
40527
6
40527
7
40527
8
40527
9
40527
10
40527
11
40527
12
40527
13
40527
14
40527
15
40527
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
21 / 22
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
-
mCPU_Fail
4
I
READ
-
mIOCard_Fail
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Cpu Card Failure
40528
1
I/O Card Failure
40528
2
40528
3
40528
4
40528
5
40528
6
40528
7
40528
8
40528
9
40528
10
40528
11
40528
12
40528
13
40528
14
40528
15
40528
16
40529
1
40529
2
40529
3
40529
4
40529
5
40529
6
40529
7
40529
8
40529
9
40529
10
40529
11
40529
12
40529
13
40529
14
40529
15
40529
16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
22 / 23
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40530
1
40530
2
40530
3
40530
4
40530
5
40530
6
40530
7
40530
8
40530
9
40530
10
40530
11
40530
12
40530
13
40530
14
40530
15
40530
16
40531
1
40531
2
40531
3
40531
4
40531
5
40531
6
40531
7
40531
8
40531
9
40531
10
40531
11
40531
12
40531
13
40531
14
40531
15
40531
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
23 / 24
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40532
1
40532
2
40532
3
40532
4
40532
5
40532
6
40532
7
40532
8
40532
9
40532
10
40532
11
40532
12
40532
13
40532
14
40532
15
40532
16
40533
1
40533
2
40533
3
40533
4
40533
5
40533
6
40533
7
40533
8
40533
9
40533
10
40533
11
40533
12
40533
13
40533
14
40533
15
40533
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
24 / 25
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628462/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628437/1
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628460/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628437/1 SOS8628450/1 SOS8628437/1
SOS8628450/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
PAHH 3215
mPSHH 3215_trip
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
TAHH 3296
mTSHH 3296_trip
BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
VAHH 3107
mVSHH 3107_trip
COMMON RADIAL VIBR. HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
PAHH 3455
mPSHH 3455_trip
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
SAHH 3052
mSSHH 3052_trip
STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
4
I
READ
XA 3048
mXS 3048_trip
EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
4
I
READ
XHA 3318
mXHS 3318_trip
UCP EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON TRIP
4
I
READ
PALL 3403
mPSLL 3403_trip
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
4
I
READ
PAHH 3460
mPSHH 3460_trip
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
PALL 3471
mPSLL 3471_trip
CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
4
I
READ
ZAHH 3004
mZSHH 3004_trip
BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLAC. COMMON TRIP
4
I
READ
XHA 3120
mXHS 3120_trip
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN TRIP
4
I
READ
PAHH 3422
mPSHH 3422_trip
HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
XA 3047A
mXS 3047A_trip
PLANT ESD
4
I
READ
XA 3214_trip
mXS 3214_trip
TRIP VALVE START.UP TEST ABORT
4
I
READ
UALL 3101
mUSLL 3101_trip
LOW STEAM QUALITY
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone 3
REV.
2
General revision
1
ADD.
40534
1
40534
2
40534
3
40534
4
40534
5
40534
6
40534
7
40534
8
40534
9
40534
10
40534
11
40534
12
40534
13
40534
14
40534
15
40534
16
40535
1
40535
2
40535
3
40535
4
40535
5
40535
6
40535
7
40535
8
40535
9
40535
10
40535
11
40535
12
40535
13
40535
14
40535
15
40535
16
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
INTERNO S.W. INTERNO S.W. COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
25 / 26
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
PDAHH 3426
mPDSHH 3426_trip
DIF.PRESS.WHEEL CHAMBER TO EXHAUST HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628460/1
4
I
READ
PALL 3451
mPSLL 3451_trip
NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS LOW LOW TRIP
SOS8628462/1
4
I
READ
XZSO 3030_trip
mXZSO_ 3030_trip
VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
SOS8628462/1
4
I
READ
XZSO 3031_trip
mXZSO_ 3031_trip
VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
4
I
READ
HS 3044
mXHS 3044_trip
EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN FROM DCS/VCCR
4
I
READ
GOV_FAILURE_trip
mGOV_FAILURE_trip
Max. time excededin critical band
4
I
READ
UNDERSPEED_trip
mUNDERSPEED_trip
Max. time excededin critical band
4
I
READ
TRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_trip mTRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_trip Max. time excededin critical band
4
I
READ
ST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR
mST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR Speed pick up descrepancy trip
4
I
READ
ST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT
mST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT Speed pick up descrepancy trip
4
I
READ
ST_TRP_STD_CTRL
mST_TRP_STD_CTRL
4
I
READ
ST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED mST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED Overspeed trip
4
I
READ
COM_TRIP_DEL
mCOM_TRIP_DEL
Common trip signal Delayed
4
I
READ
TRIP_SEQ
mTRIP_SEQ
Steam Turbine Common Trip
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628450/1
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Overspeed trip
Nuovo Pignone 3
REV.
2
General revision
1
ADD.
40536
1
40536
2
40536
3
40536
4
40536
5
40536
6
40536
7
40536
8
40536
9
40536
10
40536
11
40536
12
40536
13
40536
14
40536
15
40536
16
40537
1
40537
2
40537
3
40537
4
40537
5
40537
6
40537
7
40537
8
40537
9
40537
10
40537
11
40537
12
40537
13
40537
14
40537
15
40537
16
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
26 / 27
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
1
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
5
I
READ
6
I
READ
7
I
READ
8
I
READ
9
I
READ
10
I
READ
11
I
READ
12
I
READ
13
I
READ
14
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone 3
REV.
2
General revision
1
ADD.
40538
1
40538
2
40538
3
40538
4
40538
5
40538
6
40538
7
40538
8
40538
9
40538
10
40538
11
40538
12
40538
13
40538
14
40538
15
40538
16
40539
1
40539
2
40539
3
40539
4
40539
5
40539
6
40539
7
40539
8
40539
9
40539
10
40539
11
40539
12
40539
13
40539
14
40539
15
40539
16
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
27 / 28
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
PSHH 3215_trip_FO
mPSHH 3215_trip_FO
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
PSLL 3451_trip_FO
mPSLL 3451_trip_FO
NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS LOW LOW TRIP
4
I
READ
PDSHH 3426_trip_FO
mPDSHH 3426_trip_FO
DIF.PRESS.WHEEL CHAMBER TO EXHAUST HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628450/1
4
I
READ
PSHH 3422_trip_FO
mPSHH 3422_trip_FO
HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628460/1
4
I
READ
PSHH 3455_trip_FO
mPSHH 3455_trip_FO
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628460/1
4
I
READ
PSHH 3460_trip_FO
mPSHH 3460_trip_FO
COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1
4
I
READ
PSLL 3403_trip_FO
mPSLL 3403_trip_FO
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
SOS8628437/1
4
I
READ
PSLL 3471_trip_FO
mPSLL 3471_trip_FO
CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
SOS8628437/1
4
I
READ
SSHH 3052_trip_FO
mSSHH 3052_trip_FO
STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
4
I
READ
TSHH 3296_trip_FO
mTSHH 3296_trip_FO BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
UNDERSPEED_trip_FO
mUNDERSPEED_trip_FO Max. time excededin critical band
SOS8628450/1
4
I
READ
USLL 3102_trip_FO
mUSLL 3102_trip_FO
LOW STEAM QUALITY
SOS8628431/1
4
I
READ
VSHH 3107_trip_FO
mVSHH 3107_trip_FO
COMMON RADIAL VIBR. HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628437/1
4
I
READ
XHS 3120_trip_FO
mXHS 3120_trip_FO
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN TRIP
4
I
READ
XHS 3318_trip_FO
mXHS 3318_trip_FO
UCP EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON TRIP
4
I
READ
XS 3047A_trip_FO
mXS 3047A_trip_FO
PLANT ESD
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
XS 3048_trip_FO
mXS 3048_trip_FO
EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
4
I
READ
XS 3214_trip_FO
mXS 3214_trip_FO
Trip valve start-up test abort
SOS8628462/1
4
I
READ
XZSO_ 3030_trip_FO
mXZSO_ 3030_trip_FO
VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
SOS8628462/1
4
I
READ
XZSO_ 3031_trip_FO
mXZSO_ 3031_trip_FO
VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
SOS8628431/1
4
I
READ
ZSHH 3004_trip_FO
mZSHH 3004_trip_FO
BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLAC. COMMON TRIP
4
I
READ
ST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR_FO mST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR_FO Cumultive Trip valve congruency
4
I
READ
ST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT_FO mST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT_FO Cumultive Trip valve congruency
4
I
READ
ST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED_FO mST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED_FO Cumultive Trip valve congruency
4
I
READ
ST_TRP_STD_CTRL_FO
4
I
READ
TRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_FO mTRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_trip_FO Max. time excededin critical band
4
I
READ
GOV_FAILURE_trip_FO
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628460/1
SOS8628437/1
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
mXHS1044_trip_FO
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN FROM DCS/VCCR
mST_TRP_STD_CTRL_FOCumultive Trip valve congruency
mGOV_FAILURE_trip_FO Max. time excededin critical band
Nuovo Pignone 3
REV.
2
General revision
1
ADD.
40540
1
40540
2
40540
2
40540
4
40540
5
40540
6
40540
7
40540
8
40540
9
40540
10
40540
11
40540
12
40540
13
40540
14
40540
15
40540
16
40541
1
40541
2
40541
3
40541
4
40541
5
40541
6
40541
7
40541
8
40541
9
40541
10
40541
11
40541
12
40541
13
40541
14
40541
15
40541
16
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
28 / 29
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone 3
REV.
2
General revision
1
ADD.
40542
1
40542
2
40542
3
40542
4
40542
5
40542
6
40542
7
40542
8
40542
9
40542
10
40542
11
40542
12
40542
13
40542
14
40542
15
40542
16
40543
1
40543
2
40543
3
40543
4
40543
5
40543
6
40543
7
40543
8
40543
9
40543
10
40543
11
40543
12
40543
13
40543
14
40543
15
40543
16
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
29 / 30
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3101_ok
KEY PHASOR PROBE PROXIMITOR
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3102X_ok
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3102X_alm
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAHH 3102X
fVT 3102X_trp
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3103X_ok
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3103X_alm
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAHH 3103X
fVT 3103X_trp
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fZAH 3001A_ok
STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fZAH 3001A_alm
STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH ALM.
4
I
READ
ZAHH 3001A
fZAH 3001A_trp
STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3102Y_ok
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3102Y_alm
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAHH 3002Y
fVT 3102Y_trp
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3103Y_ok
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3103Y_alm
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
VAHH 3103Y
fVT 3103Y_trp
STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40544
1
40544
2
40544
3
40544
4
40544
5
40544
6
40544
7
40544
8
40544
9
40544
10
40544
11
40544
12
40544
13
40544
14
40544
15
40544
16
40545
1
40545
2
40545
3
40545
4
40545
5
40545
6
40545
7
40545
8
40545
9
40545
10
40545
11
40545
12
40545
13
40545
14
40545
15
40545
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
30 / 31
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
-
fZAH 3001B_ok
STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fZAH 3001B_alm
STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH ALM.
4
I
READ
ZAHH 3001B
fZAH 3001B_trp
STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3104X_ok
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3104X_alm
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALM.
4
I
READ
VAHH 3104X
fVT 3104X_trp
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3105X_ok
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3105X_alm
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH ALM.
4
I
READ
VAHH 3105X
fVT 3105X_trp
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fZAH 3002A_ok
COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fZAH 3002A_alm
COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALM.
4
I
READ
ZAHH 3002A
fZAH 3002A_trp
COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH HIGH ALM.
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3104Y_ok
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3104Y_alm
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALM.
4
I
READ
VAHH 3104Y
fVT 3104Y_trp
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3105Y_ok
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fVT 3105Y_alm
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALM.
4
I
READ
VAHH 3105Y
fVT 3105Y_trp
COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fZAH 3002B_ok
COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fZAH 3002B_alm
COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALM.
4
I
READ
ZAHH 3002B
fZAH 3002B_trp
COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3716_ok
STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3716_alm
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3716
fTI 3716_trp
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3717_ok
STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3717_alm
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3717
fTI 3717_trp
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3718_ok
STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3718_alm
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3718
fTI 3718_trp
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3719_ok
STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3719_alm
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40546
1
40546
2
40546
3
40546
4
40546
5
40546
6
40546
7
40546
8
40546
9
40546
10
40546
11
40546
12
40546
13
40546
14
40546
15
40546
16
40547
1
40547
2
40547
3
40547
4
40547
5
40547
6
40547
7
40547
8
40547
9
40547
10
40547
11
40547
12
40547
13
40547
14
40547
15
40547
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
31 / 32
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
TAHH 3719
fTI 3719_trp
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3720_ok
STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3720_alm
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3720
fTI 3720_trp
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3721_ok
STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3721_alm
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3721
fTI 3721_trp
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3724_ok
STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3724_alm
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3724
fTI 3724_trp
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3722_ok
STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3722_alm
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3722
fTI 3722_trp
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3723_ok
STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3723_alm
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3723
fTI 3723_trp
STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3727_ok
COMPRESSOR RTD CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3727_alm
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3727
fTI 3727_trp
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3728_ok
COMPRESSOR RTD CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3728_alm
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3728
fTI 3728_trp
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3729_ok
COMPRESSOR RTD CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3729_alm
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3729
fTI 3729_trp
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3730_ok
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3730_alm
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3730
fTI 3730_trp
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3731_ok
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3731_alm
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3731
fTI 3731_trp
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3732_ok
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD CHANNEL OK
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40548
1
40548
2
40548
3
40548
4
40548
5
40548
6
40548
7
40548
8
40548
9
40548
10
40548
11
40548
12
40548
13
40548
14
40548
15
40548
16
40549
1
40549
2
40549
3
40549
4
40549
5
40549
6
40549
7
40549
8
40549
9
40549
10
40549
11
40549
12
40549
13
40549
14
40549
15
40549
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
32 / 33
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1 SOS8628431/1
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3732_alm
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3732
fTI 3732_trp
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3733_ok
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3733_alm
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3733
fTI 3733_trp
COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3725_ok
COMPRESSOR RTD CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3725_alm
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3725
fTI 3725_trp
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3726_ok
COMPRESSOR RTD CHANNEL OK
4
I
READ
-
fTI 3726_alm
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH ALARM
4
I
READ
TAHH 3726
fTI 3726_trp
COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40550
1
40550
2
40550
3
40550
4
40550
5
40550
6
40550
7
40550
8
40550
9
40550
10
40550
11
40550
12
40550
13
40550
14
40550
15
40550
16
40551
1
40551
2
40551
3
40551
4
40551
5
40551
6
40551
7
40551
8
40551
9
40551
10
40551
11
40551
12
40551
13
40551
14
40551
15
40551
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
33 / 34
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40552
1
40552
2
40552
3
40552
4
40552
5
40552
6
40552
7
40552
8
40552
9
40552
10
40552
11
40552
12
40552
13
40552
14
40552
15
40552
16
40553
1
40553
2
40553
3
40553
4
40553
5
40553
6
40553
7
40553
8
40553
9
40553
10
40553
11
40553
12
40553
13
40553
14
40553
15
40553
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
34 / 35
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
READ
4
I
WRITE
NSR 3207
dNSR 3207
LO pump stop command from DCS
4
I
WRITE
HS 3239
dHS 3239
Raise speed setpoint (DCS)
4
I
WRITE
HS 3240
dHS 3240
Lower speed setpoint (DCS)
4
I
WRITE
HS 3227
dHS 3227
Halt speed starting sequencing (DCS)
4
I
WRITE
HS 3224
dHS 3224
Continue speed starting sequencing (DCS)
4
I
WRITE
HS 3230
dHS 3230
Controlled S/D (DCS)
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
XHS -PT 3403A
dXHS 3403a
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -PT 3403B
dXHS 3403b
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -PT 3403C
dXHS 3403c
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -PT 3455A
dXHS 3455a
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -PT 3455B
dXHS 3455b
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -PT 3455C
dXHS 3455c
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -PT 3460A
dXHS 3460a
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -PT 3460B
dXHS 3460b
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -PT 3460C
dXHS 3460c
Override Command
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Special_Proc_DCS
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
mSpecial_Proc_DCS
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Special procedure indication to DCS (SP=1)
Nuovo Pignone
40554
1
40554
2
40554
3
40554
4
40554
5
40554
6
40554
7
40554
8
40554
9
40554
10
40554
11
40554
12
40554
13
40554
14
40554
15
40554
16
40555
1
40555
2
40555
3
40555
4
40555
5
40555
6
40555
7
40555
8
40555
9
40555
10
40555
11
40555
12
40555
13
40555
14
40555
15
40555
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
35 / 36
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
WRITE
XHS -TI 3296A
dXHS 3296a
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -TI 3296B
dXHS 3296b
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
XHS -TI 3296C
dXHS 3296c
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
HS -PT 3426
dHSPT 3426
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
HS -PT 3451
dHSPT 3451
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
HS -PT 3471
dHSPT 3471
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
HS -PT 3422
dHSPT 3422
Override Command
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
XSO 3030
dXSO 3030
open suction isol. valve DCS
4
I
WRITE
XSC 3030
dXSC 3030
close suction isol. valve DCS
4
I
WRITE
XSO 3031
dXSO 3031
open discharge isol. valve DCS
4
I
WRITE
XSC 3031
dXSC 3031
close discharge isol. valve DCS
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
Nuovo Pignone
40556
1
40556
2
40556
3
40556
4
40556
5
40556
6
40556
7
40556
8
40556
9
40556
10
40556
11
40556
12
40556
13
40556
14
40556
15
40556
16
40557
1
40557
2
40557
3
40557
4
40557
5
40557
6
40557
7
40557
8
40557
9
40557
10
40557
11
40557
12
40557
13
40557
14
40557
15
40557
16 COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
36 / 37
Engineering Data Range
Data Tag Reference Drawing No.
Dataset No.
Data Type
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
4
I
WRITE
Read / READ (DCS Perspective)
Actual Instr Tag
Data Descriptor
Tag Within Mapped Array
Service Min Value
Max Value
Ethernet Modbus No. of Decimals
Engineering Units
WATCH DOG
40558
1
40558
2
40558
3
40558
4
40558
5
40558
6
40558
7
40558
8
40558
9
40558
10
40558
11
40558
12
40558
13
40558
14
40558
15
40558
16
40559
1
FAT Complete
Comments
Modbus Bit Within Register Register (16-bit (Bit 1 is LSB) Registers)
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB FIRENZE
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST
3
REV.
2
Rev. Where shown
1
ADD.
1102313 / 1900533 ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
N°
SOS9971995/3
LINGUA - LANG.
A
NOTE
REV,
DESCRIZIONE
Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato.
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES
REV,
DESCRIPTION
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
37 / 37
Bernardi A.
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'
Zipoli M.
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE COMMESSA - JOB
CLIENTE - CUSTOMER
Colt Engineering for Suncor Energy LOCALITA' - PLANT LOCATION
North of Fort McMurray – Alberta – CANADA IMPIANTO - PLAN
1900533-4-5
Voyageur Hydrotreater GOHT#3, DHT#2, NHT#4
TITOLO - TITLE
GOVERNOR CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
ITEM
Lotti C.
207K-300-200-100
N. SOL45717 /4
1
GENERAL REVISION
Bernardi A.
Signorini A.
0
EMESSO - ISSUED
Bernardi A.
Ortiz Neri M.
Girezzi D.
12-08-08
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
PREP'D
CONT-CHK'D
APP-APPR'D
DATA-DATE
A
1 / 2
REV.
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
23-03-09
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'
STEAM TURBINE
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
Summary
1. START-UP PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................... 3 2. OPERATING PARAMETERS................................................................................................................ 7 3. SPEED CONTROL PARAMETERS .................................................................................................... 13 4. KWATT CONTROL.............................................................................................................................. 15 5. INLET PRESSURE CONTROL ........................................................................................................... 17 6. EXTRACTION CONTROL ................................................................................................................... 18 7. CASCADE CONTROL......................................................................................................................... 19 9. PRIORITY LOGIC ................................................................................................................................ 22
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
2 / 3
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
1. START-UP PARAMETERS
1.1 GENERAL PARAMETERS 7100
1.1.a) Minimum Governor speed (rpm) (Minimum Operating Speed)
11550 1.1.b) Maximum Governor speed (rpm) (Maximum Continuous Speed) They represent respectively the lower and the upper limit within which the turbine speed can vary, once the start-up is over and the target speed is reached. 1.1.c) Synchronous speed (rpm) (no for mechanical drive)
N/A
In the case of a generator drive it is the speed related to the mains frequency expressed in rpm. 1.1.d) 1st warm-up set point (rpm)
1500
It is the speed set point for the 1st warm-up. It can be obtained directly from the start-up diagram. 1.1.e) Start up target set point (rpm)
7100
It is the speed value at which the start-up sequence ends. In case of generator drive turbine it is often set at 100.3% of synchronous speed. In case of mechanical drive turbine this value is usually set at the Minimum Operating Speed, but any value in the range (Minimum Operating Speed - Maximum Continuous Speed) is valid. 1.1.f) 2nd warm-up set point (Kwatt) (no for mechanical drive)
N/A
It is the power set point for the 2nd warm up (only in the case of a generator drive). 1.1.g) Minimum Power (Kwatt) (no for mechanical drive)
N/A
It is valid only in the case of a generator drive. It represents the min. power set point of the KWatt controller. It is used during normal stop to request the generator breaker opening. Once synchronization is accomplished, the system shifts from speed control to power control. The controller reaches the set point reported above in order to enable the generator to output the "minimum power after synchronization" and prevent the “reverse power” trip.
1.1.i)
1.1.h) First critical start (rpm) st 1 Critical enable (GOHT, DHT) 1.1.j) First critical stop (rpm)
5800
1.1.h) First critical start (rpm)
5600
1.1.j) First critical stop (rpm)
6000
st
6200
1 Critical enable (NHT)
The first critical start is the parameter that identifies the rpm value at the beginning of the first critical band during the start-up phase, and can be obtained directly from the start-up diagram. The first critical stop represents the rpm value at which the first critical band ends. The critical band presence or absence is to be signaled through the check box. ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
3 / 4
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
1.1.m)
nd
2
1.1.l) Second critical start (rpm)
6650
1.1.n) second critical stop (rpm)
7050
Critical enable
The second critical start is the parameter that identifies the rpm value at the beginning of the second critical band during the start-up phase, and can be obtained directly from the start-up diagram. The second critical stop represents the rpm value at which the second critical band ends. The critical band presence or absence is to be signaled through the check box. Function of critical bands: The governor shall allow the machine speed to be within speed critical bands only for the time necessary to cross them. Moreover, it is possible to differentiate the acceleration ramp within these ranges in relation to the normal value. 1.1.o) Hot start (sec)
18000
It represents the time in seconds below which the turbine is to be considered "hot". See note 1. 1.1.p) Cold start (sec)
18000
It represents the time in seconds above which the turbine is to be considered "cold". See note 1. 1.1.q) Manual slope (rpm/sec)
5
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the ramp with which it is possible to manually change the speed set point. 1.1.r) Synchronous slope (rpm/sec) (no for mechanical drive)
N/A
It is valid in the case of a generator drive. It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the ramp with which the speed set point is changed during the synchronization phase. Once UNICOS has sent the "permissive to synchronize" signal to the generator control panel (GCPP), the synchronization is managed by this panel, which sends three different signals to UNICOS (“Synchronizer enabled” followed by “Governor speed raise”, and “Governor speed lower”). 1.1.s) Normal stop slope (rpm/sec)
5
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp during the Normal Stop phase until the 1st warm up speed is reached. 1.1.t) 1st warm up Time Set (sec)
900
It represents the 1st warm up time maximum value (with cold turbine) in seconds. NOTE 1: If Hot start < time elapsed from last shutdown < Cold start, then the governor carries out an interpolation between the two reference values. 1.1.u) 2nd warm up Time Set (sec) (no for mechanical drive)
N/A
It represents the 2nd warm up maximum value (with cold turbine) in seconds. ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
4 / 5
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
nd
1.1.v) Min power for 2
warm-up (%) (no for mechanical drive)
N/A
It represents the power minimum value, expressed in % of deviation from the SECOND WARM-UP SETPOINT, in order to guarantee the achievement of the 2nd warm-up. If during the 2nd warm-up phase, the power produced by the generator is different from this value, the 2nd warm-up time count is stopped and an alarm is generated
1.2 SLOPE RATES 5
1.2.a) Rate to 1st warm up hot (rpm/sec)
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to 1st warm up in case of Hot Start conditions (see definition of Hot Start). 5
1.2.b) Rate to 1st warm up cold (rpm/sec)
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to 1st warm up in case of Cold Start conditions (see definition of Cold Start). 18.66
1.2.c) Rate to target hot (rpm/sec)
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to target speed in case of Hot Start conditions (see definition of Hot Start). 18.66
1.2.d) Rate to target cold (rpm/sec)
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to target speed in case of Cold Start conditions (see definition of Cold Start). 35
1.2.e) First critical hot (rpm/sec)
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp within the range corresponding to the first critical band, if the first critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the hot start condition (see definition of hot start). 35
1.2.f) First critical cold (rpm/sec)
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp within the range corresponding to the first critical band, if the first critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the cold start condition (see definition of cold start). 35
1.2.g) Second critical hot (rpm/sec)
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp within the range corresponding to the second critical band, if the second critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the hot start condition (see definition of hot start). 35
1.2.h) Second critical cold (rpm/sec)
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp within the range corresponding to the second critical band, if the second critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the cold start condition (see definition of cold start). ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
5 / 6
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
The figure below shows a diagram explaining the steam turbine start-up phase in the three conditions of hot start, warm start, and cold start, as well as a diagram representing the phase of turbine normal stop.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
6 / 7
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
2. OPERATING PARAMETERS 30
2.1 NUMBER OF PULSES PER REVOLUTION
It represents the number of pulses per turbine driving shaft revolution. This value is used to obtain the speed measurement in rpm. 2.2 START UP SELECTION 2.2.a) Manual: in this mode the speed set point increase and decrease as well as the HP valve limiter opening and closing are carried out in manual way. The speed set point can be increased up to the 1st warm up and, once the 1st warm up time is over, it can be increased up to target speed. In this (and only this) mode it is possible to carry out the overspeed test. 2.2.b) Semi auto: in this mode the set point grows in an automatic way, whereas the HP valve limiter is managed manually. The ramp interrupts at the 1st warm up. To continue with the start up sequence, it is necessary to act on the CONTINUE command. 2.2.c) Auto: the sequence is fully automatic: the speed set point shall automatically follow the trend reported in the start-up diagram in accordance with the parameters reported in section “Start-up parameters”. The HP valve limiter, too, is managed automatically. 2.3 THRESHOLDS 2.3.a) Overspeed trip (rpm)
12650
It represents the threshold beyond which a steam turbine high high speed trip occurs. Note: this function is not to be used as safety protection; however, an overspeed device separated from the governor must be featured. 12360
2.3.b) High speed (rpm) It represents the threshold beyond which a steam turbine high speed alarm is generated. 2.3.c) Turbine running (rpm)
250
It is the speed threshold below which the UNICOS governor considers the turbine at a standstill or barring. It shall be a speed slightly higher than barring speed. 2.3.d) Time in critical band (sec)
100
It represents the maximum value (in seconds) of stay in the critical band region (1st or 2nd) during the start-up phase, beyond which the UNICOS governor causes the steam turbine trip.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
7 / 8
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
2.4 GENERAL TURBINE SELECTION 2.4.a) GENERATOR DRIVE: parameter to be selected if the turbine is a generator drive. This check box animates the following parameters (2.4.b-2.4.e). 2.4.b) Sliding pressure: parameter to be selected in the case of a turbogenerator. Once the parallel connection (with the grid) is carried out, the pressure control on the HP valve shall be enabled. The HP valve is gradually opened until full opening or until the pressure measured at the steam turbine inlet is lower or equal to the pressure set point. 2.4.c) Droop enable: active only in parallel working with the grid. If selected, it enables the droop type control. It contributes to the opening or closing of the HP valve in function of the difference between the speed measured and synchronous speed (rated frequency). Its contribution takes place if the above-mentioned difference is higher than a dead band, which can be set and related to a gain, which can be set, too. This check box animates the following parameters (2.4.d-2.4.e). 2.4.d) Droop DB
(DEFAULT = 0.6%)
It represents the dead band of droop control intervention as percentage of synchronous speed. 2.4.e) Droop SAT
(DEFAULT = 4%)
This value indicates the revolutions error percentage that takes the valve to 100% of travel range. If Droop SAT = 1, the error of 1% upon revolutions corresponds to the contribution of 100% upon the valve. 2.4.f) MECHANICAL DRIVE: parameter to be selected if the turbine is the driver of a compressor. This check box animates the following parameters (2.4.g-2.4.l). 2.4.g)
Syngas
In the Syngas type mechanical drive configuration, during the start-up and normal stop stages, speed control is carried out acting on the HP valve (the LP valve is kept open and steam inlet pressure control is disabled). On the other hand, once the start-up is over and under normal working conditions, speed control is carried out acting on the LP valve (in this case, steam inlet pressure control is carried out acting on the HP valve). If this valve reaches its min. or max. limit, speed is controlled acting on the HP valve again. 2.4.h)
External Cascade Control
If the corresponding check box is selected, the external CASCADE mode is enabled (valid in the case of a mechanical drive). The Cascade is external if the speed set point at the UNICOS governor is supplied by an external PID controller: a typical case is a PIC controller external to UNICOS located on the compressor discharge whose control variable represents the UNICOS governor set point. It is important to stress that this modality must be selected even for any other controller implemented in the same PLC such as an antisurge or process controller whose output drives the steam turbine speed: all those controllers must be classified as External Cascade Control regardless their implementation. The external controller output shall be converted to standardized range (0-1). This check box animates the following parameter (2.4.i).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
8 / 9
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
2.4.i)
Span Selection
If the corresponding check box is selected, the UNICOS speed governor carries out its control action interpreting the signal coming from the external PID in the following way: 0 = 0 RPM; 1 = Maximum Continuous Speed. Set points lower than the Minimum Operating Speed, however, are not activated by the governor. If the corresponding check box is not selected, the UNICOS speed governor carries out its control action within the Minimum Operating Speed (0) and Maximum Continuous Speed (1) range. 2.4.j)
Internal Cascade Control
If the corresponding check box is selected, the internal CASCADE mode is enabled (valid in the case of a mechanical drive). See explanatory diagram below. The Cascade is internal if, unlike the external one, the controller supplying the speed set point to the UNICOS governor is defined inside this latter (i.e. the relevant process variable is acquired by UNICOS). The value shall be converted from 4 ÷ 20 mA to EU on the basis of MIN-MAX limit values (the limit values can be modified in the section dealing with Cascade Control). It’s important to stress that Internal Cascade Control doesn’t mean any other controller implemented in the same PLC such as an antisurge or process controller: all those controllers must be classified as External Cascade Control regardless their implementation. This check box animates the following parameters (2.4.k-2.4.l). 2.4.k)
Internal Cascade Control Set Point
If the corresponding check box is selected, in the case of internal CASCADE mode, the speed set point to the UNICOS governor is a dynamic process variable (for example supplied by the DCS). The value shall be converted from 4 ÷ 20 mA to EU entering the same cascade process variable limit values. If the corresponding check box is not selected, then the above-mentioned speed set point is a static variable defined within a register in the UNICOS governor, modifiable through the VDU. 2.4.l)
Internal Cascade Raise-Lower Set Point
If the corresponding check box is selected, in Cascade mode two digital inputs external to the UNICOS governor (for example coming from the DCS) are made available in order to raise / lower the Cascade Controller set point. The slope of the ramp on the basis of which this set point increases/decreases is defined on the Cascade Control page at parameter Cascade ramp slope [rpm/sec].
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
9 / 10
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
Below you can find the EXTERNAL CASCADE and INTERNAL CASCADE mode diagrams.
UNICOS TURBINE SPEED CASCADE RAMP SLOPE
EXTERNAL CASCADE SET POINT
PV SIC
Internal Cascade PID PROCESS VARIABLE MEASUREMENT
+
PV
SP +
PID HMI STATIC
Minimum Control Speed
SP
DYNAMIC
SET POINT SELECTION
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL CASCADE SELECTION
2.5 HP VALVE LIMITER CONTROL 2.5.a) Set point (Norm)
0
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the set point assumed by the HP valve limiter in case of trip. This value is standardized between 0 and 1 and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%). 2.5.b) Lower Limit (Norm)
0
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the lower limit assumed by the HP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and 1 and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%). 2.5.c) Upper Limit (Norm)
(DEFAULT = 1)
1
It represents the upper limit assumed by the HP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and 1 and expresses the valve opening percentage (0 = 0%; 1=100%).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
10 / 11
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
0.05
2.5.d) Slope rates (Norm/sec)
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the UNICOS governor raises/lowers the HP valve limiter. It is standardized between 0 and 1 in function of time (seconds). 0.4
2.5.e) 1st warm up Limit (Norm)
It represents the upper limit assumed by the HP valve limiter during automatic start-up until the 1st warm up is over. This value is standardized between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%). 0.8
2.5.f) Target Limit (Norm)
It represents the upper limit assumed by the HP valve limiter during automatic start-up until target speed is reached. This value is standardized between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%). 2.6 LP VALVE LIMITER CONTROL (only if the extraction valve is featured) 2.6.a) Set point (Norm)
(DEFAULT = 0)
N/A
It represents the set point assumed by the LP valve limiter in case of trip. This value is standardized between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%). 2.6.b) Lower Limit (Norm)
(DEFAULT = 0)
N/A
It represents the lower limit assumed by the LP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%). 2.6.c) Upper Limit (Norm)
N/A
(DEFAULT = 1)
It represents the upper limit assumed by the LP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0=0%; 1=100%). 2.6.d) Slope rates (Norm/sec)
N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the UNICOS governor raises/lowers the LP valve limiter. It is standardized between 0 and 1 in function of time (seconds).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
11 / 12
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
2.7 LOSS OF PARALLEL STATE CONTROL (visible only in case of generator drive) SHIFT FROM PARALLEL TO ISLAND In case of shift from parallel to island, thus in case of main switch opening, the HP valve shall be managed in one of the following modes: 2.7.a)
Manual: The HP valve shall reach the position set in relation to the parameter:
2.7.b) HP POSITION (norm) It represents a standardized value between 0 and 1 of the HP valve opening percentage. 2.7.c)
Disable: The PID inside the Governor deals with the HP valve control.
2.7.d) Continuous: The HP valve shall reach the position calculated in function of the island load continuous signal. SHIFT FROM PARALLEL TO ZERO LOAD In case of shift from parallel to zero load, thus in case of generator breaker opening, the HP valve shall reach the position set in relation to the parameter: 2.7.e) HP POSITION (norm)
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents a standardized value between 0 and 1 of the HP valve opening percentage. INSTANTANEOUS LOAD INCREASE IN ISLAND MODE (LOAD RECOVERY) In case of instantaneous load increase with turbogenerator running in island mode (for example in case of trip of a generator operating on the same island), with the “Load Recovery” signal the HP valve shall be managed in one of the following modes: 2.7.f)
Manual: The HP valve shall reach the position set in relation to the parameter:
2.7.g) HP POSITION (norm) It represents a standardized value between 0 and 1 of the HP valve opening percentage. 2.7.h)
Disable: The PID inside the Governor deals with the HP valve control.
2.7.i) Continuous: The HP valve shall reach the position calculated in function of the island load continuous signal.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
12 / 13
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
3. SPEED CONTROL PARAMETERS 3.1 PID PARAMETERS FOR GENERATOR DRIVE NO LOAD OR FOR MECHANICAL DRIVE UNDER M.O.S. The PID speed governor is based upon the PID classic diagram, which takes into consideration the three actions: Proportional, Integral and Derivative. The PID control typically provides a control output u(t) on the basis of error e(t) according to the formula: u(t) = PG et + 1 IT * ed + DT * det dt
(1)
The error e(t) is calculated in function of the difference between the process variable measured and the set point. The PG value is the governor proportional gain, the IT value is the integration time and the DT parameter is the derivative time. 3.1.a) Dynamic Multiplier Constant
3
(DEFAULT = 3)
In generator drive mode, in case of generator breaker opening, the parameters of the PID dealing with speed control are multiplied for the value entered in Dynamic Multiplier Constant to make the governor action more "reactive" (for a 10 sec interval). In particular, the proportionality constant and the derivative action are multiplied for this value, whereas the integral action is divided for this value. 3.1.b) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %)
1.5
(DEFAULT = 1.5)
It represents the PID governor proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point. This difference is then standardized at the speed measure full scale and is multiplied for the value set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example, a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to an error variation of 1% – with reference to speed full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%) 3.1.c) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec)
(DEFAULT =20)
20
(DEFAULT = 0)
0
It represents the PID governor integration time. 3.1.d) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec) It represents the PID governor derivation time. 3.1.e) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm)
0.01
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between speed and set point, standardized for speed full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
13 / 14
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
3.2 PID PARAMETERS FOR GENERATOR DRIVE AT LOAD (ISLAND) OR FOR MECHANICAL DRIVE ABOVE M.O.S. The PID speed governor is based on the classic PID diagram taking into consideration the three actions: Proportional, Integral and Derivative. The PID control typically provides a control output u(t) based on the error e(t) according to the formula: u(t) = PG et + 1 IT * ed + DT * det dt
(1)
The error e(t) is calculated in function of the difference between the process variable measured and the set point. The PG value is the governor proportional gain, the IT value is the integration time and the DT parameter is the derivative time. 3.2.b) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %)
2
(DEFAULT = 2)
It represents the PID governor proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point. This difference is then standardized at the speed measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example, a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1% error variation – with reference to speed full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%) 3.2.c) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec)
(DEFAULT = 15)
15
(DEFAULT = 0)
0
It represents the PID governor integration time. 3.2.d) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec) It represents the PID governor derivation time. 3.2.e) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm)
0.01
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between speed and set point, standardized for speed full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
14 / 15
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
4. KWATT CONTROL 4.1 PID PARAMETERS 4.1.a) BYPASS: if the check box is not selected, the power control is carried out in a closed loop using the feedback of the kW signal. Therefore, the control action is managed by the power control PID, whose set point shall be managed according to load engagement and disengagement ramps. If the check-box is selected, there is no control action carried out by the power PID, but the ramp shown above is ‘rescaled’ in a 0% ÷ 100% range, where 0 = minimum power, or better, HP valve opening in the moment of parallel connection, and 100% = HP valve completely open (maximum power). In this case, the KWatt measurement is not used and control is carried out in an open loop. 4.1.b) SP Set Point (KW) It represents the PID power controller set point expressed in KWatt, in the case of a generator drive. The following parameters (4.1.c 4.1.d) can be set when the dialog box pops up. 4.1.c) Min SP Set Point (KW) It represents the minimum value of the KWatt PID controller set point. 4.1.d) Max SP Set Point (KW) It represents the maximum value of the KWatt PID controller set point. 4.1.e) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %)
(DEFAULT = 0.5)
It represents the PID power controller proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point. This difference is then standardized at the power measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example, a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1% error variation – with reference to power full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%) 4.1.f) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec)
(DEFAULT = 15)
It represents the PID power controller integration time. 4.1.g) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec)
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the PID power controller derivation time. 4.1.h) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm)
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between power and set point, standardized for power full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
15 / 16
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
4.1.i) Set Point slope Hot (KW/sec)
N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID power controller pursues the set point expressed in KWatt per second, under Hot start conditions. 4.1.j) Set Point slope Cold (KW/sec)
N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID power controller pursues the set point expressed in KWatt per second, under Cold start conditions. 4.1.k) Set Point slope Stop (KW/sec)
N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which power expressed in KWatt per second is decreased during turbine normal stop.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
16 / 17
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
5. INLET PRESSURE CONTROL In the UNICOS governor, inlet pressure control at the first turbine stage can be enabled only in the case of a generator drive and a mechanical drive in Syngas mode. The PID parameters are reported below. 5.1 PID PARAMETERS N/A
5.1.a) SP Set Point (E.U.) INITIAL VALUE
It represents the inlet pressure PID controller initial set point at the first turbine stage. The following parameters (5.1.b 5.1.c) can be set when the dialog box pops up. 5.1.b) Min. SP Set Point (E.U.)
N/A
It represents the minimum value of the inlet pressure PID controller set point at the first turbine stage. 5.1.c) Max. SP Set Point (E.U.)
N/A
It represents the maximum value of the inlet pressure PID controller set point at the first turbine stage. N/A
5.1.d) Set Point slope (E.U. /sec) It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID controller pursues the set point. 5.1.e) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %)
N/A
(DEFAULT = 0.2)
It represents the PID pressure controller proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point. This difference is then standardized at the pressure measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1% error variation – with reference to pressure full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%) 5.1.f) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec)
(DEFAULT = 15)
N/A
It represents the PID pressure controller integration time. 5.1.g) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec)
N/A
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the PID pressure controller derivation time. 5.1.h) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm)
N/A
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between power and set point, standardized for power full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
17 / 18
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
6. EXTRACTION CONTROL This section is visible only when the check box 9.2.d is unchecked 6.1 PID PARAMETERS N/A
6.1.a) SP Set Point (E.U.) INITIAL VALUE
It represents the initial set point of the PID controller dealing with extraction flow control between the first and the second stage of the turbine. The following parameters (6.1.b 6.1.c) can be set when the dialog box pops up. 6.1.b) Set Point slope (E.U./sec)
N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID extraction controller pursues the set point. N/A
N/A 6.1.c) Min. SP Set Point (E.U.)
It represents the minimum set point of the PID controller dealing with extraction flow control between the first and the second stage of the turbine. N/A
6.1.d) Max. SP Set Point (E.U.)
It represents the maximum set point of the PID controller dealing with extraction flow control between the first and the second stage of the turbine. 6.1.e) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN
N/A
(DEFAULT = 0.2)
It represents the PID extraction controller proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point. This difference is then standardized at the pressure measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value set on PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1% error variation – with reference to pressure full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%) 6.1.f) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec)
(DEFAULT = 20)
N/A
It represents the PID extraction controller integration time. 6.1.g) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec)
N/A
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the PID extraction controller derivation time. 6.1.h) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm)
N/A
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between power and set point, standardized for power full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
18 / 19
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
7. CASCADE CONTROL This selection is possible only if MECHANICAL DRIVE as been selected in section Operating Parameters. 7.1 CASCADE PARAMETERS 7.1.a) Cascade ramp slope (rpm/sec) Regardless as to whether the internal or external cascade control has been selected or not, the SIC (UNICOS speed governor) shall receive a set point that is always limited by a ramp whose slope can be configured in Cascade ramp slope (in rpm per second). 7.1.b) SP Set Point (E.U.) INITIAL VALUE It represents the Cascade controller initial set point. The following parameters (7.1.b 7.1.c) can be set when the dialog box pops up. 7.1.c) Min. SP Set Point (E.U.) It represents the Cascade controller set point minimum value. 7.1.d) Max. SP Set Point (E.U.) It represents the Cascade controller set point maximum value. 7.1.e) Cascade set point slope rate (E.U./sec) It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID Cascade controller pursues the set point. 7.1.f) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %)
(DEFAULT = 0.1)
It represents the proportional gain of the PID controller in Cascade mode. The error in case of mere proportional action is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point. This difference is then standardized at the speed measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1% error variation – with reference to speed full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%) 7.1.g) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec)
(DEFAULT = 25)
It represents the integration time of the PID controller in Cascade mode. 7.1.h) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec)
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the derivation time of the PID controller in Cascade mode. 7.1.i) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm)
(DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between power and set point, standardized for power full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no effect. 7.1.j) Direct inverse If the check box is not selected, the error leading the PID output is equal to SPPV the greater is the PV the lower is the PID output. If the check box is selected, the error leading the PID output is equal to PV-SP the greater is the PV the higher is the PID output. ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
19 / 20
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
8. STEAM MAP This selection shall be valid only if extraction control is enabled in section PRIORITY LOGIC. The diagram below represents the ratio between the steam flow on the HP and LP valves, and the turbine power. This ratio is used in case of coupling between the two valves.
Max HP Flow
Flow (t/h)
Point B
Point A
Point C
Power (Kw)
Max Power
FIG. 1 On the steam map page the following parameters are configured: 8.1.a) MAX Power @ Min Ext. (KWatt) - POINT A
N/A
It represents the x-coordinate of point A in figure1. It identifies the maximum power in relation to the minimum extraction, expressed in Watt. 8.1.b) MAX HP Flow @ Min Ext. (T/H) - POINT A
N/A
It represents the y-coordinate of point A in figure 1. It identifies the HP valve maximum flow in relation to the minimum extraction, expressed in tons/h. 8.1.c) MIN Power @ Max Ext. (KWatt) - POINT B
N/A
It represents the x-coordinate of point B in figure 1. It identifies the minimum power in relation to the maximum extraction, expressed in KWatt. N/A
8.1.d) MIN HP Flow @ Max Ext. (T/H) - POINT B
It represents the y-coordinate of point B in figure 1. It identifies the HP valve minimum flow in relation to the maximum extraction, expressed in tons/h.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
20 / 21
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
N/A
8.1.e) MIN Power @ Min Ext. (KWatt) - POINT C
It represents the x-coordinate of point C in figure 1. It identifies the minimum power in relation to the minimum extraction, expressed in KWatt. (NEGATIVE VALUES ARE POSSIBLE) N/A
8.1.f) MIN HP Flow @ Min Ext. (T/H) - POINT C
It represents the y-coordinate of point C in figure 1. It identifies the HP valve minimum flow in relation to the minimum extraction, expressed in tons/h. (NEGATIVE VALUES ARE POSSIBLE) 8.1.g) Max. Power (KWatt)
N/A
It represents the maximum permissible power value expressed in KWatt. N/A
8.1.h) Max. HP Flow (T/h) It represents the maximum permissible flow of the HP valve expressed in tons/h.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
21 / 22
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
9. PRIORITY LOGIC 9.1.a)
LP PRIORITY
Control priority is given to the LP valve. Therefore, in case of control saturation on the LP valve, the HP valve is used to keep the control. 9.1.b)
HP PRIORITY
Control priority is given to the HP valve. Therefore, in case of control saturation on the HP valve, the LP valve is used to keep the control. 9.1.c)
NO PRIORITY
Priority is given neither to control on the HP valve nor to control on the LP valve. Figure 2 shows the general control diagram of the two steam turbine valves.
HP PID
A11
+
HP Valve
+
A12
A21 LP PID
A22
+
-
LP Valve
FIG.2 As can be noted, the two PIDs (and consequently their control actions on the HP and LP valves) interact by means of dynamic coupling factors. 9.2 VALVE COUPLING CONTROL 9.2.a)
Decoupling HP & LP
If this checkbox is selected, any interaction between the two PID controllers for HP and LP valves is eliminated. With reference to fig. 2, the four parameters assume the following values: A11=1, A22=1, A12=0, A21=0.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
22 / 23
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
9.2.b)
Decouple inlet (HP)
If this checkbox is selected, the interaction of the LP controller with the HP one is eliminated; in practice, making reference to fig. 2, we have: A11=1, A21=0, whereas A12 and A22 shall be calculated in function of the steam map. 9.2.c)
Decouple extraction (LP)
If this checkbox is selected, the interaction of the HP controller with the LP one is eliminated; in practice, making reference to fig.2 we have: A22=1, A12=0, whereas A11 and A21 shall be calculated in function of the steam map. 9.2.d)
Exclude Extraction Control
If this checkbox is selected, only the HP valve is featured and therefore the extraction is excluded.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4 1 REV.
REVISED WHERE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
LINGUA-LANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
23 / 23
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
UNIT CONTROL PANEL
CLIENTE – CUSTOMER
COLT ENGINEERING FOR SUNCOR ENERGY LOCALITA' - PLANT LOCATION
NORTH OF FORT MCMURRAY, ALBERTA (CANADA) IMPIANTO – PLANT
VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATER GOHT #3 2 0 7K -300 / 2 07 K T -300
Nuovo Pignone
V P 2 0 7 -K -3 075 -1
1D
JOB
110.2313
FIRENZE ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
207K-300/207KT-300
3
REVISED SHEET 1,11,12,15
SSE
Bernardi A.
Zipoli M.
30.09.09
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
SSE
Bernardi A.
Rossi S.
04.09.09
1
GENERAL REVISION – ADDED SH. 29, 30
SSE
Bernardi A.
Rossi S.
08.06.09
0
ISSUE
SSE
Bernardi A.
Palma L.
05.12.08
LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
PREP'D
CONT-CHK'D
APP-APPR'D
DATA-DATE
A
1 / 2
REV.
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
COVER SHEET
N. SOS 9971996 /3
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'
HMI VIDEO PAGES
1.
LUBE OIL MACHINE SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.
LUBE OIL CONSOLE SYSYEM................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
3.
CONTROL OIL SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
4.
SEAL GAS SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
5.
SEAL GAS CONDITIONING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
6.
PROCESS SYSTEM..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
7.
STEAM SYSTEM.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
8.
PROCESS CONTROLLER ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
9.
ANTISURGE #1.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
10.
ANTISURGE#2........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
11.
SPEED CONTROL ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
12.
TRIP VALVE TEST..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
13.
PERMISSIVE TO START ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
14.
OVERRIDE ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16
15.
SETPOINT.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
16.
ALARMS / TRIPS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
17.
EVENTS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
18.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
19.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
20.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
21.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
22.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
23.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
24.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
25.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
26.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
27.
TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
28.
KEYBOARD ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
2 / 3
1. Lube Oil Machine System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
3 / 4
2. Lube Oil Console Sysyem
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
4 / 5
3. Control Oil System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
5 / 6
4. Seal Gas System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
6 / 7
5. Seal Gas Conditioning System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
7 / 8
6. Process System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
8 / 9
7. Steam System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
9 / 10
8. Process Controller
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
10 / 11
9. Antisurge #1
10.
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
3
REVISED ALL SHHET
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
11 / 12
Antisurge#2
11.
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
3
REVISED ALL SHHET
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
12 / 13
Speed Control
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
13 / 14
12.Trip Valve Test
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
14 / 15
13.Permissive To Start
14.
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
3
REVISED ALL SHHET
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
15 / 16
Override
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
16 / 17
15.Setpoint
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
17 / 18
16. Alarms / Trips
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
18 / 19
17.Events
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
19 / 20
18. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
20 / 21
19. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
21 / 22
20. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
22 / 23
21. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
23 / 24
22. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
24 / 25
23. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
25 / 26
24. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
26 / 27
25. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
27 / 28
26. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
28 / 29
27. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
29 / 30
28. Keyboard
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
ITEM
TITOLO – TITLE
2
REVISED ALL SHEET
1
REV.
REV.
2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
207K-300/207KT-300
HMI VIDEO PAGES
DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
110.2313
FIRENZE
N. SOS 9971996 /3 LINGUA-RANG.
PAGINA-SHEET
A
30 / 30
g GE Oil & Gas
Nuovo Pignone Volume VII
Section B
N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533
UNIT CONTROL PANEL
NUOVO PIGNONE CODE
RQO 1451504 (SOS 9971973)
MANUFACTURER
SIRIO SISTEMI ELETTRONICI
MANUAL No.
SIRIO MANUAL
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
NUOVO PIGNONE CODE
RQO 1451505 (SOS 9971973)
MANUFACTURER
SIRIO SISTEMI ELETTRONICI
MANUAL No.
SIRIO MANUAL
10-08-E MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00
.2313/.0533
P. 1-1
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
UNIT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUCTION, USER AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Costruttore / Manufacturer
SSE
Descrizione / Description
Quadro di controllo / Unit Control Panel
Numero di serie SSE / SSE Serial Number
280064 and 280153 and 280155
Commessa SSE / SSE Job
280064 and 280153 and 280155
Cliente SSE / SSE Customer
Nuovo Pignone
Ordine Cliente SSE / SSE Customer Order
439519724 Pos.1,3,5
Cliente Finale / End Customer
COLT FOR SUNCOR ENERGY
Località / Location
FORT MC MURRAY, ALBERTA (CANADA)
Impianto / Plant
VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATER
Job NP / Commessa NP
1102313-14-15
NP Specification / Specifica NP
SOS9971973 (RQ 1451504 - RQ 1451506 - RQ 1451508)
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 1 di 9
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
INDEX 1.
SCOPE OF SUPPLY _________________________________________________________3
2.
REFERENCE DRAWINGS FOR PANEL CONSTRUCTION ________________________3
3.
GENERAL TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION _______________________________________3
4.
POWER SUPPLY ____________________________________________________________4
5.
EARTH CIRCUITS __________________________________________________________6
6.
SEGREGATION OF THE WIRING WITH DIFFERENT SIGNAL LEVEL ____________6
7.
OPERATING CONDITIONS __________________________________________________7
8.
STOCK REQUIREMENT _____________________________________________________7
9.
HANDLING ________________________________________________________________7
10. MAINTENANCE ____________________________________________________________7 11. POWER-UP PROCEDURE ____________________________________________________8 12. POWER-DOWN PROCEDURE ________________________________________________9
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 2 di 9
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY Description of Unit Control Panel (UCP) for the turbine and compressor control
2. REFERENCE DRAWINGS FOR PANEL CONSTRUCTION JOB 110.2313
JOB 110.2314
JOB 110.2315
a) UCP LAYOUT
SOS9971691 /3
SOS9971693 /3
SOS9971694 /3
b) UCP WIRING DIAGRAM
SOS9971994 /3
SOS9971998 /3
SOS9972002 /3
3. GENERAL TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION The UCP has been constructed according to the document “UCP LAYOUT”. The panel is in carbon steel and is self sustaining type. The panel general dimensions are 3200 x 800 x 2175 mm (LxDxH) (the height is comprehensive of the socket of 100 mm and lifting bar of 75 mm ). The cabinet is composed of 4 module with front/rear access. Cable entry is from the bottom. The protection degree is IP 42. Painting colour is RAL 7035. The wiring is according to the “UCP Wiring Diagram”.
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 3 di 9
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
4. POWER SUPPLY The Unit Control Panel works with the following voltages:
a) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac Line 1 From UPS to be supplied at UPS1-120 terminal board for the following devices:
PLC TRICONEX Rack #1 power supply 1
PLC TRICONEX Rack #2 power supply 1
PLC TRICONEX Rack #3 power supply 1
Power Supply 24 Vdc #1
Power Outlet Socket for HMI (PC and LCD video)
Power Outlet Socket for printer and switch #1
Power supply for Local Control Panel horn
Power supply for Local Control Panel HMI (panel PC)
b) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac Line 2 From Emergency Power to be supplied at EP-120 terminal board for the following devices:
PLC TRICONEX Rack #1 power supply 2
PLC TRICONEX Rack #2 power supply 2
PLC TRICONEX Rack #3 power supply 2
Power Supply 24 Vdc #2
Power supply for Local Control Panel heater
Power Outlet Socket for printer and switch #2
c) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac From 120/208 distribution panel to be supplied at MCC-120 terminal board for the following devices:
Internal Lights
Internal Fans
Internal Heaters
Power Outlet Socket
Power supply for Local Control Panel light
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 4 di 9
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
d) Internal Power Supply Distribution 24 Vdc from 23PW1 and 23PW2 for the following devices:
Bently Nevada Temperature and Vibration Monitor
Bently Nevada Overspeed monitor
Input /Output PLC TRICONEX
Solenoid valves
Safety relays
I/H converter
Media converters
Local Control Panel signalling lamps
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 5 di 9
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
5. EARTH CIRCUITS Inside the panel there are three earthing circuits: •
[PE] PROTECTION EARTH
Earth bar for the connection of the chassis of the instruments and of the armouring of the cables in input; •
[FE] FUNCTIONAL EARTH
Earth bar for the connection of the PLC chassis and instruments cable screens;
6. SEGREGATION OF THE WIRING WITH DIFFERENT SIGNAL LEVEL Different and separate routing and cable trays have been provided for the signals of the following levels :
SIGNAL LEVEL
SIGNAL TYPE
Low level
4-20 mA Analog Signals, RTD Analog Signals, Speed and Vibration transmitters
Low level
0-30 Vdc Digital Signals
High level
Vdc/Vac Power Supplies over 1500 W
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 6 di 9
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
7. OPERATING CONDITIONS The control panel has been designed to be operated in a control room with air-conditioning in a safe area. Operating temperature +50°F ÷ 95°F
8. STOCK REQUIREMENT In case the UCP should be stocked before the installation, it must be placed in a controlled humidity and temperature store with temperature ranging from 0 to 50 °C inside the panel.
9. HANDLING For the lifting of the UCP, two bars with hole are provided on the roof of the UCP.
10.
MAINTENANCE
UCP maintenance consists of the following actions: •
Check of the electrical protection devices: fuses and breakers;
•
Check that lamp are properly working;
•
Check that air filters are cleaned
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 7 di 9
SSE ®
11.
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
POWER-UP PROCEDURE
Preliminary check before power-up: •
Check that all-fixing bolts and screws are tightly screwed
•
Check that all devices are disconnected from their relative power supply
•
Check that the earth circuits are correctly connected.
•
Check that correct power supply is present at the relative input terminals boards
120Vac Line 1 From UPS: 1) Energize 9QF1 and 9FU1, verify presence of 120Vac 2) Energize 10QF1, verify PLC TRICONEX Rack #1 power supply 1 proper working, 3) Energize 10QF2, verify PLC TRICONEX Rack #2 power supply 1 proper working, 4) Energize 10QF3, verify PLC TRICONEX Rack #3 power supply 1 proper working, 5) Energize 10FU1, verify power supply of the 23PW1 24 Vdc Power Supply #1 proper working 6) Energize 11QF1, verify HMI (PC and LCD video) proper working. 7) Energize 11QF2, verify printer and switch #1 proper working 8) Energize 11FU1, verify presence of 120Vac on LCP-UPS1 terminal board for the horn power supply
when command by PLC TRICONEX 9) Energize 11QF3, verify presence of 120Vac on LCP-UPS1 terminal board for the HMI (panel PC) power
supply 120Vac Line 2 From Emergency Power: 1) Energize 13QF1 and 13FU1, verify presence of 120Vac 2) Energize 14QF1, verify PLC TRICONEX Rack #1 power supply 2 proper working, 3) Energize 14QF2, verify PLC TRICONEX Rack #2 power supply 2 proper working, 4) Energize 14QF3, verify PLC TRICONEX Rack #3 power supply 2 proper working, 5) Energize 14FU1, verify power supply of the 23PW2 24 Vdc Power Supply #2 proper working 6) Energize 15FU1, verify presence of 120Vac on LCP-EP terminal board for the heater power supply
when command by PLC TRICONEX 7) Energize 15QF2, verify printer and switch #2 proper working
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 8 di 9
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
120Vac From MCC: 1) Energize 17QF1 and 17FU1, verify presence of 120Vac 2) Energize 18FU1, verify Internal Lights proper working, 3) Energize 19FU1, verify Internal Fans proper working (adjust the temperature of the dedicate control thermostat) 4) Energize 21FU1, verify Internal Heaters proper working (adjust the temperature of the dedicate control thermostat) 5) Energize 21QF1, verify Power Outlet Socket proper working, 6) Energize 22FU1, verify presence of 120Vac on LCP-MCC terminal board for the light power supply of the
LCP 24Vdc internal power supply from 23PW1 and 23PW2 1) Energize 24QF1, verify Bently Nevada Rack #1 power supply A proper working, 2) Energize 24QF2, verify Bently Nevada Rack #1 power supply B proper working, 3) Energize 24QF3, verify Bently Nevada Rack #2 power supply A proper working, 4) Energize 24QF4, verify Bently Nevada Rack #2 power supply B proper working, 5) Energize 25QF1 and the relative fuse 25FU1÷4, verify the presence of 24Vdc on Input / Output TRICONEX boards 6) Energize 26QF1 and the relative fuse 26FU1÷4, verify the presence of 24Vdc on Input / Output TRICONEX boards 7) Energize 27QF1 and the relative fuse 27FU1÷2, verify the presence of 24Vdc on Input / Output TRICONEX boards 8) Energize 28QF1 and the relative fuse 28FU1÷6, verify the presence of 24Vdc for the solenoid valves 9) Energize 29QF1 and the relative fuse 29FU1÷5, verify the presence of 24Vdc for the solenoid valves 10) Energize 30QF1 and the relative fuse 30FU1÷4, verify the presence of 24Vdc for the safety relays, the I/H converter, LCP signalling lamps and media converters
12.
POWER-DOWN PROCEDURE
Preliminary check before power-down: •
Check that the Unit controller regulator don’t work
De-energize breakers and fuses in the reverse order of power-up sequence and verify that respective devices are disconnected.
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 9 di 9
EQUIPMENT LIST Item
Supplier part number
Description
Assembly drawing
Item on ass.y drw
Material Manufacturer part number
Qt.y
1
WEIDMULLER RELAY 24VDC 2CS 8A
SOS9971994
100KA1-5;103KA1-4;104KA1-7;120KA1-8;121KA1-4
7940006157
36
2
BUSSMANN
FUSE HOLDER 2P - 10X38
SOS9971994
9FU1;10FU1;11FU1;11FU2;13FU1;14FU1;15FU1;15FU2;17FU1;18FU1;19FU1;21FU1;22FU1
CHCC2D
13
3
BUSSMANN
FUSE SLOW-BLOW 10X38
SOS9971994
10FU1;14FU1
LP-CC-15
4
4
MOELLER
PLSM-C10/2 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER
SOS9971994
10QF1-3;11QF1-2;14QF1-3;15QF1;25QF1;26QF1;27QF1;28QF1;29QF1;30QF1
242401
15
5
BUSSMANN
FUSE SLOW-BLOW 10X38
SOS9971994
11FU1-2;15FU1-2;18FU1;19FU1;21FU1;22FU1
LP-CC-10
16
EM-DUO 120/15 USA DOUBLE SOCKET
SOS9971994
11SK1-2;15SK1;21SK1
5600461
4
SOS9971994
136PS1
2963718
1
SOS9971994
138PS1
2963912
1
6 7 8
PHOENIX CONTACT PHOENIX CONTACT PHOENIX CONTACT
PSR-SCP-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 SAFETY RELAY 24VDC PSR-SCP-24U/ESAM4/8X1/1X2 SAFETY RELAY 24VDC
9
SCHAFFNER
LINE FILTER 1 PHASE
SOS9971994
9FL1;13FL1;17FL1
FN2070-36-08
3
10
BUSSMANN
FUSE SLOW-BLOW 10X38
SOS9971994
9FU1;13FU1
LP-CC-30
4
11
WEIDMULLER OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
SOS9971994
9FU2;13FU2;17FU2
829165000
3
12
ABB
LOCKABLE HANDLE FOR SWITCH DISCONNECTOR FOR SWITCH DISCONNECTOR
SOS9971994
9QF1;13QF1
OHR2
2
13
ABB
SWITCH DISCONNECTOR
SOS9971994
9QF1;13QF1
OT45E3
2
14
MOELLER
PLSM-C16/2 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER
SOS9971994
15QF1;24QF1-4
242405
5
15
BUSSMANN
FUSE SLOW-BLOW 10X38
SOS9971994
17FU1
LP-CC-25
2
16
ABB
LOCKABLE HANDLE FOR SWITCH DISCONN.FOR SWITCH DISCONN.
SOS9971994
17QF1
OHB12
1
17
ABB
SWITCH DISCONNECTOR
SOS9971994
17QF1
OT32E3
1
18
STEGO
SLIMLINE FLUORESCENT LIGHT 11W SL025
SOS9971994
18EL1-8
B02527.0.10
8
19
ALFA PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCH
SOS9971994
18SQ1-8
AP1T11Z11
8
20
DOOR FAN (extraction) 115Vac 50Hz 230m3/h ALFA PLASTIC 250x250mm (UL)
SOS9971994
19FN1-4
ALFA2510BPUB
4
21
WEIDMULLER RELAY INTERFACE 115VAC 2CS (8A)
SOS9971994
19KA1-4
8810100000
4
22
STEGO
THERMOSTAT FOR FAN -10°C .. +50°C
SOS9971994
19ST1-4
01143.0-00
4
23
STEGO
ANTICONDENSING HEATER
SOS9971994
21EH1-3
14008.0-00
3
24
MOELLER
PLSM-C6/2 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER
SOS9971994
21QF1
242399
1
25
STEGO
THERMOSTAT FOR HEATER -10°C .. +50°C
SOS9971994
21ST1-3
01142.0-00
3
Pagina 1 di 2
EQUIPMENT LIST Item 26 27 28 29 30 31
Supplier part number PHOENIX CONTACT PHOENIX CONTACT PHOENIX CONTACT PHOENIX CONTACT MOELLER MOELLER
Description
Assembly drawing
Item on ass.y drw
Material Manufacturer part number
Qt.y
QUINT-DIODE/40 REDUNDANCY MODULE
SOS9971994
23D1-2
2938963
2
QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40 POWER SUPPLY
SOS9971994
23PW1-2
2938879
2
UK 5 - HESILED24 FUSED T. BLOCK WITH LED
SOS9971994
25FU1-4;26FU1-5;27FU1-3;28FU1-6;29FU1-6;30FU1-4
3004126
44
MINI-MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC CONFIGURABLE TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER
SOS9971994
92AB1
2864273
1
M22-A MOUNTING ADAPTER
SOS9971994
216374
1
216376
3
216876
1
M22-K10 CONTACT NO
SOS9971994
XHS 3318 XHS 3318 XHS 3318
32
MOELLER
M22-PV EMERGENCY PUSHBUTTON
SOS9971994
33
ENTRELEC
M10/10 FEED THROUGH TERMINAL BLOCK
SOS9971994
LCP-MCC;LCP-UPS1;LCP-UPS2;MCC-120;UPS1-120;UPS2-120
11512017
14
34
ENTRELEC
M10/10.P EARTH TERMINAL BLOCK
SOS9971994
LCP-MCC;LCP-UPS1;LCP-UPS2;MCC-120;UPS1-120;UPS2-120
16511510
7
35
PHOENIX CONTACT
UK 5-MTK-P/P DISCONNECTING TERMINAL BLOCK
SOS9971994
RS485_HART;TB101;TB102;TB103;TB104;TB105;TB106;TB107;TB108;TB109;TB109A;TB110;TB11 1_1;TB111_2;TB112;TB114;TBDCS_A;TBDCS_D;TBLCP_A;TBLCP_B,TBMCC_C;TBMCC_F;TBPR_ 3004032 A;TBPR_D;TBPR_S;TBSIS_D;TBSPR_A;TBSPR_D;TBSPP_C;TBSPP_F;TBTYR_TBTYR_D
877
36
ITALWEBER
FUSE 5X20 mm 2A 250V
SOS9971994
-
0442002
50
37
MOXA
Media Converter Eth / O.F, Class1 Div2,ATEX Class 1, Zone 2, EEx nC IIC, -40 to 75°C operating range
SOS9972008
68MC1
IMC-101-M-SC-T
1
Pagina 2 di 2
Single-Phase Power Supply Unit, Primary Switched for Universal Use QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40 QUINT POWER provides: • Preventive function monitoring through professional signaling • Global use due to a wide-range input • A high level of operational safety even in complex global networks • Reliable startup of heavy loads due to POWER BOOST The reliability of a power supply unit determines the availability of individual components in a system and whether complex systems can function safely. The globalization of markets increases the demands placed on the power supply unit. A wide-range input and a high level of availability are required. These requirements are met by Generation 2 QUINT POWER.
1. Short Description The QUINT POWER product range offers universal DC power supplies from 60 - 960 W. Depending on the type, regulated and adjustable output voltages of 12 V DC, 24 V DC or 48 V DC are available for output currents of 2.5 A, 5 A, 10 A, 20 A, 30 A, and 40 A. These devices, which are designed as primary switched-mode regulators, operate with a high level of efficiency so that heat loss is kept to a minimum. The high level of operational safety is also ensured in complex global networks. QUINT POWER also operates in applications where static voltage dips, transient power supply failures or phase failure are common. Powerful capacitors ensure mains buffering of more than 20 ms at full load. All 3-phase QUINT POWER units provide the complete output power even in the event of a continuous phase failure. Reliable startup of heavy loads is ensured by a power reserve of up to 50% – the POWER BOOST. Preventive function monitoring diagnoses an impermissible operating state and minimizes downtimes in your system. An active transistor output and a floating relay contact are provided for remote monitoring of this state. This signal not only provides information on the device function, but also indicates a system overload at an early stage.
2. Area of Application QUINT POWER can be used globally due to the consistent provision of a wide-range input. In this way, your entire system can be tested at any production location in the world and can be delivered to any location in the world without faulty switching of the input voltage. This reduces storage costs and logistical effort. An international approval package including CB Scheme, UL 60950 for IT equipment, and UL 508 for industrial control equipment enables the device to be used globally. Safe operation in adverse conditions is emphasized by the approval of all QUINT POWER units with 24 V output voltage by Germanischer Lloyd.
Headquarters: © Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • Flachsmarktstraße 8 • 32825 Blomberg • Germany Phone +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com Local Contact: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
3. Technical Data
125 mm
( + )
130 mm
L
a c t iv e
N
P F C
( - )
P E
D C
O K
1 3 1 4
240 mm
QUINT 24 V DC/40 A Uu
1 AC Solid 1 Input 2 Output 3, 4 Signal
Stranded [mm2] AWG
0.2 - 6 0.5 - 16 0.2 - 6
0.2 - 4 25 - 10 0.5 - 10 20 - 6 0.2 - 4 25 - 10
Torque [Nm] [Ib in.] 0.5 - 0.6 1.2 - 1.5 0.5 - 0.6
5-7 15 5-7
7 mm 10 mm 8 mm
Description
Type
Order No.
Power supply unit, primary switched for universal use
QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40
29 38 87 9
Technical Data Input Data 1 Nominal input voltage Input voltage range Frequency Current consumption (for nominal values) Inrush current limiting/I2t (+25°C) Mains buffering for a nominal load (typical) Switch-on time after applying the mains voltage Transient surge protection Input fuse, internal Recommended backup fuse
110 - 240 V AC (wide-range input) 85 - 264 V AC 120 - 350 V DC 45 - 65 Hz 0 Hz 11 A (120 V AC)/4.5 A (230 V AC), approximately 15 A, approximately/3.2 A2s, approximately > 20 ms 0.9 x UN = high signal) DC OK (electrically isolated) 4 (Uout > 0.9 x UN = contact closed) LED 6 (Uout < 0.9 x UN = LED flashing)
24 V DC ±1% 22.5 - 29.5 V DC 40 A (Uout = 24 V DC) 45 A From +60°C 2.5% per Kelvin/below 100 V AC: 2.5%/V IBOOST ≈ 45 A, approximately Unlimited < 1%, typical < 5%, typical < 0.1%, typical 20 W/80 W, approximately > 92% (for 230 V AC and nominal values) < 2 ms < 100 mVpp (for nominal values) To increase redundancy and power Yes, < 32 V DC 35 V DC +24 V DC signal (with regard to the device weight) 20 mA, maximum 30 V AC/DC, maximum; 1 A, maximum Green LED
PHOENIX CONTACT page 2 of 10
Pcs. Pkt. 1
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
General Data Insulation voltage:
Input/output Input/PE Output/PE
Electrical equipment of machines Safety transformers for switched-mode power supply units Electrical safety (of IT equipment) Industrial control equipment Equipping high voltage installations with electronic equipment Safety extra-low voltage
LISTED
EN 50 178 (VDE 0160) PELV (EN 60 204) SELV (EN 60 950) VDE 0100-410 DIN 57100-410
Safe isolation Protection against electric shock Protection against electric shock, basic requirements for safe isolation in electrical equipment Limitation of harmonic line currents
DIN VDE 0106-101 According to EN 61000-3-2
Mounting position Degree of protection Class of protection MTBF Housing version Dimensions (W x H x D) + DIN rail
On horizontal NS 35 DIN rail according to EN 60715 IP20 Ι, with PE connection > 500,000 h according to IEC 1709 (SN 29 500) AluNox (AlMg1), closed Default upon delivery: Rotated 90°: (240 x 130 x 125) mm (122 x 130 x 243) mm 2.5 kg, approximately
Weight
Climatic Data Ambient temperature
Operation Storage
Humidity Vibration Shock Pollution degree Climatic category
3 kV AC (type test)/2 kV AC (routine test) 3 kV AC (type test)/1.5 kV AC (routine test) 500 V DC (routine test) EN 60 204 (Surge Voltage Category III) EN 61 558-2-17 EN 60950/VDE 0805, UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60 950 u UL/C-UL Listed UL 508 U
According to IEC 68-2-6 According to IEC 68-2-27
-25°C to +70°C (> +60°C derating) -40°C to +85°C Up to 95% at +25°C, no condensation < 15 Hz, amplitude ±2.5 mm/15 Hz - 150 Hz, 2.3g, 90 minutes 30g in all space directions 2 (according to EN 50 178) 3K3 (according to EN 60 721)
c Conformance With EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Noise Immunity According to EN 61000-6-2: Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-23)
Electromagnetic HF field
EN 61000-4-32)
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-43)
Input: Output: Signal:
Surge current loads (surge)
EN 61000-4-53)
Input:
Housing Contact discharge: Air discharge: Housing Frequency: Field strength:
Output: Signal: Conducted interference
EN 61000-4-62)
Voltage dips
EN 61000-4-113)
I/O/S: Frequency: U0: Input:
Requirements EN 61 000-6-2
QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40
4 kV 8 kV
Level 4 8 kV 15 kV
80 - 1000 MHz 10 V/m
Level 3 80 - 1000 MHz/1.4 - 2.0 GHz 10 V/m
2 kV 2 kV 1 kV
asymmetrical5) asymmetrical5) asymmetrical5)
4 kV (Level 4) 2 kV (Level 3) 1 kV (Level 2)
2 kV 1 kV 0.5 kV 0.5 kV 1 kV
asymmetrical5) symmetrical4) asymmetrical5) symmetrical4) asymmetrical5)
4 kV (Inst. Class 4) 2 kV (Inst. Class 4) 0.5 kV (Level 1) 0.5 kV (Level 1) 1 kV (Level 2)
asymmetrical5)
Level 3 0.15 - 80 MHz 10 V
0.15 - 80 MHz 10 V 30% reduction of the input voltage for 0.5 periods
See Input Data: Mains buffering > 20 ms
EN 55011
Class A6)
EN 55011 (EN 55022) Class B7)
EN 55011
6)
EN 55011 (EN 55022) Class B7)
Noise Emission According to EN 61000-6-3: Radio interference Radio interference
Class A
EN 55011 corresponds to CISPR11/EN 55022 corresponds to CISPR22 EN 61000 corresponds to IEC 1000 2) 3)
Criterion A: Normal operating characteristics within the specified limits. Criterion B:Temporary adverse effects on the operating characteristics, which the device corrects automatically.
4) 5)
Symmetrical: Cable to cable Asymmetrical: Cable to ground
6) Class 7)
A: Class B:
Industrial applications Industrial and domestic applications
PHOENIX CONTACT page 3 of 10
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
4. Device View, Connections, and Control Elements
DC
6 O K DC
O
7
13
QUINT POWER
14
O u + tput
DC
24 V
–
40 A
–
pu
tA C
N 10024 L 0V
/40
DC
/24 40 -2 7 9 00 -1 8 8 PS 29 3 T IN o.: QU er-N d Or
2
DC
°C 60 F + 40 ° 5…+1 -2 … 3 -1
O
K DC
A 22 djus .5- t 29 .5V
–2
OK
5 -2
L
S RIA AL ST L OV DU RO NT
PR
AP
13 14
1
DC O K
D
TE
O
ut
+
pu
tD
–
C
24
V
–
40
A
0-6 00 61 81-1 EN 500 EN
ns io s ct r u a in st in o m t n io a t t in g ll a ec st in o n n ad c R ef o r e be
U LIS
+
IN NT ME COUIP EQKA 43
www.interface.phoenixcontact.com
In
3
+
–
5
4
DC O K
–
5 Figure 04 1 AC input: 85 - 264 V AC input voltage Frequency 45 - 65 Hz (0.2 mm2 to 6 mm2 solid) (0.2 mm2 to 4 mm2 stranded) (25 - 10 AWG) Internal fuse 20 AT Recommended fuse 16 A or 25 A LS/characteristic B 2 DC output: 24 V DC output voltage (default), can be set from 22.5 - 28.5 V DC using a potentiometer 5 (0.5 mm2 to 16 mm2 solid) (0.5 mm2 to 10 mm2 stranded) (20 - 6 AWG) The device is idling-proof and short-circuit-proof. 3 DC OK output active 4 DC OK output electrically isolated 5 Potentiometer (covered) 22.5 - 28.5 V DC 6 DC OK LED 7 Universal DIN rail adapter UTA 107
QUINT POWER is a built-in device. Installation and startup must only be carried out by qualified personnel. The relevant country-specific regulations (e.g., VDE, DIN) must also be observed. Before startup it is particularly important to ensure that: • The mains has been connected correctly and protection is provided against electric shock. • The device can be switched off outside the power supply according to EN 60950 regulations (e.g., by the mains protection on the primary side). • The protective conductor is connected. • All supply lines have sufficient fuse protection and are the correct size. • All output cables are the correct size for the maximum device output current or have separate fuse protection. • Sufficient convection is ensured. The housing temperature can reach high values depending on the ambient operating temperature and the load of the device.
5. Safety Notes and Warning Instructions
The device contains dangerous live components and high levels of stored energy.
To ensure that the device can be operated safely and all functions can be used, please read these instructions carefully. Caution: Never carry out work when the power is turned on, this is highly dangerous. PHOENIX CONTACT page 4 of 10
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
6. Installation 6.1. Mounting The power supply unit can be snapped onto all DIN rails according to EN 60715 and should be mounted horizontally (input terminal blocks facing downwards). QUINT POWER
Installation Dimensions
In pu tA C
5
N 100-2 4 L 0V
0
C/4
4D
/2 40 9 -2 00 87 S-1 38 T-P 29 IN o.: QU er-N Ord
8.0 cm for vertical installation 0.0 cm for horizontal installation
DC
°C 60 + 40 °F 5…+1 -2 … 3 -1
O K DC
A 22 djust .5-2 9.5 V
–2
OK
5 2
6000 1 61 1EN 5008 EN
L
S RIA AL ST L OV INDUTROENT
PR
AP
13 14
DC O K
LIS
+
O utp + ut
DC
–
24 V
–
40 A
N M COUIP EQKA 43
ns ti o s u c in s tr m a in to n ti o g ll a c ti n s ta e in o n n ad c R efo re be
U D
TE
www.interface.phoenixcontact.com
To ensure sufficient convection, we recommend the following minimum spacing be used between modules:
–
Figure 05 Flat mounting position: Installation depth: 125 mm (+ DIN rail)
Narrow mounting position: Installation depth: 243 mm (+ DIN rail)
240 mm
Input AC 100-240V
5
N
L
Adjust 22.5-29.5V 13
14
DC OK
130 mm
QUINT POWER
DC OK
290 mm
145 mm
80 mm
122 mm
Output DC 24V 40A
+
+
–
–
–
Figure 06
PHOENIX CONTACT page 5 of 10
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
6.2. Flat Mounting Position The device is supplied ready for installation in a flat mounting position. Mounting: Place the module with the DIN rail guideway on the top edge of the DIN rail and then snap it downwards. Removal: Release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and then detach the module from the bottom edge of the DIN rail. 6.3. Narrow Mounting Position A narrow mounting position can be achieved by mounting the module onto the DIN rail at a 90° angle. To do this, mount the DIN rail adapter (UTA 107) 7 as shown in Figure 08. No additional assembly material is required. Mounting screws: Torx T10 (torque 0.8 0.9 Nm).
Mounting
Removal
Figure 07
Figure 08
PHOENIX CONTACT page 6 of 10
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
6.4. Connection of Various Types of Network: 100 - 240 V AC Networks
TN-S network
TN-C network
TT network
L N PE L N PE
L PEN
L N PE
+ –
QUINT
L N PE
+ –
QUINT
L1 L2 L3
L N
L N PE
+ –
QUINT
+ –
QUINT
Figure 09
Q
Connecting Cable: To maintain UL approvals, use copper cables, which are designed for operating temperatures > +75°C. The following cable cross sections can be connected: Solid [mm2] 1 34 2
0.2 - 6 0.2 - 6 0.5 - 16
Stranded [mm2] AWG
Torque Stripping Length [Nm] [lb in] [mm]
0.2 - 4 25 - 10 0.5 - 0.6 0.2 - 4 25 - 10 0.5 - 0.6 0.5 - 10 20 - 6 1.2 - 1.5
5-7 5-7 15
In
pu
5
7 8 10
tA C
N 10024 L 0V
To maintain EN 60950/UL 60950, flexible cables require appropriate ferrules. L [mm] For reliable and safe-to-touch connections: Strip 7 mm from the input connector ends, 8 mm from the signal connector ends, and 10 mm from the output connector ends.
6.5. Input (1, Figure 10) The 100 - 240 V AC connection is made using screw connections L, N, and 5. The device can be connected to single-phase AC networks or to two external conductors for three-phase networks (TN, TT or IT network according to VDE 0100 T300/IEC364-3) with nominal voltages of 100 - 240 V AC. Protecting the Primary Side The device must be installed according to the specifications of EN 60 950. It must be possible to switch off the device using a suitable disconnecting device outside the power supply. Note that an all-pole disconnecting device must be provided for two-phase operation using two external conductors for a three-phase network. For this, mains protection on the primary side, for example, is suitable. Further device protection is not required, as an internal fuse is present.
1
5
A 22 djus .5- t 29 .5V
Figure 10 Recommended Fuse: 16 A or 25 A circuit breaker, characteristic B (or equivalent). A suitable fuse should be provided for DC applications. If the internal fuse is blown, this is most probably due to a device fault. In this case, the device should be checked in the factory.
PHOENIX CONTACT page 7 of 10
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
6.6. Output (Figure 11) The 24 V DC connection is made using the "+" and "-" screw connections on the screw connection 2. The output voltage set upon delivery is 24 V DC. The output voltage can be adjusted from 22.5 28.5 V DC on the potentiometer 5. Protecting the Secondary Side: The device is electronically short-circuit-proof and idling-proof. In the event of an error, the output voltage is limited to a maximum of 30 V DC. It should be ensured that all output cables are the correct size for the maximum output current or have separate fuse protection. The cable cross sections in the secondary circuit should be large enough to keep the voltage drops on the cables as low as possible.
6 PS TIN o.: QU er-N d Or
DC
O K DC
A 22 djus .5- t 29 .5V
OK
S AL OV INDUT
PR
AP
13 14
DC O K
LIS
+
4 3
U
N COUI EQKA 43
D
TE
O
u
+ tput D – C 24V – 40A –
i ad R ef o r e be
2 Figure 11
Signaling Both DC OK outputs are used for preventive function monitoring of the power supply. A floating signal contact 4 and an active DC OK signal 3 are available. In addition, the DC OK LED 6 can be used to evaluate the function of the power supply directly at the installation location.
13 14
DC OK
Floating Contact (Figure 12) When opened, the floating signal contact indicates that the output voltage has fallen more than 10% below the set value. Signals and ohmic loads up to a maximum of 30 V and currents up to a maximum of 1 A can be switched. With heavy inductive loads, e.g., a relay, a suitable protective circuit (e.g., free-wheeling diode) is required.
Output 24 V DC
++––– DC OK
30 V AC/DC 1 A, maximum Figure 12
Output 24 V DC
13 14
DC OK
Active Signal Output (Figure 13) The 24 V DC signal is between the "DC OK" and "-" connection terminal blocks and can be loaded with 20 mA maximum. This signal output indicates that the output voltage has fallen more than 10% below the set value when "active high" changes to "low". The DC OK signal is isolated from the power output. This ensures that a separate supply does not enter from devices connected in parallel. The 24 V DC signal can be connected directly to a logic input for evaluation.
++––– DC OK
24 V DC 20 mA
Figure 13
PHOENIX CONTACT page 8 of 10
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
Signal Loop (Figure 14) The two signal outputs mentioned above can be combined easily.
DC OK LED The green DC OK LED enables local function evaluation in the control cabinet. LED ON LED flashing
Normal operation of the power supply The output voltage has fallen by more than 10%. There is a secondary load short circuit or overload.
LED OFF
No mains voltage is present or there is a device fault.
Device 2
Device 1
13
14
Output 24 V DC
++–––
24 V DC 20 mA
13
14
DC OK
Output 24 V DC DC OK
Example: Monitoring two devices Use the active alarm output of device 1 and loop in the electrically isolated alarm output of device 2. In the event of an error, a group error message is generated. Any number of devices can be looped. This signal combination saves on wiring costs and logic inputs.
++–––
DC OK
Figure 14
7. Function 7.1. Output Characteristic Curve With heavy loads, the working point demonstrates the U/I characteristic curve shown in Figure 13. The output current is limited to 45 A. The secondary voltage is reduced until the short circuit on the secondary side is removed. The U/I characteristic curve ensures that both heavy capacitive loads and devices with DC/DC converters can be supplied by QUINT POWER in the input circuit without any problems. Connected fuses are reliably tripped. The selectivity in your system configuration is ensured at all times.
960 W
UOUT [V]
1080 W
UN 24 < 60 °C
< 40 °C
40
IN
45
IBOOST
IOUT [A]
Figure 15
UOUT = 24 V Output current [A]
7.2. Temperature Response The device can supply a nominal output current of 40 A up to an ambient operating temperature of +60°C. The output power must be decreased by 2.5% per Kelvin temperature increase for ambient operating temperatures over +60°C. At ambient operating temperatures above +70°C or in the event of a thermal overload, the device switches off. The device switches on again automatically once it has cooled down.
40
0
0
20
40
60
Ambient operating temperature [°C]
Figure 16
PHOENIX CONTACT page 9 of 10
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
7.3. Parallel Operation Devices of the same type can be connected in parallel to increase both redundancy and power. The default setting does not have to be adjusted. If the output voltage is adjusted, an even current distribution can be ensured by precisely setting all power supply units that are operated in parallel to the same output voltage. To ensure symmetrical current distribution we recommend that all cable connections from the power supply unit to the DIN rail are the same length and have the same cross section. Depending on the system, for parallel connection of more than two power supply units a protective circuit should be installed at each individual device output (e.g., decoupling diode or DC fuse). This prevents high return currents in the event of a secondary device fault. 7.4. Redundancy Operation (Figure 17) Redundant connections are designed for supplying systems, which place particularly high requirements on operational safety. If a fault occurs in the primary circuit of the first power supply unit, the second device automatically takes over the complete power supply without interruption, and vice versa. For this purpose, the power supply units to be connected in parallel must be large enough that the total current requirements of all loads can be fully met by one power supply unit. External decoupling diodes are required for 100% redundancy.
QUINT 40 A + –
QUINT 40 A + –
+ –
+ –
Σ = 40 A
Figure 17
QUINT 40 A + –
QUINT 40 A + –
+ –
+ –
Σ = 80 A
PHOENIX CONTACT
03/15/05
TNR:102315-01-gb
7.5. Power Increase (Figure 18) The output current can be increased to n x IN where n is the number of devices connected in parallel. Parallel connection for increasing power is used when extending existing systems. A parallel connection is recommended if the power supply unit does not cover the current consumption of the most powerful load. Otherwise, the loads should be divided over independent individual devices. A maximum of five devices can be connected in parallel.
http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Figure 18
PHOENIX CONTACT page 10 of 10
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40 QUINT DIODE provides: • 100% decoupling of power supplies connected in parallel • Can be installed in potentially explosive areas • Load currents up to 60 A supported • Easy assembly by snapping onto the DIN rail
1. Short Description The redundancy module can be used to 100% decouple two power supplies of the same type, which are connected in parallel on the output side to increase power or provide redundancy. The reliability of a power supply determines the availability of individual components in a system and whether complex systems can function safely. Redundant connections are designed for supplying systems, which place particularly high requirements on operational safety. The redundant configuration of the power supply ensures continuous system availability. The power supply of a system can be configured redundantly through the connection of at least two power supply units in parallel. Together they then supply the connected devices. The connected power supplies must be large enough that the total current requirements of all devices can be fully met by one power supply. In the event of an internal fault on one device or a mains voltage supply failure on the primary side, the other device automatically takes over the complete power supply without interruption and vice versa. In this way the operational reliability of the system can be increased effectively.
Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • 32825 Blomberg, Germany Phone +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com Local Contact: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40
2. Technical Data 102 mm (4.016 in.)
IN
84 mm (3.307 in.)
1
OUT
2
62 mm (2.441 in.)
QUINT-DIODE/40 Redundancy module 10 mm (0.39 in.)
solid
2]
flexible
[mm 0.5 - 16
torque AWG [Nm] [Ib in.]
0.5 - 10 20 - 6 1.2 - 1.5 10.6 -13.3
Description
Type
Order No.
Redundancy module
QUINT-DIODE/40
29 38 96 3
Pcs. Pkt. 1
Technical Data Input Data Input voltage Input current
UN/Umax IN (Cable cross section 6 [10 AWG]) Imax 2 (Cable cross section 10 mm [8 AWG]) Imax (Cable cross section 16 mm2 [6 AWG]) Imax mm2
Transient surge voltage protection using Transil diode Protection against polarity reversal with diode Input/output voltage drop Maximum power dissipation with nominal load
General Data Insulation voltage: Mounting position Can be mounted with spacing Degree of protection Protection class (without PE connection) Efficiency Housing version Dimensions (W x H x D) + DIN rail Weight
Input, output/housing - Vertical - Horizontal
24 V DC/< 30 V DC 2 x 20 A, 1 x 40 A 2 x 19 A, 1 x 39 A (< 40°C [104˚F]), 2 x 16 A, 1 x 32 A (< 60°C [140˚F]) 2 x 27 A, 1 x 54 A (< 40°C [104˚F]), 2 x 21 A, 1 x 43 A (< 60°C [140˚F]) 2 x 30 A, 1 x 60 A (< 40°C [104˚F]), 2 x 24 A, 1 x 48 A (< 60°C [140˚F]) Yes Yes, < 60 V 0.5 V, approximately 20 W, approximately
1 kV NS 35 DIN rail according to EN 50 022 5 cm (1.969 in.) 2 cm (0.787 in.) IP20 II > 97% AIMg (enclosure), GD-ZnAICu (heatsink) (62 x 84 x 102 mm [2.441 x 3.307 x 4.016 in.]) 0.7 kg, approximately
Phoenix Contact page 2 of 6
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40
Climatic Data Ambient temperature
-25°C to +70°C (-13˚F to +158˚F) -25°C to +60°C (-13°F to +140°F) -40°C to +85°C (-40˚F to +185˚F) > 95% 3 - 15 Hz, amplitude ±2.5 mm/15 Hz - 150 Hz, 2.3 g 30 g, 18 ms 2
- Operation - Storage
Humidity Vibration Shock Degree of pollution Climatic category
according to IEC 68-2-6 according to IEC 68-2-27 according to EN 50 178
Certification/Standards Electrical safety (of IT equipment) Industrial control equipment
EN 60 950/VDE 0805, EN 50 178/VDE 0160
u UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60 950 U UL/C-UL Listed UL 508 LISTED X II 3G EEx nA IIC T4 KEMA 03 ATEX 1197X
Conformance mark according to EN 50 021 Electrical equipment for potentially explosive areas
UL/C-UL Recognized UL 1604 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Electromagnetic compatibility c Conformance with EMC directive: • Noise immunity • Noise emission
89/336/EEC EN 61 000-6-2 EN 55 011/EN 55 022 B1) 1
) Class B: Industrial and domestic applications
EN 55 011 = CISPR 11; EN 50 022 = CISPR 22; EN 61 000 = IEC 1000
Q
U
IN
T
D
IO
D
E
3. Device View, Connections, and Control Elements
1
IN 2
OU
T
1 2 3
4 Figure 04 1 2 3 4
DC input 1:UN = 24 V, IN = 20 A, Imax = 28 A DC input 2:UN = 24 V, IN = 20 A, Imax = 28 A DC output Universal latching foot for NS 35 DIN rails according to EN 50 022
Phoenix Contact page 3 of 6
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40
4. Safety Notes and Warning Instructions To ensure that the device can be operated safely and all functions can be used, please read these instructions carefully. Installation and startup must only be carried out by qualified personnel. The relevant country-specific regulations (e.g., VDE, DIN) must also be observed. Before startup it is particularly important to ensure that: • All supply lines have sufficient fuse protection and are the correct size. • All output cables are the correct size for the maximum device output current or have separate fuse protection. • Sufficient convection is ensured. • To protect the device, the input current of 56 A must not be exceeded. This is ensured if the supply is provided from an automatic current limiting source (e.g., QUINT POWER) or if a suitable fuse is connected. To meet directive 94/9/EU (ATEX), the following safety notes must be observed: • The QUINT-DIODE/40 redundancy module corresponds to standard EN 50 021. • This redundancy module may be installed within a potentially explosive area, in which Category 3 equipment is required. • When working on the redundancy module, observe the national safety rules and regulations for the prevention of accidents. • The module must only be installed and operated by qualified personnel. • Installation should be carried out following the instructions given in this data sheet. • The QUINT-DIODE/40 redundancy module should be installed in the control cabinet so that IP54 protection according to EN 60 529 or higher is ensured. • If dust is present, the device must be installed in suitable housing. The device must not be subject to mechanical strain or thermal load, which exceed the limits described in this data sheet. • To ensure sufficient convection, the following minimum spacing should be provided between other modules: 5 cm (1.969 in.) for vertical installation and 2 cm (0.787 in.) for horizontal installation. • During operation only devices, which are suitable for operation in potentially explosive areas of zone 2, can be connected to the redundancy module. • The redundancy module does not require maintenance, is closed ex works, and should not be opened. Repairs can only be carried out by the manufacturer. • The safety data and features provided according to the valid conformance mark are listed after the technical data.
Phoenix Contact page 4 of 6
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40
5. Installation 5.1. Mounting The redundancy module can be snapped onto all DIN rails according to EN 50 022-35. The module can be mounted horizontally (input terminal blocks facing upwards or downwards) or vertically on the DIN rail.
Mounting
Removal
Installation Dimensions To ensure sufficient convection, we recommend the following minimum spacing be used between modules: 5 cm (1.969 in.) for vertical installation 2 cm (0.787 in.) for horizontal installation
Mounting: Place the module with the DIN rail guideway on the top edge of the DIN rail and then snap it downwards. Figure 05
Q
U
I
Removal: Release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and then detach the module from the bottom edge of the DIN rail. Connection Cable:
1
The following cable cross sections can be connected:
1 2 3
Solid [mm2] 0.2 - 16
Flexible [mm2] 0.5 - 10
AWG 20 - 6
For reliable and safe-to-touch connection: Strip 10 mm (0.39 in.) from the connector ends.
Torque [Nm] [Ib in.] 1.2 - 1.5 10.6 - 13.3
IN 2
OU
T
1
10 mm (0.39 in.) mm
To maintain UL approvals, use copper cables, which are designed for operating temperatures of at least 75°C (167˚F).
2 3 Figure 06
Phoenix Contact page 5 of 6
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40
6. Function
Power Supply
Power Supply
Imax = 6 0 A
A
Power Supply
50°C (122˚F)
60°C (140˚F)
2 x 19 A 1 x 39 A
2 x 18 A 1 x 36 A
2 x 16 A 1 x 32 A
10 mm2/8 AWG
2 x 27 A 1 x 54 A
2 x 25 A 1 x 50 A
2 x 21 A 1 x 43 A
2 x 30 A 1 x 60 A
2 x 27 A 1 x 55 A
2 x 24 A 1 x 48 A
16 mm2/6 AWG
B
+ + – –
+ + – –
QUINT-DIODE/40
GND 24V DC
1
IN
OUT
2
QUINT-DIODE/40 1
IN
OUT
2
Output current [A]
Figure 08
2 x 27, 1 x 54 2 x 21, 1 x 43 2 x 19, 1 x 38
0 -25 40 60 70 Ambient temperature [°C]
2 x 27, 1 x 54 2 x 20, 1 x 40 2 x 17, 1 x 34
10 mm2/8 AWG
Phoenix Contact page 6 of 6
a
b
0 -25 30 40 60 70 Ambient temperature [°C]
Figure 09
Phoenix Contact
40°C (104˚F)
+
Figure 07
Ambient Temperature
6 mm2/10 AWG
OUT
2
04/30/03
Cable Cross Section
GND 24V DC
–
A B
Output current [A]
Table 1
QUINT-DIODE/40
Imax = 3 0 A
Imax = 6 0 A
6.3 Temperature Response In the horizontal mounting position (input terminal blocks facing upwards or downwards), the redundancy module can lead maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 27 A or 1 x 54 A at ambient temperatures of up to 40°C (104˚F). The permissible current carrying capacity reduces according to the ambient temperature as shown in Figure 9, curve a for a cable cross section of 10 mm2 (8 AWG). At an ambient temperature of 60°C (140˚F), the module can lead maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 21 A or 1 x 43 A. In the vertical mounting position, the redundancy module can lead maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 27 A or 1 x 54 A at ambient temperatures of up to 30°C (86˚F). The permissible current carrying capacity reduces according to the ambient temperature as shown in Figure 9, curve b for a cable cross section of 10 mm2 (8 AWG). At an ambient temperature of 60°C (140˚F), the module can lead maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 20 A or 1 x 40 A.
1
IN
–
A
Power Supply
6.2 Output During operation only devices, which are suitable for operation in potentially explosive areas of Zone 2, can be connected to the output of the redundancy module in Zone 2. The plus pole of the device is wired to the output of the redundancy module as shown in Figure 7/8.
+
Imax = 3 0 A
TNR: 5156438-00
6.1 Input The maximum permissible current depends on the cross section of the connected cables and the ambient temperature (see Table 1). Only one redundancy module is required to decouple two power supplies that are connected in parallel (A and B) with nominal currents up to 20 A. The individual modules are wired together as shown in Figure 7. One redundancy module per power supply is required to decouple power supplies with nominal currents from 20 A to 40 A. Both inputs "1" and "2" of the redundancy module must be connected to the power supply via two cables as shown in Figure 8. This is required as the maximum current carrying capacity of 30 A per input must not be exceeded. For connecting the redundancy module to the power supply, we recommend using two cables of the same length and with identical cross sections.
UL Type CM AWM 2464 CSA PCC FT4 RoHS COMPLIANT 300 VOLT
MULTICONDUCTOR, FOIL SHIELD
Xtreme Performance In Critical, High Technology Electronic Signal Applications XTREME PERFORMANCE BENEFITS: Unique Premium-Grade PVC Insulation And Jacket Provides Easier Routing Of Cables In Tight Spaces Fast, Easy Stripping Of Insulation And Jacket To Reduce Installation And Connectorization Time And Cost Light-Duty Resistance To Most Oils Per UL Class 43 Resistance To Ambient Temperatures Up To 105°C (221°F) XTRA·GUARD® 1 APPLICATIONS: High Technology Applications in Controlled Environments Medical Electronics Point-Of-Sale Equipment Computer Peripherals Industrial Process Controls CHARACTERISTICS Operating Temperature: -20° C to 105° C CM & CMG -20° C to 85° C CM AWM 2464
30 18 AWG (0,81mm²), 16/30 (16x0,25mm), Insulation Thickness: 0.017" (0,43mm) Jacket Thickness
Nominal Diameter
Alpha Part No.
No. of Cond.
Inches
mm
Inches
mm
5382C
2
0.032
0,81
0.230
5,84
5382/1C*
2
0.032
0,81
0.230
5,84
5383/1C*
3
0.032
0,81
0.242
6,15
5383C
3
0.032
0,81
0.242
6,15
5384C
4
0.032
0,81
0.263
6,68
5386C
6
0.032
0,81
0.311
7,90
5388C
8
0.032
0,81
0.336
8,53
5390C
10
0.032
0,81
0.388
9,86
5390/15C
15
0.032
0,81
0.437
11,10
5390/20C
20
0.032
0,81
0.488
12,40
5390/25C
25
0.053
1,35
0.588
14,94
5390/30C
30
0.053
1,35
0.621
15,77
5390/40C
40
0.053
1,35
0.692
17,58
5390/50C
50
0.053
1,35
0.762
19,35
5390/60C
60
0.083
2,11
0.885
22,48
16 AWG (1,23mm²), 19/0.0117 (19x0,29mm), Insulation Thickness: 0.017" (0,43mm)
Voltage Rating: 300 Volt
Alpha Part No.
No. of Cond.
Inches
mm
Inches
mm
5362C
2
0.032
0,81
0.254
6,45
Color Description: Color Code: Chart D Page 375 Jacket Colors: Chrome Gray, Industrial Black, Robust Red, High Visibility Yellow, Safety Orange, Bold Blue, Environmental Green, Sand Beige, Pure White
5362/1C*
2
0.032
0,81
0.254
6,45
5363/1C*
3
0.032
0,81
0.268
6,81
5363C
3
0.032
0,81
0.268
6,81
5364C
4
0.032
0,81
0.292
7,42
5366C
6
0.032
0,81
0.347
8,81
Product Description: Conductor: Stranded Insulation : Color-Coded Premium PVC Shield : Aluminum/Polyester Foil Facing in with Stranded Tinned Copper Drain Wire Equal in Size to Insulated Conductors of Cable Jacket: Premium PVC Nylon Rip Cord for Ease of Jacket Stripping
5368C
8
0.032
0,81
0.376
9,55
5370C
10
0.032
0,81
0.436
11,07
5370/15C
15
0.032
0,81
0.492
12,50
5370/20C
20
0.053
1,35
0.593
15,06
5370/25C
25
0.053
1,35
0.660
16,76
5370/30C
30
0.053
1,35
0.698
17,73
5370/40C
40
0.053
1,35
0.779
19,79
Jacket Thickness
Nominal Diameter
SPECIFICATIONS UL Type CM, AWM Style 2464 Overall UL AWM Style 1569 Conductors CSA CMG FT4 Passes UL VW-1 Flame Test Passes CSA FT4 Flame Test RoHS Compliant
AVAILABILITY Many Items Are Available For Same-Day Shipment From Inventory Orders Placed By 6:00 EST Will Be Shipped The Same Day Please Refer To http://www.alphawire.com/pages/stk.cfm For Stocked Items Minimums May Apply For Non Stocked Items FIT® TUBING RECOMMENDATION FIT® - 221 - General Purpose, Irradiated Polyolefin (See Page 114 for Product Specifications) FIT® - 321 - Medium-Wall, Adhesive-Lined Irradiated Polyolefin (See Page 121 for Product Specifications) Web Site: www.alphawire.com Email: [email protected]
Toll Free: 1-800-52 ALPHA • Telephone: 908-925-8000 • Fax: 908-925-6923 Europe/UK Telephone: +44 (0) 1932 772422 • Europe/UK Fax: +44 (0) 1932 772433
907X]PI4:'WMRKPIGSVI:
8IGLRMGEPHEXE
'EFPIGSRWXVYGXMSR
4VSTIVXMIW
Ɣ 4:'MRWYPEXIHNYQTIV[MVIEWTIV90%;1 7X]PI18;ERH'7%%;18);EWTIV 907X]PIERH'7%8); Ɣ 8IQTIVEXYVIVERKI JPI\MFPI'XS' JM\IHMRWXEPPEXMSR'XS' Ɣ 8IQTIVEXYVIEXGSRHYGXSV QE\90ERH'7% ' Ɣ 2SQMREPZSPXEKI : Ɣ 8IWXZSPXEKI 7TEVOXIWX %;+ O: %;+ERH O: %;+ XS O: ุ%;+ O: Ɣ 90X]TI%;118; ': Ɣ '7%X]TI%;18);': Ɣ &IRHMRKVEHMYW SRGIGEGEFPI QYPXMTPIGEGEFPI
Ɣ 7XVERHIHGSTTIVGSRHYGXSVXMRRIHSVTPEMR %;+WM^IWEWTIVXEFPIFIPS[ Ɣ 4:'GSVIMRWYPEXMSREGGSVHMRKXS 907XERHEVH GPEWWERH'7%' 2S90:;ERH'7%*8LIEXERH HEQTVIWMWXERX
Ɣ 'SRHMXMSREPP]VIWMWXERXXS 3MPW 7SPZIRXW %GMHW 0]IW Ɣ 4:'WIPJI\XMRKYMWLMRKERHJPEQI VIXEVHERXXIWXQIXLSHXS90:; Ɣ 8LIQEXIVMEPWYWIHMRQERYJEGXYVIEVI GEHQMYQJVIIERHGSRXEMRRSWMPMGSRIERH JVIIJVSQWYFWXERGIWLEVQJYPXSXLI [IXXMRKTVSTIVXMIWSJPEGUYIVW
2SXI Ɣ 4PIEWIGSQTPIXIXLIEFSZITEVXRYQFIV JSVXLIGSPSYVVIUYMVIHYWMRKXLIJSPPS[MRK XEFPI !KVIIR!FPEGO !FPYI!FVS[R !VIH![LMXI !KVI]!ZMSPIX !]IPPS[ !SVERKI !XVERWTEVIRX!TMRO !FIMKI!KVIIR]IPPS[ !FPYI[LMXI!HEVOFPYI ![LMXIFPYI WYTTP]YTXS%;+
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ª \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\
%;+RS
3YXIV GEQQ
'ST [IMKLX OKOQ
;IMKLX GEOKOQ
4EVX2S 'VSWW WIGXMSR GEQQª \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\
%;+RS
OGQMP OGQMP OGQMP OGQMP OGQMP
3YXIV GEQQ
'ST [IMKLX OKOQ
;IMKLX GEOKOQ
(MQIRWMSRWERHWTIGMJMGEXMSRWQE]FIGLERKIH[MXLSYXTVMSVRSXMGI
*
*
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC) Configurable Temperature Transducer for PT100
Data Sheet
04/2005
Functions
Features
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC) is a configurable 3-way isolated temperature measuring transducer. It is suitable for the connection of PT100 resistance thermometers in acc. with IEC 60751 in 2, 3 and 4-conductor connection systems. On the output side, the analog standard signals 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V, 10...0 V, 20...0 mA, 20...4 mA are available, electrically isolated. The DIP switches are accessible on the side of the housing and allow the following parameters to be configured: – Connection system, – Temperature span to be measured, – Output signal, and – Type of error evaluation. The voltage supply (19.2...30 V DC) can be provided via connecting terminal blocks "7"/"8" of the modules, or together, via the DIN rail connector (see Figure 5 on page 8). Please also observe "Connection Systems" on page 9.
101949_02_en
Figure 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Features
Input: PT100 resistance thermometer Transparent cover Diagnostics LED Groove for ZBF 6 Zack marker strip Output: Standard signals Supply voltage Connection option for DIN rail connector DIP switch S1 DIP switch S2 DIP switch S3 Universal snap-on foot for EN mounting rails
1
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Technical Data General Data Supply voltage Current consumption at 24 V DC Power consumption Transmission error
19.2...30 V DC < 25 mA < 500 mW
At max. measuring span With configured measuring span ∆TEMP Temperature coefficient Step response (0...99%) Test voltage (input / output / supply) Ambient temperature range
< 0.2% ((100 K / ∆TEMP [K]) + 0.1) % 0.02%/K, max. < 30 ms 1.5 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min.
Operation Storage Error messages Dimensions (W x H x D) Conductor cross section Stripping length
-20°C…+65°C -40°C…+85°C LED red 6.2 mm x 93.1 mm x 102.5 mm 0.2...2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12)
Screw connection Spring-cage connection Housing design Tests / Approvals
12 mm 8 mm Polybutylenterephthalate PBT, green
cuF U PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
LISTED 31ZN Class I Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D T5 A) This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous locations only. B) Warning - explosion hazard - substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1, Division 2.
Statement of conformity in acc. with EN 60079-15
2
C) Warning - explosion hazard - do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous. X II 3 G Ex nA II T4 X
101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Input (see Figure 1, detail 1) Sensor in acc. with IEC 60751 Connection system (configurable) Sensor input current Max. permissible conductor resistance Measuring range (configurable) Measuring range span
IIN PT100 2-, 3-, 4-conductor connection system 1 mA, constant 10 Ω per conductor -150°C...+850°C 50K, min.
Output (see Figure 1, detail 5) Output signal range
IOUT 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 20...0 mA, 20...4 mA < 500 Ω (20 mA) < 20 mVss (500 Ω) 23 mA / 12.5 V 0...105%
Load Ripple Max. output signal Behavior in the case of a sensor fault (configurable)
UOUT 0...5 V, 1...5 V, 0...10 V, 10...0 V ≥ 10 kΩ < 20 mVss 12.5 V / 10 mA
Conformance With EMC Guideline 89/336/EEC And Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC Immunity to Interference According to EN 61000-6-21 Discharge of static electricity (ESD)
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion B2
Electromagnetic HF field
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A3
Fast transients (Burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion B4
Surge voltage capacities (Surge)
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion B4
Conducted disturbance
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A3
Noise Emission According to EN 61000-6-4 Noise emission of housing
EN 550115
Class A6
1
EN 61000 corresponds to IEC 1000
2
Criterion B:
Take protective measures against electrostatic discharge.
3
Criterion A:
Normal operating behavior within the defined limits.
4
Criterion B:
Temporary impairment to operational behavior that is corrected by the device itself.
5
EN 55011 corresponds to CISPR11
6
Class A:
101949_02_en
Area of application industry.
3
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Ordering Data Description Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 Screw terminal block, preconfigured (see "Ordering Key for MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI and MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP" on page 5) Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 Screw terminal block, not configured (see "NC Version" on page 10) Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 Spring-cage terminal block, preconfigured (see "Ordering Key for MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI and MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP" on page 5) Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 Spring-cage terminal block, not configured (see "NC Version" on page 10)
Order Designation MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI
Order No. 28 64 43 5
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC
28 64 27 3
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP
28 64 73 6
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP-NC
28 64 28 6
Order Designation ME 6,2 TBUS-2 1,5/5-ST-3,81 GN MINI MCR-SL-PTB MINI MCR-SL-PTB-SP MINI-SYS-PS-100-240AC/24DC/1,5
Order No. 28 69 72 8 28 64 13 4 28 64 14 7 28 66 98 3
Accessories Description DIN rail connector Power terminal block with screw connection Power terminal block with spring-cage connection System power supply (not for Zone 2!)
4
101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Ordering Key for MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI and MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP If the customer order information is incorrect or missing, the standard configuration is delivered (shown as an example in the ordering key). Manufacturer’s Connection Failure Order No. Measuring Range [°C]1 Output Calibration 2 Method Information Certificate WKZ Start End / 28 64 43 5 / 3 / 0 / 100 / OUT01 / A NONE 28 64 73 6 / (see "Ordering Length (see Range (see page 6) Data") of step below) 2 = 2-cond. 0 0...100 5K OUT01 A NONE = without WKZ 3 = 3-cond. -10 110...300 10 K OUT02 B YES = with WKZ (a charge will be made) 4 = 4-cond. -20 320...700 20 K OUT03 C -30 750...850 50 K OUT05 D YESPLUS = WKZ -40 OUT06 with 5 measuring points (a charge will -50 OUT07 be made) -100 OUT08 -150
OUT09
1
Smallest span 50 K
2
Depending on the output signal range, for further details see "DIP Switch S2" on page 11.
Output: Output OUT01 OUT02 OUT03 OUT05 OUT06 OUT07 OUT08 OUT09
101949_02_en
= = = = = = = =
Output signal 0...20 mA 4...20 mA 0...10 V 0...5 V 1...5 V 20...0 mA 20...4 mA 10...0 V
5
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Failure Information: Line break 0...20 mA 4...20 mA
Overrange 0...10 V
0...20 mA 4...20 mA
0...10 V
A =
21 mA
21 mA
10.5 V
20.5 mA
20.5 mA
10.25 V
B =
21 mA
21 mA
10.5 V
20.5 mA
20.5 mA
10.25 V
C =
21 mA
21 mA
10.5 V
20 mA
20 mA
10 V
D =
0 mA
4 mA
0V
20 mA
20 mA
10 V
Underrange 0...20 mA 4...20 mA A =
0 mA
4 mA
Short circuit 0...10 V 0V
0...20 mA 4...20 mA 0 mA
4 mA
0...10 V 0V
B =
0 mA
3.5 mA
0V
0 mA
3 mA
0V
C =
0 mA
4 mA
0V
21 mA
21 mA
10.5 V
D =
0 mA
4 mA
0V
0 mA
4 mA
0V
Installation Screw Connection
Spring-Cage Connection
Figure 2
Figure 3
6
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP-NC
101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
The device may only be installed and put into operation by qualified personnel. The corresponding national regulations (e.g. VDE, DIN) must be observed.
Notes for Ex: The device is category 3 electrical apparatus. Please observe the instructions given here for installation. The device must be installed in a housing with IP54 protection in acc. with EN 60529. The limits for mechanical or thermal loads described for the device must not be exceeded. Only devices designed for operation in the hazardous areas of Zone 2 may be connected. Under no circumstances may repairs be carried out by the user.
Only engage or connect conductors in the hazardous area when the device is deenergized!
The assignment of the connecting terminal blocks is shown in Figure 4. Block Diagram
Figure 4
Block diagram
The MINI Analog module can be snapped onto all 35 mm DIN rails corresponding to EN 60715.
101949_02_en
7
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Using DIN rail connector ME 6,2 TBUS-2 1,5/5-ST-3,81 GN (Order No.: 28 69 72 8) Please also pay particular attention to the direction of the MINI Analog module and DIN rail connector when snapping into position: Snap-on foot (Figure 5, detail D 11) below and plug (Figure 5, detail C 12) left! •
First position the DIN rail connector in the DIN rail to bridge the voltage supply (see Figure 5).
Figure 5
8
Mounting/Removing
101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Power Supply Never connect the supply voltage directly to the DIN rail connector! It is not permitted to draw power from the DIN rail connector or from individual MINI Analog modules!
Connection Systems 2-conductor connection system (Figure 6) – –
For short distances (< 10 m) Cable resistances RL1 and RL2 are incorporated in the measurement result directly and falsify the result accordingly.
Feeding in power via the MINI Analog module Where the total current consumption of the aligned MINI Analog modules does not exceed 400 mA, the power can be fed in directly at the connecting terminal blocks of a MINI Analog module. We recommend connecting a 400 mA fuse upstream. Feeding in power with a power terminal block Power terminal block MINI MCR-SL-PTB (Order No.: 28 64 13 4) or MINI MCR-SL-PTB-SP (Order No.: 28 64 14 7), of the same shape, is used to feed in the supply voltage to the DIN rail connector. We recommend connecting a 2 A fuse upstream.
Figure 6
3-conductor connection system (Figure 7)
Feeding in the power with a system power supply unit
–
System power supply unit MINI-SYS-PS-... (Order No.: 28 66 98 3) with 1.5 A output current contacts the DIN rail connector with the supply voltage, allowing several MINI Analog modules to be supplied from the network.
–
For long distances between PT100 sensor and MINI Analog module The value of all cable resistances must be exactly the same in order to balance out the sensor cable resistances (RL1 = RL2 = RL3).
Figure 7
101949_02_en
2-conductor connection system
3-conductor connection system
9
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
4-conductor connection system (Figure 8) –
Configuration
For long distances between the PT100 sensor and the MINI Analog module and different cable resistances (RL1 ≠ RL2 ≠ RL3 ≠ RL4).
Electrostatic Discharge! The module contains components that can be damaged or destroyed by electrostatic discharge. When handling the module, observe the necessary safety precautions against electrostatic discharge (ESD), in accordance with EN 61340-5-1 and EN 61340-5-2, as well as IEC 61340-5-1 and IEC 61340-5-2. NC Version
Figure 8
4-conductor connection system
Diagnostics LED (Figure 1, detail 3) is visible on the front and displays the following error statuses: – LED flashes: Measuring range span less than 50 K – LED lit: Line break on the sensor side – LED lit: Short circuit on the sensor side – LED lit: Measuring range exceeded – LED lit: Measuring range fallen below
If the device is not configured ("NC version": MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC or ...-SP-NC), all DIP switches are at pos. 0. The device does not have a defined function until the DIP switches have been set. DIP Switch S1 DIP switch S1 (Figure 1, detail 8) defines the connection system, output signal range and the start of the measuring range. Connection Output Signal System Range 1 2 3 4 5 OUT 2-cond. 0...20 mA • 2-cond. • 20...0 mA • 3-cond. • 4...20 mA • • 4-cond. • • 20...4 mA • 0...10 V • • 10...0 V • • 0...5 V • = ON • • • 1...5 V
Start Temperature 6 7 8 [°C] [°F] 0 32 • -10 14 • -20 -4 • • -30 -22 • -40 -40 • • -50 -58 • • -100 -148 • • • -150 -238
DIP Switch S3 DIP switch S3 (Figure 1, detail 10) is used to select the voltage and current output. 1 • •
10
2 • = ON
OUT 0(4)...20 mA, 20...0(4) mA 0...10 V, 10...0 V, 0(1)...5 V
101949_02_en
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
DIP Switch S2 DIP switch S2 (Figure 1, detail 9) defines the end value of the measuring range and error evaluation. 1 2 3 4 5 6 • •
• •
• •
• •
• • • •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• • • •
• • • • • • • •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• • • •
• •
• •
• •
• • •
7 8 A B •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
End Temperature [°C] [°F] 0 32 5 41 10 50 15 59 20 68 25 77 30 86 35 95 40 104 45 113 50 122 55 131 60 140 65 149 70 158 75 167 80 176 85 185 90 194 95 203 100 212 110 230 120 248 130 266 140 284 150 302 160 320 170 338 180 356 190 374 200 392
Line Break Measuring range end +5%
Overrange Measuring range end +2.5%
Measuring range end +5%
Measuring range end +2.5%
C
•
Measuring range end +5%
Measuring range end
D •
• Measuring range start
Measuring range end
101949_02_en
1 2 3 4 5 6 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Underrange Measuring range start Measuring range start -12.5% Measuring range start Measuring range start
End Temperature [°C] [°F] 210 410 220 428 230 446 240 464 250 482 260 500 270 518 280 536 290 554 300 572 320 608 340 644 360 680 380 716 400 752 420 788 440 824 460 860 480 896 500 932 520 968 540 1004 560 1040 580 1076 600 1112 620 1148 640 1184 660 1220 680 1256 700 1292 750 1382 800 1472 850 1562
Short Circuit Measuring range start Measuring range start -25% Measuring range end +5% Measuring range start
11
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Make sure you always use the latest documentation. It can be downloaded at www.download.phoenixcontact.com.
© PHOENIX CONTACT 04/2005 Technical modifications reserved
A conversion table is available on the Internet at www.download.phoenixcontact.com/general/7000_en_00.pdf.
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Flachsmarktstr. 8 32825 Blomberg Germany + 49 - (0) 52 35 - 3-00 + 49 - (0) 52 35 - 3-4 12 00 www.phoenixcontact.com Worldwide Locations: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
12
101949_02_en
Multi-stage performance filter
FN 2070
• • • •
Current ratings from 1 to 36A Very high differential and common mode attenuation Good high-frequency attenuation Optional medical versions (B types)
• • • •
Nennströme von 1 bis 36A Sehr hohe Gleich- und Gegentaktdämpfung Gute Hochfrequenzdämpfung Optionale medizinische Versionen (Typ B)
• • • •
Courants de service de 1 à 36A Très bonne atténuation en modes différentiel et mode commun Bonne atténuation à des hautes fréquences En option version pour appareils médicaux (type B)
Filter selection table
Approvals
Choose the filter FN xxxx-x with the required current rating and features, and add /?? to determine input/output (line/load) connection style. Example: FN 2070-10/06 is a 10A filter with fast-on connections. Filter
FN FN FN FN FN FN FN FN
2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070 2070
Connections
-1 -3 -6 -10 -12 -16 -25 -36
/06 /06 /06 /06 /06 /06
/?? /?? /?? /?? /?? /?? /?? /??
/07 /07 /07 /07 /07 /07
Current ratings
Inductance
at 40°C (25°) A
L mH
Cx μF
Cy nF
R MΩ
22 9.8 7.8 4.5 3.25 2.8 2 1.23
0.33 0.47 1 1 1 1 2.2 2.2
4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7
1 0.47 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22
1 3 6 10 12 16 25 36
/08 /08 /08
(1.15) (3.45) (6.9) (11.5) (13.8) (18.4) (28.75) (41.4)
Capacitance
Resistance
Housing
Weight
g K1 K2 P Q Q L2 Q Q
190 250 450 730 730 1000 760 790
Additional specifications Filter type
Maximum operating voltage
Standard types B medical types (no Y capacitors) A safety types (lower capacitance)
Operating frequency
VAC
Hz
Hz
250 250 250
50/60 50/60 50/60
DC to 400 DC to 400 DC to 400
2000 2500 2500
Electrical schematic
LINE
Cx
L
R
L
Cx
P
P'
N
N'
E Cy See tables for component values.
136
Cy
LOAD
FN 2070
Hipot test voltage
PN¤E VAC
P¤N VDC
Per Mil-HB-217F at 40ºC 230V
MTBF
Maximum leakage
hours
mA/phase
1700 1700 1700
1 550 000 1 600 000 1 550 000
0.4 0.002 0.040
FN 2070 insertion loss Per CISPR 17; A = 50Ω/50Ω sym, B = 50Ω/50Ω asym, C = 0.1Ω/100Ω sym, D = 100Ω/0.1Ω sym
1A types
3A types
6A types
10A types (12A*)
dB
dB
dB
dB
70
70
70
70
60
60
60
60
50
50
50
50
40
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
0
0
0
0
-10
-10
-10
-10
-20
10k
100k
1M
-20
10M
16A types
10k
100k
1M
10M
25A types
-20
10k
100k
1M
10M
-20
10k
100k
1M
10M
36A types
dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 -20
10k
100k
1M
10M
* attenuation performance of the 12A version is similar to the 10A component.
Mechanical data Front Housing style
A B C D F J K L M N P S
K1 85 54 30.3
40.3 64.8 75 27 12.3/8.3§
20.8/23.3
29.8 5.3 6.3 0.7
19.9/34.9§
S
Tol. ± mm
K2
11.4/34.9§
± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ±
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.5
C
L
K J
Top
P
M
N A F D
B
§ with /07 connections
Housings K1, K2
wire length of /07: 140 +5 mm
Housing style
A B C D F J K L M N P Q R S
P
Q
L2
113.5
156
119 ± 0.5 85.5 57.6 98.5 109 40 15.6/8.6 §
57.5 45.4 ± 1.2 94 130.5 103 143 25 12.4/8.4§ 32.4 4.4 5.3 6 0.9
15.5/38 § § with /07 connections
wire length of /07: 140 +5 mm
All dimensions in mm; 1 inch = 25.4 mm
4.4 7.4 1.2 66 51
Tol.* ± mm
±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ± 0.3 ± 0.2 ± 0.5 ± 0.5 ± 0.1 ± 0.1 ± 0.1 ± 0.3 ± 0.2 ± 0.5
Front
S C
C
L
K
K J
Top
P
P
J N
M N
M A F D A F
D
B R
Q B
* Measurements share this common tolerance unless otherwise stated.
Housings P, Q
Housing L2
137
Presentation, terminology
Presentation
Limit switches 3
3
Osiswitch® General
Electromechanical detection Limit switches are used in all automated installations and also in a wide variety of applications, due to the numerous advantages inherent to their technology. They transmit data to the logic processing system regarding: v presence/absence, v passing, v positioning, v end of travel.
Simple to install switches, offering many advantages b From an electrical viewpoint v galvanic separation of circuits, v models suitable for low power switching, combined with good electrical durability, v very good short-circuit withstand in coordination with appropriate fuses, v total immunity to electromagnetic interference, v high rated operational voltage. b From a mechanical viewpoint v N/C contacts with positive opening operation, v high resistance to the different ambient conditions encountered in industry (standard tests and specific tests under laboratory conditions), v high repeat accuracy, up to 0.01 mm on the tripping points.
Detection movements
Terminology
b Linear actuation (plunger) b Rotary actuation (lever)
b Multi-directional actuation
Unactuated
Unactuated
Tripped
Rated value of a quantity Catégories d'emploi
Positive opening travel Positive opening force Switching capacity
Positive opening operation
31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/2
Unactuated
Tripped
Tripped
b This replace the term “nominal value”. b It is the fixed value for a specific function. b AC-15 replaces AC-11: control of an electromagnet on a.c., test 10 le/le. b AC-12: control of a resistive load on a.c. or static load isolated by opto-coupler. b DC-13 replaces DC-11: control of an electromagnet on d.c., test le/le. b Minimum travel from the initial movement of contact actuator to the position required to accomplish positive opening operation. b The force required on the contact actuator to accomplish positive opening operation. b Ithe is no longer a rated value but a conventional current used for heating tests). Example: for category A300 the corresponding rated current, le maximum, is 6 A-120 V or 3 A-240 V, the equivalent Ithe being 10 A. b A limit switch complies to this specification when all the closed contact elements of the switch can be changed, with certainty, to the open position (no flexible link between the moving contacts and the operator of the switch, to which an actuating force is applied). b All limit switches incorporating either a slow break contact block or a snap action N/C + N/O (form Zb), N/C + N/O + N/O, N/C + N/C + N/O, N/C + N/C + N/O + N/O contact block are positive opening operation, in complete conformity with the standard IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K.
Schneider Electric
Contact blocks
3
Limit switches
3
Osiswitch® General
Contact blocks
Snap action contacts b Snap action contacts are characterised by different tripping and reset points (differential travel). b The displacement speed of the moving contacts is independent to the speed of the operator. b This feature ensures satisfactory electrical performance in applications involving low speed actuators.
13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
21
22
21
22
21
22
21
22
Unactuated state
Approach travel
Contact change of state
Positive opening
Slow break contacts b Slow break contacts are characterised by identical tripping and resetting points. b The displacement speed of the moving contacts is equal, or proportional, to the speed of the operator (which must not be less than 0.001 m/s = 6 m/minute). The opening distance is also dependent on the distance travelled by the operator.
21
22
21
22
13
14
13
14
Electrical durability for normal loads V Insulation voltage limit
b Normally, for inductive loads, the current value is less than 0.1 A (sealed) i.e. values of 3 to 40 VA sealed and 30 to 1000 VA inrush, depending on the voltage. For this type of application the electrical durability will exceed 10 million operating cycles. Application example: XCK J161 + LC1 D12pppp (7 VA sealed, 70 VA inrush). Electrical durability = 10 million operating cycles.
500
3
240 200
Switching capacity
150 120 100
4
60
Heating limit (I the)
Inductive zone
(1)
48 24 20
1
15
2 10 8 6 5 1 mA
2 3 mA mA
6 mA 10 mA
1A
2 A 3A
6A 10 A
1 Normal PLC input type 1 2 Normal PLC input type 2 3 Switching capacity conforming to IEC 60947-5-5, utilisation category AC-15, DC-13 A300 240 V 3 A B300 240 V 1.5 A Q300 250 V 0.27 A R300 250 V 0.13 A 4 Switching capacity conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, utilisation category AC-15, DC-13 A300 120 V 6 A B300 120 V 3 A Q300 125 V 0.55 A R300 125 V 0.27 A
Electrical durability for small loads b The use of limit switches with programmable controllers is becoming more common. b With small loads, limit switches offer the following levels of reliability: v failure rate of less than 1 for 100 million operating cycles using snap action contacts (XEpS P contacts and contacts of XCM Dp), v failure rate of less than 1 for 50 million operating cycles using slow break contacts (XEpN P contacts).
Range of use Standard contacts XE2S P2151, P3151 Continuous service XE2N Ppppp (frequent switching) Contacts of XCM D XE3p Ppppp Gold flashed Occasional service contacts infrequent switching, on resistive load y 1 operating cycle/day, and/or corrosive atmosphere (1) Usable up to 48 V/10 mA.
Schneider Electric
(1)
31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/3
Contact blocks (continued)
3
Limit switches
3
Osiswitch® General
Contact blocks (continued)
Function diagrams of the snap action contacts b Example: N/C + N/O
A B
P
Tripping
21 - 22 13 - 14 21 - 22 13 - 14
Resetting 0
A - Maximum travel of the actuator in mm or degrees. B - Tripping travel of contact. C - Resetting travel of contact. D - Differential travel = B - C. P - Point from which positive opening is assured.
D
C
A
D C
B
v Linear movement (plunger)
0 1 2 P max.
1 - Resetting point of contact. 2 - Tripping point of contact. A - Maximum travel of the actuator in mm. B - Tripping travel of contact. C - Resetting travel of contact. D - Differential travel = B - C. P - Point from which positive opening is assured.
v Rotary movement
1 - Resetting point of contact. 2 - Tripping point of contact. A - Maximum travel of the actuator in degrees. B - Tripping travel of contact. C - Resetting travel of contact. D - Differential travel = B - C. P - Point from which positive opening is assured.
B 1
C
A 2
D
P
Function diagrams of the slow break contacts b Example: N/C + N/O break before make A P
B
Tripping and resetting
21 - 22 13 - 14 0
A - Maximum travel of the actuator in mm or degrees. B - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 21-22. C - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 13-14. P - Point from which positive opening is assured.
C
A
B
C
v Linear movement (plunger)
0 1 2 P max.
1 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 21-22. 2 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 13-14. A - Maximum travel of the actuator in mm. B - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 21-22. C - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 13-14. P - Positive opening point.
v Rotary movement
C A B
1
2
1 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 21-22. 2 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 13-14. A - Maximum travel of the actuator in degrees. B - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 21-22. C - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 13-14. P - Positive opening point.
P
31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/4
Schneider Electric
Contact blocks (continued), mounting
Contact blocks (continued)
Limit switches 3
3
Osiswitch® General
Contact connections b Tightening torque: v minimum tightening torque ensuring the nominal characteristics of the contact: 0.8 N.m, v maximum tightening torque without damage to the terminals: 1.2 N.m for XE2 pP, 1 N.m for XE3 pP. b Connecting cable: cable preparation lengths: v for XE2p P, L = 22 mm, v for XE2p P3 ppp, L = 45 mm.
XE2p P screw clamp terminal connections
L v for XE3p P, L = 14 mm, L1 = 11 mm
L
L1
XE3p P screw clamp terminal connections
Mounting
Sweep of connecting cable 1 Recommended 2 To be avoided
1
2
Position of cable gland 1 Recommended 2 To be avoided
1
2
Type of cam 1 Recommended 2 To be avoided
1 30
2 30
Mounting and fixing limit switches by the head 1 Recommended 2 To be avoided
Types XCK D, XCK P and XCK T, XCM D and XCM N
1
Schneider Electric
2
2
31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/5
Setting-up
3
Limit switches
3
Osiswitch® General
Setting-up
Tightening torque b The minimum torque is that required to ensure correct operation of the switch. b The maximum torque is the value which, if exceeded, will damage the switch. Range Item Torque (N.m) Min. Max. Compact design XCK D, XCK P, Cover 0.8 1.2 XCK T Fixing screw for lever on rotary head 1 1.5 Miniature design XCM D, XCM N – – – Fixing screw for lever on rotary head 1 1.5 Compact design XCK N Cover 0.8 1.2 Fixing screw for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Classic design XCK J Classic design XCK S Classic design XCK M, XCK ML, XCK L
Cover Fixing screw for lever on rotary head Cover Fixing screw for lever on rotary head Cover Fixing screw for lever on rotary head
1 1 0.8 1 0.8 1
1.5 1.5 1.2 1.5 1.2 1.5
Types XCK D, XCK P, XCK T, XCM D b Adjustable in 3 planes:
15˚
15˚
15˚
All the heads can be adjusted in 15° steps throughout 360°, in relation to the body.
All the levers can be adjusted in 15° steps throughout 360°, in relation to the horizontal axis of the head.
Type XCK J b Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever or its mounting. 1 Reversed a = 5° 2 Forward a = 45°
1 2 5° steps throughout 360°
1
31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/6
45° steps throughout 360°
2
Schneider Electric
Setting-up (continued)
3
Limit switches
3
Osiswitch® General
Setting-up (continued)
Direction of actuation programming b XC2 J
Head ZC2 JE05
b XCK J
Head ZCK E05
b XCK S
Head ZCK D05
b XCK D, XCK P, XCK T and XCM D
Head ZCE 05
Specific cams for heads ZCK E09 and ZC2 J09
1
h
1
1 0.5 mm min. 2 2 mm min.
2
B A
A = length of lever + 11 mm ZCK E09: 13 < h < 18 mm and B = 12 mm max. ZCK JE09: 14 < h < 24 mm and B = 6 mm max.
Schneider Electric
31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/7
Reminder of the standards Limit switches 3
3
Osiswitch® General
Reminder of the standards The majority of Telemecanique products comply to national standards (for example French standard NF C, German standard DIN), European standards (for example CENELEC) or international standards (for example IEC). These standards rigidly stipulate the characteristic requirements of the designated products (for example IEC 60947 relating to low voltage switchgear and controlgear). These products, when correctly used, enable the production of control equipment assemblies, machine control equipment or installations conforming to their own specific standards (for example IEC 60204 for the electrical equipment of machines).
IEC 60947-5-1 Insulation coordination (and dielectric strength)
Terminal connections
Switching capacity Positive opening operation (IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K)
Electrical symbols for contacts
b The standard IEC 60664 defines 4 categories of prospective transient overvoltages. It is important for the user to select control circuit components which are able to withstand these overvoltages. To these ends, the manufacturer states the rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) applicable to the product. b The cabling capacity, mechanical robustness and durability of the terminals as well as the ability to resist loosening are verified by standardised tests. b Terminal reference marking conforms to the standard EN 50013. b With maximum electrical load. A single designation (A300 for example) enables indication of the contact block characteristics related to the utilisation category. b For contacts used in safety applications (end of travel, emergency stop device, etc.) the assurance of positive opening is required (see IEC 60204, EN 60204) after each test, the opening of the contact being verified by testing with an impulse voltage (2500 V). b Form Za, b Form Zb, the 2 contacts are the 2 contacts are electrically separate. the same polarity. b Simplified version
Symbol for positive opening
b Complete symbol
CENELEC EN 50047 The European standards organisation CENELEC, which has 14 member countries, has defined in this standard the first type of limit switch. It defines 4 variants of devices (forms A, B, C, E). (1) Minimum value A: reference axis Limit switches XCK P, XCK D and XCK T conform to the (2) Maximum value H: differential travel standard EN 50047. P: tripping point E: cable entry Form A, with roller lever Form B, with end plunger (rounded)
20 (1)
50 (2)
H P 12,5
31 (2)
15 (1)
A
21 (1)
55
40 E
55 (2)
10 (1)
H
P 5 (1)
12,5 (1) 30 (2)
Form C, with end roller plunger
20 (1)
10 (1)
Form E, with roller lever for 1 direction of actuation
10 (1)
H
12,5
5 (1)
10
2
H
P 30 (2)
40
20 (1)
25 31 (1)
28
25 (1)
H
P
31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/8
35
P 2,5 (1)
Schneider Electric
Reminder of the standards Limit switches (continued)
3
3
Osiswitch® General
Reminder of the standards (continued) CENELEC EN 50041 The European standards organisation CENELEC, which has 14 member countries, has defined in this standard the second type of limit switch. It defines 6 variants of devices (forms A, B, C, D, F, G). (1) Minimum value A: reference axis Za: tripping zone Limit switches XCK J and XCK S conform to the standard (2) Maximum value B: optional elongated holes Sa: tripping threshold EN 50041. H: differential travel P: tripping point E: cable entry Form A, with roller lever Form B, with end plunger (rounded)
20 (1)
70 (2) H
P
A 80 (2)
7,3 E
40 (1)
5,3
31(1)
67
5 (1) 10 (1)
70 (2)
H
P
B
15 (1) 30
42,5 (2)
46 (2) Form C, with end roller plunger
Form D, with rod lever
Za
10 (1)
H
40
P
40
˚
200
58
20 (1)
3 (1)
Sa
20 (2) 100 (1)
20 (2)
˚
53 (1)
Form F, with side plunger (rounded)
Form G, with side roller plunger
56 (1)
3
H
H
20
20
H
30 (1)
H
41
20 (1)
30˚
47 (1)
H
58
20 (1)
39 (1)
H
44 (1)
H
P
72
55
H
3 (1)
20
H
59 (1) 67 (1)
Schneider Electric
41 (1) 50 (1)
31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/9
NEW Fan & Filter Fan
Air-flow Monitor
LC 013 / LCF 013
Reliable mechanical switch contact Small size Easily installs via clip or clamp Versatile fields of application The LC 013/LCF 013 air-flow monitor provides a simple but reliable alternative to indicate positive or negative air flow of fans. When properly installed and connected in series with an optical (i.e. LED) or audible signaling device, a bi-directional switch will activate an electrical contact if the air flow of the fan falls below 8.2 ft/s, thus either turning the signaling device on or off.
Photo enlarged
Technical Data LC 013 / LCF 013 Reed / magnet contact Contact open with air flow Contact closed with air flow
Contact type: NC (normally closed) NO (normally open) Switching threshold of air flow speed: Hysteresis: Contact resistance incl. wire: Service life: Max. switching capacity: Max. switching voltage: Max. switching current: Connection:
Application: The LC 013 air-flow monitor can be used in combination with optical or audible signaling devices (such as LED’s or alarms), or remote monitoring devices. It should be connected: A) in series directly with the signaling device itself, if the power of the connected device does not exceed the electrical ratings of the LC 013 as listed, or B) to the pilot switch side of a relay (i.e. our SM 010), if the signaling device to be switched exceeds the electrical ratings of the LC 013 and needs to be switched via relay. In this case, a properly sized relay should be specified by the customer for the specific application/device.
>8.2 ft/s (2.5 m/s) 3.3 ft/s (1 m/s) - fixed 370mW > 100,000 cycles 10W (resistive load) NC: AC/DC 240 V / NO: DC 60 V NC: DC 500mA / NO: DC 170mA 2 x single strand AWG 26, length 500 mm, tip of stranded wire stripped/tinned (5 mm) Attachment clamp and/or clip, Mounting: or integrated in protective grill (see below) Plastic, UL 94HB, black Housing: 1.3 x 0.7 x 0.3” (34 x 17.5 x 7.5 mm) Dimensions: Air-flow monitor opening perpendicular to air flow Mounting position: Operating/storage temperature: -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C) / -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C) IP 20 Protection type: UL and VDE Agency approvals:
LC 013 LCF 013 LCF 013 LCF 013
Part No. 01300.0-00 01301.0-00 01302.0-00 01303.0-00
Protective Grill no ü ü ü
LC 013 LCF 013 LCF 013 LCF 013
01300.1-00 01301.1-00 01302.1-00 01303.1-00
no ü ü ü
Weight (approx.) Dimensions 0.2 oz. 1.3 x 0.7 x 0.3” 3.15 x 3.15 x 0.4” 0.7 oz. 0.7 oz. 3.6 x 3.6 x 0.4” 1.1 oz. 4.7 x 4.7 x 0.4” 0.2 oz. 1.3 x 0.7 x 0.3” 3.15 x 3.15 x 0.4” 0.7 oz. 0.7 oz. 3.6 x 3.6 x 0.4” 1.1 oz. 4.7 x 4.7 x 0.4”
Please refer to the table shown below to ensure the correct contact type (NC-normally closed or NO-normally open) suitable for the application. Installation notes: To avoid possible interference problems, a suitable distance from the following must be guaranteed, preferably through prior testing: · magnets (permanent magnets) and ferrous metals (e.g. sheet metal) · electromagnetic fields and inductive loads (e.g. caused by transformers, motors, etc.) The air-flow monitor must be positioned directly in the air flow in a dust-free and contamination-free environment. Avoid installing in areas where air pockets or turbulence can be expected.
Flap Position £ 8.2 ft/s >8.2 ft/s
Closed
Closed
Contact £ 8.2 ft/s >8.2 ft/s
Open
Description NC - normally closed Contact opens when air flow > 8.2 ft/s
Open
NO - normally open Contact closes when air flow > 8.2 ft/s
Recommended use Use to turn an alarm or signaling device ON to indicate loss of air flow (£ 8.2 ft/s) Use to turn a signaling device ON to indicate sufficient air flow (> 8.2 ft/s)
Air-flow monitor integrated in protective grill
Wiring example e.g. signal device
+ -
80 x 80mm 92 x 92 / 120 x 120mm
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/buyer in its final application.
STEGO, Inc. · 1395 South Marietta Parkway · Building 800 · Marietta, GA 30067 · Tel: (770) 984-0858 · Fax: (770) 984-0615 Toll free: 1-888-783-4611 (US & Canada only) · www.stegousa.com
LC013/03-07/US
1.3” (34 mm)
0.7” (17.5 mm)
0.3” (7.5 mm)
Semiconductor Heater HG 140 Series
15W to 150W
Pressure clamp connectors Dynamic heating up Wide voltage range Temperature limiting Energy saving
Heating
Clip fixing Quick installation These heaters are used in enclosures where damage from condensation must be prevented, or where the temperature may not fall below a minimum value. The aluminium profile heater body design has a chimney effect and distributes the heat evenly. The pressure clamp connectors save time and simplify installation.
| Specifications are subject to change without notice. Errors and omissions excepted. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/ buyer in its final application. 24.04.2006
Technical Data Operating voltage
120-250V AC/DC*
Heating element
PTC resistor, self regulating and temperature limiting
Heater body
extruded aluminium profile, anodised
Connection
3 pressure clamps for stranded wire 0.5-1.5mm² (with wire end ferrule) and rigid wire 0.5-2.5mm²
Connection casing
plastic according to UL94 V-0, black
Mounting
clip for 35mm DIN rail, EN 50022
Fitting position
vertical
Operating/Storage temperature
-45 to +70°C (-49 to +158°F)
Protection type / Protection class
IP20 / I (earthed)
Approvals
VDE, UL File No. E150057
Accessories
screw fixing, Art. No. 09024.0-00 (1 packing unit = 2 pieces)
*Operating with voltages below 140V AC/DC reduces heating performance by approx. 10%.
Art. No.
Heating capacity*
Inrush current max.
Length (L)
Weight (approx.)
14000.0-00
15W
1.5A
65mm
0.30kg
14001.0-00
30W
3.0A
65mm
0.30kg
14003.0-00
45W
3.5A
65mm
0.30kg
14005.0-00
60W
2.5A
140mm
0.40kg
14006.0-00
75W
4.0A
140mm
0.50kg
14007.0-00
100W
4.5A
140mm
0.50kg
14008.0-00
150W
9.0A
220mm
0.70kg
*at 20°C (68°F) ambient temperature
++ STEGO UK Ltd. + Unit 12, First Quarter Business Park + Blenheim Road + Epsom, Surrey KT19 9QN + England + [email protected] + www.stego.co.uk ++
Slimline
Light
SL 025
Compact design Integrated receptacle
Light with Motion Sensor
Energy-saving lamp On/Off switch or Motion Sensor The SL025 Light was designed to fit in tight spaces in enclosures. It features an integrated receptacle so that electrical devices (e.g. power tools) can be easily plugged in when needed. The standard light can be screw-mounted in a variety of positions, or the light can be fitted with an available magnet mount. The optional motion sensor was designed so it can be used in enclosures with glass doors and not be activated by movement outside the enclosure. Technical Data SL 025
Part No.: Light bulb: Power: Luminosity: Service life: Switch: Motion sensor: Receptacle: Connection:
Light with On/Off Switch
Mounting: Dimensions: Housing: Weight (approx.): Protection type: Agency approvals:
Part Number with On/Off Switch
Part Number with Motion Sensor
Germany (AC 230 V): w/ magnet mounting:
02520.0-00 02520.1-00
02520.0-03 02520.1-03
France (AC 230 V): w/ magnet mounting:
02521.0-00 02521.1-00
02521.0-03 02521.1-03
Switzerland (AC 230 V): w/ magnet mounting:
02522.0-00 02522.1-00
02522.0-03 02522.1-03
UK (AC 230 V): w/ magnet mounting:
02523.0-00 02523.1-00
02523.0-03 02523.1-03
USA/Canada (AC 120 V): w/ magnet mounting:
02524.0-01 02524.1-01
02524.0-04 02524.1-04
No receptacle (AC 230 V): w/ magnet mounting:
02527.0-00 02527.1-00
02527.0-04 02527.1-04
No receptacle (AC 120 V): w/ magnet mounting:
02527.0-10 02527.1-10
02527.0-12 02527.1-12
Receptacle
1.6” (40mm)
Magnet (optional)
Specify according to plug and switch types as shown below Compact fluorescent light bulb 11W (~75W incand.), Base: 2G7, electronic ballast 900 Lm 5000h On/off switch (for light only) PIR = Passive Infrared (see note below) max. AC 250 V / 16A (Schuko) 3-pole screw terminal for AWG 14 max. (2.5 mm²) (includes cable strain relief) M5 screws (not included), 11.8” (300 mm) hole distance or optional attached magnet (see part nos. below) L x W x D: 13.6 x 3.6 x 1.6” (345 x 91 x 40 mm) Plastic, UL94V-O 0.9 lbs. (400 g), 1.3 lbs. (600 g) with magnet IP 20 VDE, UL
13.6” (345 mm)
Note: A Passive Infrared (PIR) motion sensor detects the motion of the enclosure door being opened and automatically turns on the light. The sensor is factory pre-set to turn the light off 5 minutes after all motion ceases. The motion sensor does not detect movement through glass or fiberglass, thus allowing installation in enclosure with glass doors.
3.6” (91mm)
0.5” (12.5 mm)
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/buyer in its final application.
STEGO, Inc. · 1395 South Marietta Parkway · Building 800 · Marietta, GA 30067 · Tel: (770) 984-0858 · Fax: (770) 984-0615 Toll free: 1-888-783-4611 (US & Canada only) · www.stegousa.com
SL025/03-07/US
11.8” (300 mm) 0.8” (20 mm)
SG_Order_MV_E.qxd
17.10.2005
10:39
Seite 145
Protective Devices Rated current In (A)
Type Designation
Article No.
Units per package
PLSM-C0,16/2 PLSM-C0,25/2 PLSM-C0,5/2 PLSM-C0,75/2 PLSM-C1/2 PLSM-C1,5/2 PLSM-C1,6/2 PLSM-C2/2 PLSM-C2,5/2 PLSM-C3/2 PLSM-C3,5/2 PLSM-C4/2 PLSM-C5/2 PLSM-C6/2 PLSM-C8/2 PLSM-C10/2 PLSM-C12/2 PLSM-C13/2 PLSM-C15/2 PLSM-C16/2 PLSM-C20/2 PLSM-C25/2 PLSM-C32/2 PLSM-C40/2 PLSM-C50/2 PLSM-C63/2
242386 242387 242389 242388 242390 242391 242392 242393 242394 242395 242396 242397 242398 242399 242400 242401 242402 242403 242404 242405 242406 242407 242408 242409 242410 242411
1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60
PLSM-C0,16/3 PLSM-C0,25/3 PLSM-C0,5/3 PLSM-C0,75/3 PLSM-C1/3 PLSM-C1,5/3 PLSM-C1,6/3 PLSM-C2/3 PLSM-C2,5/3 PLSM-C3/3 PLSM-C3,5/3 PLSM-C4/3 PLSM-C5/3 PLSM-C6/3 PLSM-C8/3 PLSM-C10/3 PLSM-C12/3 PLSM-C13/3 PLSM-C15/3 PLSM-C16/3 PLSM-C20/3 PLSM-C25/3 PLSM-C32/3 PLSM-C40/3 PLSM-C50/3 PLSM-C63/3
242455 242456 242458 242457 242459 242460 242461 242462 242463 242464 242465 242466 242467 242468 242469 242470 242471 242472 242473 242474 242475 242476 242477 242478 242479 242480
1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40
2-p pole SG8602
0.16 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 8 10 12 13 15 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 3-p pole SG14202
0.16 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 8 10 12 13 15 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Explanation PLSM: P = XPole, LS = MCB, M = 10 kA
145
Moxa Industrial Media Converter IMC-101 Hardware Installation Guide
Fifth Edition, June 2008
© 2008 Moxa Inc., all rights reserved. Reproduction without permission is prohibited.
P/N: 18020010104
Overview Moxa Industrial Media Converter, which is specially designed for reliable and stable operation in harsh industrial environments, provides industrial grade media conversion between 10/100BaseT(X) and 100BaseFX. IMC-101’s reliable industrial design is excellent for keeping your industrial automation applications running continuously, and comes with a relay output warning alarm to help prevent damages and losses. This product has a wide operating temperature range, from -40 to 75°C, and is designed to withstand a high degree of vibration and shock. The rugged hardware design makes IMC-101 perfect for ensuring that your Ethernet equipment can withstand critical industrial applications, such as in hazardous locations (Class 1 Division 2/Zone 2), and complies with FCC, TÜV, UL, and CE Standards NOTE
Throughout this Hardware Installation Guide, we often use IMC as an abbreviation for Moxa Industrial Media Converter: IMC = Moxa Industrial Media Converter
Package Checklist Moxa Industrial Media Converter is shipped with the following items. If any of these items is missing or damaged, please contact your customer service representative for assistance. y Moxa Industrial Media Converter y Hardware Installation Guide y Moxa Product Warranty booklet
Features y y y y y y
Supports 10/100Base-TX auto-negotiation and auto-MDI/MDI-X Multi mode, single mode with SC or ST fiber connector available Supports Link Fault Pass-Through Relay Output alarm when a port breaks or the power fails Redundant 12 to 48 VDC power inputs, DIN-Rail or panel mountable Operating temperature range from 0 to 60°C, or extended operating temperature from –40 to 75°C for (-T) models
2
Panel Layout of IMC-101 Series Top Panel View 1 2
1. 2.
V2+
Grounding screw Terminal block for power
PWR2 V2-
input PWR1/PWR2 and relay
FAULT
V1+
PWR1
V1V1 V2 INPUTS: 24 VDC
3
output 3.
Heat dissipation orifices
PORT ALARM
1
ON
2 3
DIP
4
4.
Dip switch
5.
Power input PWR1 LED
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-ST) 6. 7. 2 5 8. 6 7 9. 8 10. 9 10 11. FDX /CO L
12.
11
12 14
13
12 14
FDX /CO L
11 13
Rear Panel View
16 17
16
3
100BaseFX (ST connector) Port FX port’s 100 Mbps LED FX port’s Full Duplex/Collision LED TP port’s 100 Mbps LED 10/100BaseT(X)
13.
TP port’s 10 Mbps LED
14.
Model Name
15. Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-SC) 2 16. 5 6 17. 7
15 9 10
Power input PWR2 LED Fault LED
100BaseFX (SC connector) Port Screw hole for wall mounting kit DIN-Rail mounting kit
Mounting Dimensions (Unit = mm)
15.10
30.00
13.10
54.00
9.50
25.40
135.00
135.00
Side View
Front View
13.90 18.20 13.90 3.5 6 3.5 6
25.71 +
+
+ +
7.75
39.37
+ +
+ + +
+ + +
13
30.50 18 13
+ + +
+ + +
6 66.80 10 57.05 10 5 7.75
46.77
+
+
23.15
+ +
+ +
30.50 10.65
10.65 Panel Mount Kit
Back View
4
DIN-Rail Mounting The aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate should be fixed to the back panel of IMC when you take it out of the box. If you need to reattach the DIN-Rail attachment plate to IMC, make sure the stiff metal spring is situated towards the top, as shown in the figures below. STEP 1: STEP 2: Insert the top of the DIN-Rail into the The DIN-Rail attachment unit will slot just below the stiff metal spring. snap into place as shown below.
metal spring
metal spring
DIN-Rail
DIN-Rail
To remove Moxa Industrial Media Converter from the DIN-Rail, simply reverse Steps 1 and 2 above.
Wall Mounting (Optional) For some applications, you will find it convenient to mount Moxa Industrial Media Converter on the wall, as illustrated below. STEP 1: Remove the aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate from Moxa Industrial Media Converter, and then attach the wall mount plates, as shown in the diagrams below.
Top plate
⇒ Bottom plate
5
STEP 2: Mounting Moxa Industrial Media Converter on the wall requires 4 screws. Use the IMC, with wall mount plates attached, as a guide to mark the correct locations of the 4 screws. The heads of the screws should be less than 6.0 mm in diameter, and the shafts should be less than 3.5 mm in diameter, as shown in the figure at the right. NOTE Test the screw head and shank size by inserting the screw into one of the keyhole shaped apertures of the Wall Mounting Plates, before it is screwed into the wall.
6.0 mm
3.5 mm
Do not screw the screws in all the way—leave a space of about 2 mm to allow room for sliding the wall mount panel between the wall and the screws. STEP 3: Once the screws are fixed in the wall, insert the four screw heads through the large parts of the keyhole-shaped apertures, and then slide Moxa Industrial Media Converter downwards, as indicated below. Tighten the four screws for added stability.
Wiring Requirements WARNING
Do not disconnect modules or wires unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous. The devices may only be connected to the supply voltage shown on the type plate. The devices are designed for operation with a safety extra-low voltage. Thus, they may only be connected to the supply voltage connections and to the signal contact with the safety extra-low voltages (SELV) in compliance with IEC950/ EN60950/ VDE0805.
WARNING
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2. These devices must be supplied by a SELV source as defined in the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC.
6
WARNING
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
This equipment has been evaluated as EEx nC IIC T4 equipment under DEMKO Certificate No. 03 ATEX 0324537U. Each module is marked with II 3G and is suitable for use in Zone 2 Explosive Atmospheres. Devices must be installed in a minimum IP 54 enclosure as defined in IEC 60529 and EN 60529.
This unit is a built-in type. During installation into certain end equipment, it must comply with fire enclosure stipulations of IEC 60950/EN60950, or similar statements.
Safety First! Be sure to disconnect the power cord before installing and/or wiring your Moxa Industrial Media Converter.
Safety First! Calculate the maximum possible current in each power wire and common wire. Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size. If the current goes above the maximum ratings, the wiring could overheat, causing serious damage to your equipment.
You should also pay attention to the following points: y Use separate paths to route wiring for power and devices. If power wiring and device wiring paths must cross, make sure the wires are perpendicular at the intersection point. NOTE: Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same wire conduit. To avoid interference, wires with different signal characteristics should be routed separately. y You can use the type of signal transmitted through a wire to determine which wires should be kept separate. The rule of thumb is that wiring that shares similar electrical characteristics can be bundled together. y Keep input wiring and output wiring separated. y It is strongly advised that you label wiring to all devices in the system when necessary.
Grounding Moxa Industrial Media Converter Grounding and wire routing help limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the ground connection from the ground screw to the grounding surface prior to connecting devices.
7
ATTENTION
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel.
Wiring the Alarm Contact The Alarm Contact is made up of the two middle contacts of the terminal block on IMC’s top panel. Refer to the next section for detailed instructions on how to connect the wires to the terminal block connector, and how to attach the terminal block connector to the terminal block receptor. In this section, we explain the meaning of the two contacts used to connect the Alarm Contact. FAULT: The two middle contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector are used to detect both power faults and port faults. The two FAULT wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open Top View circuit when: 1. IMC has lost power from one of the DC power inputs. FAULT
OR
Front View
2. One of the ports for which the corresponding PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not properly connected. If neither of these two conditions occurs, the Fault circuit will be closed.
Wiring the Redundant Power Inputs The top two contacts and the bottom two contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector on IMC’s top panel are used for IMC’s two DC inputs. Top and front views of one of the terminal block connectors are shown here.
Top View
Front View
STEP 1: Insert the negative/positive DC wires into the V-/V+ terminals. STEP 2: To keep the DC wires from pulling loose, use a small flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the wire-clamp screws on the front of the terminal block connector. STEP 3: Insert the plastic terminal block connector prongs into the terminal block receptor, which is located on IMC’s top panel. ATTENTION
Before connecting IMC to the DC power inputs, make sure the DC power source voltage is stable.
8
Communication Connections IMC-101 models have one 10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet port, and one 100BaseFX (SC or ST type connector) fiber port.
10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet Port Connection The 10/100BaseT(X) ports located on IMC’s front panel are used to connect to Ethernet-enabled devices. Below we show pinouts for both MDI (NIC-type) ports and MDI-X (HUB/Switch-type) ports, and also show cable wiring diagrams for straight-through and cross-over Ethernet cables. RJ45 (8-pin, MDI) Port Pinouts Pin
Signal
1 2 3 6
Tx+ TxRx+ Rx-
1
RJ45 (8-pin, MDI-X) Port Pinouts
8
Pin
Signal
1 2 3 6
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-
1
8
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Straight-Through Cable Wiring Straight-Through Cable
Switch Port RJ45 Connector Tx+ TxRx+ Rx-
NIC Port
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 Connector
Cable Wiring 3 6 1 2
3 6 1 2
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Cross-Over Cable Wiring Cross-Over Cable
Switch Port (NIC Port)
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 Connector (Rx+) (Rx-) (Tx+) (Tx-)
Tx+ TxRx+ Rx-
Switch Port (NIC Port) RJ45 Connector
Cable Wiring 3 6 1 2
1 2 3 6
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-
(Tx+) (Tx-) (Rx+) (Rx-)
100BaseFX Ethernet Port Connection The concept behind the SC port and cable is quite straightforward. Suppose you are connecting devices I and II. Contrary to electrical signals, optical signals do not require a circuit in order to transmit data. Consequently, one of the optical lines is used to transmit data from device I to device II, and the other optical line is used transmit data from device II to device I, for full-duplex transmission. All you need to remember is to connect the Tx (transmit) port of device I to the Rx (receive) port of device II, and the Rx (receive) port of device I to the Tx (transmit) port of device II. If you are making your own cable, we suggest labeling the two sides of the same line with the same letter (A-to-A and B-to-B, as shown below, or A1-to-A2 and B1-to-B2).
9
SC-Port Pinouts
SC-Port to SC-Port Cable Wiring A
A
B
B
Tx
Cable Wiring A B
Rx
ST-Port Pinouts
A B
ST-Port to ST-Port Cable Wiring A
A
Tx B
B
Cable Wiring A B
Rx
A B
ATTENTION
This is a Class 1 Laser/LED product. Do not stare into the Laser Beam.
Redundant Power Inputs Both power inputs can be connected simultaneously to live DC power sources. If one power source fails, the other live source acts as a backup, and automatically supplies all of Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s power needs.
Alarm Contact Moxa Industrial Media Converter has one Alarm Contact located on the top panel. For detailed instructions on how to connect the Alarm Contact power wires to the two middle contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector, see the “Wiring the Alarm Contact” section above. A typical scenario would be to connect the Fault circuit to a warning light located in the control room. The light can be set up to switch on when a fault is detected. The Alarm Contact has two terminals that form a Fault circuit for connecting to an alarm system. The two wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open circuit when (1) IMC has lost power from one of the DC power inputs, or (2) one of the ports for which the corresponding PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not properly connected. If neither of these two conditions occurs, the Fault circuit will be closed.
10
Dip Switch Setting IMC-101 series DIP switch Dip Switch 1 (Default: Off ) ON: Enables the PORT Alarm. If the port’s link fails, the relay will form an open circuit and the fault LED will light up. ON DIP Off: Disables the corresponding PORT Alarm. The relay will form a closed circuit and the Fault LED will never light up. Dip Switch 2 (Default: ON ) 1 2 3 ON: Enables full duplex for 100BaseFX Off: Disables full duplex for 100BaseFX Dip Switch 3 Reserved for future use To activate the updated DIP switch setting, power off and then power on the IMC.
LED Indicators The front panel of Moxa Industrial Media Converter contains several LED indicators. The function of each LED is described in the table below. LED PWR1
PWR2
FAULT
10M
100M (TP)
Color
State On Off
Power is not being supplied to power input PWR1
On
Power is being supplied to power input PWR2
Off
Power is not being supplied to power input PWR2
On
When the corresponding PORT alarm is enabled, and the port’s link is inactive.
Off
When the corresponding PORT alarm is enabled and the port’s link is active, or when the corresponding PORT alarm is disabled.
On
TP port’s 10 Mbps link is active
AMBER
AMBER
RED
GREEN
GREEN
Description Power is being supplied to power input PWR1
Blinking
Data is being transmitted at 10 Mbps
Off
TP Port’s 10 Mbps link is inactive
On
TP port’s 100 Mbps link is active
Blinking Off
Data is being transmitted at 100 Mbps 100BaseTX Port’s link is inactive
11
100M (FX)
FDX/COL
GREEN
GREEN
On
FX port’s 100 Mbps is active
Blinking
Data is being transmitted at 100 Mbps
Off
100BaseFX port is inactive
On
100BaseFX port is being transmitted at full duplex
Blinking
Collision occurs
Off
100BaseFX port is being transmitted at half duplex
Auto MDI/MDI-X Connection The Auto MDI/MDI-X function allows users to connect Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s 10/100BaseTX ports to any kind of Ethernet device, without paying attention to the type of Ethernet cable being used for the connection. This means that you can use either a straight-through cable or cross-over cable to connect IMC to Ethernet devices.
Dual Speed Functionality and Switching Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s 10/100 Mbps RJ45 switched port auto negotiates with the connected device for the fastest data transmission rate supported by both devices. All models of Moxa Industrial Media Converter are plug-and-play devices, so that software configuration is not required at installation, or during maintenance. The half/full duplex mode for the RJ45 switched ports is user dependent and changes (by auto-negotiation) to full or half duplex, depending on which transmission speed is supported by the attached device.
Auto-Negotiation and Speed Sensing All of Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s RJ45 Ethernet ports independently support auto-negotiation for transmission speed in the 10BaseT and 100BaseTX modes, with operation according to the IEEE 802.3u standard. This means that some nodes could be operating at 10 Mbps, while at the same time, other nodes are operating at 100 Mbps. Auto-negotiation takes place when an RJ45 cable connection is made, and then each time a LINK is enabled. Moxa Industrial Media Converter advertises its capability for using either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps transmission speeds, with the device at the other end of the cable expected to advertise similarly. Depending on what type of device is connected, this will result in agreement to operate at a speed of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. If a Moxa Industrial Media Converter RJ45 Ethernet port is connected to a non-negotiating device, it will default to 10 Mbps speed and half-duplex mode, as required by the IEEE 802.3u standard.
12
Specifications Technology Standards Interface RJ45 ports Fiber ports LED Indicators Dip Switch Alarm Contact
IEEE802.3, 802.3u, Link Fault Pass-Through 10/100BaseT(X) 100BaseFX (SC, ST connectors available) Power, Fault, 10/100M, Full Duplex/Collision, Port break alarm mask, 100BaseFx Full/Half duplex selection One relay output with current carrying capacity of 1A @ 24 VDC
Optical Fiber
Distance, km Wavelength, nm Min. TX Output, dBm Max. TX Output, dBm Sensitivity, dBm Recommended Diameter (Core/Cladding) μm Power Input Voltage Input Current (@24V) Connection Overload Current Protection Reverse Polarity Protection Mechanical Casing Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight Installation Environmental Operating Temperature
Multi mode 5 1310 -20 -14 -34 to -30 62.5/125 (1 dB/km, 800 MHz × km)
Single mode, 15 15 1310 -15 -6 -36 to -32 9/125
Single mode, 40 40 1310 -5 0 -36 to -32 9/125
Single mode, 80 80 1550 -5 0 -36 to -32 9/125
12 to 48 VDC; Redundant inputs 0.16 A Removable Terminal Block 1.1 A Present IP30 protection, aluminum case 53.6 x 135 x 105 mm 0.63 kg DIN-Rail, Wall Mounting 0 to 60℃ (32 to 140 oF), -40 to 75oC (-40 to 167oF) for – T models
Storage Temperature
-40 to 85℃ (-40 to 185 oF)
Ambient Relative Humidity Regulatory Approvals Safety Hazardous Location
5 to 90% (non-condensing)
EMI EMS
Shock Free Fall Vibration WARRANTY
UL60950, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, EN60950 UL/cUL Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D ATEX Class I, Zone 2, EEx nC IIC FCC Part 15, CISPR (EN55022) class A EN61000-4-2 (ESD), level 3 EN61000-4-3 (RS), level 3 EN61000-4-4 (EFT), level 3 EN61000-4-5 (Surge), level 3 EN61000-4-2 (CS), level 3 IEC 60068-2-27 IEC 60068-2-32 IEC 60068-2-6 5 years
13
Revision History Document Edition
Revision Date
2nd
June 15, 2004
Revision Details 1.
Updated the edition of this manual on the title page.
2.
Changed the Moxa logo on the title page.
3.
Added several “Attention” messages
4.
Added one product feature: Operating temperature ranges from 0 to 60°C, or extended operting temperature from –40 to 75°C for (-T) models.
3rd
July 1, 2004
1.
Revise 100BaseFX for fiber optic port of ST connector.
4th
Nov. 15, 2004
1.
Modify Optical Fiber specs.
2.
Improve resolution of figures.
Technical Support Contact Information www.moxa.com/support Moxa Americas: Toll-free: 1-888-669-2872 Tel: +1-714-528-6777 Fax: +1-714-528-6778
Moxa China (Shanghai office): Toll-free: 800-820-5036 Tel: +86-21-5258-9955 Fax: +86-10-6872-3958
Moxa Europe: Tel: +49-89-3 70 03 99-0 Fax: +49-89-3 70 03 99-99
Moxa Asia-Pacific: Tel: +886-2-8919-1230 Fax: +886-2-8919-1231
14
Extract from the online catalog
UKKB 3 Order No.: 2771010
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2771010
Double-level terminal block with a screw connection, cross section: 0.2 2 2 mm - 2.5 mm , AWG: 28 - 12, width: 5.2 mm, color: Gray
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
Commercial data EAN
4017918068165
Pack
50 Pcs.
Customs tariff
85369010
Weight/Piece
0.014051 KG
Catalog page information
Page 291 (CL-2007)
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data General Number of levels
2
Number of connections
4
Color
gray
Insulating material
PA
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 1 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UKKB 3 Order No.: 2771010
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2771010
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V0
Dimensions Width
5.2 mm
Length
67 mm
Height NS 35/7,5
62 mm
Height NS 35/15
69.5 mm
Height NS 32
67 mm
Technical data Rated surge voltage
6 kV
Pollution degree
3
Surge voltage category
III
Insulating material group
I
Connection in acc. with standard
IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN
32 A
Nominal voltage UN
500 V
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section solid max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section stranded min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section stranded max.
2.5 mm
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
24
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
12
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
2.5 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
0.2 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
1 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
0.2 mm
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
2
2 2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
Page 2 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UKKB 3 Order No.: 2771010
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2771010
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
0.25 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
0.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
1 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, solid max.
2.5 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, stranded max.
2.5 mm
Type of connection
Screw connection
Stripping length
8 mm
Screw thread
M3
Tightening torque, min
0.5 Nm
Tightening torque max
0.6 Nm
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
BV, CCA, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, GOST, KEMA, LR, PRS, RS, UL
CSA Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
25 A
AWG/kcmil
28-12
CUL Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
20 A
AWG/kcmil
28-12
UL Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
20 A
AWG/kcmil
28-12
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 3 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UKKB 3 Order No.: 2771010
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2771010
Address
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Flachsmarktstr. 8 32825 Blomberg,Germany Phone +49 5235 3 00 Fax +49 5235 3 41200 http://www.phoenixcontact.com
© 2008 Phoenix Contact Technical modifications reserved;
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 4 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
Extract from the online catalog
UKK 5-DIO/U-O Order No.: 2791032 The illustration shows version UKK 5-DIO/O-U
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2791032
2-level terminal block with screw connection, diode conducting direction from bottom to top, cross section: 0.2 - 4 mm², width: 6.2 mm, color: Gray
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 07/26/2006
Commercial data EAN
4017918072407
Pack
50 Pcs.
Customs tariff
85369010
Weight/Piece
0.01641 KG
Catalog page information
Page 324 (CL-2007)
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data General Number of levels
2
Number of connections
4
Color
gray
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 1 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UKK 5-DIO/U-O Order No.: 2791032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2791032
Insulating material
PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V0
Dimensions Width
6.2 mm
Length
56 mm
Height NS 35/7,5
62 mm
Height NS 35/15
69.5 mm
Height NS 32
67 mm
Technical data Maximum load current
32 A (with 4 mm conductor cross section)
Rated surge voltage
6 kV
Pollution degree
3
Surge voltage category
III
Insulating material group
I
Connection in acc. with standard
IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN
32 A
Nominal voltage UN
500 V (data is based on the dielectric strength of adjacent terminal blocks or of the mounting rail.)
2
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section solid max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section stranded min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section stranded max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
24
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
12
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
2.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
0.2 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
1.5 mm
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
Page 2 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UKK 5-DIO/U-O Order No.: 2791032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2791032
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
0.2 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
0.25 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
0.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
1.5 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, solid max.
4 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, stranded max.
2.5 mm
Type of connection
Screw connection
Stripping length
8 mm
Internal cylindrical gage
A4
Screw thread
M3
Tightening torque, min
0.6 Nm
Tightening torque max
0.8 Nm
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
CUL, GOST, UL
CUL Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
30 A
AWG/kcmil
26-10
UL Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
30 A
AWG/kcmil
26-10
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 3 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UKK 5-DIO/U-O Order No.: 2791032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2791032
Address
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Flachsmarktstr. 8 32825 Blomberg,Germany Phone +49 5235 3 00 Fax +49 5235 3 41200 http://www.phoenixcontact.com
© 2008 Phoenix Contact Technical modifications reserved;
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 4 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
Extract from the online catalog
UKKB 10-PV Order No.: 3003567 The illustration shows the product version UKKB 10
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3003567
Double-level terminal block with a screw connection, cross section: 0.5 2 2 mm - 10 mm , AWG: 24 - 6, width: 10.2 mm, color: Gray
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
Commercial data EAN
4017918100759
Pack
50 Pcs.
Customs tariff
85369010
Weight/Piece
0.04692 KG
Catalog page information
Page 292 (CL-2007)
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data General Number of levels
2
Number of connections
4
Color
gray
Insulating material
PA
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 1 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UKKB 10-PV Order No.: 3003567
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3003567
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V0
Dimensions Width
10.2 mm
Length
77.5 mm
Height NS 35/7,5
73 mm
Height NS 35/15
80.5 mm
Height NS 32
78 mm
Technical data Rated surge voltage
6 kV
Pollution degree
3
Surge voltage category
III
Insulating material group
I
Connection in acc. with standard
IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN
70 A
Nominal voltage UN
500 V
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
0.5 mm
Conductor cross section solid max.
16 mm
Conductor cross section stranded min.
0.5 mm
Conductor cross section stranded max.
10 mm
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
20
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
6
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
0.5 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
10 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
0.5 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
6 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
0.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
6 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
0.5 mm
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
Page 2 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UKKB 10-PV Order No.: 3003567
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3003567
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
4 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
0.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
6 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
0.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
6 mm
Type of connection
Screw connection
Stripping length
11 mm
Internal cylindrical gage
B6
Screw thread
M4
Tightening torque, min
1.5 Nm
Tightening torque max
1.8 Nm
2
2
2
2
2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
GOST
Page 3 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UKKB 10-PV Order No.: 3003567
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3003567
Address
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Flachsmarktstr. 8 32825 Blomberg,Germany Phone +49 5235 3 00 Fax +49 5235 3 41200 http://www.phoenixcontact.com
© 2008 Phoenix Contact Technical modifications reserved;
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 4 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
Extract from the online catalog
UK 5-MTK-P/P Order No.: 3004032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004032
Knife disconnect terminal block with screw connection, with test socket screws on both sides, cross section: 0.2 - 4 mm², AWG: 22 - 12, width: 6.2 mm, color: Gray
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
Commercial data EAN
4017918090579
Pack
50 Pcs.
Customs tariff
85369010
Weight/Piece
0.01325 KG
Catalog page information
Page 315 (CL-2007)
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data General Number of levels
1
Number of connections
2
Color
gray
Insulating material
PA
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 1 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
UK 5-MTK-P/P Order No.: 3004032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004032
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V0
Dimensions Width
6.2 mm
Length
51 mm
Height NS 35/7,5
58.5 mm
Height NS 35/15
66 mm
Height NS 32
63.5 mm
Technical data Maximum load current
16 A (with 4 mm conductor cross section)
Rated surge voltage
6 kV
Pollution degree
3
Surge voltage category
III
Insulating material group
I
Nominal current IN
16 A
Nominal voltage UN
500 V
2
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section solid max.
6 mm
Conductor cross section stranded min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section stranded max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
24
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
10
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
2.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
0.2 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
0.2 mm
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2 2
Page 2 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
UK 5-MTK-P/P Order No.: 3004032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004032
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
0.25 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
0.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
2.5 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, solid max.
4 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, stranded max.
4 mm
Type of connection
Screw connection
Stripping length
8 mm
Internal cylindrical gage
A3
Screw thread
M3
Tightening torque, min
0.5 Nm
Tightening torque max
0.6 Nm
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
CSA, CUL, GOST, PRS, UL
CSA Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
15 A
AWG/kcmil
18-10
CUL Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
15 A
AWG/kcmil
22-12
UL Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
15 A
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 3 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
UK 5-MTK-P/P Order No.: 3004032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004032
AWG/kcmil
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
22-12
Page 4 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
UK 5-MTK-P/P Order No.: 3004032
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004032
Address
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Flachsmarktstr. 8 32825 Blomberg,Germany Phone +49 5235 3 00 Fax +49 5235 3 41200 http://www.phoenixcontact.com
© 2008 Phoenix Contact Technical modifications reserved;
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 5 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
Extract from the online catalog
UK 5-HESILED 24 Order No.: 3004126 The illustration shows version UK 5-HESI
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004126
Fuse terminal block for cartridge fuse insert, cross section: 0.2 - 4 mm², AWG: 26 - 10, width: 8.2 mm, color: black
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 08/01/2006
Commercial data EAN
4017918090647
Pack
50 Pcs.
Customs tariff
85363010
Weight/Piece
0.019733 KG
Catalog page information
Page 304 (CL-2007)
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data General Number of levels
1
Number of connections
2
Color
black
Insulating material
PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V2
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 1 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UK 5-HESILED 24 Order No.: 3004126
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004126
Dimensions Width
8.2 mm
Length
72.5 mm
Height NS 35/7,5
56.5 mm
Height NS 35/15
64 mm
Height NS 32
61.5 mm
Technical data Fuse
G / 5 x 20
Fuse type
Glass
LED voltage range
12 V AC/DC ... 30 V AC/DC
Rated surge voltage
6 kV
Pollution degree
3
Surge voltage category
III
Insulating material group
I
Connection in acc. with standard
IEC 60947-7-3
Nominal current IN
6.3 A
Nominal voltage UN
500 V As a fuse terminal block
LED voltage range
12 V AC/DC ... 30 V AC/DC
LED current range
3.5 mA ... 8.1 mA
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section solid max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section stranded min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section stranded max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
24
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
12
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
4 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
0.2 mm
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Page 2 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UK 5-HESILED 24 Order No.: 3004126
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004126
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
0.2 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
0.25 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
0.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
1.5 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, solid max.
4 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, stranded max.
4 mm
Type of connection
Screw connection
Stripping length
8 mm
Internal cylindrical gage
A4
Screw thread
M3
Tightening torque, min
0.5 Nm
Tightening torque max
0.8 Nm
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
CSA, GL, GOST, LR, UL
CSA Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
6.3 A
AWG/kcmil
28-10
UL Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
6.3 A
AWG/kcmil
26-10
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 3 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
UK 5-HESILED 24 Order No.: 3004126
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3004126
Address
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Flachsmarktstr. 8 32825 Blomberg,Germany Phone +49 5235 3 00 Fax +49 5235 3 41200 http://www.phoenixcontact.com
© 2008 Phoenix Contact Technical modifications reserved;
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 4 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
T01121
001229
Ground terminal blocks electrically connected to the mounting rail
D 4/6.P.T1
M 4/6.4A.P Spacing 6 mm + 0,05 .238"
M 6/8.P
Spacing 6 mm + 0,05 .238"
Spacing 8 mm - 0,05 .315"
Compression clamp DIN 1 - 3 2
R
1
Type
Part number Type
Green-yellow - UL 94 V0 M 4/6.4A.P.V0
Part number
Type
Part number
0199 220.00
Green-yellow M 6/8.P
0165 114.17
Green-yellow - UL 94 V0 0195 638.23
D 4/6.P.T1
DIN 3 only Terminal block for ground wire, same size as M 4/6.4A terminal block. IEC UL CSA NFC-DIN
Characteristics Wire size
Compression clamp
Solid wire Stranded wire
Short circuit current Rated wire size / Gauge
Other characteristics
0,2-4 mm² 0,22-4 mm² 480A/1s
22-10 AWG 22-10 AWG
12 AWG max. 12 AWG max.
4 mm²/A4
10 AWG
12 AWG
Wire stripping length
Recomm. screwdriver
Recomm. torque
Protection
9,5 mm .37"
4 mm .16"
0,5-0,8 Nm 4.4-7 lb.in
Terminal block for ground wire, same size as D 4/6.T... terminal block. IEC UL CSA NFC-DIN 0,2-4 mm² 0,22-4 mm² 480A/1s
24-10 AWG 24-10 AWG
24-10 AWG 24-10 AWG
4 mm²/A4
10 AWG
10 AWG
M 6/8.P.V0 0195 114.06 Terminal block for ground wire, same size as M 6/8 terminal block. IEC UL CSA NFC-DIN 0,5-10 mm² 0,5-6 mm² 720A/1s
24-8 AWG 24-8 AWG
24-8 AWG 24-8 AWG
6 mm²/A5
8 AWG
8 AWG
Wire stripping length
Recomm. screwdriver
Recomm. torque
Protection
Wire stripping length
9,5 mm .37"
4 mm .16"
0,5-0,8 Nm 4.4-7 lb.in
IP 20 NEMA 1
12 mm .47"
Recomm. screwdriver
Recomm. torque
Protection
4-5 mm 0,8-1 Nm .16" - .20" 7.1-8.9 lb.in
Approvals
Accessories 1
Type
End sectionyellow
Part number Type
Part number Type closed block
FEM4AP V0 green th. 3 mm 0199 879.01
yellow 2 Separator end section grey On rail : Recomm.screwdriver/Recomm.torque R See markers marking method
Ground terminal blocks electrically connected to the mounting rail
4 mm .16" / 0,8 Nm 7.0 lb.in 11
RC65
12
5
M 10/10.P
Part number
FEM6 th. 2,8 mm 0103 062.21 FEM6 V0 th. 2,8 mm 0199 305.02 SCF6 th. 3 mm 0118 707.03 4 mm .16" / 0,8 Nm 7.0 lb.in 11
12
M 16/12.P
Spacing 10 mm - 0,05 .394"
M 35/16.P
Spacing 12 mm - 0.1 .473"
Spacing 16 mm - 0.1 .630"
Compression clamp DIN 1 - 3 2
R
1
Type Green-yellow M 10/10.P M 10/10.P.V0
Compression clamp
Type
0165 115.10
Green-yellow M 16/12.P
0195 115.07
Terminal block for ground wire, same size as M 10/10 terminal block. IEC UL CSA NFC-DIN
Characteristics Wire size
Part number
Solid wire Stranded wire
Short circuit current Rated wire size / Gauge
Other characteristics
0,5-16 mm² 0,5-10 mm² 1200A/1s 10 mm²/B6 Wire stripping length
12 mm .47"
22-6 AWG 22-6 AWG
22-6 AWG 22-6 AWG
6 AWG
6 AWG
Recomm. screwdriver
Recomm. torque
Protection
5,5-6 mm 1,2-1,4 Nm .22" - 24" 10.6-12.3 lb.in
Part number Type 0165 130.23
M 16/12.P.V0
0195 130.12
Terminal block for ground wire, same size as M 16/12 terminal block. IEC UL CSA NFC-DIN 4-25 mm² 4-16 mm² 1920A/1s 16 mm²/B7 Wire stripping length
14 mm .55"
18-4 AWG 18-4 AWG
18-4 AWG 18-4 AWG
4 AWG
4 AWG
Recomm. screwdriver
5,5 mm .22"
Recomm. torque
Protection
1,2-1,4 Nm 10.6-12.3 lb.in
Part number
Green-yellow M 35/16.P
0165 111.14
M 35/16.P.V0
0195 111.03
Terminal block for ground wire, same size as M 35/16 terminal block UL CSA IEC NFC-DIN 4-50 mm² 4-35 mm² 4200A/1s 35 mm²/B9 Wire stripping length
17 mm .67"
10-0 AWG 10-0 AWG
10-0 AWG 10-0 AWG
0 AWG
0 AWG
Recomm. screwdriver
8 mm .32"
Recomm. torque
Protection
2,8-3 Nm 24.3-26.1 lb.in
Approvals
Accessories 1
Type
Part number
End sectionyellow
2 Separator end section grey On rail : Recomm.screwdriver/Recomm.torque R See markers marking method
Type
Part number Type
SCFM6 12
17
th. 3 mm 0114 825.05 4 mm .16 / 0,8 Nm 7.0 lb.in 26
Part number
closed block
closed block
closed block
th. 3 mm SCFM6 0114 825.05 5,5 mm .22" / 1,0 Nm 9.0 lb.in 12
17
26
5,5 mm .22" / 1,0 Nm 9.0 lb.in 13
17
26
79
001229
T01009
M 10/10...
Standard terminal blocks Compression clamp
Spacing 10 mm - 0,05 (.394")
DIN 1 - 3
Accessories 1 2
3 4
2 3 4 11 5 6
Test connector : See Accessories section
8
14 Test plug 15 Assembled jumper bar (without IP20 protection)
10
Stranded
UL
CSA
0,5-16 mm² 0,5-10 mm²
22-6 AWG 22-6 AWG
22-6 AWG 22-6 AWG
800 V 8 kV 3
600 V
600 V
57 A
65 A
70 A
10 mm² / B6
6 AWG
6 AWG
15
17
16
wire
Voltage Rated Pulse Pollution degree
18
Current Rated
19
Wire size Rated / Gauge Wire stripping length
Recomm. Screwdriver
Recomm. torque
Protection
12 mm .47"
5,5-6 mm .217" - .238"
1,2-1,4 Nm 10.6-12.3 lb.in.
IP 20 NEMA 1
grey blue orange yellow green white beige blue yellow End section grey End section grey Circuit separator grey blue orange yellow beige Separator end section grey blue beige Separator end section grey Separator end section grey Separator end section grey Separator end section grey Separator end section grey (for cover CPV) beige Protective cover Protective cover Test socket
14
13
Compression Solid wire clamp
11 12 13
12
Wire size IEC NFC DIN
5
6 7 8 9 10
7
Characteristics
Standard blocks Grey Blue Yellow Beige V0 Blue V0
M 10/10 M 10/10.N M 10/10 M 10/10.V0 M 10/10.N.V0
Type 1 End section
9
Type
20 21
Part numbers
0115 120.17 0125 120.11 0105 120.26 0195 120.10 0199 004.20
0115 120.17
Standard 10 mm block
End stop th. 9 mm BADL V0 0199 408.02 End stop th. 9,1 mm BAM 0103 002.26 Rail 35 x 7,5 x 1 PR30 prepunched 0173 220.05 Rail 35 x 15 x 2,3 PR4 0168 500.12 Rail 35 x 15 x 1,5 PR5 prepunched 0101 598.26 Rail 32 x 15 x 1,5 PR1Z2 0163 050.04 Other end stops and rails : See Accessories section
Color
16 Assembled jumper bar (with IP20 protection)
57 A 57 A 57 A 57 A 57 A 57 A 57 A 57 A 57 A 57 A 57 A
17 Jumper bar not assembled Post + screw + washer 70 A 18 Pivoting jumper bar 19 Universal jumper bar 50 A 70 A 70 A 20 Comb type jumper bar 21 Protection label
Screw for protection label 22 Protection label 23 IDC jumper 24 A
FEM6 th. 2,8 mm FEM6 th. 2,8 mm FEM6 th. 2,8 mm FEM6 th. 2,8 mm FEM6 th. 2,8 mm FEM6 th. 2,8 mm FEM6 V0 V0 th. 2,8 mm FEM6 V0 V0 th. 2,8 mm FEM6 V0 V0 th. 2,8 mm FEM61 (3) th. 3,0 mm FEM6C (3) th. 3,0 mm SCM6 SCM6 SCM6 SCM6 SCM6 V0 V0 SCF6 th. 3,0 mm SCF6 th. 3,0 mm SCF6 V0 V0 th. 3,0 mm SCF61 th. 3,0 mm SCFM6 (3) th. 3,0 mm SCFEX1 (3) th. 2,4 mm SCFEX3 (3) th. 2,4 mm SCFCV1-2 th. 3,0 mm SCFCV1-2 V0 V0 th. 3,0 mm (for FEM6C, SCF6(V0) and SCFM6) CPM (for SCFCV1-2...) CPV1-2 DIA. 2 mm AL2 (1) DIA. 3 mm AL3 (1) DIA. 4 mm AL4 (1) DIA. 2 mm FC2 DIA. 4 mm FC4 BJM10 (1) 2 poles BJM10 (1) 3 poles BJM10 (1) 4 poles BJM10 (1) 5 poles BJM10 (1) 10 poles BJMI10 (1) 2 poles BJMI10 (1) 3 poles BJMI10 (1) 4 poles BJMI10 (1) 5 poles BJMI10 (1) 10 poles BJS10 (1) 20 poles EV6 BJP10 BJDP1 (1)(2) spacing 10 spacing 16 BJDP3 (1)(2) spacing 10 spacing 12 PC10 10 poles EP8 3 blocks EP10 4 blocks VSP6 EPU6 AD2,5
Part numbers 0118 368.16 0128 368.10 0103 126.16 0103 062.21 0103 125.15 0103 312.20 0198 368.17 0199 302.07 0199 305.02 0114 776.23 0114 777.24 0113 003.10 0123 003.12 0103 233.21 0103 020.23 0193 003.11 0118 707.03 0128 707.05 0198 707.04 0114 202.25 0114 825.05 0103 619.04 0103 620.01 0116 795.11 0196 795.12 0187 312.14 0176 816.12 0163 043.21 0163 261.00 0163 262.01 0007 865.26 0167 860.01 0173 611.21 0173 612.22 0173 613.23 0173 614.24 0173 615.25 0176 675.04 0176 676.05 0176 677.06 0176 678.17 0176 679.10 0177 654.00 0168 604.16 0174 451.22 0179 623.03 0179 625.05 0163 315.26 0163 428.20 0163 429.21 0163 433.15 0107 038.25 0114 205.20
22
Notes The use of some accessories may decrease the block's voltage rating. For more information, consult us.
23
R
40
R See section on markers marking method 11 12 17 26 Note : (1) A circuit separator SC may be required with the use of these accessories. (2) See column : "Various applications". (3) End sections and circuit separators snapped on rails.
Bussmann®
Modular Fuseholders
10 ≈ 38, 14 ≈ 51, 22 ≈ 58
Features: • 10 ≈ 38 Dovetail design provides maximum flexibility in assembling multiple poles • Touchsafe design - No exposed contacts • DIN rail mount (35mm) • Optional open fuse indication lights • Excellent for switchboard panel, control consoles, small motors, transformers, and similar applications • Handle/fusepuller to install and remove fuses easily • Available in single and multi-pole configurations • Circuit marking system (P/N CH10CL and CH10CM) • Wire ready: Saves time as terminals are ready to accept wires. • CE marking
CH Series Standards: North American 10 ≈ 38 Class CC Listed U.L. 512, Guide IZLT, File E14853 Certified CSA Std. C22.2 No. 39, Class 6225-01, File LR47235 North American 10 ≈ 38 Midget U.L. Recognized 512, Guide IZLT2, File E14853 CSA Certified, Std. C22.2 No. 39, Class 6225-01, File LR47235 European 10 ≈ 38 IEC 269-2-1 14 ≈ 51 IEC 269-2*** U.L. Recognized, CSA Certified 22 ≈ 58 IEC 269-2*** U.L. Recognized, CSA Certified Recommended Buss® Fuse Types: 10 ≈ 38 North American Class CC Fuses - LP-CC, FNQ-R, KTK-R 10 ≈ 38 North American Midget Fuses - FNQ, KTK, AGU, KLM, BAF, BAN, FNM, FWA, FWC, & FNQ 14 ≈ 51 Fuses - FWX, FWH, FWP & NON 22 ≈ 58 Fuses - FWP
Specifications Fuse Size (mm) Voltage Amperage
U.L./CSA*** IEC U.L./CSA*** IEC
Wire Size Wire Type (& Temp.) Torque (in-lbs) IP Rating Contact Material (fuseclip) Connector Material Maximum Watts Loss of Fuse Dual Wire Rating 10 ≈ 38
Description 1 Pole 1 Pole w/Indication 2 Pole 2 Pole w/Indication 3 Pole 3 Pole w/Indication *Assembly Pins - 2 Poles *Assembly Pins - 3 Poles **Circuit markers **Circuit marker labels Spare Fuseholder
30A, 600V North American Class CC Fuseholder CHCC1 CHCC1I CHCC2 CHCC2I CHCC3 CHCC3I CH102AP CH103AP CH10CM CH10CL 5TPH
10 ≈ 38 600V 690V 30A 32A #8 - #18 Cu only Solid/Stranded (75°) 12 in-lbs IP 20 Tin-plated copper Steel 3W‡ Please consult factory 30A, 600V North American Midget Fuseholder CHM1 CHM1I CHM2 CHM2I CHM3 CHM3I CH102AP CH103AP CH10CM CH10CL 5TPH
32A, 690V European 10 ≈ 38 Fuseholder CH101 CH101I CH102 CH102I CH103 CH103I CH102AP CH103AP CH10CM CH10CL 5TPH
‡Refer to BIF documents 720003, 720008, 720025 and 720028 for watts loss of applicable fuses. *CH102AP and CH103AP are packaged in quantities of ten pins. One pin is required to gang units together, and rating multiple poles. **CH10CM are packaged in quantities of ten. CH10CL are packaged in quantities of ten sheets of labels. ***U.L./CSA part numbers include U.L. suffix.
12-17-98 SB98107
Rev. A
14 ≈ 51 750V*** 660V 30A*** 50A(See Watts Loss) #6 - #14 Cu only Solid/Stranded (75°) 17.7 in-lbs IP 20 Tin-plated copper Steel 5W‡
Description 1 Pole 1 Pole w/U.L. markings 1 Pole w/microswitch 2 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole w/U.L. markings 3 Pole w/microswitch Handle Profile - 2 Poles Handle Profile - 3 Poles
22 ≈ 56 750V*** 660V 50A*** 125A(See Watts Loss) #1 - #14 Cu only Solid/Stranded (75°) 22.1 in-lbs IP 20 Tin-plated copper Steel 9.5W‡
14 ≈ 51 Part No. Ctn. Qty. CH141G 6 CH141GUL 6 CH141MSG 6 CH142G 3 CH143G 2 CH143GUL 2 CH143MSG 2 CH142HCG 10 CH143HCG 10
22 ≈ 58 Part No. Ctn. Qty. CH221G 6 CH221GUL 6 CH221MSG 6 CH222G 3 CH223G 2 CH223GUL 2 CH223MSG 2 CH222HCG 10 CH223HCG 10
CE logo denotes compliance with European Union Low Voltage Directive (50-1000 Vac, 75-1500 Vdc). Refer to BIF document #8002 or contact Bussmann Application Engineering at 314-527-1270 for more information.
Form No. CH Series Page 1 of 2 BIF Doc #1151
Modular Fuseholders
Bussmann®
10 ≈ 38, 14 ≈ 51, 22 ≈ 58
CH Series
Size: 10 ≈ 38 Fuseholder G E
A
in
(mm)
in
(mm)
A
2.26
(57.5)
G
2.07
(52.5)
B
1.73
(44.0)
H
0.75
(19.0)
C
1.78
(45.2)
I
0.69
(17.5)
D
1.97
(49.9)
J
1.38
(35.0)
E
3.24
(82.2)
K
3.18
(80.7)
F
0.24
(6.0)
L
0.30
(7.6)
in
(mm)
in
(mm)
A
0.98
(26.0)
I
3.50
(89.0)
B
2.05
(52.0)
J
0.20
(5.0)
C
3.07
(78.0)
K
1.28
(32.5)
E
3.19
(81.0)
L
3.86
(98.0)
F
2.11
(53.5)
M
4.17
(106.0)
G
1.75
(44.5)
N
0.83
(21.0)
H
2.07
(52.6)
O
1.72
(43.8)
in
(mm)
in
(mm)
A
1.38
(35.0)
I
4.06
(103.0)
B
2.76
(70.0)
J
0.18
(4.5)
C
4.13
(105.0)
K
1.77
(45.0)
E
3.46
(88.0)
L
4.41
(112.0)
F
2.09
(53.0)
M
5.51
(140.0)
G
1.77
(45.0)
N
1.04
(26.5)
H
2.28
(58.0)
O
2.48
(63.0)
H J
I
F
B
K
C
D
L
Size: 14 ≈ 51 Fuseholder L C
E A
F
B
J
J
K
K
M
M
G O
O
N
G H
Size: 22 ≈ 58 Fuseholder L C
E F
A
B J
J
K M
K M
G O
G H
N
O
N
I The only controlled copy of this BIF document is the electronic read-only version located on the Bussmann Network Drive. All other copies of this document are by definition uncontrolled. This bulletin is intended to clearly present comprehensive product data and provide technical information that will help the end user with design applications. Bussmann reserves the right, without notice, to change design or construction of any products and to discontinue or limit distribution of any products. Bussmann also reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any technical information contained in this bulletin. Once a product has been selected, it should be tested by the user in all possible applications.
12-17-98 SB98107
Rev. A
Form No. CH Series Page 2 of 2 BIF Doc #1151
Bussmann®
LOW-PEAK®
LP-CC
Time-Delay Fuses Class CC – 600 Volt, ⁄Ω™ to 30 Amps Dimensional Data
1.5" (±0.031) (38.1mm)
.41" (±0.005) (10.3mm)
Catalog Symbol: LP-CC Time-Delay, Current-Limiting Ampere Rating: ⁄Ω™ to 30A AC Voltage Rating: 600V (or less) Interrupting Rating: 200,000A RMS Sym. Agency Information: UL Listed, Std. 248-4, Class CC, Guide JDDZ, File E4273 CSA Certified, C22.2 No. 248.4, Class 1422-02, File 53787 DC Voltage Rating: 300Vdc (or less) ⁄Ω™-2 °/⁄‚A and 20-30A, 20,000 AIR, UL 198L 150Vdc or less 3-15A, 20,000 AIR, UL 198L Catalog Numbers LP-CC-⁄Ω™
LP-CC-1⁄Ω™
LP-CC-3
LP-CC-6
LP-CC-12
LP-CC-flꭧ
LP-CC-1flꭧ
LP-CC-3¤Ω¡º
LP-CC-6⁄Ω¢
LP-CC-15
LP-CC-°Ω¡º
LP-CC-1°Ω¡º
LP-CC-3⁄Ω™
LP-CC-7
LP-CC-20
LP-CC-1
LP-CC-2
LP-CC-4
LP-CC-7⁄Ω™
LP-CC-25
LP-CC-1⁄Ω•
LP-CC-2⁄Ω¢
LP-CC-4⁄Ω™
LP-CC-8
LP-CC-30
LP-CC-1⁄Ω¢
LP-CC-2⁄Ω™
LP-CC-5
LP-CC-9
—
LP-CC-1›Ω¡º
LP-CC-2°Ω¡º
LP-CC-5flꭧ
LP-CC-10
—
Carton Quantity and Weight Ampere Ratings
Weight*
Carton Qty.
Lbs.
Kg.
10
.193
.088
0-30 *Weight per carton.
Recommended fuseblocks/fuseholders for Class CC 600V fuses See Data Sheets listed below • Open fuseblocks - 1105 • Finger-safe fuseholders - 1109, 1102, 1103, 1151 • Panel-mount fuseholders - 2114, 2113 • In-line fuseholders - 2126
General Information: LP-CC LOW-PEAK Yellow™ Fuse • A superior all-purpose, space-saving branch circuit fuse that meets most protection requirements up to 30A. • Very compact; physical size is only ⁄‹Ω£™∑ ≈ 1⁄Ω™∑ (10.3mm ≈ 38.1mm) with rejection tip. • The unique yellow color makes it easy to tell that the correct fuse type is installed. • Faster response to damaging short-circuit currents and higher interrupting rating than mechanical overcurrent protective devices. 200,000A Interrupting Rating • Maximum interrupting rating for available fault current in today's large capacity systems. • Helps ensure that future growth will not obsolete the system. Dual Characteristics • Time-delay to avoid unwanted fuse openings from surge currents. • Fast speed of response under short-circuit conditions for a high degree of current-limitation. • ADVANTAGE: The LOW-PEAK ® fuse can be sized close to full load ratings for maximum overload and short-circuit protection. • ADVANTAGE: Can be used where either a time-delay or a fast-acting fuse is needed, making selection easier and reducing spare fuse inventories for substantial cost reduction. Superior Motor Protection • For protection of small horsepower motor circuits. • Proper sizing can provide Type “2” coordinated protection for NEMA and IEC motor controllers. • Motors receive maximum protection against burnout from overloads and single phasing. Current-Limiting Effects Prospective Short- *Let-Through Current (Apparent RMS Symmetrical) Circuit Current 1⁄Ω¢A 2°Ω¡ºA 15A 20A 25A 30A 1,000
100
135
240
305
380
435
3,000
140
210
350
440
575
580
5,000
165
255
420
570
690
710
10,000
210
340
540
700
870
1,000
20,000
260
435
680
870
1,090
1,305
30,000
290
525
800
1,030
1,300
1,520
40,000
315
610
870
1,150
1,390
1,700
50,000
340
650
915
1,215
1,520
1,820
60,000
350
735
1,050
1,300
1,650
1,980
80,000
390
785
1,130
1,500
1,780
2,180
100,000
420
830
1,210
1,600
2,000
2,400
200,000
525
1,100
1,600
2,000
2,520
3,050
*RMS Symmetrical Amperes Short-Circuit NOTE: To calculate Ip (Ipeak) multiply IRMS value ≈ 2.3.
CE logo denotes compliance with European Union Low Voltage Directive (50-1000Vac, 75-1500Vdc). Refer to Data Sheet: 8002 or contact Bussmann Application Engineering at 314-527-1270 for more information.
10-2-02
SB02295
Form No. LP-CC Page 1 of 2 Data Sheet: 1023
Bussmann®
LOW-PEAK®
LP-CC
AMPERE RATING
2-8/10
300
1-1/4
200
100 80 60 50 40 30
2,000
800 1,000
400 500 600
300
200
80 100
20
1,000
CURRENT IN AMPERES
100
10
1
PROSPECTIVE SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT–SYMMETRICAL RMS AMPS
.4
.01
AMPERE RATING
600 500 400
10
.1
30 25 20 15
1,000 800
40 50 60
1
2,000
30
10
3,000
20
100
TIME IN SECONDS
4,000
INSTANTANEOUS PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT IN AMPS
200
10
3 3⁄Ω™ 4 4⁄Ω™ 6 8 10 12 15 20 25 30
⁄Ω™ flΩ¡º °Ω¡º 1 1⁄Ω¢
Time-Delay Fuses Class CC – 600 Volt, ⁄Ω™ to 30 Amps
The only controlled copy of this Data Sheet is the electronic read-only version located on the Bussmann Network Drive. All other copies of this document are by definition uncontrolled. This bulletin is intended to clearly present comprehensive product data and provide technical information that will help the end user with design applications. Bussmann reserves the right, without notice, to change design or construction of any products and to discontinue or limit distribution of any products. Bussmann also reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any technical information contained in this bulletin. Once a product has been selected, it should be tested by the user in all possible applications.
10-2-02
SB02295
Form No. LP-CC Page 2 of 2 Data Sheet: 1023
Fixing Adapters, Contact Elements
2/25
Moeller HPL0211-2004/2005 Contacts M = Make, B = Break f = Positive opening safety function to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Fixing adapters Fixing adapter (front fixing) for 3 contact-/LED elements For M22-(C)K... contact elements and M22-(C)LED... LED elements Sequence numbers on fixing adapter – – – –
–
–
Fixing adapter (front fixing) for 4 contact elements For M22-(C)K contact elements – – –
Contact elements Front fixing
Screw terminals
1M
Circuit symbol
–
Contact travel diagram, stroke in connection with front element
–
–
– –
–
1Bf
4
4
4
.3
1
0
1M
1
–
2.8
5.5
4
3
3
6
6
3
3
2
2
M22-A 216374 M22-A-GVP 216375
50 off
M22-A4 279437
50 off
M22-K10 216376 M22-K10-GVP 216377 M22-K01 216378 M22-K01-GVP 216379
20 off
M22-K01D 262165
20 off
M22-KC10 216380 M22-KC10-GVP 216381 M22-KC01 216382 M22-KC01-GVP 216383
20 off
5
M22-CK10 216384
20 off
M22-CK01 216385
20 off
5
M22-CK01D 262510
20 off
5
5
5
2
6
2
1
5
.4
.1
–
1Bf
.2
–
1Bf
.5
1
0 1.2
5.5
1
0
2.8
5.5
0
2.8
5.5
Std. pack
Type Article no. Price See Price List
1
–
–
Configuration1)
4
4
3
3
6
6
2
2
5
5
500 off
500 off 20 off 500 off
.6
Base fixing
Contact elements Front fixing
1M
Cage Clamp2)
–
1M
–
–
1Bf
–
1Bf
1M
–
.3
2
3
1
.4
.1
0 1.2
.2
5.5
.3
2
1
0
2.8
5.5
4
3
3
1
6
2
200 off 20 off 200 off
.4
–
1Bf
.1
1
0 1.2
.2
–
1Bf
5.5
.5
1
0
2.8
5.5
0
2.8
5.5
4
4
3
3
6
6
2
2
.6
Base fixing
1M
–
.3
2
3
1
M22-CKC10 216386
20 off
2
3
1
M22-CKC01 216387
20 off
1
3
2
M22-AK11 216505
5 off
5
5
M22-AK10 216504
5 off
M22-AK01 216503
5 off
5
.4
–
1Bf
.1
0 1.2
.2
5.5
Complete modules Assembly of contact element with screw terminals and fixing adapter, Front fixing – 1M 1Bf
13
14
–
1M
– 1Bf
0 1.2
2.8
5.5
0
2.8
5.5
1
21
22
Notes
22
13
14
–
21
1
0 1.2
5.5
4
4
4
3
3
6
6
6
1) Assignment: xy
2
2
Assignment of the fixing adapter with sequence numbers according to EN 50013 x = Sequence number on fixing adapter y = Function number on contact element
xy
2) Cage
Clamp is a registered trademark of Wago Kontakttechnik GmbH/Minden, Germany
Control Circuit Devices RMQ-Titan
Connection types
Type: M22−A Article No.: 216374
Ordering information Description
3 contact blocks
Configuration
Notes concerning the table header Assignment: Assignment of the fixing adapter with sequence numbers according to EN 50013
x = Sequence number on fixing adapter y = Function number on contact element General IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660
Standards Lifespan, mechanical
Operations
Operating frequency
Operations/h
Operating force Operating torque (screw terminals) Degree of protection, IEC/EN 60529 1
× 106
>5 3600
n Nm
5 0,8 IP 20
2/10
Emergency-Stop Actuators RMQ-Titan
Control Circuit Devices RMQ-Titan
Moeller HPL0211-2004/2005 Contacts M = Make, B = Break f = Positive opening safety function to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Complete units for front fitting1) Emergency-Stop actuators Tamper-proof according to ISO 13850/EN 418 Pull to release Max. contacts to be fitted together: 4 x M22-(C)K... IP66, IP69K
–
Circuit symbol
1Bf
Colour of mushroom head (yellow base)
21
Type Article no.
Price See Price List
Std. pack
RAL 3000
M22-PV/K01 216515
RAL 3000
M22-PV/K11 216516
RAL 3000
M22-PVS/K01 216514
RAL 3000
M22-PV 216876 M22-PV-GVP 216877
5 off
M22-PVL 216878 M22-PVT 263467 M22-PVLT 263469
5 off
M22S-PV 225528 M22S-PVT 271499 M22S-PVL 230962 M22S-PVLT 271540
5 off
5 off
22
–
1M
1Bf
Tamper-proof according to ISO 13850/EN 418 With one key, MS1 individual lock mechanisms, not suitable for master key systems Release by using the key IP67, IP69K
–
1Bf
13 21
14 22
Emergency-Stop key-release mushroom button
21
22
Emergency-Stop actuators1) Non-illuminated, pull to release, IP66, IP69K
– –
Illuminated, pull to release, IP66, IP69K Non-illuminated, turn to release, IP66, IP69K Illuminated, turn to release, IP66, IP69K Emergency-Stop/Emergency-Halt actuators Non-illuminated, pull to release, IP66, IP69K Non-illuminated, turn to release, IP66, IP69K Illuminated, pull to release, IP66, IP69K Illuminated, turn to release, IP66, IP69K Notes
1)
– – –
– – – –
RAL 9005
50 off
Emergency-Stop Actuators RMQ-Titan
2/11
Moeller HPL0211-2004/2005 Circuit symbol
Colour of mushroom head (yellow base)
Type Article no.
Price See Price List
Std. pack
Emergency-Stop key-release mushroom actuators, IP67, IP69K1) With 1 key, not suitable for master key systems Release by using the key MS1 individual lock mechanisms Individual lock mechanisms MS2 – MS20
–
RAL 3000
–
RAL 3000
M22-PVS 216879 M22-PVS-MS* 216880
5 off 1 off
Guard ring for Emergency-Stop buttons, IP65 Degree of protection IP65
Notes
–
–
–
–
RAL 1004
M22-XGPV 231273
1 off
–
–
–
–
RAL 7032
M22G-XGPV 271610
1 off
1)
Control Circuit Devices RMQ-Titan
Contacts M = Make, B = Break f = Positive opening safety function to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Product catalog | Functional Electronics | Relay connector | RIDERSERIES | Complete modul | 2 CO | RCL
General ordering data Order No. Part designation Version EAN Qty
7940006157 RCLKIT 24VDC 2CO LED GN Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Screw connection 4032248474776 10 pc(s).
Contact data Number of contacts Contact base material Mechanical endurance
2 AgNi 90/10 30*10
Input Rated voltage DC Response/dropout Volt Rated current DC Power rating Status indicator
24 V DC 16.8 V / 2.4 V 16.7 mA 500 mW Green LED = DC coil; red LED = AC coil
Output Continuous current Response time / Drop-out time max. switching power max. switching voltage AC min. switching current
8A 7 ms / 3 ms 4000 VA 250 V 10 mA
Rated data Connection system DIN Rail compatibility UL 94 flammability rating Ambient temperature (operational)
Screw connection TS 35 V-0 -40 °C...+70 °C
-1-
Product catalog | Functional Electronics | Relay connector | RIDERSERIES | Complete modul | 2 CO | RCL
Insulation coordination (EN 50178) Clearance and creepage distances for control side - load side Dielectric strength, Input/Output Insulation group Pollution severity Protection class Protective separation to VDE 0106 part 101 Rated voltage Surge category
10 mm 5 kV C 3 IP 20 Yes 250 V III
Dimensions Clamping range, max. Clamping range, min. Clamping range, nom. Length Height Width
2.5 mm² 0.5 mm² 2.5 mm² 78.5 mm 62 mm 15.5 mm
Approvals Approval body
CEy
Classifications ETIM 2.0 ETIM 3.0 eClass 4.1 eClass 5.0 eClass 5.1
EC001437 EC001437 40-02-06-14 27-37-16-01 27-37-16-01
Similar products Order No. 8810120000 8798630000 7940006157 7940006159 8798650000 8798670000 7940006162 8810100000
Part designation RCLKITZ 115VAC 2CO LDRT RCLKITZ 24VDC 2CO LED RCLKIT 24VDC 2CO LED GN RCLKIT 230VAC 2CO LED RT RCLKITZ 24VAC 2CO LED RCLKITZ 230VAC 2CO LED RCLKIT 24VAC 2CO LED RT RCLKIT 115VAC 2CO LD RT
Version Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Screw connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 230 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V AC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 230 V AC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection
-2-
Product catalog | Functional Electronics | Relay connector | RIDERSERIES | Complete modul | 2 CO | RCL
General ordering data Order No. Part designation Version EAN Qty
8810100000 RCLKIT 115VAC 2CO LD RT Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection 4032248509621 10 pc(s).
Contact data Number of contacts Contact base material
2 AgNi 90/10
Input Rated voltage AC Response/dropout Volt Rated current AC Power rating Status indicator
115 V AC 86,3 V / 17,3 V 6,6 mA 0,75 VA Green LED = DC coil; red LED = AC coil
Output Continuous current max. switching power max. switching voltage AC
8A 4000 VA 250 V
Rated data Connection system DIN Rail compatibility UL 94 flammability rating Ambient temperature (operational)
Screw connection TS 35 V-0 -40 °C...+70 °C
Insulation coordination (EN 50178) Pollution severity Protection class Protective separation to VDE 0106 part 101
3 IP 20 Yes
-1-
Product catalog | Functional Electronics | Relay connector | RIDERSERIES | Complete modul | 2 CO | RCL
Dimensions Clamping range, max. Clamping range, min. Clamping range, nom. Length Height Width
2.5 mm² 0.5 mm² 2.5 mm² 78.5 mm 62 mm 15.5 mm
Approvals Approval body
CEy
Classifications ETIM 2.0 ETIM 3.0 eClass 4.1 eClass 5.0 eClass 5.1
EC001437 EC001437 40-02-06-14 27-37-16-01 27-37-16-01
Similar products Order No. 8810120000 8798630000 7940006157 7940006159 8798650000 8798670000 7940006162 8810100000
Part designation RCLKITZ 115VAC 2CO LDRT RCLKITZ 24VDC 2CO LED RCLKIT 24VDC 2CO LED GN RCLKIT 230VAC 2CO LED RT RCLKITZ 24VAC 2CO LED RCLKITZ 230VAC 2CO LED RCLKIT 24VAC 2CO LED RT RCLKIT 115VAC 2CO LD RT
Version Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Screw connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 230 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V AC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 230 V AC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection
-2-
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay PSR-ESAM4 – Emergency stop/safety door monitoring – Safety Category 4, EN 954-1 – Plug-in screw-cage or spring-cage terminal blocks – One or two-channel circuit – Cross-circuit detection – Safe isolation/basic insulation – Housing width 45 mm (1.772 in.) – Eight enable contacts – One signaling contact – Approvals:
U(applied for)
1. Short Description The PSR-...-24UC/ESAM4/8x1/1x2 safety relay can be used in emergency stop devices according to EN 418 and in safety circuits according to DIN EN 60204-1/VDE 0113 Part 1. Depending on the external circuit, up to Safety Category 4 according to EN 954-1 can be achieved. One or two-channel control is available with manual or automatic activation. The connected start button is monitored. The relay has eight enable current paths and one signaling current path. The contacts drop without delay according to Stop Category 0 (DIN EN 60204-1/ VDE 0113 Part 1).
Headquarters: © Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • Flachsmarktstraße 8 • 32825 Blomberg • Germany Phone +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com Local Contact: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESAM4
2. Technical Data
Logic
≈
=
23
33
43
53
63
73
83
91
24
34
44
54
64
74
84
92
114.5 mm (4.508 in.)
A1 S35 S10 S11 S12 13
K1 K2
A2 S33 S34 S21 S22 14
99 mm (3.898 in.)
PSR-ESAM4 7/10 Housing width 45 mm (1.772 in.)
M3 solid Connection data: Stripping length:
[mm2]
flexible AWG
0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5 25 - 14 Screw-cage version 7 mm (0.28 in.) Spring-cage version 10 mm (0.39 in.)
Description Safety relay, Category 4, with or without start button monitoring
Screw-cage terminal block
Type
Order No.
PSR-SCP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2 PSR-SPP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2
29 63 91 2 29 63 99 6
Technical Data Input Data Nominal input voltage UN Permissible range Typical current consumption at UN Voltage at input, start, and feedback circuit Maximum voltage drop for S11/S12 and S21/S22 (e.g., two Form B contacts of an emergency stop button) Typical response time at UN - Monitored/manual start - Automatic start Typical release time (K1, K2) at UN Simultaneity input S11/S12 and S21/S22 Recovery time
24 V AC/DC 0.85 - 1.1 x UN 210 mA AC, 120 mA DC 24 V DC, approximately 2 V DC, approximately (corresponds to 11 Ω) (at UN = 24 V DC and Tamb = 25°C [77°F]) 60 ms 250 ms 20 ms ∞ 1 s, approximately
Output Data Contact version Contact material Maximum switching voltage Minimum switching voltage Limiting continuous current ITH=I12+I22+I32 Maximum inrush current Minimum switching current Maximum shutdown power 24 V DC 48 V DC 110 V DC 220 V DC 250 V AC Minimum switching power Mechanical life Breaking capacity according to DIN EN 60947-5-1/VDE 0660 Part 200 Short-circuit protection of the output circuits, external
Cycles: 360/h 3600/h
8 enable current paths 1 signaling current path Silver stannic oxide, gold-flashed (AgSnO2 0.2 µm Au) 250 V AC/DC 15 V AC/DC 6 A (Form A contact/Form B contact) On request 6A 25 mA Ohmic load Inductive load τ = 0 ms τ = 40 ms 144 W 42 W 288 W 42 W 110 W 42 W 88 W 42 W 1500 VA 0.4 W 107 cycles, approximately 24 V (DC13) 4 A; 230 V (AC15) 4 A 24 V (DC13) 2.5 A; 230 V (AC15) 3 A 6 A fast-blow
PHOENIX CONTACT page 2 of 5
Pcs. Pkt. 1 1
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESAM4
General Data Permissible ambient operating temperature Nominal operating mode Degree of protection - Housing - Connection terminal blocks - Mounting location Mounting position Mounting Air and creepance distances between circuits
-20°C to +55°C (-4°F to +131°F) 100% ED According to VDE 0470 Part 1 IP 40 IP 20 IP 54, minimum Any Can be mounted without spacing According to DIN EN 50 178:1998-04, Basic insulation1) 4 kV1) 2 III 45 mm x 99 mm (112 mm SPP) x 114.5 mm (1.772 x 3.898 (4.409 SPP) x 4.508 in.) 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (25 - 14 AWG) Polyamide PA, not reinforced
Impulse voltage withstand level Degree of pollution Surge Voltage Category Dimensions (W x H x D) Cable cross section Housing material Note: When operating relay modules the operator must meet the requirements for emitted interference for electrical and electronic equipment (EN 50081-2) on the contact side and, if required, take appropriate measures.
3. Connection Notes and Safety Instructions
Connection diagram S10, S11, S12 Input circuits 12
S
S33, S34, S35 Start circuit A1, A2 Connection for operating voltage
S
10
34
S
S
11
33
S
S
rd
11
35
S
O o .:
91
N
12
S
.2
92
33
6
o
9
P
3
w
9 2
34
43
1
er
1
K
13
2
44
53
K
23
54
33 43 53 63
1
24
A
83
54
22
14
S
44
21
73
34
13
S
91
2
23
A
64 74
63 64
83
/ UC 2 -24 X2 1 CPX1/13 9 R-S4/8 9 6 PSAMo.: 2 ES .N
64
A1 S35 S10 S11 S12 13
23
91-92 Signaling current path
74
14
92
A2
63 13
84
22
73
A1 S2 1S
84
S21, S22 Input circuit
83
24
Ord
≈
24
23 33 43 53 63 73 83 91
33-34, 43-44, 53-54 Enable current paths
54 64 74
13-14, 23-24, 63-64, 73-74, 83-84 Enable current paths
K2
74
K1
A2 S33 S34 S21 S22 14 24 34 44
73
Logic
=
84
84 92
u
Figure 05
3
2 74
63
A2
74
14
23
64
73
22
83 63
13
92
84
A1 S2 1S
83
7 mm
84
24
3.2. Connection Notes To maintain the UL, use copper cables, which are designed for operating temperatures of 75°C (167°F). For reliable and safe contacts, strip the connector ends accordingly.
Safe isolation, reinforced insulation, and 6 kV between the input circuit and the output contact paths (63/64, 73/74, 83/84) and between the various output contact paths (63/64, 73/74, 83/84).
14
3.1. Safety Instructions – Please observe the safety regulations of electrical engineering and industrial safety and liability associations. – Disregarding these safety regulations may result in death or serious damage to persons or property. – Before working on the device, disconnect the power. – Startup, mounting, modifications, and upgrades should only be carried out by a skilled electrical engineer. – Protective covers must not be removed when operating electrical switching devices. – During operation, parts of electrical switching devices carry hazardous voltages. – Keep the instruction sheet in a safe place. – In the event of an error, replace the device immediately.
1)
64
24 84 A2 S33 S34 S21 S22
73
74
PSR-SCP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2 83
92
84 63 73 74
S2 2A 2
83 63
14
23
64
A1 S2 1
13
64
24 84 73
74
PSR-SPP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2
PHOENIX CONTACT page 3 of 5
84
24
10 mm
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESAM4
4. Mounting and Startup For reliable operation, the emergency stop safety relay must be installed in a housing protected against dust and humidity with IP 54 protection. Ensure the wiring is appropriate to the field of application. Follow the application examples (page 5). In general, the safety relay is wired according to the following specifications: 4.1. Closing the Activation Circuit and Feedback Circuit
Automatic activation: Connect a jumper between S33 and S35.
4.2. Closing the Input Circuit (Emergency Shutdown)
Two-channel with cross-circuit protection: Connect the Form B contacts of the tripping device to S11/S12 and S21/S22, and jumper S10/S11.
Emergency stop
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
Figure 06 Monitored reset: Connect the reset between terminal blocks S33 and S34.
Figure 10 One-channel: Connect the Form B contact of the tripping device to S11/S12. Jumper S21/S22 and S10/S12. Safety Category 4 can only be achieved if automatic disconnecting switches are used and the cables are installed in separate cable sheaths. Emergency stop
Reset
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
Figure 07 Monitored reset with monitored contact expansion: Connect the reset button and the Form B contacts of the expansion contactors in series to terminal blocks S33 and S34.
Figure 11 Two-channel without cross-circuit protection: Connect the Form B contact of the tripping device to S10/S11 and S11/S12, and jumper S21/S22.
exp. Reset
K5
Emergency stop
K6 S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
Figure 08 Automatic activation with monitored contact expansion: Connect the Form B contacts of the expansion contactors to terminal blocks S33 and S35.
exp. K5 K6 S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
Figure 09 PHOENIX CONTACT page 4 of 5
Figure 12
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESAM4
Emergency stop
5.1. Two-Channel Emergency Stop Circuit with Cross-Circuit Detection and Monitored Reset Button Suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
Reset
5. Connection Examples
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23
91
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1
A2
14 24
92
24V AC/DC GND
Emergency stop
5.2. One-Channel Emergency Stop Circuit with Monitored Reset Button (Jumper S33/ S35: Automatic Activation) Suitable for up to Safety Category 4**.
Reset
Figure 13
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23
91
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1
A2
14 24
92
24V AC/DC GND
5.3. Two-Channel Limit Switch Monitoring with Solid-State Output and Monitored Reset Button (Jumper S33/S35: Automatic Activation) Depending on the limit switch, suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
Reset
Figure 14
Solid-state output GND
+24 V DC OUT1
OUT2
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23
91
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A2
14 24
92
24V AC/DC GND
5.4. Two-Channel Safety Door Circuit with Cross-Circuit Detection and Monitored Reset Button (Jumper S33/S35: Automatic Activation) Suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
Reset
Figure 15
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23
91
http://www.phoenixcontact.com
A1
A2
14 24
92
24V AC/DC GND
Reset
5.5. One-Channel Safety Door Circuit with Monitored Reset Button (Jumper S33/S35: Automatic Activation) Suitable for up to Safety Category 4**.
02/15/05
Figure 16
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23
91
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1
** Safety Category 4 can only be achieved if automatic disconnecting switches are used and the cables are installed in separate cable sheaths. PHOENIX CONTACT page 5 of 5
A2
14 24
92
24V AC/DC GND
Figure 17
PHOENIX CONTACT
A1
TNR: 5107089-02
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay PSR-ESA4 PSR-ESM4 – Emergency stop/safety door monitoring – Safety Category 4, EN 954-1 – Plug-in screw-cage or spring-cage terminal blocks – One or two-channel circuit – Safe isolation – Cross-circuit detection – Housing width 22.5 mm (0.886 in.) – Two enable contacts – One signaling contact – Approvals:
U Listed
1. Short Description The PSR-...-24UC/ES...4/2X1/1X2 safety relays can be used in emergency stop devices according to EN 418 and in safety circuits according to DIN EN 60204-1/VDE 0113 Part 1. Depending on the external circuit, up to Safety Category 4 according to EN 954-1 can be achieved. The connected start button is monitored for the PSR-...-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2. This relay can only be activated manually. Depending on the circuit, the PSR-...-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 can be activated both manually and automatically. However, the connected start button is not monitored. One or two-channel control is available for both modules. The relay has two enable current paths and one signaling current path. The contacts drop without delay according to Stop Category 0 (DIN EN 60204-1/ VDE 0113 Part 1).
Headquarters: © Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • Flachsmarktstraße 8 • 32825 Blomberg • Germany Phone +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com Local Contact: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESA4; PSR-ESM4
2. Technical Data
»
S 2 1
S 3 3
S 3 4
K
1 K
2
= Logic
A 2
S 2 2
S 1 1
S 1 2
1 3
2 3
3 1
1 4
2 4
3 2
114.5 mm (4.508 in.)
A 1
99 mm (3.898 in.)
PSR-ESA4 PSR-ESM4 7/10 Housing width 22.5 mm (0.886 in.)
M3 solid
[mm2]
flexible AWG
Connection data: 0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5 25 - 14 Stripping length: Screw-cage version 7 mm (0.28 in.) Spring-cage version 10 mm (0.39 in.)
Description Safety relay, Category 4, with start button monitoring Safety relay, Category 4
Screw-cage Spring-cage Screw-cage Spring-cage
Type
Order No.
PSR-SCP-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 PSR-SPP-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 PSR-SCP-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 PSR-SPP-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2
29 63 71 8 29 63 70 5 29 63 75 0 29 63 93 8
Technical Data Input Data Nominal input voltage UN Permissible range Typical current consumption at UN Voltage at input, start, and feedback circuit Maximum voltage drop for S11/S12 and S21/S22 (e.g., two Form B contacts) Typical response time (K1, K2) at UN Typical release time (K1, K2) at UN
24 V AC/DC 0.85 - 1.1 x UN 140 mA AC, 65 mA DC 24 V DC, approximately 2 V DC, approximately (corresponds to 22.8 Ω) 45 ms 45 ms (one-channel) 20 ms (two-channel) 1 s, approximately
Recovery time Output Data Contact version Contact material Maximum switching voltage Minimum switching voltage Limiting continuous current Maximum inrush current Minimum switching current Maximum shutdown power 24 V DC 48 V DC 110 V DC 220 V DC 250 V AC Minimum switching power Mechanical life Breaking capacity according to DIN EN 60947-5-1/VDE 0660 Part 200 Short-circuit protection of the output circuits, external
Cycles: 360/h 3600/h
2 enable current paths, 1 signaling current path Silver stannic oxide, gold-flashed (AgSnO2 0.2 µm Au) 250 V AC/DC 15 V AC/DC 6 A (Form A contact/Form B contact) 6A 25 mA Ohmic load Inductive load τ = 0 ms τ = 40 ms 144 W 42 W 288 W 42 W 110 W 42 W 88 W 42 W 1500 V A 0.4 W 107 cycles, approximately 24 V (DC13) 4 A; 230 V (AC15) 4A 24 V (DC13) 2.5 A; 230 V (AC15) 3A 6 A fast-blow
PHOENIX CONTACT page 2 of 4
Pcs. Pkt. 1 1 1 1
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESA4; PSR-ESM4
General Data Permissible ambient operating temperature Nominal operating mode Degree of protection - Housing - Connection terminal blocks - Mounting location Mounting position Mounting Air and creepance distances between circuits
-20°C to +55°C (-4°F to +131°F) 100% ED According to VDE 0470 Part 1 IP 40 IP 20 IP 54, minimum Any Can be mounted without spacing According to DIN EN 50 178:1998-04, safe isolation, reinforced insulation 6 kV 2 III 22.5 mm x 99 mm x 114.5 mm (0.886 x 3.898 x 4.508 in.) 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (25 - 14 AWG) Polyamide PA, not reinforced
Impulse voltage withstand level Degree of pollution Surge Voltage Category Dimensions (W x H x D) Cable cross section Housing material Note: When operating relay modules the operator must meet the requirements for emitted interference for electrical and electronic equipment (EN 50081-2) on the contact side and, if required, take appropriate measures.
3. Connection Notes and Safety Instructions
1
A 33
12
S
S
34
21
S
S
S 11
.-
22
rd
S
O N .:
2
A
o 9
w
2
o
P
6 3 7
er
1 8
K 1
13
2
K 23 31
24
31 C C
13
N
S33, S34 Start circuit
32
N
32
14
23 24
31
nc
13
/ UC -24 2 1 8 CP /1X3 7 R-S X19 6 PSM4/2.: 2 ES .No
14
A1
Ord
S21 S34
24
S33
23
=
nc
≈
32
A2
S22
K2
13
K1
S11
Logic
31-32 Signaling current paths
23 31
S12 14 24
13-14, 23-24 Enable current paths
32
u 0
22
ET
00
Metal lock for fastening onto the DIN rail
Figure 05
32
32
7 mm
13 14
23 24
3.2. Connection Notes To maintain the UL, use copper cables, which are designed for operating temperatures of 75°C (167°F). For reliable and safe contacts, strip the connector ends accordingly.
Plug-in COMBICON spring-cage/screwcage terminal blocks
A1, A2 Connection for operating voltage S11, S12, S21, S22 Input circuit
14
3.1. Safety Instructions – Please observe the safety regulations of electrical engineering and industrial safety and liability associations. – Disregarding these safety regulations may result in death or serious damage to persons or property. – Before working on the device, disconnect the power. – Startup, mounting, modifications, and upgrades should only be carried out by a skilled electrical engineer. – Protective covers must not be removed when operating electrical switching devices. – During operation, parts of electrical switching devices carry hazardous voltages. – Keep the instruction sheet in a safe place. – In the event of an error, replace the device immediately.
Connection diagram
31 13
14
32
PSR-SCP-24UC/ES...4/2X1/1X2 3 14
23 24
10 mm
31 13
23
2
14
PSR-SPP-24UC/ES...4/2X1/1X2
PHOENIX CONTACT page 3 of 4
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-PSR-ESA4; PSR-ESM4
4. Connection Examples One-channel emergency stop circuit with manual activation1), suitable for up to Safety Category 2.
One-channel safety door monitoring with automatic activation, suitable for up to Safety Category 2.
Reset S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13
23
23
31
24
32
PSR-...-24UC/ ESA4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
PSR-...24UC/ ESM 4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
A1
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13
31
A2
14
24
A2
A1
32
Emergency stop
14
24V AC/DC GND
24V UC GND
Two-channel emergency stop circuit with cross-circuit monitoring and manual activation1), suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
Two-channel safety door monitoring with cross-circuit monitoring and automatic activation, suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
Emergency stop Reset S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13
A2
24
32
A1 14
A2
Two-channel emergency stop circuit with cross-circuit monitoring, manual activation1), and monitored contact expansion, suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
K4
23
L
23
31
24
32
31 PSR-...24UC/ ESA4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
PSR-...24UC/ ESM 4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
A1 14
24
A2
14
32
K2 ext. K1 ext.
N
1)
L
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13
24V UC GND
32
K3
K2 ext.
K1ext.
L
A2
24
Two-channel safety door monitoring with cross-circuit monitoring, automatic activation, and monitored contact expansion, suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
Emergency stop
A1
14
24V AC/DC GND
24V UC GND
Reset
31
PSR-...-24UC/ ESA4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
PSR-...24UC/ ESM 4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
A1
23
PSR-...-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 with reset button monitoring PSR-...-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 without reset button monitoring PHOENIX CONTACT page 4 of 4
24V AC/DC GND
K3 K4
N
TNR: 5106695-02-gb http://www.phoenixcontact.com
31
06/01/02
23
PHOENIX CONTACT
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13
Extract from the online catalog
EM-DUO 120/15 Order No.: 5600461
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=5600461
Rail-mountable double socket, for mounting on 35 mm mounting rail in acc. with EN EN 60715, housing color: white, with screw connection, national version: USA
Commercial data EAN
4017918929930
Pack
1 Pcs.
Customs tariff
85366990
Weight/Piece
0.2548 KG
Catalog page information
Page 513 (IF-2007)
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data General data Nominal voltage UN
120 V AC
Nominal current IN
15 A
For country-specific use in
USA
Color
white
Insulating material
PVC 94 V0
Ambient temperature (operation)
-40 °C ... 70 °C
Ambient temperature (storage/transport)
-40 °C ... 70 °C
Standards/regulations
UL 508
Length
134 mm
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 1 / 3 Aug 18, 2008
EM-DUO 120/15 Order No.: 5600461
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=5600461
Width
83 mm
Height
49 mm
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section solid max.
6 mm
Conductor cross section stranded min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section stranded max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
24
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
10
Type of connection
Screw connection
Stripping length
8 mm
Screw thread
M3
2
2 2
2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
CUL Listed, UL Listed
Page 2 / 3 Aug 18, 2008
EM-DUO 120/15 Order No.: 5600461
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=5600461
Address
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Flachsmarktstr. 8 32825 Blomberg,Germany Phone +49 5235 3 00 Fax +49 5235 3 41200 http://www.phoenixcontact.com
© 2008 Phoenix Contact Technical modifications reserved;
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 3 / 3 Aug 18, 2008
Overvoltage Protection
PU Series
0WFSWPMUBHF1SPUFDUJPO'PS&OFSHZ %JTUSJCVUJPO4ZTUFNT 77 B/C/D arrestors Detachable modules, installation facilities Easy visual inspection of modules service ability
Warning signal over distance Codification of the voltage modules Mounts on all TS 35
PU overvoltage protection - Class I (B arrestors) Order No.
Type
Qty.
Rated Voltage
Monit. Contact
Lightening Test Current
Rated Leakage Current Max.
Width
8381890000
PU 3B
1
230 Vac
no
(10/350µs) 20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
54
8381900000
PU 3BR
1
230 Vac
yes
(10/350µs) 20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
72
8147020000
PU 4B
1
230 Vac
no
(10/350µs) 20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
72
8291640000
PU 4BR
1
230 Vac
yes
(10/350µs) 20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
90
Accessories Pluggable spare arrester PU 0B
Order No. : 8381880000
PU overvoltage protection - Class II (C arrestors) Order No.
Type
Qty.
Rated Voltage
Rated Nom.
Leakage Current Max.
Monit. Width. Pluggable Contact Type
Spare Arrester Order No.
8102610000
PU 1C
1
230 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 40 kA
no
*
PU 0 B
8339510000
8215820000
PU 1C
1
115 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 40 kA
no
*
PU 0 C
8432430000
8291700000
PU 1C
1
470 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 40 kA
no
*
PU 0 C
8451080000
8098170000
PU 2C
1
230 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 75 kA
no
*
PU 0 B
8339510000
8291650000
PU 2C
1
115 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 75 kA
no
*
PU 0 C
8432430000
8291710000
PU 2C
1
470 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 75 kA
no
*
PU 0 C
8451080000
8021490000
PU 3C
1
230 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
no
*
PU 0 B
8339510000
8291660000
PU 3C
1
115 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
no
*
PU 0 C
8432430000
8451050000
PU 3C
1
470 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
no
*
PU 0 C
8451080000
8021510000
PU 3CR
1
230 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
yes
*
PU 0 B
8339510000
8291680000
PU 3CR
1
115 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
yes
*
PU 0 C
8432430000
8451060000
PU 3CR
1
470 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
yes
*
PU 0 C
8451080000
8021500000
PU 4 C
1
230 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
no
*
PU 0 B
8339510000
8291670000
PU 4 C
1
115 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
no
*
PU 0 C
8432430000
8291720000
PU 4 C
1
470 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
no
*
PU 0 C
8451080000
8021520000
PU 4CR
1
230 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
yes
*
PU 0 B
8339510000
8291690000
PU 4CR
1
115 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
yes
*
PU 0 C
8432430000
8451070000
PU 4CR
1
470 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
yes
*
PU 0 C
8451080000
8416370000
PU 3+1 C
1
230 Vac
20 kA
(8/20µs) 100 kA
no
*
PU 0 C
8339510000
Control unit PU 1... 4 PU 0/S-E Order No.: 8021530000
*1 block: 2 blocks: 3 blocks: 4 blocks:
17.7 35.5 53.4 71.2
mm mm mm mm
C.17
A C
Small, compact Thermostat KTO 011 / KTS 011 Regulating and Monitoring
Large setting range Small size Simple to mount High switching performance
KTO 011: Thermostat (normally closed); contact breaker for regulating heaters. KTS 011: Thermostat (normally open); contact maker for regulating of filter fans and heat exchangers or for switching signal devised when temperature limit has been exceeded.
| Specifications are subject to change without notice. Errors and omissions excepted. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/ buyer in its final application. 24.04.2006
Technical Data Switch temperature difference
7K (± 4K tolerance)
Sensor element
thermostatic bimetal
Contact type
snap-action contact
Contact resistance
< 10mOhm
Service life
> 100,000 cycles
Max. Switching capacity
250VAC, 10 (2) A 120VAC, 15 (2) A DC 30W
EMC
acc. to EN 55014-1-2, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3
Connection
2-pole terminal for 2.5mm², clamping torque 0.8Nm
Mounting
clip for 35mm DIN rail, EN50022 (or for exit filter EF 118 Series)
Thermostat KTO 011 (NC)
Thermostat KTS 011 (NO)
Casing
plastic according to UL94 V-0, light grey
Dimensions
60 x 33 x 43mm
Weight
approx. 40g
Fitting position
variable
Operating/Storage temperature
-20 to +80 °C (-4 to +176 °F) / -45 to +80 °C (-49 to +176 °F)
Protection type
IP20
Thermostat KTO 011 (NC)
Example of connection
Setting range
Heater
Thermostat KTS 011 (NO)
e.g. Fan
Thermostat KTS 011 (NO)
Example of connection
Art. No. Contact Breaker (NC)
Art. No. Contact Maker (NO)
Approvals
0 to +60°C
01140.0-00
01141.0-00
VDE
-10 to +50°C
01142.0-00
01143.0-00
VDE
+20 to +80°C
01159.0-00
01158.0-00
VDE
+32 to +140°F
01140.9-00
01141.9-00
UL File No. E164102
+14 to +122°F
01142.9-00
01143.9-00
UL File No. E164102
0 to +60°C
01146.9-00
01147.9-00
UL File No. E164102
++ STEGO UK Ltd. + Unit 12, First Quarter Business Park + Blenheim Road + Epsom, Surrey KT19 9QN + England + [email protected] + www.stego.co.uk ++
e.g. Signal device
100 234 225
90 80
250
70 60 fa Al
00 23
40
O
00 24
fa Al
50 30 20
20
Modello
Model
Alfa Bp
Alfa Bp
121*
2000 Alfa
10
40
Descrizione
Description
Griglia con filtro
60
80
100
120
*
m3/h
per Alfa 2400/10 Bp
mm. 128
Dimensioni
Alimentazione
Portata aria
Potenza
mm'
V$Hz
m /h
W
Dimensions
Feeding
Flow rate
Power
mm'
V$Hz
m /h
x x
$$$$
x x
105
5,5
Portata aria con filtro in uscita * m /h
Corrente assorbita A
Rumorosità
Noise level
W
Absorbed current A
dB (A)
Flow rate with exit filter ** m /h
$$$$
$$$$
$$$$
$$$$
$$$$
$ /&
/
)/
' / '
&/
/)
x x
$ /&
/
)/
'/ ' )
&/
/)
x x
V DC
'
(
x x
V DC
'
(
x x
$ /&
/
/
' &/ '
(/
)/
x x
$ /&
/
/
'&/ '
(/
)/
dB (A)
Filter Ventilatore con griglia
Filter fan
Alfa Bp
Griglia con filtro
Filter
Alfa Bp
Ventilatore con griglia
Filter fan
Alfa Bp
Ventilatore con griglia
Filter fan
Alfa Bp
Ventilatore con griglia
Filter fan
Alfa Bp
Ventilatore con griglia
Filter fan
** Abbinato a un filtro in uscita di pari dimensione ** Jointed an exit filter of equal dimension
GRUPPI DI VENTILAZIONE A BASSO PROFILO: 2000-2300-2310-2324-2348-2400-2410 LOW-THICKNESS FILTER FANS: 2000-2300-2310-2324-2348-2400-2410
250
234 225
∆Pf (Pa)
200
234 225
180 160
250
140 120 100
Al fa
80 60 40
Alfa 260 0B p 25 00
O
Bp
Bp 2000 Alfa
20
* mm. 218 ** mm. 104
172*
per Alfa 2600/10/40 Bp
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380
m3/h
Modello
Model
Alfa Bp
Descrizione
Description
Ventilatore con griglia
113**
Dimensioni
Alimentazione
Portata aria
Potenza
mm'
V%Hz
m(/h
W
Dimensions
Feeding
Flow rate
Power
mm'
V%Hz
m(/h
x x $
( % /
x x $
% /
x x $
5,5
Portata aria con filtro in uscita * m(/h
Corrente assorbita A
Rumorosità
Noise level
W
Absorbed current A
dB (A)
Flow rate with exit filter ** m(/h
( /
/(
'(/ ')
/
/
( /
/(
' / '
/
/
V DC
(
'
x x $
V DC
(
'(
x x
( % /
() /
) /$
' / '(
/
/)
x x
% /
() /
) /$
' / ')
/
/)
% /
() /
) /$
' / '
/
/)
dB (A)
Filter fan
Alfa Bp
Ventilatore con griglia
Filter fan
Alfa Bp
Griglia con filtro
Filter
Alfa Bp
Ventilatore con griglia
Filter fan
Alfa Bp
Ventilatore con griglia
Filter fan
Alfa Bp
Ventilatore con griglia
Filter fan
Alfa Bp
Ventilatore con griglia
x x
Filter fan
** Abbinato a un filtro in uscita di pari dimensione ** Jointed an exit filter of equal dimension
GRUPPI DI VENTILAZIONE A BASSO PROFILO: 2000-2500-2510-2524-2548-2600-2610-2640 LOW-THICKNESS FILTER FANS: 2000-2500-2510-2524-2548-2600-2610-2640
250
234 225
∆Pf (Pa)
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL INSTRUCTION, USER AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Costruttore / Manufacturer
SSE
Descrizione / Description
Quadro di controllo locale / Local Control Panel
Numero di serie SSE / SSE Serial Number
280152 and 280154 and 280156
Commessa SSE / SSE Job
280152 and 280154 and 280156
Cliente SSE / SSE Customer
Nuovo Pignone
Ordine Cliente SSE / SSE Customer Order
439519724 Pos.2,4,6
Cliente Finale / End Customer
COLT FOR SUNCOR ENERGY
Località / Location
FORT MC MURRAY, ALBERTA (CANADA)
Impianto / Plant
VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATER
Job NP / Commessa NP
1102313-14-15
NP Specification / Specifica NP
SOS9971973 (RQ 1451505 - RQ 1451507 - RQ 1451509)
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 1 di 7
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
INDEX 1.
SCOPE OF SUPPLY _________________________________________________________3
2.
REFERENCE DRAWINGS FOR PANEL CONSTRUCTION ________________________3
3.
GENERAL TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION _______________________________________3
4.
POWER SUPPLY ____________________________________________________________4
5.
EARTH CIRCUITS __________________________________________________________5
6.
SEGREGATION OF THE WIRING WITH DIFFERENT SIGNAL LEVEL ____________5
7.
OPERATING CONDITIONS __________________________________________________6
8.
STOCK REQUIREMENT _____________________________________________________6
9.
HANDLING ________________________________________________________________6
10.
MAINTENANCE __________________________________________________________6
11.
INTERCONNETCTION ____________________________________________________6
12.
POWER-UP PROCEDURE __________________________________________________7
13.
POWER-DOWN PROCEDURE ______________________________________________7
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 2 di 7
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY Description of Local Control Panel (LCP) for the local control and monitoring of the turbo compression unit.
2. REFERENCE DRAWINGS FOR PANEL CONSTRUCTION JOB 110.2313
JOB 110.2314
JOB 110.2315
a) LCP LAYOUT
SOS9971701/3
SOS9971703/3
SOS9971704/3
b) LCP WIRING DIAGRAM
SOS9972008 /3
SOS9972009 /3
SOS9972010 /3
3. GENERAL TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION The LCP has been constructed according to the document “LCP LAYOUT”. The panel is in stainless steel and is self sustaining type. The panel general dimensions are 800 x 800 x 2100 mm. The panel consist of a box with lamps, selectors and push button and a panel PC. Cable entry is from the top. The protection degree is NEMA 4X. The panel is unpainted. The wiring is according to the “LCP Wiring Diagram”.
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 3 di 7
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
4. POWER SUPPLY The Local Control Panel is powered by Unit Control Panel:
a) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-UPS1 terminal board) to be supplied at the following device:
External horn (6HA1)
b) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-EP terminal board) to be supplied at LCP-HRT terminal board for the following devices:
Internal Heater (8EH1)
c) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-UPS1 terminal board) to be supplied at the following device:
Panel PC
d) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-MCC terminal board) to be supplied at the following device:
External lamp (9EL1)
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 4 di 7
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
5. EARTH CIRCUITS Inside the panel there are two earthing circuits: •
[PE] PROTECTION EARTH
Earth bar for the connection of the chassis of the instruments and of the armouring of the cables in input; •
[FE] FUNCTIONAL EARTH
Earth bar for the connection of the PLC chassis and instruments cable screens;
6. SEGREGATION OF THE WIRING WITH DIFFERENT SIGNAL LEVEL Different and separate routing and cable trays have been provided for the signals of the following levels :
SIGNAL LEVEL
SIGNAL TYPE
Low level
4-20 mA Analog Signals, RTD Analog Signals, Speed and Vibration transmitters
Low level
0-30 Vdc Digital Signals
High level
Vdc/Vac Power Supplies over 1500 W
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 5 di 7
SSE ®
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
7. OPERATING CONDITIONS The local control panel has been designed to be operated in out-door under shelter in a hazardous area, Class 1 Zone 2 Group IIC Temp.T3 (acc. to IEC). Operative temperature range -58 °F and +104 °F
8. STOCK REQUIREMENT The LCP can be stocked at temperature between -58 °F and +104 °F and relative humidity between 5% and 95%.
9. HANDLING For the lifting of the LCP, use the two provided holes on the top of LCP.
10.
MAINTENANCE
LCP maintenance consists of the following actions: •
Check that lamp is properly working;
11.
INTERCONNETCTION
For entry of the cables in the box use cable gland Eex-e certified. For the Panel PC connection refer to installation manual of the panel PC DRAWING MDRW00245 For the connection of the horn refer to installation instructions for vibratone
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 6 di 7
SSE ®
12.
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
POWER-UP PROCEDURE
Preliminary check before power-up: •
Check that all-fixing bolts and screws are tightly screwed
•
Check that the earth circuits are correctly connected
120Vac from the relative UCP : 1) Energize 11FU1 in the Unit Control Panel, verify that external horn proper working; 2) Energize 11QF3 in the Unit Control Panel, verify that Panel PC proper working; 3) Energize 15FU1 in the Unit Control Panel, verify presence of 120Vac at LCP-HTR terminal board and verify that internal heater proper working; 4) Energize 22FU1 in the Unit Control Panel, verify that external light proper working;
13.
POWER-DOWN PROCEDURE
De-energize breakers and fuses in the unit control panel in the reverse order of power-up sequence and verify that respective devices are disconnected.
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483 Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 7 di 7
EQUIPMENT LIST Supplier part Item number
Description
Assembly drawing
Item on ass.y drw
Material Manufacturer part number
Qt.y
1
FEDERAL SIGNAL
350WB HORN 120VAC
SOS9972008
6HA1
350WBX-120
1
2
INTERTEC
ANTICONDENSING HEATER
SOS9972008
8EH1
CPA-300-T3-80-1
1
3
NRL
AC-Exacta INCANDESCENT LAMP FOR CEILING MOUNTING
SOS9972008
9EL1
ACEH15I1GCGC2
1
4
NRL
LAMP 120VAC 100W
SOS9972008
9EL1
INX3543
1
SWITCH 2P
SOS9972008
9SA1
EDSC218
1
PANELMETER (FOR HAZARDOUS AREA)
SOS9972008
FI 3290B;PDI 3461B;PI 3095B;PI 3096B;PI 3403B;PI 3471B;SI 3049B;UZI 3293B
PD688-0K0
8
5 6
CROUSE HINDS PRECISION DIGITAL
HS 3084;HS 3113;HS 3114;HS 3118;HS 3111;SHS 3111;SHS 3112;XHS 3085;XHSC 3030;XHSC 05-0003-000700BN 3031;XHSO 3030;XHSO 3031;XHSO 3315 HS 3084;HS 3113;HS 3114;HS 3115;HS 3117;HS 3118;HS 3126;HS 3111;NCR 3741;SHS 3111;SHS 3112;SHS 3116;XHS 3085;XHS 3120;XHS 3316;XHSC 3030;XHSC 3031;XHSO 3030;XHSO 07-3323-1200 3031;XHSO 3315
13
7
BARTEC
PUSH BUTTON
SOS9972008
8
BARTEC
SWITCH MODULE 2NO
SOS9972008
9
BARTEC
POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH 2 POSITION
SOS9972008
HS 3115;HS 3117;HS 3126;NCR 3741;SHS 3116
05-0003-000900BN
5
USLKG5 EARTH TERMINAL BLOCK
SOS9972008
LCP-HTR
441504
1
UK 3N FEED THROUGH TERMINAL BLOCK
SOS9972008
LCP-HTR;TBLCP_A;TBLCP_B;TBLCP_L;TBSPR_D
3001501
200
RTD TH15 PT100
SOS9972008
RTD PT100
TH15-F2A5AA2KA1
1
10 11 12
PHOENIX CONTACT PHOENIX CONTACT ENDRESS HAUSER
20
13
BARTEC
EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON
SOS9972008
XHS 3120
05-0003-000800BN
1
14
BARTEC
KEY SELCTOR 2 POSITION
SOS9972008
XHS 3316
05-0003-001200BN
1
15
BARTEC
INDICATOR RED LIGHT
SOS9972008
XL 3311;XZLC 3030;XZLC 3031
05-0003-001300BN
3
16
BARTEC
RED LAMP MODULE
SOS9972008
XL 3311;XZLC 3030;XZLC 3031
07-3353-1110
3
17
BARTEC
INDICATOR YELLOW LIGHT
SOS9972008
XL 3312
05-0003-001500BN
1
18
BARTEC
YELLOW LAMP MODULE
SOS9972008
XL 3312
07-3353-1130
1
19
BARTEC
INDICATOR GREEN LIGHT
SOS9972008
XL 3313;XL 3314;XZLO 3030;XZLO 3031
05-0003-001400BN
4
20
BARTEC
GREEN LAMP MODULE
SOS9972008
XL 3313;XL 3314;XZLO 3030;XZLO 3031
07-3353-1120
4
21
MOXA
Media Converter Eth / O.F, Class1 Div2,ATEX Class 1, Zone 2, EEx nC IIC, -40 to 75°C operating range
SOS9972008
7MC1
IMC-101-M-SC-T
1
Pagina 1 di 1
HOOK-UP WIRE
MIL-W-16878E TYPE B: 105°C, 600 VOLT UL 1429, CSA: 80°C, 150 VOLT MIL-W-16878E TYPE C: 105°C, 1000 VOLT UL 1430, CSA: 105°C, 300 VOLT RoHS COMPLIANT
IRRADIATED PVC INSULATION
SOLDER IRON RESISTANT Irradiated PVC Insulated Hook-Up Wire is exposed to controlled electron beam radiation which results in an insulation far superior to ordinary PVC. Irradiated PVC withstands higher temperatures than ordinary PVC. Because of its ability to resist solder iron heat, it is the ideal material to use where high reliability is essential and particularly valuable in the wiring of tight, high-density systems. Irradiated PVC insulation is tougher than ordinary PVC resulting in greatly improved abrasion and cut-through resistance.
CHARACTERISTICS OPERATING TEMPERATURE: ■ –55°C to 105°C – UL AWM 1430 ■ –55°C to 105°C – UL AWM 3317 ■ –55°C to 105°C – CSA AWM I A/B FT1 ■ –55°C to 105°C – MIL-W-16878E ■ –55°C to 80°C – UL AWM 1429 VOLTAGE RATING: ■ 600 Volt (MIL), 150 Volt (UL, CSA) ■ 1000 Volt (MIL), 300 Volt (UL, CSA) PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: ■ Conductor: Stranded Tinned Copper ■ Insulation: Color-Coded, Irradiated PVC (XLPVC)
SPECIFICATIONS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
MIL-W-16878E TYPE B: 105°C, 600 VOLT CSA AWM I A/B FT1: 105°C, 150 VOLT UL 1429: 80°C, 150 VOLT Alpha Part No. 7053 7054 7054/19 7055 7055/19 7056 7056/19 7057 7057/19 7058/19
26 24 24 22 22 20 20 18 18 16
Insul. Thickness Inches mm
7/34 7/32 19/36 7/30 19/34 7/28 19/32 7/26 19/30 19/29
0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25
Diameter Inches mm 0.040 0.045 0.045 0.051 0.052 0.059 0.060 0.070 0.070 0.078
1,02 1,14 1,14 1,30 1,32 1,50 1,52 1,78 1,78 1,98
Stock Colors* 1–10 1–10 1–10 1–10 1–10 1–10 1–10 1–10 1–10 1–10
*See color chart below
MIL-W-16878E TYPE C: 105°C, 1000 VOLT UL 1430, CSA REW XLPVC: 105°C, 300 VOLT Alpha Part No.
UL AWM Style 1429 UL AWM Style 1430 UL AWM Style 3317 CSA AWM I A/B FT1 CSA REW XLPVC FT1 MIL-W-16878E, Type B MIL-W-16878E, Type C RoHS Compliant
Conductor AWG Strand
7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7035† 7036†
Conductor AWG Strand 24 22 20 18 16 14 12
Insul. Thickness Inches mm
7/32 7/30 7/28 7/26 19/29 19/27 19/25
0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016
0,41 0,41 0,41 0,41 0,41 0,41 0,41
Diameter Inches mm 0.056 0.062 0.070 0.082 0.092 0.107 0.124
1,42 1,58 1,78 2,08 2,34 2,72 3,15
Stock Colors* 1–10,29 1–10,29 1–10,29 1–10,29 1–10,29 1–10,29 1–10,29
† UL 3317 *See color chart below
®
AVAILABILITY ■
100 ft (30,5m), 1000 ft (305m) put-ups
*STOCK COLOR CHART
1–White 2–Black
Web Site: www.alphawire.com Email: [email protected]
3–Red 4–Green
5–Yellow 6–Blue
7–Brown 8–Orange
9–Gray 10–Violet (purple)
29–Yellow/Green
Toll Free: 1-800-52 ALPHA • Telephone: 908-925-8000 • Fax: 908-925-6923 Europe/UK Telephone: +44 (0) 1932 772422 • Europe/UK Fax: +44 (0) 1932 772433
171
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
7931A Multi-Conductor - Category 6 DataTwist® Twisted Pair Cable For more Information please call 1-800-Belden1
Description: 23 AWG Bonded-Pairs solid bare copper conductors, FEP insulation, sunlight- oil- and gas-resistant FEP jacket. Sequential marking at two foot intervals. Usage (Overall) Suitable Applications:
Industrial Ethernet Cable, Harsh Environments, 350MHz Enhanced Category 6, Gigabit Ethernet, 100BaseTX, 100BaseVG ANYLAN, 155ATM, 622ATM, NTSC/PAL Component or Composite Video, AES/EBU Digital Audio, AES51, RS-422, RJ-45 Compatible, High and Low Temperature, Oil and Gasoline Exposure, Limited Combustible FHC 25/50
Physical Characteristics (Overall) Conductor AWG: # Pairs AWG Stranding Conductor Material 4
23
Solid
BC - Bare Copper
Insulation Insulation Material: Insulation Material FEP - Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene
Outer Shield Outer Shield Material: Outer Shield Material Unshielded
Outer Jacket Outer Jacket Material: Outer Jacket Material FEP - Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene
Overall Cabling Overall Cabling Fillers:
Rod Center Member
Overall Nominal Diameter:
0.214 in.
Pair Pair Color Code Chart: Number Color 1
White/Blue Stripe & Blue
2
White/Orange Stripe & Orange
3
White/Green Stripe & Green
4
White/Brown Stripe & Brown
Mechanical Characteristics (Overall) Installation Temperature Range:
-55°C To +150°C
Operating Temperature Range:
-70°C To +150°C
Bulk Cable Weight:
28 lbs/1000 ft.
Max. Recommended Pulling Tension:
40 lbs. Page 1 of 4
03-16-2009
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
7931A Multi-Conductor - Category 6 DataTwist® Twisted Pair Cable Min. Bend Radius (Install)/Minor Axis:
0.500 in.
Applicable Specifications and Agency Compliance (Overall) Applicable Standards & Environmental Programs NEC/(UL) Specification:
FHC 25/50, CMP, UL444
NEC Articles:
NFPA 259
CEC/C(UL) Specification:
CMP
EU Directive 2000/53/EC (ELV):
Yes
EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS):
Yes
EU RoHS Compliance Date (mm/dd/yyyy):
04/01/2005
EU Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE):
Yes
EU Directive 2003/11/EC (BFR):
Yes
CA Prop 65 (CJ for Wire & Cable):
Yes
MII Order #39 (China RoHS):
Yes
Telecommunications Standards:
568-B.2-1 Category 6
Other Specification:
UL verified to Category 6
Flame Test UL Flame Test:
UL723 (NFPA 255), NFPA 262
CSA Flame Test:
FT6
Suitability Oil Resistance:
Yes
Plenum/Non-Plenum Plenum (Y/N):
Yes
Electrical Characteristics (Overall) Nom. Mutual Capacitance: Capacitance (pF/ft) 15
Nominal Velocity of Propagation: VP (%) 72
Maximum Capacitance Unbalance (pF/100 m):
330
Maximum Delay: Delay (ns/100 m) 537 @ 100MHz
Max. Delay Skew: Delay Skew (ns/100 m) 45
Maximum Conductor DC Resistance: DCR @ 20°C (Ohm/100 m) 9.38
Max. Operating Voltage - UL: Voltage 300 V RMS
Maximum DCR Unbalanced: DCR Unbalance @ 20°C (%) 5
Page 2 of 4
03-16-2009
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
7931A Multi-Conductor - Category 6 DataTwist® Twisted Pair Cable
Electrical Characteristics-Premise (Overall) Premise Cable Electrical Table 1: Freq. (MHz) Max. Attenuation (dB/100 m) Min. NEXT (dB) Min. PSNEXT (dB) Min. ACR (dB) Min. PSACR (dB) Min RL (dB) Min. SRL (dB) 1
2.0
74.3
72.3
72.3
70.3
20.0
na
4
3.8
65.3
63.3
61.5
59.5
23.0
na
8
5.3
60.8
58.8
55.4
53.4
24.5
na
10
6.0
59.3
57.3
53.3
51.3
25.0
na
16
7.6
56.2
54.3
48.7
46.7
25.0
na
20
8.5
54.8
52.8
46.3
44.3
25.0
na
25
9.5
53.3
51.3
43.8
41.8
24.3
na
31.25
10.7
51.9
49.9
41.2
39.2
23.6
na
62.5
15.4
47.4
45.4
32.0
30.0
21.5
na
100
19.8
44.3
42.3
24.5
22.5
20.1
na
155
25.2
41.5
39.5
16.3
14.3
18.8
na
200
29.0
39.8
37.8
10.8
8.8
18.0
na
250
32.8
38.3
36.3
5.5
3.5
17.3
na
Premise Cable Electrical Table 2: Freq. (MHz) Input (Unfitted) Imp. (Ohms) Fitted Impedance Min. ELFEXT (dB) Min. PSELFEXT (dB) 1
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
67.8
64.8
4
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
55.8
52.7
8
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
49.7
46.7
10
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
47.8
44.8
16
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
43.7
40.7
20
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
41.8
38.7
25
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
39.8
36.8
31.25
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
37.9
34.9
62.5
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
31.9
28.8
100
100 ± 15
100 ± 15
27.8
24.8
155
100 ± 22
100 ± 15
23.9
20.9
200
100 ± 22
100 ± 15
21.8
18.7
250
100 ± 32
100 ± 15
19.8
16.8
Notes (Overall) Notes: US Patents 5, 606, 151& 5, 573, 126. Operating temperatures subject to length de-rating. Notes (Cont'd.):
Cable passes -70C Cold Bend per UL 1581.
Put Ups and Colors: Item #
Putup
Ship Weight
Color
7931A 0101000
1,000 FT
35.000 LB
BLACK
Revision Number: 7
Notes
Item Desc 4 PR #23 FEP FEP
Revision Date: 05-14-2007
© 2008 Belden, Inc All Rights Reserved. Although Belden makes every reasonable effort to ensure their accuracy at the time of this publication, information and specifications described herein are subject to error or omission and to change without notice, and the listing of such information and specifications does not ensure product availability. Belden provides the information and specifications herein on an "AS IS" basis, with no representations or warranties, whether express, statutory or implied. In no event will Belden be liable for any damages (including consequential, indirect, incidental, special, punitive, or exemplary damages) whatsoever, even if Belden has been advised of the possibility of such damages, whether in an action under contract, negligence or any other theory, arising out of or in connection with the use, or inability to use, the information or specifications described herein. All sales of Belden products are subject to Belden's standard terms and conditions of sale. Belden believes this product to be in compliance with EU RoHS (Directive 2002/95/EC, 27-Jan-2003). Material manufactured prior to the compliance date may be in stock at Belden facilities and in our Distributor’s inventory. The information provided in this Product Disclosure, and the identification of materials listed as reportable or restricted within the Product Disclosure, is correct to the best of Belden’s knowledge, information, and belief at the date of its publication. The information provided in this Product Disclosure is designed only as a general guide for the safe handling, storage, and any other operation of the product itself or the one that it becomes a part of. This Product Disclosure is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification. Regulatory information is for guidance purposes only. Product users are responsible for determining the applicability of legislation and regulations based on their individual usage of the product.
Page 3 of 4
03-16-2009
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
7931A Multi-Conductor - Category 6 DataTwist® Twisted Pair Cable
Page 4 of 4
03-16-2009
5 digit Loop-powered Panel meters with Loop-powered Backlight +
Loop Leader -
Series
Model PD683 General Purpose TM
Model PD688 Hazardous Area
Model PD688 Only
• • • • • • • • • • • •
4-20 mA Input 5 Digit LCD, 0.6” (15.2 mm) High FM Type 4X, IP65 Front Shallow Depth Case 3.2” Behind Panel 2 V Drop (5.7 V with Backlight) Loop-Powered Backlight Standard Custom Engineering Units & Bargraph Linear, Square Root, or Programmable Exponent Maximum & Minimum Display Operating Temperature Range -30 to 65°C Intrinsically Safe & Non-Incendive HART Protocol Transparent
Precision Digital Corporation
www.predig.com
Model PD683 & PD688 loop-powered panel meters
• Trend Arrow • 5 Digits, 0.6” High • Bargraph • Engineering Notation • Custom Engineering Units • Backlight is Standard
KEY FEATURES
Square Root Function
The square root extraction feature displays flow rate by extracting the square root from a differential pressure transmitter signal. The user selectable low-flow cutoff feature gives a reading of zero when the flow rate drops below a user selectable value.
Through significant innovation in technology and design, we developed the Loop Leader™ Series of loop-powered indicators, which are loaded with standard features and built for tough industrial environments.
• Displays Flow Rate • User Selectable Low-Flow Cutoff • Only 2 Calibration Points Required
Full Featured
There’s nothing stripped down or bare bones about these indicators; they’re designed for demanding process control applications. Standard features include a full 5 digit backlit display with bargraph, on-screen custom engineering units, and max/min display capabilities
Install Just About Anywhere
Indoors, outdoors, bright sunlight, dimly lit plant, wet, dirty, hot or cold- these indicators go just about anywhere. Their shallowdepth case, FM Type 4X front, loop-powered backlighting, and wide operating temperature range are all standard features. And the PD688 with its FM Approval and CSA Certification can be installed in just about any hazardous location.
FLOW
Programmable Exponent
4-20 mA Input Connections Wiring with Backlight
Power Supply
S+ S- B+ B4-20 mA Transmitter
Wiring without Backlight
Power Supply
The programmable exponent function is used to linearize the level signal in open channel flow applications using weirs and flumes and display flow rate in engineering units.
4-20 mA output S+ S- B+ B-
4-20 mA Transmitter
2
Model PD683 & PD688 loop-powered panel meters Setup & Programming Easy Setup
PD688 Intrinsically Safe Wiring
I nstallation must be performed in accordance with Control Drawing LIM688-2.
Even with all the features packed into these meters, they’re still easy to setup and get running. Everything is programmed from the front panel buttons with no pots or jumpers to deal with. In fact, these meters can be scaled without a signal source for even quicker setup.
Loop Input with Backlight
HAZARDOUS AREA
Main Menu
9.2 846
s et up
GPS
S+ S- B+ B-
Loop Input
Run Mode
pr oG
pas s
NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
I.S. Barrier
+ -
I.S. GROUND
Transmitter
Io of single channel barrier or It of dual channel barrier
Pi > Po of single channel barrier or Pt of dual channel barrier
Li plus interconnecting wiring < Lo of single or dual channel barrier Ci plus interconnecting wiring < Co of single or dual channel barrier
It is not necessary to use intrinsic safety barriers when installing the PD688/PD689 in Class I, II, III, Division 2, Groups ABCDFG, maximum input voltage = 30 VDC. Division 2 wiring methods must be used when not powering from a barrier.
+ -
I.S. GROUND
bn
bu
ϑ>
ye/gn
PA
VARITHERM
The MB or MW mounting brackets can be ordered as options.
bu=blue bn=brown ye/gn=yellow/green bk=black gy=grey
HD652-0c CP VARITHERM CPA…
page 2/ 2
I N T E RT E C I n s t r u m e n t a t i o n - S a r n i a , O n t a r i o - H o u s t o n , Te x a s - P h o n e : 1 - 8 8 8 - 8 7 5 - 8 7 5 6
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Vibratone ® Horns Model 350WB
DESIGNED FOR ROUTINE SIGNALING USES •
Effective range 200 feet (61m)
•
Coded or sustained tones
•
Wall mount
•
120 and 240VAC
•
Produces 100dB @ 10’ (110dB @ 1m)
•
UL and cUL Listed, CSA Certified, FM Approved
•
Type 4X, IP65 enclosure
The Model 350WB (AC current) Vibratone® horn produces sound by the electro-mechanical vibration of a stainless steel diaphragm. The horn mechanism with diaphragm is attached to the grille. Indoor or outdoor use is made possible by the water- and dust-tight backbox. The 350WB is available in 120 or 240VAC for 50/60Hz. The sound output level is 100dB nominal at ten feet (110dB @ 1m). Model 350WB features a die-cast aluminum rear housing sealed with a gray enamel finish. The rugged outer housing resists vandalism without reducing sound output. Model 350WB is fused and utilizes a terminal block connection. The horn and backbox combination is UL and cUL Listed, CSA Certified and FM Approved. Capable of reproducing coded blasts or sustained tones, Federal Signal’s Vibratone horns are excellent for general alarm, start/dismissal, coded paging and process control signaling in areas where their sound output exceeds ambient noise levels. Compact size and various installation options make them ideal for institutional use.
Model
Voltage
Operating Current
Decibels @ 10' 1m
350WB 350WB
120VAC 50/60Hz 240VAC 50/60Hz
0.18 amps 0.09 amps
100 100
Gross Automation, 1725 South Johnson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53146, 262-446-0000, www.federalsignalsales.com
110 110
VIBRATONE ® HORN (350WB)
3
/4” Conduit Entrance
1
/2” Conduit Entrance
3
/4” Conduit Entrance
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S Operating Temperature: Net Weight: Shipping Weight: Height: Width: Depth:
HOW TO ORDER -65°F to 150°F 2.7 lbs. 2.8 lbs. 5.3" 5.3" 3.66"
-54°C to 66°C 1.2 kg 1.2 kg 115 mm 115 mm 92.9 mm
• Specify model and voltage • Please refer to Model Number Index 350WB beginning on page 378
R E P L A C E M E N T PA RT S Description Coil (120VAC only) Volume Control Kit
Part Number KFC1516C K8435663B
2645 Federal Signal Dr., University Park, IL 60466 Tel: 708.534.4756
Fax: 708.534.4852
www.federalsignal-indust.com
Gross Automation, 1725 South Johnson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53146, 262-446-0000, www.federalsignalsales.com
117
n n n n n n
CSA - Class I Div. 2 - Groups A, B, C, & D CSA - Class I Zone 2 - Groups IIA, IIB & IIC CSA - Class II Div. 2 - Groups F & G CSA - Class III CSA - Type 4 Enclosed & Gasketed
AC-Exacta Incandescent, HPS & Compact Fluorescent Fixtures Features: n n n n n n n n n
Heavy duty cast aluminum, polyester powder coated housing. Two models to choose from, enclosed & gasketed or hazardous area watertight. Three light sources - incandescent (150 watt max.), compact fluorescent (32 watt max.) or high pressure sodium (35 or 50 watt). Standard models with glass or polycarbonate globe (prismatic and colored globes available). Three mounting styles: pendant, ceiling and wall (½” npt. hubs standard). Optional cast aluminum guard or polymeric guard for use with glass globes. Optional stainless steel wire guard for use with polycarbonate globes. Optional polycarbonate prismatic reflector for architectural applications. Silicone gasket for high temperature and corrosive areas.
Applications: n n n n
n n n n
Chemical plants Mining applications Marine facilities Tunnels & walkways
Page 91
Oil drilling rigs Walk-in coolers Security lighting Architectural lighting applications
AC-Exacta Catalog Number Logic
ACE H - 15I - 1 GC G CI - X (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Series - Aluminum Cast Exacta “ACE” Compact designed cast aluminum fixture complete with impact resistant glass or polycarbonate globe, available in incandescent, high pressure sodium or compact fluorescent models.
(6)
(7)
(8)
(5) Globe Type CG - Coated (plastic) glass (for food handling areas) (min 100 pieces)
GC* PC* PP TG -
(2) Model H - Hazardous area V - Vapor proof
Standard glass, clear Polycarbonate, clear Polycarbonate, prismatic Tempered glass
* For colored globes replace “C” with first letter of color required. (ie,: “GR” for red glass globe.) Colors available: amber, blue, green, red and white Globe use - mounting warning: Glass globes 150 watt maximum, any mounting position Polycarbonate globe 100 watt maximum, base up only Polycarbonate globe 60 watt maximum, any mounting position
(3) Lamp Wattage & Type 15I - 150 watt max. incandescent 09F - 9 watt fluorescent 13F - 13 watt fluorescent 18F - 18 watt fluorescent 26F - 26 watt fluorescent 32F - 32 watt fluorescent 35S - 35 watt high pressure sodium 50S - 50 watt high pressure sodium
(6) Guard G - Guard, cast (for use with glass globes only) GP - Guard, polymeric (for use with glass globes only) GW - Guard, stainless steel wire
(4) Voltage / Frequency 1 - 120 Volt 60 Hz. 2 - 240 Volt 50/60 Hz. (incandescent only) 3 - 277 Volt 60 Hz. (18w, 26w, and 32w fluorescent models only)
(5)
(7) Mounting Options C1 - Ceiling mount, feed-thru ½” npt. C2 - Ceiling mount, feed-thru ¾” npt. P1 - Pendant mount, ½” npt. P2 - Pendant mount, ¾” npt. W1 - Wall mount & outlet box, ½” npt. W2 - Wall mount & outlet box, ¾” npt. (8) Special Options L - Lamp installed. RP - Reflector, prismatic (not available for wall mount models, if guard is required only type “GP” is available)
Consult factory for any catalog number or options not listed above for price and availability.
Page 92
AC-Exacta Ordering Guide Mounting
Lamp Type
Lamp Watts
Hazardous Location *
Vapor Proof *
Shipping Weight
Shipping Volume
Incandescent
150
ACE H-15I-1GC G P1
ACE V-15I-1GC G P1
3.7 lbs.(1.65kg.)
0.5ft
9
ACE H-09F-1GC G P1
ACE V-09F-1GC G P1
13
ACE H-13F-1GC G P1
ACE V-13F-1GC G P1
18
ACE H-18F-1GC G P1
ACE V-18F-1GC G P1
26
ACE H-26F-1GC G P1
ACE V-26F-1GC G P1
32
ACE H-32F-1GC G P1
ACE V-32F-1GC G P1
High Pressure Sodium
35
ACE H-35S-1GC G P1
ACE V-35S-1GC G P1
5.8 lbs.(2.6kg.)
50
ACE H-50S-1GC G P1
ACE V-50S-1GC G P1
6.2 lbs.(2.8kg.)
Incandescent
150
ACE H-15I-1GC G C1
ACE V-15I-1GC G C1
4.1 lbs.(1.85kg.)
9
ACE H-09F-1GC G C1
ACE V-09F-1GC G C1
13
ACE H-13F-1GC G C1
ACE V-13F-1GC G C1
18
ACE H-18F-1GC G C1
ACE V-18F-1GC G C1
26
ACE H-26F-1GC G C1
ACE V-26F-1GC G C1
32
ACE H-32F-1GC G C1
ACE V-32F-1GC G C1
High Pressure Sodium
35
ACE H-35S-1GC G C1
ACE V-35S-1GC G C1
6.2 lbs.(2.8kg.)
50
ACE H-50S-1GC G C1
ACE V-50S-1GC G C1
6.6 lbs.(3.0kg.)
Incandescent
150
ACE H-15I-1GC G W1
ACE V-15I-1GC G W1
5.4 lbs.(2.45kg.)
9
ACE H-09F-1GC G W1
ACE V-09F-1GC G W1
13
ACE H-13F-1GC G W1
ACE V-13F-1GC G W1
18
ACE H-18F-1GC G W1
ACE V-18F-1GC G W1
26
ACE H-26F-1GC G W1
ACE V-26F-1GC G W1
32
ACE H-32F-1GC G W1
ACE V-32F-1GC G W1
35
ACE H-35S-1GC G W1
ACE V-35S-1GC G W1
7.5 lbs.(3.4kg.)
50
ACE H-50S-1GC G W1
ACE V-50S-1GC G W1
7.9 lbs.(3.6kg.)
3
5.2 lbs.(2.35kg.) Compact Fluorescent
5.1 lbs.(2.3kg.)
3
0.8ft
3
0.5ft
5.6 lbs.(2.55kg.) Compact Fluorescent
5.5 lbs.(2.5kg.)
3
0.8ft
3
0.5ft
6.9 lbs.(3.15kg.) Compact Fluorescent
High Pressure Sodium
6.8 lbs.(3.1kg.)
Notes: * All fixtures shown are with ½” npt. hubs. If ¾” npt. hubs are required, change suffix “1” to “2”. 1. All fixtures shown are 120 Volt, 60 Hz. For other voltages see Catalog Number Logic. 2. All fixtures shown have standard glass globes. If polycarbonate globe is required, replace “GC” with “PC”. See Catalog Number Logic for standard or colored globes. 3. Wall mounted fixtures are shown with outlet box. If outlet box is not required, replace the suffix “W1” with “WB”. 4. If stainless steel wire guard is required, change “G” to “GW” and add .5 lbs. (0.23 kg.) to shipping weight. 5. If polymeric guard is required, change “G” to “GP” and deduct .78 lbs. (0.36 kg.) from shipping weight.
Page 93
3
0.8ft
AC-Exacta Dimensions PENDANT MOUNT
CEILING MOUNT
C
WALL MOUNT
C
C
C
C
C D
D
D B
MOUNT
A
BA
AB
B
BA
A B
A
TYPE
INCANDESCENT
HPS & FLUORESCENT
INCANDESCENT
HPS & FLUORESCENT
A* B C D
9.75 (24.8) 9.25 (23.5) 4.34 (11) --
12.13 (30.8) 11.63 (29.5) 4.34 (11) --
9.25 (23.5) 8.75 (22.2) 4.63 (11.7) 4.00 (10.2)
11.13 (28.3) 10.63 (27.0) 4.63 (11.7) 4.00 (10.2)
INCANDESCENT
10.13 (25.7) 9.63 (24.5) 7.25 (18.4) 5.13 (13)
HPS & FLUORESCENT
12.5 (31.8) 12.0 (30.5) 7.25 (18.4) 5.13 (13)
Notes: * Add 1/2” (1.3 cm.) if steel wire guard is required. All dimensions are in inches (cm.).
Components & Accessories Globes
Catalog No.
Weight lbs. (kg.)
Prismatic Globe and Reflectors
Catalog No.
Weight lbs. (kg.)
Prismatic polycarbonate Globe
Clear* Glass
G150C
1.1 lbs. (.5 kg.)
Tempered Glass
PP100
1.1 lbs. (.5 kg.)
.22 lbs. (.1 kg.)
P100C
.22 lbs. (.1 kg.)
Weight lbs. (kg.)
GP150
0.22 lbs (.1 kg.)
GC150
1.0 lbs (.45 kg.)
GW150
0.5 lbs. (.22 kg.)
Cast Guard
RPPE**
2.8 lbs (1.3 kg.)
Prismatic Polycarbonate Reflector c/w Guard
Clear*Polycarbonate
Catalog No.
Polymeric Guard
Prismatic Polycarbonate Reflector
GT150
Guards
Steel Wire Guard
RPPG **
3.1 lbs. (1.4 kg.)
* For colored globes change the suffix “C” to the color required; ie “R” for red. ** Reflectors cannot be used with wall mount models.
Page 94
Moxa Industrial Media Converter IMC-101 Hardware Installation Guide
Fifth Edition, June 2008
© 2008 Moxa Inc., all rights reserved. Reproduction without permission is prohibited.
P/N: 18020010104
Overview Moxa Industrial Media Converter, which is specially designed for reliable and stable operation in harsh industrial environments, provides industrial grade media conversion between 10/100BaseT(X) and 100BaseFX. IMC-101’s reliable industrial design is excellent for keeping your industrial automation applications running continuously, and comes with a relay output warning alarm to help prevent damages and losses. This product has a wide operating temperature range, from -40 to 75°C, and is designed to withstand a high degree of vibration and shock. The rugged hardware design makes IMC-101 perfect for ensuring that your Ethernet equipment can withstand critical industrial applications, such as in hazardous locations (Class 1 Division 2/Zone 2), and complies with FCC, TÜV, UL, and CE Standards NOTE
Throughout this Hardware Installation Guide, we often use IMC as an abbreviation for Moxa Industrial Media Converter: IMC = Moxa Industrial Media Converter
Package Checklist Moxa Industrial Media Converter is shipped with the following items. If any of these items is missing or damaged, please contact your customer service representative for assistance. y Moxa Industrial Media Converter y Hardware Installation Guide y Moxa Product Warranty booklet
Features y y y y y y
Supports 10/100Base-TX auto-negotiation and auto-MDI/MDI-X Multi mode, single mode with SC or ST fiber connector available Supports Link Fault Pass-Through Relay Output alarm when a port breaks or the power fails Redundant 12 to 48 VDC power inputs, DIN-Rail or panel mountable Operating temperature range from 0 to 60°C, or extended operating temperature from –40 to 75°C for (-T) models
2
Panel Layout of IMC-101 Series Top Panel View 1 2
1. 2.
V2+
Grounding screw Terminal block for power
PWR2 V2-
input PWR1/PWR2 and relay
FAULT
V1+
PWR1
V1V1 V2 INPUTS: 24 VDC
3
output 3.
Heat dissipation orifices
PORT ALARM
1
ON
2 3
DIP
4
4.
Dip switch
5.
Power input PWR1 LED
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-ST) 6. 7. 2 5 8. 6 7 9. 8 10. 9 10 11. FDX /CO L
12.
11
12 14
13
12 14
FDX /CO L
11 13
Rear Panel View
16 17
16
3
100BaseFX (ST connector) Port FX port’s 100 Mbps LED FX port’s Full Duplex/Collision LED TP port’s 100 Mbps LED 10/100BaseT(X)
13.
TP port’s 10 Mbps LED
14.
Model Name
15. Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-SC) 2 16. 5 6 17. 7
15 9 10
Power input PWR2 LED Fault LED
100BaseFX (SC connector) Port Screw hole for wall mounting kit DIN-Rail mounting kit
Mounting Dimensions (Unit = mm)
15.10
30.00
13.10
54.00
9.50
25.40
135.00
135.00
Side View
Front View
13.90 18.20 13.90 3.5 6 3.5 6
25.71 +
+
+ +
7.75
39.37
+ +
+ + +
+ + +
13
30.50 18 13
+ + +
+ + +
6 66.80 10 57.05 10 5 7.75
46.77
+
+
23.15
+ +
+ +
30.50 10.65
10.65 Panel Mount Kit
Back View
4
DIN-Rail Mounting The aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate should be fixed to the back panel of IMC when you take it out of the box. If you need to reattach the DIN-Rail attachment plate to IMC, make sure the stiff metal spring is situated towards the top, as shown in the figures below. STEP 1: STEP 2: Insert the top of the DIN-Rail into the The DIN-Rail attachment unit will slot just below the stiff metal spring. snap into place as shown below.
metal spring
metal spring
DIN-Rail
DIN-Rail
To remove Moxa Industrial Media Converter from the DIN-Rail, simply reverse Steps 1 and 2 above.
Wall Mounting (Optional) For some applications, you will find it convenient to mount Moxa Industrial Media Converter on the wall, as illustrated below. STEP 1: Remove the aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate from Moxa Industrial Media Converter, and then attach the wall mount plates, as shown in the diagrams below.
Top plate
⇒ Bottom plate
5
STEP 2: Mounting Moxa Industrial Media Converter on the wall requires 4 screws. Use the IMC, with wall mount plates attached, as a guide to mark the correct locations of the 4 screws. The heads of the screws should be less than 6.0 mm in diameter, and the shafts should be less than 3.5 mm in diameter, as shown in the figure at the right. NOTE Test the screw head and shank size by inserting the screw into one of the keyhole shaped apertures of the Wall Mounting Plates, before it is screwed into the wall.
6.0 mm
3.5 mm
Do not screw the screws in all the way—leave a space of about 2 mm to allow room for sliding the wall mount panel between the wall and the screws. STEP 3: Once the screws are fixed in the wall, insert the four screw heads through the large parts of the keyhole-shaped apertures, and then slide Moxa Industrial Media Converter downwards, as indicated below. Tighten the four screws for added stability.
Wiring Requirements WARNING
Do not disconnect modules or wires unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous. The devices may only be connected to the supply voltage shown on the type plate. The devices are designed for operation with a safety extra-low voltage. Thus, they may only be connected to the supply voltage connections and to the signal contact with the safety extra-low voltages (SELV) in compliance with IEC950/ EN60950/ VDE0805.
WARNING
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2. These devices must be supplied by a SELV source as defined in the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC.
6
WARNING
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
This equipment has been evaluated as EEx nC IIC T4 equipment under DEMKO Certificate No. 03 ATEX 0324537U. Each module is marked with II 3G and is suitable for use in Zone 2 Explosive Atmospheres. Devices must be installed in a minimum IP 54 enclosure as defined in IEC 60529 and EN 60529.
This unit is a built-in type. During installation into certain end equipment, it must comply with fire enclosure stipulations of IEC 60950/EN60950, or similar statements.
Safety First! Be sure to disconnect the power cord before installing and/or wiring your Moxa Industrial Media Converter.
Safety First! Calculate the maximum possible current in each power wire and common wire. Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size. If the current goes above the maximum ratings, the wiring could overheat, causing serious damage to your equipment.
You should also pay attention to the following points: y Use separate paths to route wiring for power and devices. If power wiring and device wiring paths must cross, make sure the wires are perpendicular at the intersection point. NOTE: Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same wire conduit. To avoid interference, wires with different signal characteristics should be routed separately. y You can use the type of signal transmitted through a wire to determine which wires should be kept separate. The rule of thumb is that wiring that shares similar electrical characteristics can be bundled together. y Keep input wiring and output wiring separated. y It is strongly advised that you label wiring to all devices in the system when necessary.
Grounding Moxa Industrial Media Converter Grounding and wire routing help limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the ground connection from the ground screw to the grounding surface prior to connecting devices.
7
ATTENTION
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel.
Wiring the Alarm Contact The Alarm Contact is made up of the two middle contacts of the terminal block on IMC’s top panel. Refer to the next section for detailed instructions on how to connect the wires to the terminal block connector, and how to attach the terminal block connector to the terminal block receptor. In this section, we explain the meaning of the two contacts used to connect the Alarm Contact. FAULT: The two middle contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector are used to detect both power faults and port faults. The two FAULT wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open Top View circuit when: 1. IMC has lost power from one of the DC power inputs. FAULT
OR
Front View
2. One of the ports for which the corresponding PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not properly connected. If neither of these two conditions occurs, the Fault circuit will be closed.
Wiring the Redundant Power Inputs The top two contacts and the bottom two contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector on IMC’s top panel are used for IMC’s two DC inputs. Top and front views of one of the terminal block connectors are shown here.
Top View
Front View
STEP 1: Insert the negative/positive DC wires into the V-/V+ terminals. STEP 2: To keep the DC wires from pulling loose, use a small flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the wire-clamp screws on the front of the terminal block connector. STEP 3: Insert the plastic terminal block connector prongs into the terminal block receptor, which is located on IMC’s top panel. ATTENTION
Before connecting IMC to the DC power inputs, make sure the DC power source voltage is stable.
8
Communication Connections IMC-101 models have one 10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet port, and one 100BaseFX (SC or ST type connector) fiber port.
10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet Port Connection The 10/100BaseT(X) ports located on IMC’s front panel are used to connect to Ethernet-enabled devices. Below we show pinouts for both MDI (NIC-type) ports and MDI-X (HUB/Switch-type) ports, and also show cable wiring diagrams for straight-through and cross-over Ethernet cables. RJ45 (8-pin, MDI) Port Pinouts Pin
Signal
1 2 3 6
Tx+ TxRx+ Rx-
1
RJ45 (8-pin, MDI-X) Port Pinouts
8
Pin
Signal
1 2 3 6
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-
1
8
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Straight-Through Cable Wiring Straight-Through Cable
Switch Port RJ45 Connector Tx+ TxRx+ Rx-
NIC Port
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 Connector
Cable Wiring 3 6 1 2
3 6 1 2
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Cross-Over Cable Wiring Cross-Over Cable
Switch Port (NIC Port)
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 Connector (Rx+) (Rx-) (Tx+) (Tx-)
Tx+ TxRx+ Rx-
Switch Port (NIC Port) RJ45 Connector
Cable Wiring 3 6 1 2
1 2 3 6
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-
(Tx+) (Tx-) (Rx+) (Rx-)
100BaseFX Ethernet Port Connection The concept behind the SC port and cable is quite straightforward. Suppose you are connecting devices I and II. Contrary to electrical signals, optical signals do not require a circuit in order to transmit data. Consequently, one of the optical lines is used to transmit data from device I to device II, and the other optical line is used transmit data from device II to device I, for full-duplex transmission. All you need to remember is to connect the Tx (transmit) port of device I to the Rx (receive) port of device II, and the Rx (receive) port of device I to the Tx (transmit) port of device II. If you are making your own cable, we suggest labeling the two sides of the same line with the same letter (A-to-A and B-to-B, as shown below, or A1-to-A2 and B1-to-B2).
9
SC-Port Pinouts
SC-Port to SC-Port Cable Wiring A
A
B
B
Tx
Cable Wiring A B
Rx
ST-Port Pinouts
A B
ST-Port to ST-Port Cable Wiring A
A
Tx B
B
Cable Wiring A B
Rx
A B
ATTENTION
This is a Class 1 Laser/LED product. Do not stare into the Laser Beam.
Redundant Power Inputs Both power inputs can be connected simultaneously to live DC power sources. If one power source fails, the other live source acts as a backup, and automatically supplies all of Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s power needs.
Alarm Contact Moxa Industrial Media Converter has one Alarm Contact located on the top panel. For detailed instructions on how to connect the Alarm Contact power wires to the two middle contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector, see the “Wiring the Alarm Contact” section above. A typical scenario would be to connect the Fault circuit to a warning light located in the control room. The light can be set up to switch on when a fault is detected. The Alarm Contact has two terminals that form a Fault circuit for connecting to an alarm system. The two wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open circuit when (1) IMC has lost power from one of the DC power inputs, or (2) one of the ports for which the corresponding PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not properly connected. If neither of these two conditions occurs, the Fault circuit will be closed.
10
Dip Switch Setting IMC-101 series DIP switch Dip Switch 1 (Default: Off ) ON: Enables the PORT Alarm. If the port’s link fails, the relay will form an open circuit and the fault LED will light up. ON DIP Off: Disables the corresponding PORT Alarm. The relay will form a closed circuit and the Fault LED will never light up. Dip Switch 2 (Default: ON ) 1 2 3 ON: Enables full duplex for 100BaseFX Off: Disables full duplex for 100BaseFX Dip Switch 3 Reserved for future use To activate the updated DIP switch setting, power off and then power on the IMC.
LED Indicators The front panel of Moxa Industrial Media Converter contains several LED indicators. The function of each LED is described in the table below. LED PWR1
PWR2
FAULT
10M
100M (TP)
Color
State On Off
Power is not being supplied to power input PWR1
On
Power is being supplied to power input PWR2
Off
Power is not being supplied to power input PWR2
On
When the corresponding PORT alarm is enabled, and the port’s link is inactive.
Off
When the corresponding PORT alarm is enabled and the port’s link is active, or when the corresponding PORT alarm is disabled.
On
TP port’s 10 Mbps link is active
AMBER
AMBER
RED
GREEN
GREEN
Description Power is being supplied to power input PWR1
Blinking
Data is being transmitted at 10 Mbps
Off
TP Port’s 10 Mbps link is inactive
On
TP port’s 100 Mbps link is active
Blinking Off
Data is being transmitted at 100 Mbps 100BaseTX Port’s link is inactive
11
100M (FX)
FDX/COL
GREEN
GREEN
On
FX port’s 100 Mbps is active
Blinking
Data is being transmitted at 100 Mbps
Off
100BaseFX port is inactive
On
100BaseFX port is being transmitted at full duplex
Blinking
Collision occurs
Off
100BaseFX port is being transmitted at half duplex
Auto MDI/MDI-X Connection The Auto MDI/MDI-X function allows users to connect Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s 10/100BaseTX ports to any kind of Ethernet device, without paying attention to the type of Ethernet cable being used for the connection. This means that you can use either a straight-through cable or cross-over cable to connect IMC to Ethernet devices.
Dual Speed Functionality and Switching Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s 10/100 Mbps RJ45 switched port auto negotiates with the connected device for the fastest data transmission rate supported by both devices. All models of Moxa Industrial Media Converter are plug-and-play devices, so that software configuration is not required at installation, or during maintenance. The half/full duplex mode for the RJ45 switched ports is user dependent and changes (by auto-negotiation) to full or half duplex, depending on which transmission speed is supported by the attached device.
Auto-Negotiation and Speed Sensing All of Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s RJ45 Ethernet ports independently support auto-negotiation for transmission speed in the 10BaseT and 100BaseTX modes, with operation according to the IEEE 802.3u standard. This means that some nodes could be operating at 10 Mbps, while at the same time, other nodes are operating at 100 Mbps. Auto-negotiation takes place when an RJ45 cable connection is made, and then each time a LINK is enabled. Moxa Industrial Media Converter advertises its capability for using either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps transmission speeds, with the device at the other end of the cable expected to advertise similarly. Depending on what type of device is connected, this will result in agreement to operate at a speed of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. If a Moxa Industrial Media Converter RJ45 Ethernet port is connected to a non-negotiating device, it will default to 10 Mbps speed and half-duplex mode, as required by the IEEE 802.3u standard.
12
Specifications Technology Standards Interface RJ45 ports Fiber ports LED Indicators Dip Switch Alarm Contact
IEEE802.3, 802.3u, Link Fault Pass-Through 10/100BaseT(X) 100BaseFX (SC, ST connectors available) Power, Fault, 10/100M, Full Duplex/Collision, Port break alarm mask, 100BaseFx Full/Half duplex selection One relay output with current carrying capacity of 1A @ 24 VDC
Optical Fiber
Distance, km Wavelength, nm Min. TX Output, dBm Max. TX Output, dBm Sensitivity, dBm Recommended Diameter (Core/Cladding) μm Power Input Voltage Input Current (@24V) Connection Overload Current Protection Reverse Polarity Protection Mechanical Casing Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight Installation Environmental Operating Temperature
Multi mode 5 1310 -20 -14 -34 to -30 62.5/125 (1 dB/km, 800 MHz × km)
Single mode, 15 15 1310 -15 -6 -36 to -32 9/125
Single mode, 40 40 1310 -5 0 -36 to -32 9/125
Single mode, 80 80 1550 -5 0 -36 to -32 9/125
12 to 48 VDC; Redundant inputs 0.16 A Removable Terminal Block 1.1 A Present IP30 protection, aluminum case 53.6 x 135 x 105 mm 0.63 kg DIN-Rail, Wall Mounting 0 to 60℃ (32 to 140 oF), -40 to 75oC (-40 to 167oF) for – T models
Storage Temperature
-40 to 85℃ (-40 to 185 oF)
Ambient Relative Humidity Regulatory Approvals Safety Hazardous Location
5 to 90% (non-condensing)
EMI EMS
Shock Free Fall Vibration WARRANTY
UL60950, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, EN60950 UL/cUL Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D ATEX Class I, Zone 2, EEx nC IIC FCC Part 15, CISPR (EN55022) class A EN61000-4-2 (ESD), level 3 EN61000-4-3 (RS), level 3 EN61000-4-4 (EFT), level 3 EN61000-4-5 (Surge), level 3 EN61000-4-2 (CS), level 3 IEC 60068-2-27 IEC 60068-2-32 IEC 60068-2-6 5 years
13
Revision History Document Edition
Revision Date
2nd
June 15, 2004
Revision Details 1.
Updated the edition of this manual on the title page.
2.
Changed the Moxa logo on the title page.
3.
Added several “Attention” messages
4.
Added one product feature: Operating temperature ranges from 0 to 60°C, or extended operting temperature from –40 to 75°C for (-T) models.
3rd
July 1, 2004
1.
Revise 100BaseFX for fiber optic port of ST connector.
4th
Nov. 15, 2004
1.
Modify Optical Fiber specs.
2.
Improve resolution of figures.
Technical Support Contact Information www.moxa.com/support Moxa Americas: Toll-free: 1-888-669-2872 Tel: +1-714-528-6777 Fax: +1-714-528-6778
Moxa China (Shanghai office): Toll-free: 800-820-5036 Tel: +86-21-5258-9955 Fax: +86-10-6872-3958
Moxa Europe: Tel: +49-89-3 70 03 99-0 Fax: +49-89-3 70 03 99-99
Moxa Asia-Pacific: Tel: +886-2-8919-1230 Fax: +886-2-8919-1231
14
Extract from the online catalog
USLKG 5 Order No.: 0441504
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=0441504
Ground terminal block with screw connection, cross section: 0.2 - 4 mm², AWG: 24 - 10, width: 6.2 mm, color: Green-yellow
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/15/2005
Commercial data EAN
4017918002190
Pack
50 Pcs.
Customs tariff
85369010
Weight/Piece
0.02081 KG
Catalog page information
Page 281 (CL-2007)
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data General Note
When aligning with a feed-through terminal block with the same shape, an end cover must be interposed with insulation voltages of > 690 V
Number of levels
1
Number of connections
2
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 1 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
USLKG 5 Order No.: 0441504
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=0441504
Color
green-yellow
Insulating material
PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V0
Dimensions Width
6.2 mm
Length
42.5 mm
Height NS 35/7,5
47 mm
Height NS 35/15
54.5 mm
Height NS 32
52 mm
Technical data Rated surge voltage
8 kV
Pollution degree
3
Surge voltage category
III
Insulating material group
I
Connection in acc. with standard
IEC 60947-7-2
Open side panel
nein
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section solid max.
6 mm
Conductor cross section stranded min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section stranded max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
24
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
10
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
2.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
0.2 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
0.2 mm
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2 2
Page 2 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
USLKG 5 Order No.: 0441504
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=0441504
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
0.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
2.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
0.25 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
1.5 mm
Type of connection
Screw connection
Stripping length
8 mm
Screw thread
M3
Tightening torque, min
0.6 Nm
Tightening torque max
0.8 Nm
2
2
2
2
2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
ABS, BV, CCA, CSA, CUL, DNV, GOST, KEMA, KR, LR, PRS, RS, UL
Certification Ex:
IECEx, KEMA-EX
CSA AWG/kcmil
28-10
CUL AWG/kcmil
26-10
UL AWG/kcmil
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
26-10
Page 3 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
USLKG 5 Order No.: 0441504
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=0441504
Address
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Flachsmarktstr. 8 32825 Blomberg,Germany Phone +49 5235 3 00 Fax +49 5235 3 41200 http://www.phoenixcontact.com
© 2008 Phoenix Contact Technical modifications reserved;
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 4 / 4 Aug 18, 2008
Extract from the online catalog
UK 3 N Order No.: 3001501
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3001501
Universal terminal block with screw connection, cross section: 0,2- 2.5 mm², AWG: 24- 12, width: 5.2 mm, color: Gray
Product notes WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003
Commercial data EAN
4017918089955
Pack
50 Pcs.
Customs tariff
85369010
Weight/Piece
0.00772 KG
Catalog page information
Page 277 (CL-2007)
http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data General Number of levels
1
Number of connections
2
Color
gray
Insulating material
PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94
V2
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 1 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
UK 3 N Order No.: 3001501
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3001501
Dimensions Width
5.2 mm
Length
42.5 mm
Height NS 35/7,5
47 mm
Height NS 35/15
54.5 mm
Height NS 32
52 mm
Technical data Maximum load current
32 A (with 4 mm conductor cross section)
Rated surge voltage
8 kV
Pollution degree
3
Surge voltage category
III
Insulating material group
I
Connection in acc. with standard
IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN
32 A
Nominal voltage UN
800 V
Open side panel
ja
2
Connection data Conductor cross section solid min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section solid max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section stranded min.
0.2 mm
Conductor cross section stranded max.
2.5 mm
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.
24
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max
12
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.
4 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.
0.25 mm
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.
2.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.
0.2 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.
0.2 mm
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
2
2 2 2
2
2
2
2
2 2 2
Page 2 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
UK 3 N Order No.: 3001501
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3001501
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.
0.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.
1.5 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.
0.25 mm
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.
1.5 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, solid max.
4 mm
Cross-section with insertion bridge, stranded max.
2.5 mm
Type of connection
Screw connection
Stripping length
8 mm
Screw thread
M3
Tightening torque, min
0.6 Nm
Tightening torque max
0.8 Nm
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
Certificates / Approvals
Certification
ABS, BV, CCA, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, GOST, KEMA, KR, LR, NK, PRS, RS, UL
Certification Ex:
CUL-EX, FM, GL-EX, IECEx, KEMA-EX, UL-EX
CSA Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
20 A
AWG/kcmil
28-12
CUL Nominal voltage UN
600 V
Nominal current IN
20 A
AWG/kcmil
28-12
UL Nominal voltage UN
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
600 V
Page 3 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
UK 3 N Order No.: 3001501
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3001501
Nominal current IN
20 A
AWG/kcmil
28-12
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 4 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
UK 3 N Order No.: 3001501
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3001501
Address
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Flachsmarktstr. 8 32825 Blomberg,Germany Phone +49 5235 3 00 Fax +49 5235 3 41200 http://www.phoenixcontact.com
© 2008 Phoenix Contact Technical modifications reserved;
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Page 5 / 5 Aug 18, 2008
DEN-LAB/Krö/Schü 22.09.1998 Page 1(5)
DATA SHEET
Article:
Universal ground terminal block
Type:
USLKG 3
Part-No.:
0441083
Test specification:
IEC 60947-7-2:1995
Please note the "General usage regulations for technical data sheets".
DS-No.: 0468
Revision-No.: 06
Data sheet
DEN-LAB/Krö/Schü 22.09.1998 Page 2(5)
USLKG 3
Description Ground terminal block with screw connection. Foot part for contact on rail (busbar) NS 32 acc. to EN 50035:1978 or NS 35 acc. to EN 50022:1977 (except NS 35/15-2,3).
Rated data Rated insulation voltage:
800 V*
Rated cross-section:
2,5 mm2
Technical data Rated connecting capacity - rigid (solid or stranded): - flexible: - flexible with ferrule: (without plastic sleeve) - flexible with ferrule: (with plastic sleeve) - flexible with TWIN-ferrule: - AWG: Multi-wire connection (2 conductors of the same cross-section) - rigid (solid or stranded): - flexible: - flexible with ferrule: (without plastic sleeve)
0,2 mm2 up to 4 mm2 0,2 mm2 up to 2,5 mm2 0,25 mm2 up to 2,5 mm2 0,25 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2 0,5 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2 24 up to 12
0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2 0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2 0,25 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
Gauge (IEC 60947-1:1988):
A3
Stripping length:
8 mm
* When mounting next to an opened housing of a feed through modular terminal block of the same type and size it must be closed with an end cover, if the insulation voltage is expected to exceed >690 V.
DS-No.: 0468
Rev.-No.: 06
Data sheet
DEN-LAB/Krö/Schü 22.09.1998 Page 3(5)
USLKG 3 Technical data (with UK 3) Clearances and creepage distances Basic requirements - rated impulse withstand voltage: - pollution degree: - installation category: - insulating material group: - supply system: Minimum clearance: (case A, inhomogeneous field) Shortest clearance - versus neighboured terminal block: Minimum creepage distance: Shortest creepage distance - versus neighboured terminal block: Voltage resistance: 1 min. power-frequency withstand voltage(³3,5 kV) - versus neighboured terminal block:
8 kV 3 III I/CTI 600 unearthed 8
mm
10,3 mm with end cover 8,5 mm without end cover 10
mm
10,3 mm with end cover 8,5 mm without end cover passed 6 kV
Technical data Test of mechanical properties:
passed
Test of mechanical strength of terminals: - screw thread clamping screw: fixing screw: - tightening torque clamping screw: fixing screw:
passed
Testing for damage to and accidental loosening of conductors of a terminal block: (flexion test) - conductor cross-section/mass: - speed of rotation: - revolutions:
DS-No.: 0468
M3 M 2,5 0,6 - 0,8 Nm 0,5 - 0,6 Nm passed 0,2 mm2/0,3 kg 2,5 mm2/0,7 kg 4 mm2/0,9 kg 10 rpm 135
Rev.-No.: 06
Data sheet
DEN-LAB/Krö/Schü 22.09.1998 Page 4(5)
USLKG 3 Technical data
Pull-out test: - conductor cross-section/pull-out force: (0,2 mm2/³10 N) (2,5 mm2/³50 N) (4 mm2/³60 N)
20 N 100 N 120 N
Attachment of the terminal block on its support: - rails: - force (³1 N):
passed NS 32/NS 35 5 N
Voltage drop (I = 2,4 A/A = 2,5 mm2) - terminal/terminal (£3,2 mV): - terminal block/mounting surface (£6,4 mV):
1,2 mV 2 mV
Short-time withstand current: (Ik = 0,48 kA/A = 4 mm2)
passed
passed
Additional tests (with UK 3)
Insulation resistance (DIN IEC 60512-2:1994-05) - versus neighboured terminal block:
1012 W
Material specifications
Metal parts - live parts: - surface plating:
DS-No.: 0468
copper alloy nickel plated
Rev.-No.: 06
Data sheet
DEN-LAB/Krö/Schü 22.09.1998 Page 5(5)
USLKG 3
Material specifications
Insulating material Type of insulating material:
polyamide 6.6
Colour:
green/yellow
Quality features of insulating material
- Rel. temperature index (Elec., UL 746 B):
130 °C
- Temperature at operation (IEC 60216-1) in heat: in cold:
120 °C -40 °C
- Resistance to tracking (IEC 60112/DIN VDE 0303-1):
CTI 600
- Burning behaviour UL 94:
V0
Enclosure: Portrait
- Technical modifications reserved -
PHOENIX CONTACT DEN-Laboratory
DS-No.: 0468
Rev.-No.: 06
Data sheet
DEN-LAB/Krö/Schü 22.09.1998
USLKG 3
Portrait
Dimensions Terminal width:
5,2
mm
Terminal height (NS 32):
52
mm
Terminal height (NS 35/7,5):
47
mm
Terminal height (NS 35/15):
54,5 mm
Terminal length:
42,5 mm
Weight (approx.):
17,6 g
DS-No.: 0468
Rev.-No.: 06
EV-FEA/Ni/Schu 07.11.2003 Page 1(5)
D A T A
S H E E T
Article:
Universal terminal block
Type:
UK 3 N
Part-No.:
3001501
Test specifications:
IEC 947-7-1:1989
Note:
This data sheet also covers the following variant(s).
No.
type designation or title
part-no.
1
UK 3 N BU
3001514
Please note the "General usage regulations for technical data sheets".
DS-No.: 0558
Revision-No.: 09
Data sheet
EV-FEA/Ni/Schu 07.11.2003 Page 2(5)
UK 3 N
Description Straight-through terminal block with screw connection. Mounting on rail NS 32 or NS 35 acc. to DIN EN 60715:2001-09.
Rated data Rated insulation voltage:
800 V
Rated current:
24 A
Rated cross-section:
2,5 mm2
Technical data Rated connecting capacity - rigid (solid or stranded): - flexible:
0,2 0,2
mm2 mm2 up to 4 2 mm up to 2,5 mm2
0,25 mm2 up to 2,5 mm2
- flexible with ferrule: (without plastic sleeve) - flexible with ferrule: (with plastic sleeve) - flexible with TWIN ferrule:
0,5
- AWG:
24 up to 12
Multi-wire connection (2 conductors of the same cross-section) - rigid (solid or stranded): - flexible: - flexible with ferrule: (without plastic sleeve)
0,25 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2 mm2
0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2 0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2 0,25 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
Gauge (IEC 947-1:1988):
A3
Stripping length:
8 mm
DS-No.: 0558
mm2 up to 1
Rev.-No.: 09
Data sheet
EV-FEA/Ni/Schu 07.11.2003 Page 3(5)
UK 3 N
Technical data Voltage drop (£3,2 mV): (I = 2,4 A/A = 2,5 mm2)
1,2 mV
Max. current carrying capacity: (A = 4 mm2)
32 A
Temperature-rise test (£45 K): (I = 24 A/A = 2,5 mm2)
40 K
Short-time withstand current test: (Ik = 0,3 kA/A = 2,5 mm2)
passed
Voltage resistance: 1 min. power-frequency withstand voltage (³3 kV) - between adjacent terminal blocks: - between terminal block and rail NS 32: - between terminal block and rail NS 35:
passed 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV
Clearances and creepage distances Basic requirements - rated impulse withstand voltage: - pollution degree: - installation category: - insulating material group: - supply system: Minimum clearance: (case A, inhomogeneous field) Shortest clearance - between adjacent terminal blocks: - between terminal block and rail NS 32: - between terminal block and rail NS 35: Minimum creepage distance: Shortest creepage distance - between adjacent terminal blocks: - between terminal block and rail NS 32: - between terminal block and rail NS 35:
DS-No.: 0558
8 kV 3 III I unearthed 8
mm
12,5 mm 15,7 mm 12,5 mm 10 mm 12,5 mm 15,7 mm 12,5 mm
Rev.-No.: 09
Data sheet
EV-FEA/Ni/Schu 07.11.2003 Page 4(5)
UK 3 N Technical data Testing for damage to and accidental loosening of conductors of a terminal block: (flexion test) - conductor cross-section/mass: - speed of rotation: - revolutions:
passed 0,2 mm2/0,3 kg 2,5 mm2/0,7 kg 4 mm2/0,9 kg 10 rpm 135
Pull-out test: - conductor cross-section/pull-out force: (0,2 mm2/³10 N) (2,5 mm2/³50 N) (4 mm2/³60 N)
passed 20 N 100 N 120 N
Torque test: - screw thread: - tightening torque:
passed M3 0,6 - 0,8 Nm
Attachment of the terminal block on its support: - rails: - force (³1 N):
passed NS 32/NS 35 5N
Additional tests Insulation resistance (DIN IEC 512-2:1994-05) - between adjacent terminal blocks: - between terminal block and rail NS 32: - between terminal block and rail NS 35:
1012 W 1012 W 1012 W
Electric shock protection (DIN VDE 0106-100:1983-03) - back of hand safety: - finger safety:
guaranteed guaranteed
Current carrying capacity of - insertion bridge (EBL 2-5): - fixed bridge bar (FBRI 2-5 N):
24 A 30 A
Material specifications Metal parts - live parts: - surface plating:
DS-No.: 0558
copper alloy tin plated
Rev.-No.: 09
Data sheet
EV-FEA/Ni/Schu 07.11.2003 Page 5(5)
UK 3 N
Material specifications Insulating material Type of insulating material:
polyamide
Colour:
grey blue
Quality features of insulating material - Rel. temperature index (Elec., UL 746 B):
125 °C
- Temperature at operation conditions (DIN IEC 60216-1/DIN VDE 0304 part 21) in heat: in cold:
115 °C -40 °C
- Resistance to tracking (DIN IEC 60112/VDE 0303 part 1):
CTI 600
- Burning behaviour UL 94:
V2
Enclosure: Portrait
- Technical modifications reserved -
PHOENIX CONTACT EV-FEA
DS-No.: 0558
Rev.-No.: 09
Data sheet
EV-FEA/Ni/Schu 07.11.2003
UK 3 N
Portrait
Dimensions
Terminal width:
5,2
mm
Terminal height (NS 32):
52
mm
Terminal height (NS 35/7,5):
47
mm
Terminal height (NS 35/15):
54,5 mm
Terminal length:
42,5 mm
Weight (approx.):
7,2
DS-No.: 0558
g
Rev.-No.: 09
GE Fanuc Automation Industrial Computers
WOLVERINE Industrial Computer Hardware Users Manual MAN00055 Rev. E
April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use. In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.
Caution Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein, which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply. The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. Alarm Master CIMPLICITY CIMPLICITY 90–ADS CIMSTAR Field Control GEnet
Genius Helpmate Logicmaster Modelmaster Motion Mate ProLoop
PROMACRO PowerMotion PowerTRAC Series 90 Series Five Series One
©Copyright 2002 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Series Six Series Three VersaMax VersaPro VuMaster Workmaster
Preface
Content of This Manual This manual describes the features and operation of the following Wolverine industrial computers: Standard Wolverine - 15.0" Industrial computer with Windows 2000 or XP Wolverine with heater option - 15.0" Industrial computer with Windows 2000 or XP - includes heaters and front keypad overlay
Related Publications
MAN00055 Rev. E
iii
Contents
Wolverine Industrial Computer Features .................................... 1-1 Feature Summary.............................................................................................................. 1-3 Standard Features ....................................................................................................... 1-3 Optional Features ....................................................................................................... 1-4 Back I/O Plate ............................................................................................................ 1-4 Gland Plate................................................................................................................. 1-6 Power Input ................................................................................................................ 1-8 Standard I/O ............................................................................................................... 1-8 Network Interface....................................................................................................... 1-8 Optional I/O ............................................................................................................... 1-8 Heaters ....................................................................................................................... 1-9 Front Overlay Keypad................................................................................................ 1-9
Hardware Installation.......................................................................................... 2-1 Installation Guidelines ...................................................................................................... 2-1 Warnings for Hazardous Location Approvals .................................................................. 2-2
Connectors & Cabling .......................................................................................... 3-1 Power Input....................................................................................................................... 3-1 Battery Backup ................................................................................................................. 3-3 Connector Layout ............................................................................................................. 3-4 Printer Port LPT1.............................................................................................................. 3-5 Serial Communication Ports ............................................................................................. 3-6 USB Ports ......................................................................................................................... 3-7 Network Interface ............................................................................................................. 3-7 Remote Dimming Connector............................................................................................ 3-8 4-20 mA Data Input.......................................................................................................... 3-8 Horn Output...................................................................................................................... 3-9 VGA Port........................................................................................................................ 3-10 Mouse & Keyboard Ports ............................................................................................... 3-11
System Operation ...................................................................................................... 4-1 Setup ................................................................................................................................. 4-1 Powering Up the Wolverine Industrial Computer...................................................... 4-2 Powering Down the Wolverine Industrial Computer................................................. 4-2 System Peripherals ........................................................................................................... 4-2 Removable Storage Media ......................................................................................... 4-3 PCMCIA Slots ........................................................................................................... 4-4 MAN00055 Rev. E
v
Contents PCMCIA Slots ........................................................................................................... 4-5 Compact Flash Socket................................................................................................ 4-5 External Keyboard and Mouse ......................................................................................... 4-6 Graphic System................................................................................................................. 4-6 Touch Screen .................................................................................................................... 4-6 Touch Screen Driver for Windows................................................................................... 4-6 Communications............................................................................................................... 4-7 Heater Operation............................................................................................................... 4-7 Front Overlay Keypad ...................................................................................................... 4-8 Shutting Down the Computer ........................................................................................... 4-9
BIOS Settings ................................................................................................................. 5-1 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ........................................................... 6-1 Self-Test Diagnostics........................................................................................................ 6-1 System Test and Initialization.................................................................................... 6-1 System Configuration Verification ............................................................................ 6-1 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................ 6-2 Power up .................................................................................................................... 6-2 Display ....................................................................................................................... 6-3 Memory...................................................................................................................... 6-3 External PS/2 Mouse.................................................................................................. 6-3 Keyboard.................................................................................................................... 6-4 Communications ........................................................................................................ 6-4 COM Port Connection ...............................................................................................6-4 Network Communications .........................................................................................6-4 Printing ......................................................................................................................6-5
Corrective Actions............................................................................................................ 6-6 CMOS Checksum Error ............................................................................................. 6-6
Technical Data ............................................................................................................. A-1 Mechanical Specifications ............................................................................................... A-1 Front Assembly ......................................................................................................... A-1 Main Chassis ............................................................................................................. A-1 Gland Plate................................................................................................................ A-1 Functional Specifications ................................................................................................ A-2
Agency Approvals, Government Regulations & General Specifications .................................B-1 Agency Approvals......................................................................................................B-1 Government Regulations............................................................................................B-2 General Specifications ...............................................................................................B-3 vi
WOLVERINE Industrial Computer Hardware User’s Manual–April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
Contents DRW00245 .......................................................................................................................................B-4
MAN00055 Rev. E
Contents
vii
Chapter
Wolverine Industrial Computer Features
1 The Wolverine industrial computers are high performance workstations designed primarily for use in Hazardous Location and Harsh Environment running on Windows 2000® or XP® operating systems. Each member of the Wolverine industrial computer family is a fully self-contained PC-compatible computer with a built-in flat screen display and resistive touch screen. The unit is housed in a rugged metal case to protect the system against dust, water, and damage. Wolverine industrial computers are available as either 24VDC units that accept a range of 18–30 VDC, or as 120/220VAC units that accept a range of 100-240 VAC. Wolverine computers can be ordered with a heater option for extended temperature operation and a front keypad overlay. The unit is supplied completely assembled and requires only mounting and connecting.
MAN00055 Rev. E
1-1
1
Figure 1.1 Standard Wolverine
Figure 1.2 Wolverine with Heater Option
1-2
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
1
Feature Summary When you purchase a Wolverine, you receive: • • •
Industrial computer with the operating system software installed. Installation hardware Microsoft Windows documentation, software distribution, Certificate of Authenticity and license agreement
Standard Features Feature
MAN00055 Rev. E
Description
Operating Systems:
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Embedded XP
CPU
Pentium-M processor 1.6GHz
Cache
1MB L2
Two PCMCIA Slots
16 bit PC Cards
Hard disk
40GB (minimum)
RAM
512MB, DDR266 installed by factory.
Display
15.0” Color Active Matrix TFT –XGA 1024 x 768 resolution
Touch Screen
Resistive
Parallel port
LPT1
Serial ports
Com1 (RS232), Com2 (RS232/485)
USB ports
Two USB 2.0,
Communications
10/100 Ethernet (RJ-45)
Keyboard port
PS/2
Mouse port
PS/2
PC/104 connector
Populated by PCMCIA PC/104 adapter
Panel dimming
I/O Plate Dimming knob (Standard Wolverine only) Front Keypad Dimming buttons (Wolverine with heater option only)
ATX Switch
Momentary push button
VGA Port
External VGA Port (Wolverine with heater option only)
Chapter 1 Wolverine Industrial Computer Features
1-3
1
Optional Features The following features are optional. Contact your GE Fanuc sales representative for details. •
Additional DDR (DIMMs) (Maximum upgrade to: 2GB)
•
Higher/Lower speed CPU
•
Enhanced option for Transflective Daylight readable TFT.
•
Compact Flash Drive (Note: Refer to Appendix B for important Shock and Vibration specifications)
•
RS 422/485 (Bios selectable - Com2 only)
•
Two Additional RS232 Ports (Com3, Com4)
•
Remote Dimmer cable (Standard Wolverine only)
•
Battery backup – 20 minutes (Only available on DC units without heater option)
•
Mounting – VESA, Panel Mount, Yoke
•
NEMA4 external connections (Gland Plate used to achieve NEMA 4 & Hazardous Location approvals)
•
Wireless Ethernet - 802.11b
•
4-20mA Data Input (Standard Wolverine only)
•
Horn Output
•
2nd 10/100 Ethernet Port (RJ-45)
•
Heater Option (not available on Standard Wolverine)
Back I/O Plate The Wolverine industrial computers are equipped with a back I/O plate. The back I/O plate on the Standard Wolverine units provide access to three serial ports, one printer port, one PS/2 keyboard, one PS/2 mouse, two USB 2.0 ports, two Ethernet RJ45 ports, Dimming POT, Remote POT connector, ATX power button, input power terminal block, fuse, and horn output terminal block. The back I/O plate on the Wolverine units with heater option provide access to four serial ports, one printer port, one PS/2 keyboard, one PS/2 mouse, two USB 2.0 ports, two Ethernet RJ45 ports, input power terminal block, fuse, horn output terminal block, and VGA port. Figures 1.2 and 1.3 indicate I/O Plates used on Wolverine units.
1-4
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
1
Figure 1.3 – Back I/O Plate - Standard Wolverine
Figure 1.4 – Back I/O Plate - Wolverine with heater option
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 1 Wolverine Industrial Computer Features
1-5
1
Gland Plate Figures 1.5 and 1.6 indicate Gland Plates used on Wolverine units. All cabling will access the back I/O plate through a gland plate.
Note Modification of Gland Plate invalidates the Type 4/4X enclosure rating.
Two NEMA4 keyboard and mouse connectors, the ATX switch, and 4 glands are available on the standard gland plate shown in Figure 1.5.
Figure 1.5
1-6
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
1 Two NEMA4 keyboard and mouse connectors, the ATX switch, one gland, one NEMA4 USB connector, and one Data Input connector are available on the optional gland plate shown in Figure 1.6.
Figure 1.6
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 1 Wolverine Industrial Computer Features
1-7
1
Power Input The input power consists of a three terminal power block. For DC-powered Wolverines, the terminal denoted by the (+) sign is for the +24V, the (-) terminal is for the return of the power supply, and the ground symbol denotes case ground. For AC-powered Wolverines, the terminal denoted by the character “L” is for line voltage, the “N” terminal is for the neutral AC return, and “G” denotes case ground. The “ATX” switch near the terminal block powers on the unit when depressed. This switch tells the motherboard to turn on the main power supply. Depressing the switch for 4 seconds shuts down the unit. The “ATX” switch on the gland plate provides the same functions. Best practice is for the operating system to power down the unit. Note: The “ATX” switch for Wolverine units with heater option is located on the front keypad overlay.
Standard I/O The Wolverine industrial computer provides the following I/O interface channels: •
4 RS-232 serial ports. The user may request for the optional 422/485 port in place of RS232 for COM2. COM ports are accessible from the back I/O plate. Resources for COM3 and COM4 are used by PC/104 boards such as the wireless Ethernet and A/D cards used in Wolverines having wireless Ethernet or 4-20mA Data Input option; so, COM3 and COM4 are not available to the user when the wireless Ethernet or 4-20mA Data Input option is ordered. Com 4 consumes the cutout normally reserved for Remote pot/Gland ATX switch. Remote pot/Gland ATX switch is not available when COM 4 is ordered.
•
One enhanced parallel port. LPT1 is located on the back I/O plate.
•
Two USB 2.0 Ports are accessible through the back I/O plate.
•
VGA port is accessible through the back I/O plate. (Wolverine with heater option only)
Network Interface The Wolverine includes an auto-sensing 10/100 Ethernet adapter that provides a RJ-45 connector for unshielded twisted pair cable. As an option, the Wolverine also includes 802.11b wireless Ethernet with external antenna that is capable of data transfers up to 11 mbps. Also optional is a 2nd 10/100 Ethernet port.
Optional I/O The Wolverine industrial computer provides the following I/O interface options:
1-8
•
802.11b wireless Ethernet with external antenna that is capable of data transfers up to 11 mbps.
•
4-20mA Data Input
•
Horn Output
•
External USB
•
2nd 10/100 Ethernet Port (RJ-45)
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
1 Heaters Wolverine computers can be ordered with a heater option for extended temperature operation. AC units are equipped with AC heaters that are powered through the AC input terminal block. DC units are equipped with DC heaters that are powered through the DC input terminal block. Battery backup is not available on DC units with heaters installed.
Front Overlay Keypad Wolverine units with heater option feature a front overlay keypad. The keypad provides an ATX power button and dimming buttons for changing the backlight intensity. LEDs embedded in the overlay provide indicators for system status and various I/O activities. These will be discussed in further detail in Chapter 4 – System Operation.
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 1 Wolverine Industrial Computer Features
1-9
Chapter
Hardware Installation
2 This chapter describes the procedures for the safe location and securing of the Wolverine industrial computer. The Wolverine industrial computers have been designed to ensure simple installation of the system.
Installation Guidelines •
This unit is designed to operate in an outdoor environment.
•
The computer is furnished with four ¼ -20 mounting holes two on each side and eight ¼-20 VESA mounting holes on the back of the Heat Sink. A panel mount option is also available (see Fig. 2.3 for cutout dimensions and mounting instructions)
•
When panel mounting, insert unit through front of panel and install panel mounting clips as shown in Figure 2.3. Torque clips from 5 to 10 in-lbs.
•
The mounting method must be able to support the weight of the unit under shock and vibration conditions for the given application.
•
To insure proper operation take care not to install unit in tight confined areas, during mid day operations when the effects of solar heating are at peak radiance, surrounding walls and surfaces can reflect additional solar energy and cause the unit to over heat and shut down until temperatures fall back to normal operating conditions.
•
The unit must have a minimum clearance of six inches per side and back.
•
The unit is available with optional pass through glands for cable connections (required to maintain enclosure protection rating). These glands are watertight and must be tightened to two complete turns after hand tightening to keep water out. The customer must pass the cables through the glands and wire the associated I/O connectors to the end of these cables.
See Figures 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 for illustrations and dimensions of Standard Wolverine units. See Figure 2.4 for illustrations and dimensions of Wolverine units with heater option.
MAN00055 Rev. E
2-1
2
Warnings for Hazardous Location Approvals •
Input and output wiring methods must be in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods and in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.
•
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or nonhazardous locations only.
•
WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2.
•
WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not connect or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
Do not install or remove SCSI devices or cards while circuit is alive.
•
Gland Plate shall be installed for Division 2 applications.
•
(DC version) Power supply is to be connected to an isolated secondary voltage which is separated from the primary circuit by reinforced or double insulation. The power supply shall be properly bonded to the main earthing terminal in the end product. Power supply is to be connected to no greater than 50A maximum.
•
(AC version) Product shall be connected to no greater than a 50 Amp branch circuit.
•
The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Keep away from children.
Note
2-2
•
The proper method for removing power from the unit is to switch off power at the circuit breaker.
•
See the control drawing located in Appendix B for non-incendive field wiring parameters.
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
2 Figure 2.1
MAN00055 Rev. E
Standard Wolverine unit with rear exit gland plate
Chapter2 Hardware Installation
2-3
2 Figure 2.2
2-4
Standard Wolverine unit with bottom exit gland plate
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
2 Figure 2.3
MAN00055 Rev. E
Panel Mount Option – Standard Wolverine
Chapter2 Hardware Installation
2-5
2
Figure 2.4
2-6
Wolverine unit with heater option - bottom exit gland plate
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
2 Figure 2.5
MAN00055 Rev. E
Panel Mount Option – Wolverine with heaters
Chapter2 Hardware Installation
2-7
Chapter
Connectors & Cabling
3 This chapter describes the connector layout and cabling on the Wolverine industrial computers. All power and communication connectors are described in this section. Communication connectors are provided from the main CPU motherboard. These connectors are located on the back I/O plate. If the gland plate is installed, the cabling to the I/O plate will be accessed through the glands. •
PS/2 Keyboard (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (gland plate)
•
PS/2 Mouse port (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (gland plate)
•
Three serial ports, COM1, COM2, COM3 (back I/O plate).
•
Parallel port (back I/O plate)
•
Two USB 2.0 ports (back I/O plate), one USB NEMA4 connector (optional gland plate)
•
Two Ethernet 10/100 base T ports (RJ-45) (back I/O plate)
•
Remote POT/PWR (back I/O plate)
•
4-20mA Data Input (back I/O plate), military connector (optional gland plate)
•
Horn Output (back I/O plate)
•
VGA port (back I/O plate)
Power Input Wolverine industrial computers are available as DC-powered or AC-powered. DC-powered Wolverines are powered by 24VDC, and will operate from 18-30VDC. AC-powered Wolverines are powered by 120/220VAC, and will operate from 100-240VAC. The unit is powered on through the ATX button. The power supply input to the industrial computer uses a terminal block that shall be connected to no greater than a 50 AMP branch circuit. Connect earth ground to the ground terminal on the terminal block. The terminal block is rated for wire size 12-22 AWG and has a torque rating of 7 in-lb. max. To remove power from the unit, the proper method is to switch off power at the circuit breaker. For power supply details, refer to specifications in Appendix A. There is one user-serviceable fuse on the back I/O plate. DC-powered Wolverines without heaters come equipped with a 5A 250V 5x20mm fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 217-005. AC-powered Wolverines without MAN00055 Rev. E
3-1
3 heaters come equipped with a 2A 250V 5x20mm fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 215002AC-powered Wolverines with heaters come equipped with an 8A 250V 5x20mm fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 215008. DC-powered Wolverines with heaters come equipped with a 25A 32V 3AG fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 312025P.
3-2
Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
3
Battery Backup DC-powered Wolverines may be ordered with an optional internal 24V battery to act as a battery backup when power is interrupted to the unit. The battery backup will automatically switch to battery power when the external DC power is removed. Battery backup will support the unit for at least 20 minutes at full load. To prevent loss of data, it is recommended to shut the unit down if external DC power has been removed. The battery charging board charges the battery when the unit is powered on. A completely discharged battery will take approximately 4-5 hours to reach its peak charge. The battery charging board will terminate the charge after the battery has reached its peak charge. Battery backup is not available on Wolverine DC units with heaters installed.
Figure 3.1
Battery Backup System:
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 3 Connectors & Cabling
3-3
3
Connector Layout Caution External devices should not be powered up when connecting to communication ports.
Back I/O Plate Connectors Glands on the gland plate allow cabling to access the back I/O plate connectors. The back I/O plate consists of:
3-4
•
2 USB ports
•
ATX switch
•
4 RS232 ports – Com 1-4
•
LPT port
•
Input Power Terminal block
•
Keyboard connector
•
Mouse Connector
•
Dimming Knob
•
Remote dimming connector
•
2 RJ45 Ethernet ports
•
Horn Output
•
VGA Port
Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
3
Printer Port LPT1 A 25-pin D-type female printer port connector is located on the back I/O plate and labeled accordingly. In order to provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the USB cables must be shielded.
Figure 3.2
Pin
MAN00055 Rev. E
Assignment
Pin
Assignment
1
Strobe
10
Acknowledge
2
Data Bit 0
11
Busy
3
Data Bit 1
12
Paper End
4
Data Bit 2
13
Select Out
5
Data Bit 3
14
Auto Feed XT
6
Data Bit 4
15
Error
7
Data Bit 5
16
Initialize Printer
8
Data Bit 6
17
Select In (from Printer)
9
Data Bit 7
18 to 25
Ground
Chapter 3 Connectors & Cabling
3-5
3
Serial Communication Ports 3 RS232 COM ports (1-3) are available on the back I/O plate. COM3 and COM4 are used by PC/104 boards (such as the wireless Ethernet and 4-20mA Data Input) and are not available to the user when a PC/104 board option is ordered. Com 4 consumes the cutout normally reserved for Remote pot/Gland ATX switch. Remote pot/Gland ATX switch is not available when COM 4 is ordered. The standard 9-pin D-sub connector pin out is shown below.
Figure 3.3
RS-232C Name
Pin
Assignment
CF
1
DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
BB
2
RX (Receive Data)
BA
3
TX (Transmit Data)
CD
4
DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
AB
5
GND (Signal Ground)
CC
6
DSR (Data Set Ready)
CA
7
RTS (Request to Send)
CB
8
CTS (Clear to Send)
CE
9
RI (Ring Indicator)
RS485 Option: Only COM2 can be selected for RS485 through SW1 located near the bios chip. To select RS485 set SW1 to the following: (1) On (2) On (3) Off (4) On
Pin 1 2 5
3-6
Assignment RS485 TXRS485 TX+ GND
Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
3
RS422 Option: Only COM2 can be selected for RS422 through SW1 located near the bios chip. To select RS422 set SW1 to the following: (1) On (2) On (3) On (4) On
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
Assignment TXTX+ RX+ RXGND
Pin 6 7 8 9
Assignment RTSRTS+ CTS+ CTS-
Shielding In order to provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the serial cables must be shielded.
USB Ports The two USB ports are 2.0 compliant and are located on the back I/O plate. In order to provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the USB cables must be shielded.
Network Interface An RJ-45 Ethernet connector is available on the back I/O plate for connecting standard, unshielded twisted pair cable. In order to meet EMC Directive, EN61000-4-6 test, the included ferrite (P/N 7COI0-0102-1500) must be installed on the Ethernet cable. The cable should be wrapped 2 times through the ferrite with location as close as possible to the Wolverine RJ-45 connector. The Wolverine also offers 802.11b, 2.4GHz wireless with an external antenna attached to the top of the unit. A 2nd RJ-45 Ethernet connector is also offered as an option.
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 3 Connectors & Cabling
3-7
3
Remote Dimming Connector Remote dimming is available by cabling a potentiometer to the Remote Pot connector. Maximum cable length is limited to less than 3 meters.
Figure 3.4
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
Assignment Low Wiper High
Pin 6 7 8 9
Assignment
4-20 mA Data Input 4-20mA Data Input is available by cabling either to the Remote Pot DB9 connector on the back I/O plate, or to the 3-pin military connector on the optional gland plate. Maximum cable length is limited to less than 30 meters. In the presence of severe RF interference (EN61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to 2% of full scale.
Figure 3.5
Pin 6 7
Assignment EXC RTN
Pin A B C
Assignment EXC RTN Chassis Gnd
EXC provides +20V output from the Wolverine for excitation of a remote transducer. RTN is the return input to the Wolverine for current returned from the transducer.
3-8
Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
3 Shielding In order to provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the Data Input cable must be shielded.
Horn Output The Horn Output is available on the back I/O plate through a terminal block. The terminal block is rated for wire size 12-22 AWG and has a torque rating of 7 in-lb. max. For DC-powered Wolverines, the terminal denoted by the (+) sign is +VDC switched through an internal relay, the () terminal is DC return. For AC-powered Wolverines, the terminal denoted by the (+) sign is AC Line voltage switched through an internal relay; the (-) terminal is AC return. Maximum cable length is limited to less than 3 meters.
Figure 3.6
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 3 Connectors & Cabling
3-9
3
VGA Port The VGA port is available on the back I/O plate. The standard 15-pin D-sub connector pin out is shown below.
Figure 3.7
Pin
3-10
Assignment
Pin
Assignment
1
Red
9
+5V
2
Green
10
Ground
3
Blue
11
Pull-Up
4
N/C
12
DDC Data
5
V Ground
13
HSYNC
6
V Ground
14
VSYNC
7
V Ground
15
DDC Clock
8
V Ground
Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
3
Mouse & Keyboard Ports NEMA4 connectors are available on the gland plate to allow connections to a keyboard and mouse without removal of the gland plate. This temporary maintenance connection is intended for such things as initial setup, downloading data, uploading software, etc. Two PS/2 ports are also available on the back I/O plate and labeled accordingly. This temporary maintenance connection is intended for such things as initial setup, downloading data, uploading software, etc. NEMA4 Keyboard connector:
Figure 3.8
Pin
Signal
1
KB Data
2
NC
3
GND
4
+5V
5
KB Clock
6
NC
NEMA4 Mouse connector:
Pin
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 3 Connectors & Cabling
Signal
1
Mouse Data
2
NC
3
GND
4
+5V
5
Mouse Clock
6
NC
3-11
Chapter
System Operation
4 This chapter provides details of system operation. The following topics are covered: •
Setup
•
System Peripherals
•
External Keyboard and Mouse
•
Graphic System
•
Operator Interfaces
•
Communications
•
Heater Option
•
Shutdown
Setup This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or nonhazardous locations only. Before you attempt to power up the system for the first time, inspect the unit for loose or damaged components. Before you power up your system, you may want to attach a standard PS/2-type keyboard and mouse to the external ports on the industrial computer. Most configuration activities that you perform on the unit can be more easily completed using a keyboard and mouse.
MAN00055 Rev. E
4-1
4
Powering Up the Wolverine Industrial Computer The system will power up when the ATX power button on the back I/O plate, gland plate, or front keypad overlay is pressed. For DC-powered Wolverines, attach the +24V DC line to the (+) connection, the return line to the (-) connection, and earth ground to the ground symbol connection of the DC power terminal block on the back I/O plate. For AC-powered Wolverines, attach the 120/220V AC line to the “L” connection, the AC neutral to the “N” connection, and earth ground to the “G” connection of the AC power terminal block on the back I/O plate. Product shall be connected to no greater than a 50 AMP branch circuit. During power up, the processor will run its normal diagnostic checks and indicate the presence of any errors with a screen prompt.
Powering Down the Wolverine Industrial Computer In a proper shutdown, the operating system will turn off the power supply and the unit will power down. In the case of an emergency, the ATX switch can be depressed for a quick controlled shutdown of Windows. The ATX switch can also be held down for four seconds for the system to power down without Windows shutting down (this is not a recommended shut down process).
Explosion Hazard Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous. To ensure power has been switched off to the unit, the main power should be removed at the circuit breaker, followed by removal of the power cables at Wolverine’s power terminal block.
System Peripherals Caution Do not connect or disconnect external devices, such as a printer, keyboard, mouse, USB, Ethernet, or 4-20mA Data Input while the unit is powered on and the area is considered hazardous. Do not install or remove Hard Disk Drive or PCMCIA cards while circuit is alive. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the equipment.
4-2
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
4
Removable Storage Media The Wolverine industrial computer system has a single removable hard disk drive. The disk drive has a standard EIDE/ATA-2 interface. The standard size is 40GB or larger. An optional dual compact flash adapter may be substituted for the hard drive. An optional Solid State IDE Flash Drive may also be substituted for the hard drive. Access to the storage media is from the bottom access plate (Standard Wolverine – Figure 4.1) or from the rear access plate (Wolverine with heater option - Figure 4.2). NOTE: To achieve the shock and vibe specs detailed in App B, a solid-state media compact flash card must be used rather than the hard drive.
Figure 4.1 Storage Media Access – Standard Wolverine
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 4 System Operation
4-3
4 Figure 4.2 Storage Media Access – Wolverine with Heater Option
4-4
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
4 PCMCIA Slots Wolverine industrial computers include two PCMCIA slots. These are accessible from the side access plate (Standard Wolverine) or from the bottom access plate (Wolverine with heater option). The Wireless Ethernet card occupies one slot. The customer can use the other slot. NOTE: The lower slot is not available when the optional 2nd Ethernet port is selected.
Figure 4.3
Compact Flash Socket The Wolverine contains one Compact Flash socket. This socket is not accessible by the user. Any device populating the Compact Flash socket must be installed prior to the unit leaving the factory.
Figure 4.4 Compact Flash Socket
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 4 System Operation
4-5
4
External Keyboard and Mouse An external PS/2 keyboard and mouse can be attached via the two NEMA4 connectors (Figure 3.6) on the gland plate or to the PS/2 keyboard and mouse connectors (Figure 1.2) on the back I/O plate. The touch screen and PS/2 mouse will work simultaneously if the mouse is Microsoft or IBM PS/2 compatible.
Graphic System The Wolverine industrial computers include a 15-inch color TFT (XGA resolution) screen. The flat screen display has the following features: •
High Luminance (equal to or greater than 500cd/m2)
•
Wide angle viewing
•
A built-in back light with a long life back light tube (equal to or greater than 50,000 hrs)
•
Optional Transflective technology – allows for sunlight readable viewing
Touch Screen The Wolverine includes a Resistive touch screen on the flat panel display. The touch screen has a resolution of 1024 x 1024 touch points (independent of screen size) and provides an efficient and reliable method of entering information. The screen responds to the touch of your finger with or without a glove. The touch screen is connected internally to a USB port.
Touch Screen Driver for Windows The touch screen driver is installed, configured and calibrated at the time of manufacture.
4-6
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
4
Communications Your industrial computer has been configured with networking components that enable you to establish new networks or connect to existing networks easily. If you intend to use Microsoft NetBEUI, TCP/IP, or Direct Cable Connection, some minimal setup changes are required before you can use the system for network applications. In Windows 2000 or XP systems, these settings are changed using the Network application in the Control Panel program group. Installed Network Components Network Component
Comments
PCI Network Adapter
Automatically configured in system
TCP/IP
Default settings must be changed before connecting to an existing network. Contact your network administrator for appropriate settings.
NetBEUI
Default settings must be changed before connecting to an existing network. Contact your network administrator for appropriate settings.
System Identification
Computer Name: Each system is uniquely identified by its serial number and can be renamed before adding it to an existing network Workgroup: The default workgroup is Workgroup. This should be renamed before adding it to an existing network.
Heater Operation Wolverine computers may be ordered with heaters to extend the operating temperature range. Ambient temperatures below or near 0°c will require a warm-up period before power will be applied to the internal ATX power supply. Once power is applied to the ATX power supply the unit will power on automatically*. The heaters will continue to operate following power-up as needed to maintain internal temperatures above the turn-off threshold. The HTR LED on the front keypad overlay will illuminate steady when heat is being applied. If the HTR LED flashes then an error has been detected within the heater control system. In this case disconnect external power. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect power. If the problem persists contact the GE Fanuc Hotline. *NOTE: If the BIOS power setting for ‘Power on after Power Fail’ has been changed then pressing the ATX switch will be required to power the unit on after the warm-up period. Under most conditions the LCD should power on in less than 30 minutes. DC units will require a longer warm-up time if the voltage is below 24VDC.
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 4 System Operation
4-7
4
Front Overlay Keypad Wolverine units with heater option include a front overlay keypad, which provides an ATX power button, dimming buttons, and LEDs to indicate system status and I/O activity.
Figure 4.5
Keypad Buttons and Operation: •
ATX power button – press and release to power up or power down the unit. The ATX power button can also be held down for four seconds for the system to power down without Windows shutting down (this is not a recommended shut down process).
•
Dimming buttons – used to change backlight intensity. There are seven distinct levels of backlight intensity available. Pressing and releasing a dimming button will change the backlight intensity one level. Holding down a dimming button will quickly scroll through the various backlight intensity levels. The selected brightness level is stored in non-volatile memory. On power up the unit will return to the last brightness level selected.
LED Operation:
LED Function
Label Color
Operation
Power Status
PWR Green
On when unit is powered on
OFF = Normal operation ON STEADY = Heating Mode Heater Status HTR Yellow FLASHING = Error Detected - unit will not heat or power on Green when unit is running on external power Green or Red when unit is running on battery power Battery Status BAT Red Remains unlit on units that do not have battery backup Hard Drive Status HDD Green On when there is Hard Drive/Compact Flash Activity Green or Green when there is a Link on Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Status LINK1 Amber Amber when there is also Activity on Ethernet 1 Green or Green when there is a Link on Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Status LINK2 Amber Amber when there is also Activity on Ethernet 2
4-8
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
4
Shutting Down the Computer Caution To avoid damaging files, always shut down Windows software before removing power from your Wolverine. To shut down Windows 2000 or XP software, select Shut Down from the Start menu.
MAN00055 Rev. E
Chapter 4 System Operation
4-9
Chapter
BIOS Settings
5 It is normally not necessary to change the hardware configuration settings in the CMOS memory. If settings become corrupted, follow the procedures here to reload the factory configuration.
MAN00055 Rev. E
1.
Power down the computer, connect a keyboard and turn on the power. Enter the Setup mode by pressing the DEL key when prompted during the computer power-up sequence. The main BIOS setup utility screen will appear offering several options for changing settings.
2.
Once in the Bios load optimized defaults – this will restore all defaults.
3.
Save bios and exit.
5-1
Chapter
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
6 This chapter consists of “Self-Test Diagnostics,” “Troubleshooting,” and “Corrective Actions.” “Self-Test Diagnostics,” describes how to respond to errors that could be detected by the automatic self-test that is performed each time the Wolverine industrial computer powers up. “Troubleshooting” contains tables of symptoms, their possible causes, and recommended corrective actions. “Corrective Actions” contains detailed procedures that are too lengthy to include in the Troubleshooting tables.
Self-Test Diagnostics The computer automatically performs self-test diagnostics each time it is powered up. The self-test consists of a series of checks that verify correct performance of the computer hardware. When the self-test is being performed, you will see the message XXXX M OK displayed on the screen, where XXXX is a number that increases until it matches the amount of usable memory.
System Test and Initialization These routines test and initialize board hardware. If the routines encounter an error during the tests, you will see an error message on the screen. There are two kinds of errors: fatal and non-fatal. If a non-fatal error occurs, the system can usually continue the boot up sequence. Non-fatal error messages usually appear on the screen with the following instruction: Press to RESUME
Write down the message and press the F1 key to continue the bootup sequence.
System Configuration Verification These routines check the current system configuration against the values stored in the CMOS memory. If they don’t match, the program will generate an error message. To correct this condition, you will need to run the BIOS setup program and correct the configuration information in memory. There are three situations in which you might need to change the CMOS settings:
MAN00055 Rev. E
1.
You are starting your system for the first time.
2.
You have changed the hardware attached to your system.
3.
The CMOS memory had lost power and the configuration information has been erased. If this has happened, call GE Fanuc’s Support Hotline at 1-800-GEFANUC (800-433-2682). 6-1
6
Troubleshooting Power up Symptom Computer does not power up.
Possible Causes 1. 2. 3.
4.
Power not on. Improper shutdown – loss of power Unit in ‘warm-up’ mode (Wolverine with heaters only) HTR LED will be on Steady Error within heater control system (Wolverine with heaters only) HTR LED will be flashing
Solution 1.
2.
3.
4.
Display is blank.
See “Display” topic in this Chapter
See “Display” topic in this Chapter
Safe Recovery Error message displayed.
Occurs on initial power up if the unit is accidentally turned off without first shutting down the Windows software.
The computer will power up normally.
CMOS checksum error — Defaults loaded CMOS battery failed
CMOS battery failure.
This battery has a lifetime of up to 10 years under normal operating conditions. For more information, see “CMOS Checksum Error” topic in this chapter.
A screen appears just after powerup, or just after reset, which has the title “CMOS Setup Utility.”
The DEL key has been accidentally pressed.
Cycle power again. The computer will power up normally.
The computer has reset even though the power was not interrupted.
The CTRL-ALT-DEL keys were pressed twice at the same time.
This should never be done, unless you are attempting to reset the computer.
message displayed.
6-2
Make sure that computer is plugged in. Make sure that power source is functioning properly. Depress “ATX” button for 4 seconds. Depress the button again to power on. Wait for unit to finish heating. LCD should power on after warm-up is complete. Press the ATX switch if LCD does not power on automatically after warm-up period. See Chapter 4 – Heater Operation for more details. Disconnect external power. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect power. If the problem persists contact the GE Fanuc Hotline.
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
6
Display Symptom
Possible Causes
Solution
Characters are dim.
Computer screen is in direct light. Dimming is turned down
Change lighting or adjust contrast. Adjust dimming knob to increase brightness
Display is blank.
System temperature is outside operating range.
Keep unit in 0C to 50C temperature range.
Computer is set up for invalid video mode.
Reboot. Select VGA Mode
Screen saver is active.
Touch the screen.
Memory Symptom Out of Memory message is displayed or insufficient memory error occurs during operation.
Possible Causes
Solution
System ran out of memory for the application.
Check the memory requirements for the application. (Refer to the application documentation.)
Too many terminate and stay resident (TSR) programs running.
Modify the startup folder to use only those TSR applications that are really needed.
External PS/2 Mouse Symptom Cursor does not respond to mouse movement
MAN00055 Rev. E
Possible Causes
Solution
Mouse not plugged in.
Power down computer. Plug mouse into mouse port on computer and reboot.
The type of mouse is not supported.
Use a PS/2 mouse.
System is busy.
Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE to view task list.
Mouse not detected.
Restart computer with external mouse connected.
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
6-3
6
Keyboard Symptom External keyboard locks up
Possible Causes
Solution
The type of keyboard is not supported.
Use PS/2 compatible keyboard
Keyboard not plugged into keyboard port on the computer.
Plug keyboard in. (Power down computer first.)
System is busy.
Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE to view task list.
Communications COM Port Connection Symptom Communications between the host computer and the controller are unsuccessful.
Possible Causes
Solution
COM port not configured in system.
Verify that the COM port is configured in the system.
Cabling between computer and controller.
Verify that the cable between the computer and the controller is correctly wired.
Baud rate and parity configured incorrectly.
Verify that the baud rate and parity on the computer are consistent with those on the controller.
Wrong address.
Verify that the slave address is correct.
Network Communications Symptom Conflicts on network.
6-4
Possible Causes
Solution
IP Address not unique.
Change the IP address to a unique address. (Contact your system administrator if this or other settings need to be changed.)
Identical computer name.
Change computer name. Computers cannot share computer name on network.
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
6
Printing Symptom
MAN00055 Rev. E
Possible Causes
Solution
Printer will not turn on.
Cables not connected properly. Printer power cord not plugged in.
Ensure that the cables are properly connected and that the power cord is connected to the electrical outlet.
Printer will not print.
Printer is not turned on.
Turn on the printer
Printer is not online.
Set the printer to online.
The device drivers for your application are not installed.
Install the correct printer drivers for your application in Windows.
Printer that is set up for a network is not connected to the network.
Connect the printer to the network.
Printer cable is too long, unshielded, or defective.
Replace the cable.
Printer is offline.
Paper tray is empty.
Fill the paper tray with paper. Set printer to online.
Printer prints garbled information.
Correct printer drivers not installed.
Install the correct printer driver.
Cable is not connected properly.
Ensure that the printer cable is connected properly to the computer.
Problem specific to printer.
Run a printer self-test. Refer to the documentation provided with your printer for instructions. If the selftest fails, the problem is printerspecific. The printing section of the software documentation and in Windows online Help may also be helpful.
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
6-5
6
Corrective Actions CMOS Checksum Error If the CMOS battery has failed, the following error messages will be displayed on the screen: CMOS checksum error - Defaults loaded CMOS battery failed
This battery has a lifetime of up to 10 years under normal operating conditions. If the battery failed, contact the GE Fanuc Hotline.
6-6
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
Appendix Technical Data
A Mechanical Specifications Front Assembly The Model Wolverine industrial computer provides a display screen and touch screen.
Main Chassis The main chassis is manufactured from aluminum and houses the motherboard, which is mounted securely in a vertical plane. The PC/104, PCMCIA add-on board plugs directly onto the motherboard. Two access panels for the hard drive and PC cards are also located on the main chassis.
Gland Plate The gland plate is fixed to the main chassis so that yoke and pedestal mounting configurations have necessary hardware to wire the unit in accordance with the National Electrical Code for Hazardous Locations, and also to maintain the enclosure protection rating.
Note Modification of Gland Plate invalidates the Type 4/4X enclosure rating.
MAN00055 Rev. E
A-1
A
Functional Specifications CPU and Memory Microprocessor
Pentium-M processor 1.6GHz∗
User Memory
512MB, DDR266 minimum installed by factory.*
Operating System
Windows 2K or XP
Hard Disk
40Gbyte minimum*, IDE standard 2.5 inch mounting
Two PCMCIA Slots
16 bit PC Cards
Compact Flash
Optional
PC/104 connector
Populated by PCMCIA PC/104 adapter
Display Display Variants
15 inch Color TFT – XGA
Active Display Area
15 inch - 246 x 184.5 mm
Power Requirements – DC Powered Wolverines without heaters DC Input
24 VDC,
Voltage Range
18-30 VDC
Power Rating
120Watts, 5.0Amp max
Requirements – DC Powered Wolverines with heaters DC Input
24 VDC
Voltage Range
18-30 VDC
Power Rating
560Watts, 18.6Amp max
Power Requirements– AC Powered Wolverines without heaters AC Input
120/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Voltage Range
100-240 VAC
Power Rating
For 100 VAC: 80 Watts, 0.8 Amp max For 240 VAC: 120 Watts, 0.5 Amp max
Power Requirements– AC Powered Wolverines with heaters AC Input
120/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Voltage Range
100-240 VAC
Power Rating
For 100 VAC: 780 Watts, 5.8 Amp max For 240 VAC: 780 Watts, 2.9 Amp max
∗
A-2
Contact your local distributor for upgrades.
Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
A
Ports Parallel Port
LPT1 (back I/O plate)
Serial Ports
COM1 external RS232 port (back I/O plate) COM2 external RS232 port (back I/O plate), Optional RS485/422 COM3 optional (no wireless Ethernet available) COM4 optional (no wireless Ethernet available)
Keyboard Port
PS/2 (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (optional)
Mouse Port
PS/2 (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (optional)
USB Ports
USB1 external USB port (back I/O plate) USB2 external USB port (back I/O plate) NEMA4 USB (gland plate) (optional)
Panel dimming
Back I/O plate; Remote POT – (optional) Front Overlay Keypad (Wolverine with heater option only)
Data Input
4-20mA Data Input (optional)
Communication
10/100 Ethernet (RJ-45) (back I/O plate) 2nd 10/100 Ethernet (RJ-45) (back I/O plate) (optional)
VGA Port
VGA port (back I/O plate) (Wolverine with heater option only)
Physical – Standard Wolverine Dimensions
404 mm wide (15.90 inches) 349 mm high (13.75 inches) without antenna 477 mm high (18.78 inches) with antenna 110 mm deep (4.32 inches) without gland plate 189 mm deep (7.44 inches) with standard gland plate (See Figure 1.5) 159 mm deep (6.26 inches) with optional gland plate (See Figure 1.6)
Weight
15.0 Kg (33 lbs) with gland plate 13.6 Kg (30 lbs) without gland plate
Physical – Wolverine with heater option Dimensions
404 mm wide (15.90 inches) 349 mm high (13.75 inches) without antenna 477 mm high (18.78 inches) with antenna 128 mm deep (5.02 inches) without gland plate 207 mm deep (8.14 inches) with standard gland plate (See Figure 1.5) 177 mm deep (6.96 inches) with optional gland plate (See Figure 1.6)
Weight
MAN00055 Rev. E
Appendix A Technical Data
15.9 Kg (35 lbs) with gland plate 14.5 Kg (32 lbs) without gland plate
A-3
Appendix Agency Approvals, Government Regulations
B
& General Specifications
Agency Approvals Description N.A. Safety for Industrial Control Equipment N.A. Safety for Hazardous Locations Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Low Voltage Directive European Safety for Industrial Control Equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive European EMC for Industrial Control Equipment Explosive Atmospheres Directive European Safety for Hazardous Locations Equipment Group II, Category 3, Gas
Agency Standard or Marking
Comments Certification by Underwriter's Laboratories to UL508 standard and equivalent CSA C22.2 No 142 M1987standard Certification by Underwriter's Laboratories to UL1604 standard and equivalent CSA C22.2 No 213-M1987 standard Self-Declaration in accordance with European Directive Certification by Competent Body in accordance with European Directive Certification in accordance with European Directive and Independent 3rd Party Assessment Certificate;
Note: The agency approvals listed above and on the Declaration of Conformities are believed to be accurate, however, a product’s agency approvals should be verified by the marking on the unit itself
MAN00055 Rev. E
Appendix B Product Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications
B-1
B
Government Regulations U.S., Canadian, Australian and European regulations are intended to prevent equipment from interfering with approved transmissions or with the operation of other equipment through the AC power source. The Wolverine has been tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of U.S. (47 CFR 15), Canadian (ICES-003), Australian (AS/NZS 3548), and European (EN55022) regulations for Class A digital devices when installed in accordance with the guidelines noted in the appropriate product section. These various regulations share commonality in content and test levels with that of CISPR 22 and based on this commonality testing to the each individual standard was deemed inappropriate. The FCC requires the following to be published according to FCC guidelines:
Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Note Any changes or modifications to the product or installation that are not expressly approved by GE Fanuc Automation could void the user's authority to operate the equipment under FCC rules Industry Canada requires the following note to be published:
Note This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
B-2
Wolverine Industrial Computer – Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
B
General Specifications Environmental Conditions
MAN00055 Rev. E
Temperature
Operation
0°C to 50°C
AC & DC Powered Wolverines without heaters
Storage
-20°C to 70°C
Temperature
Operation
-40°C to 50°C
AC Powered Wolverines with heaters
Storage
-40°C to 70°C
Temperature
Operation
-30°C to 50°C
DC Powered Wolverines with heaters
Storage
-40°C to 70°C
Humidity
5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Enclosure Protection
NEMA 4/4X, UL50 Type 4/4X
Vibration (Operating)
2g, 10 - 500Hz (compact flash media only)
Shock (Operating)
40 G pulse, 3 – Axis (compact flash media only)
Appendix B Product Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications
B-3
B DRW00245 Hazardous (Classified) Location Class I, Division 2 Groups A, B, C and D
Non-Hazardous Location
Keyboard Port
Wolverine: Mouse port
Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus
Ethernet USB*
*Applicable to Wolverine AMS2000 only
1. Nonincendive Circuit Parameters: Keyboard, Mouse, & Ethernet ports Vmax = 5VDC Voc = 5 VDC Imax = 100mA Isc = 100mA Ci = 0.1 µF Ca = 1000 µF Li = 0 mH La = 5 mH * USB port (Wolverine AMS2000 only) Vmax = 5VDC Voc = 5 VDC Imax = 100mA Isc = 100mA Ci = 0.1 µF Ca = 15 µF Li = 0 mH La = 3 µH 2. Selected Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus shall satisfy the following: Associated Non-Incendive Wolverine Field Wiring Apparatus Voc ≤ Vmax Isc ≤ Imax Ca ≥ Ci + C cable La ≥ Li + L cable 3. If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values may be used: Capacitance – 60 pF/ft Inductive – 0.20 uH/ft 4. Nonincendive Field Wiring must be installed in accordance with Article 501.4(B)(3) of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
B-4
Wolverine Industrial Computer – Hardware User's Manual – April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
B
Non-Hazardous Location Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus
Hazardous (Classified) Location Class I, Division 2 Groups A,B,C and D Wolverine
+
Data Input Port (Voc, Isc, La, Ca)
PROTECTIVE GND
1. Nonincendive Circuit Parameters (Data Input Port): Vmax = 30VDC Voc = 30VDC Imax = 100mA Isc = 100mA Ci = 0.055 µF Ca = 200 µF Li = 0 mH La = 0.20 mH 2. Selected Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus shall satisfy the following: Wolverine Voc Isc Ca La
≤ ≤ ≥ ≥
Associated Non-Incendive Field Wiring Apparatus Vmax Imax Ci + C cable Li + L cable
3. If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values may be used: Capacitance – 60 pF/ft Inductive – 0.20 uH/ft 4.
MAN00055 Rev. E
Nonincendive Field Wiring must be installed in accordance with Article 501.4(B)(3) of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
Appendix B Product Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications
B-5
Index A
H
Audible warning, 4-2
Hard disk drive, 4-3 Heaters, 1-9
B
I
Battery Backup, 3-3
Initial startup, 4-1 Installation
C
panel mounting, 2-1
Installed network components, 4-7
CD-ROM drive, 4-5 CMOS battery, 6-6 failed battery, 6-2 settings, 6-1
CMOS checksum error, 6-6 COM ports
K Keyboard troubleshooting, 6-4
Keypad, 1-9
location, 3-4 pinout, 3-6
Communications, 4-7 troubleshooting, 6-4
Connectors, 3-1
L LPT1 pinout, 3-5
layout, 3-4
M
Corrective Actions, 6-6
D Diagnostics bootup sequence, 6-1 self-test, 6-1 system configuration verification, 6-1 system test and initialization, 6-1
Display troubleshooting, 6-3
E Error messages AUTOCONFIG/DEFAULT I/O, 6-4 CMOS checksum error, 6-2, 6-6 CMOS Setup Utility, 6-2 Insufficient memory, 6-3 non-fatal, 6-1 Out of Memory, 6-3 Safe Recovery, 6-2
External keyboard and mouse, 4-6
F FCC notice, B-2 Front access panel, 1-4, 1-6
G Graphic system, 4-6
MAN00055 Rev. E
Memory troubleshooting, 6-3
Mounting guidelines, 2-1
N Network communications troubleshooting, 6-4
Network components, 4-7 Network interface, 1-8
O Optional features, 1-4 Optional I/O, 1-8
P Parallel port pinout, 3-5
Peripherals, 4-2 PLC/CPU connection troubleshooting, 6-4
Power input, 1-8, 3-1 Powering up, 4-2 troubleshooting, 6-2
Printer port, 3-5 Printing troubleshooting, 6-5
Index-1
Index R Reset accidental, 6-2
RFI standards, B-2
S Self-test diagnostics, 6-1 Serial communication ports, 3-6 Serial Mouse troubleshooting, 6-3
Shutting down the computer, 4-9 Specifications functional, A-2 general, B-3 mechanical, A-1
Standard features, 1-3 System Configuration Verification, 6-1 System Test and Initialization, 6-1
T Temperature effect on contrast setting, 6-3
Touch Screen, 4-6 driver for Windows, 4-6
Troubleshooting, 6-2 communications, 6-4 display, 6-3 keyboard, 6-4 memory, 6-3 network communications, 6-4 PLC/CPU connection, 6-4 powerup, 6-2 printing, 6-5 serial mouse, 6-3
TSRs, 6-3
W Warning, audible, 4-2
Index-2
WOLVERINE Industrial Computer Hardware User’s Manual–April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
Technical Information
RTD TH13, TH14 and TH15 RTD assemblies in Thermowells with spring loaded insert and enclosure for process industry
Areas of application The TH13, TH14 and TH15 temperature sensors are RTD assemblies installed in Thermowells and designed for use in all types of process industries, including harsh environments, due to their rugged design. The sensor is made up of a measurement probe with an insulated RTD element, sheath and a thermowell made of bar-stock material. The sensor assemblies can be used in process industries such as: • Chemicals • Petrochemical • Power plants • Refineries • Offshore Platforms Head transmitters Instead of directly wiring your temperature sensors to your control system, use transmitters to reduce wiring and maintenance costs while increasing measurement accuracy. Field transmitters Temperature field transmitters with HART® or FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ protocol for highest reliability in harsh industrial environments. Blue backlit display with large measured value, bargraph and fault condition indication for ease of reading. Your benefits • One source shopping for temperature measurement solutions. World class transmitter with integrated sensor offering for heavy process industry applications. • Remove and install straight out of the box! • Improved galvanic isolation on most devices (2 kV) • Simplified model structure: Competitively priced, offers great value. Easy to order and reorder. A single model number includes sensor, thermowell and transmitter assembly for a complete point solution • All iTEMP® transmitters provide long term stability ≤ 0.05 % per year
TI110R/24/ae
TH13, TH14, TH15
Function and system design Measuring principle
The RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) element consists of an electrical resistance with a value of 100 Ω at 0 °C (called Pt100, in compliance with IEC 60751), which increases at higher temperatures according to a coefficient characteristic of resistor material (platinum). In industrial thermometers that comply with the IEC 60751 standard, the value of this coefficient is α = 0.00385 °C-1, calculated between 0 and 100 °C (32 and 212 °F).
Measuring system
Example of an application of the temperature assemblies Water - heat Differential Calculation of heat quantity which is emitted or absorbed by a water flow in a heating or cooling system. The quantity of heat is calculated from the process variable for ∆p flow (Q) and the differential from the feed and return temperature (T2 - T1). Bidirectional energy calculations, such as the calculating systems with changing flow direction (charging/ discharging the heat accumulator) are also possible.
Energy manager RMS621 Energy conservation and cost expenditures are significant issues in today's industry. Accurate flow monitoring and calculation is the basis for thorough analysis and billing of energy. This data can serve as a basis to maximize savings potential and help in controlling operational costs on a daily basis. Endress+Hauser's energy managers provide accurate and reliable calculations for the monitoring and control of energy consumption (both produced and consumed) according to international standards, e.g. IAPWS-IF 97, AGA8, ISO 5167 etc. For RMS621 details see Technical Information. iTEMP® TMT162 Temperature Field Transmitter Aluminum or stainless steel dual compartment explosion - proof enclosure and compact, fully potted electronics provide the ultimate protection in harshest environments. TMT162 prevents costly plant shutdowns by detecting corrosion on RTDs or thermocouples before it corrupts the measured value. Endress+Hauser's Field Temperature Transmitters with backlit display and sensor backup functionality are designed with safety in mind to keep your plant, equipment and personnel safe. For TMT162 details see Technical Information. Deltabar S/Cerabar S The evolution series of Cerabar S/Deltabar S represents a decisive step ahead in making pressure instrumentation better and safer for the process industry. The development of new products thrives especially on the knowledge, commitment and experience of staff members. Permanent high performance can only be achieved if dedicated and enthusiastic people provide their ideas. Endress+Hauser's instruments are not only supposed to distinguish themselves for customers and users by technological novelties but also by the presence of people supporting this progress, be it in service, sales or production. For Deltabar S & Cerabar S details see Technical Information.
2
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Equipment architecture
Measurement range
The single and duplex element RTDs are designed to measure temperature in a variety of processes and laboratory applications. These RTDs are specifically designed for use in two different process temperature ranges and they will provide accurate and repeatable temperature measurement through a broad temperature range of -328 to 1112 °F (-200 to 600 °C). Low range thin film RTDs -58 to 392 °F (-50 to 200 °C) are constructed using silver plated and copper internal leads, PTFE wire insulations with potting compounds to resist moisture penetration. High range RTDs -328 to 1112 °F (-200 to 600 °C) are constructed with nickel internal leads inside swaged MgO insulated cables to allow higher temperature measurements at the RTD element and to provide higher temperature lead protection along the sheath. Construction
Model code (class and type of sensor)
max. range
TH13-_ _ _ _ _ (A/C/E/G/J/L) _ _ _ _ _ Low temperature range
TH14-_ _ _ _ _ (A/C/E/G/J/L) _ _ _ _ _
-58 to 392 °F (-50 to 200 °C)
TH15-_ _ _ (A/C/E/G/J/L) _ _ _ _ _ TH13-_ _ _ _ _ (B/D/F/H/K/M) _ _ _ _ _ High temperature range
TH14-_ _ _ _ _(B/D/F/H/K/M) _ _ _ _ _
-328 to 1112 °F (-200 to 600 °C)
TH15-_ _ _ (B/D/F/H/K/M) _ _ _ _ _ _
! Calibration specifications
Note! Options J, K, L, M are duplex platinum elements of two sensors inside the same sheath. 3 point sensor calibration -40 to 0 °C
0 to 100 °C
+40 to 215 °C
-40 to 32 °F
32 to 212 °F
104 to 420 °F
Minimum length requirements for calibrated sensors = 6"
!
Note! Use option code ’B’ (Block: Test; calibration) for RTD calibration, the three temperature points need to be specified in 5 °C (9 °F) increments. The manufacturer provides comparison temperature calibrations from -40 to +215 °C (-40 to +420 °F) on the international temperature scale of 1990. Calibrations are traceable to standards maintained by the national institute of standards and technology (NIST). Calibration services are in conformance with ASTM E220, IEC 17025 and ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994. The report of calibration is referenced to the serial number of the RTD assembly. Three point calibrations are provided, given that the specified temperatures are within the recommended range and the minimum length requirements are met as specified. The minimum length is based on overall length ’x’ of the spring loaded insert.
Endress+Hauser
3
TH13, TH14, TH15
Electronics Family of temperature transmitters
Measurement assemblies with iTEMP® transmitters are an installation ready solution to improve the functionality of temperature measurement by increasing accuracy and reliability when compared to direct wired sensors. Overall installation costs are lower than with direct wired sensors, since an inexpensive pair of signal (4 to 20 mA) wires can be run over long distances.
PC programmable devices TMT180 and TMT181
PC programmable head transmitters offer you extreme flexibility and help control costs with the ability to stock one device and program it for your needs. Regardless of your choice of output, all iTEMP® transmitters can be configured quickly and easily with a PC. To help you with this task, Endress+Hauser offers free software ReadWin® 2000 which can be downloaded from our website. Go to www.readwin2000.com to download ReadWin® 2000 today. For details see Technical Information.
HART® TMT182 head transmitter
HART® communication is all about easy, reliable data access and getting better information more inexpensively. iTEMP® transmitters integrate seamlessly into your existing control system and provide painless access to preventative diagnostic information. Configuration with a DXR275 or 375 hand-held or a PC with configuration program (FieldCare, ReadWin® 2000) or configure with AMS or PDM. For details, see Technical Information.
Field transmitter TMT162 Dual compartment housing
Field transmitter with HART® communication, FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ protocol and blue backlit display. Can be read easily from a distance, in sunlight and at night. Large measurement value, bargraph and fault indication display. Benefits are: dual sensor input, highest reliability in harsh industrial environments, mathematic functions, thermometer drift monitoring, sensor back-up functionality, corrosion detection and sensor transmitter matching by accepting Callendar Van Dusen constants. For details, see Technical Information.
Field transmitter TMT142 Single compartment housing
Field transmitter with HART® communication. The one channel TMT142 allows for cost effective replacement of smaller transmitters with tiny display and old style analog transmitters. Large and brilliant blue backlit display. Regardless of whether you install the transmitter in a dark location or in direct sunlight, you still get a clear temperature reading. Reliable temperature measurement through advanced diagnostics. For details, see Technical Information.
PROFIBUS® PA TMT184 head transmitter
Universally programmable head transmitter with PROFIBUS®-PA fieldbus communication. Converting various input signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy in the total ambient temperature range. Swift and easy operation, visualisation and maintenance using a PC direct from the control panel, e. g. using operating software such as FieldCare, Simatic PDM or AMS. DIP switch for address setting, makes start up and maintenance save and reliable. For details, see Technical Information.
Performance characteristics Response time
63% response time per ASTM E644 RTD assembly TH15 without thermowell
!
4
Construction
RTD insert ø ¼"
High temperature range
3s
Low temperature range
9s
Note! Response time for the sensor assembly without transmitter.
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15 Response time examples for RTD assemblies with thermowell TH13 and TH14
!
Construction
Stepped thermowell
Tapered thermowell
¾" straight thermowell
High temperature range
20 s
25 s
30 s
Low temperature range
25 s
30 s
35 s
Note! Response times for RTD assemblies with thermowell are provided for general design guidance without transmitter When the temperature of a process media changes, the output signal of a RTD assembly follows this change after a certain time delay. The physical cause is the time related to heat transfer from the process media through the thermowell and the insert to the sensor element (RTD). The manner in which the reading follows the change in temperature of the assembly over time is referred to as the response time. Variables that influence or impact the response time are: • • • •
Maximum measured error
RTD corresponding to IEC 60751 Class
max. Tolerances (°C)
A
±(0.15 + 0.002 · |t|1), Temperature range: -100 °C to 450 °C
B
±(0.3 + 0.005 · |t|1), Temperature range: -200 °C to 600 °C
1)
!
Wall thickness of thermowell Spacing between RTD insert and thermowell Sensor packaging Process parameters such as media, flow velocity, etc.
|t| = absolute value °C
Note! For measurement errors in °F, calculate using equation above in °C, then multiply the outcome by 1.8.
Measurement accuracy transmitter TMT180 Pt100 PCP
TMT181 multifunctional PCP
TMT182 HART®
TMT184 PROFIBUS®PA
TMT162 FF Field transmitter
TMT142 and TMT162 HART® Field transmitter Accuracy
0.36 °F (0.2 °C) or 0.08%1
0.36 °F (0.2 °C) or 0.08%2
0.36 °F (0.2 °C) or 0.08%2
0.27 °F (0.15 °C)
0.18 °F (0.1 °C)
1)
% is related to the adjusted measurement range (the larger value applies)
2)
% relates to the set span. Accuracy = digital + D/A accuracy
Transmitter long-term stabiltiy
≤ 0.18 °F / year (≤ 0.1 °C/year) or ≤ 0.05% / year Data under reference conditions; % relates to the set span. The larger value applies.
Insulation resistance
Insulation resistance between terminals and probe sheath, test voltage 250 V.
Digital
D/A2
0.18 °F (0.1 °C)
0.02%
• ≥100 MΩ at 77 °F (25 °C) • ≥10 MΩ at 572 °F (300 °C)
Endress+Hauser
5
TH13, TH14, TH15
Self heating
RTD elements are not self-powered and require a small current be passed through the device to provide a voltage that can be measured. Self-heating is the rise of temperature within the element itself, caused by the current flowing through the element. This self-heating appears as a measurement error and is affected by the thermal conductivity and velocity of the process being measured; it is negligible when an Endress+Hauser iTEMP® temperature transmitter is connected.
Sensor current
Sensor current of Endress+Hauser iTEMP® transmitters
Galvanic isolation
Transmitter type
Sensor current
TMT180 & TMT181 PCP
≤ 0.6 mA
TMT182 HART®
≤ 0.2 mA
TMT184 PROFIBUS®-PA
≤ 0.2 mA
TMT162 HART®, FF Field transmitter
≤ 0.3 mA
TMT142 HART® Field transmitter
≤ 0.3 mA
Galvanic isolation of Endress+Hauser iTEMP® transmitters (input/output) Transmitter type
Galvanic isolation
TMT181 PCP
Û = 3.75 kV AC
TMT182 HART® TMT184 PROFIBUS®-PA TMT162 HART®, FF Field transmitter
U = 2 kV AC
TMT142 HART® Field transmitter
6
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Wiring Wiring diagrams
Type of sensor connection Head mounted transmitter
Field mounted transmitter
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-000
T09-TH131415-04-xx-xx-ae-000
Terminal block mounted
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-001
!
Endress+Hauser
Note! The blocks and transmitters are shown as they sit inside the heads in reference to the conduit opening.
7
TH13, TH14, TH15
Wire specifications
24AWG, 19 strand silver plated copper with 0.010” PTFE extruded outer. Electrical connection Flying leads, standard 3" for wiring in connection head, head mounted transmitter or terminal block mounted Flying leads, 5½" for wiring with TMT162 or TMT142 assemblies
Design of leads Flying leads 3" or 5½" with brass crimped sleeves
Installation conditions Orientation
No restrictions for installation orientation.
Installation instructions
T09-TH1314x15-11-xx-xx-ae-000
Examples for pipe installation - In pipes with a small cross section the sensor tip should reach or extend slightly past the center line of the pipe (=U). A: TH13 assembly socket weld installation B: Threaded, tilted installation of TH13 assembly C: Flange installation of TH14 assembly
8
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15 Immersion Minimum immersion per ASTM E644, ∆T ≤ 0.09 °F (0.05 °C) Immersion RTD assembly TH15 without thermowell Construction
RTD Insert ø ¼" Minimum Immersion (Inch)
High temperature range
1¼"
Low temperature range
¾"
For temperature assemblies with themowell (TH13 and TH14) the minimum immersion is the depth to which the thermowell is immersed in the medium, measured from the tip. To minimize errors from ambient temperature the following minimum immersion lengths are recommended: Construction
Minimum Immersion (Inch)
Stepped thermowell
2½"
Tapered thermowell
4½"
¾" straight thermowell
4"
Weld in thermowell
4½"
Environmental conditions Ambient temperature
Housing without head-mounted transmitter • Aluminum pressure die-cast housing -40 to 300 °F (-40 to 150 ºC) • Plastic housing -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C) • Deep drawn SS housing without display -40 to 300 °F (-40 to 150 °C) Housing with head-mounted transmitter • -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C) Field transmitter without display • -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C)
Shock and vibration resistance
4g / 2 to 150 Hz as per IEC 60 068-2-6
Process conditions Thermowells are used in measuring the temperature of a moving fluid in a conduit, where the stream exerts an appreciable force. The limiting value for the thermowells is governed by the temperature, the pressure and the speed of the medium, the immersion length, the materials of the thermowells and the medium, etc. Calculations for stress and vibration of thermowells can be done according to ASME PTC 19.3-1974 standard, please consult Endress+Hauser.
Endress+Hauser
9
TH13, TH14, TH15
Mechanical construction Design, dimensions
All dimensions in inches. For the values related to this graphic please refer to the tables and equations below.
T09-TH131415-06-xx-xx-ae-000
*For TH13 thermowells with ½"NPT - 1" Process thread length and ¾" Hex length dimensions are reversed. Pos. P: Pipe size Pos. Q: Thermowell diameter Pos. T: Lag dimension (see product structure) Pos. U: Thermowell immersion length Pos. XA, A: Immersion length RTD sensor; Thermowell drilled length Pos. X: Insert overall length
10
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15 All thermowells are marked with: • Material I.D. • CRN# (Canadian Registration Number) • Heat No.
Dimensions of TH13 U
E
T
Process connection
Shape of Thermowell
øQ
2½", 4½", 7½", 10½" specified length 2" to 18" in ½" increments
Hex nipple = 1" or Nipple Union Nipple (NUN) = 4" or 7" Material: Steel or 316SS
3" or specified length 1" to 6" in ½" increments
½" NPT
Stepped (Standard duty) Tapered (Heavy duty)
5/8" 11 /16"
¾" NPT
Stepped (Standard duty) Tapered (Heavy duty)
¾" 7/8"
1" NPT
Stepped (Standard duty) Tapered (Heavy duty)
7/8" 1 1/16"
¾" Socket weld
Stepped (Standard duty) Tapered (Heavy duty)
¾" ¾"
1" Socket weld
Stepped (Standard duty) Tapered (Heavy duty)
7/8" 1"
¾" weld in
Tapered (Heavy duty)
1.050"
1" weld in
Tapered (Heavy duty)
1.315"
Immersion length RTD sensor = Thermowell drilled length XA = A = U + 1½" + T Insert overall length X = A + E + 1" P = Pipe size • Nom. ¾"; Dia. = 1.050" • Nom. 1"; Dia. = 1.315"
Dimensions of TH14 Flange rating: ASME B16.5 U
E
T
Flange size
ø Q, Tapered version
2", 4", 7", 10" specified length 2" to 18" in ½" increments
Hex nipple = 1" or Nipple Union Nipple (NUN) = 4" or 7" Material: Steel or 316SS
specified length 1" to 10" in ½" increments
1"
7/8"
1½"
11/16"
2"
11/16"
Immersion length RTD sensor - Thermowell drilled length XA = A = U + 2" + T Insert overall length X = A + E + 1"
Dimensions of TH15 (without Thermowell)
Weight
Endress+Hauser
Immersion length RTD sensor XA
E
4", 6", 9", 12", 14" specified length 4" to 30" in ½" increments
Hex nipple = 1" or Nipple Union Nipple (NUN) = 4" or 7"
From 1 to 10 lbs
11
TH13, TH14, TH15
Material
Wetted parts 316SS Thermowell material Wetted parts 316SS for usage up to 1700 °F (927 °C). 316SS has good oxidation and corrosion resistance in a wide range of industrial environments with improved resistance to mild acid and pitting corrosion. Exposure to carbide precipitation, reduces corrosion resistance in the 800 to 1000 °F (427 to 538 °C) temperature range. Good mechanical properties for -300 to 1450 °F (-184 to 788 °C) temperature range. Generally regarded as standard protection tube material, other materials are available upon request.
System components Housing Type of housing
Specification
Connection head Aluminum
• • • •
Material: Die-cast Aluminum head Sensor connection: ½" NPT Female Cable entry: ½" NPT or ¾" NPT Female. ½" NPT has a Al reducer bushing Body paint: Spray SPU, RAL5012 Cover paint: Spray SPU, RAL7035 • Coating thread (body-cover), lubricant acc. E+H standard, MgO coating; benefits include ease of opening/closing cover and improved thread engagement. Improves lifetime of the connection head. • Degree of protection NEMA 4X (IP 66)
T09-TH11xxxx-06-xx-xx-ae-001
Connection head plastic
• Polyprolylene, FDA compliant • Sensor connection: ½" NPT Female • Cable entry: ½" NPT or ¾" NPT Female. ½" NPT with nylon reducer bushing (FDA compliant) • Degree of protection NEMA 4X
T09-TH11xxxx-06-xx-xx-ae-000
Temperature field transmitter
iTEMP®
TMT162
• Material: Die-cast aluminum housing AlSi10Mg with powder coating on polyester base • Separate electronics compartment and connection compartment • Display rotatable in 90° increments • Cable entry: 2 x ½" NPT • Degree of protection NEMA 4X (IP 67) • Brilliant blue backlit display with ease of visibility in bright sunshine or pitch darkness • Gold plated terminals to avoid corrosion and additional measurement errors Details see Technical Information (see 'Documentation')
T09-TMT162ZZ-06-00-xx-ae-001
12
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15 Type of housing
Specification ®
®
Temperature field transmitter iTEMP HART TMT142
• Material: Die-cast aluminum housing AlSi10Mg with powder coating on polyester base • Display rotatable in 90° increments • Cable entry: 3 x ½" NPT • Degree of protection NEMA 4X (IP 67) • Brilliant blue backlit display with ease of visibility in bright sunshine or pitch darkness • Gold plated terminals to avoid corrosion and additional measurement errors Details see Technical Information (see 'Documentation')
T09-TMT142ZZ-06-00-06-ae-001
Connection head deep drawn stainless steel, TA20J style
• • • • •
Material: Deep drawn stainless steel AISI 316L SS (hygienic design) Optional with display and/or head transmitter Sensor connection: ½" NPT female Cable entry: ½" NPT female Degree of protection NEMA 4X (IP 66)
Display: • 4 digits 7-segments LC display (loop powered) • Maximum error: 0.1% of programmed range • Loop drop: 2.5 V at 22 mA • Max. ambient temperature: -4 to 160 °F (-20 to 70 °C) The programming is executed through 3 keys mounted on the bottom of the display.
a0005938
* dimensions with optional display
Head transmitter Type of transmitter)
Specification
®
iTEMP TMT18x
• Material Housing: PC Potting: PUR • Terminals: Cable up to max. 16 AWG (secure screws) or with wire end ferrules • Eyelets for easy connection of a HART®-handheld terminal with alligator clips • Degree of protection NEMA 4 (see also type of connection head) Details see Technical Information (see ’Documentation’) R09-TMT182ZZ-06-06-xx-ae-001
iTEMP®
PA TMT184
T09-TMT184ZZ-06-06-xx-ae-001
Endress+Hauser
13
TH13, TH14, TH15
Fieldbus connector
Type (dimensions in inches [mm])
Specification
Fieldbus connector to PROFIBUS® -PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus™
• Ambient temperature: -40 to 300 °F (-40 to 150 °C) • Degree of protection IP 67 Wiring diagram:
a0006023
T09-FFCONNEC-06-xx-xx-ae-000
Pos. A: M12 on PROFIBUS® -PA connector 7/8-16 UNC on FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ connector
PROFIBUS®
-PA Pos 1: grey (shield) Pos 2: brown (+) Pos 3: blue (-) Pos 4: not connected
FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ Pos 1: blue (-) Pos 2: brown (+) Pos 3: not connected Pos 4: ground (green/yellow)
Certificates and approvals CE Mark
The iTEMP® Series of temperature transmitters complies with the legal requirements laid out within the EU regulations.
Other standards and guidelines
• IEC 60529: Degrees of protection by housing (IP-Code). • IEC 61010: Safety requirements for electrical measurement, control and laboratory instrumentation. • ASTM E644: American society for testing and materials, standard test methods for testing industrial resistance thermometers. • NEMA - ANSI / NEMA 250 Standardization association for the electrical industry. • IEC 60571 Industrial platinum resistance thermometer • ASME PTC 19.3 - 1974 Performance test codes
UL
Temperature transmitters are recognized components to UL 3111-1 (iTEMP® Series) except for TMT184 PROFIBUS®-PA.
CSA GP
The installed and assembled transmitters (iTEMP® Series) are CSA GP approved, except TMT184 PROFIBUS® PA
14
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Ordering information Product structure, RTD assembly in thermowell TH13
TH13-
RTD assembly in thermowell, TH13
TW Immersion length U: 1 2 3 4 8 Y
2½ inch 4½ inch 7½ inch 10½ inch .... inch (0.5" increments) special
Process connection, TW Material, 1 inch: A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C1 C2 YY
½" NPT 316SS ¾" NPT 316SS 1" NPT 316SS Socket weld ¾" 316SS Socket weld 1" inch 316SS Weld in ¾" 316SS Weld in 1" inch 316SS Special
Shape of TW: 2 3 9
Stepped, Standard Duty Tapered, Heavy Duty Special
Lag of TW T: A E X Y
None 3 inch ... inch (0.5" increments) Special
Extension: 1 2 3 4 5 6 9
Hex nipple 316SS, E=1" Nipple Union Nipple 316SS, E=4" Hex nipple steel, E=1" Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=4" Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=7" Nipple Union Nipple, 316SS, E=7" Special
Class; Type Sensor IEC751; Connection: A B C D E F G H J K L M Y TH13-
Endress+Hauser
1 Pt100 class B, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class B, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 1 Pt100 class B, 4 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class B, 4 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 4 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 4 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 2 Pt100 class B, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 2 Pt100 class B, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 2 Pt100 class A, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 2 Pt100 class A, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) Special ← Order code (Part 1)
15
TH13, TH14, TH15
Enclosure; communication: A B C D E F G H I J K L M Y
None E+H blue Al + cover, ½" NPT cable entry E+H blue Al + cover, ¾" NPT cable entry Plastic PP white ½" NPT cable entry Plastic PP white ¾" NPT cable entry SS316L (TA20J), ½" NPT SS316L (TA20J), LCD, ½" NPT AL Field Housing, 1 Input, ½" NPT, HART AL Field Housing, 1 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, HART AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, FF AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, FF, ½" NPT Special
Electrical connection: A C D E F G H I J K L M N O P R T Y 2 3
Programmable RTD TMT180 Programmable TMT181 NON Ex Programmable TMT181 FM IS Programmable TMT181 CSA IS Profibus PA TMT184, non Ex Profibus PA TMT184, FM IS Profibus PA TMT184, CSA IS TMT162, non Ex, Dual Compartment TMT162, FM IS, Dual Compartment TMT162, CSA IS, Dual Compartment HART TMT142 non Ex, Single Compartment HART TMT142, FM IS, Single Compartment HART TMT142, CSA IS, Single Compartment HART TMT182, FM IS Advanced Diagnostic HART TMT182 NON Ex HART TMT182 FM IS HART TMT182 CSA IS Special Flying Leads Terminal block
Additional option: 1 2 3 9
None Profibus PA Plug M12 Foundation Fieldbus Plug 7/8" special version
Test; Calibration: A B Y
None Sensor calibration certificate Special version
Model: K Y TH13-
16
Standard model, North American region Special version ← Order code (complete)
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Product structure, RTD assembly in flanged thermowell TH14
TH14-
RTD assembly in flanged thermowell, TH14
TW Immersion length U 1 2 3 4 8 Y
2 inch 4 inch 7 inch 10 inch .... inch (0.5" increments) Special version
Flange size; TW Material per 1 inch: A B C Y
1 inch 316SS 1½ inch 316SS 2 inch 316SS Special
Rating; Type: 1 2 3 9
150 psi; RF 300 psi; RF 600 psi; RF Special
Shape of TW; Welding: 1 2 3 4 9
Straight; standard Tapered; standard Straight; full penetration Tapered; full penetration Special
Lag of TW, T: A X Y
None .... inch (0.5" increments) Special
Extension: 1 2 3 4 5 6 9
Hex nipple 316SS, E=1" Nipple Union Nipple 316SS, E=4" Hex nipple steel, E=1" Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=4" Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=7" Nipple Union Nipple, 316SS, E=7" Special
Class; Type Sensor IEC751; Connection: A B C D E F G H J K L M Y TH14-
Endress+Hauser
1 Pt100 class B, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class B, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 1 Pt100 class B, 4 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class B, 4 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 4 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 4 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 2 Pt100 class B, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 2 Pt100 class B, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 2 Pt100 class A, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 2 Pt100 class A, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) Special ← Order code (Part 1)
17
TH13, TH14, TH15
Enclosure; communication: A B C D E F G H I J K L M Y
None E+H blue Al + cover, ½" NPT cable entry E+H blue Al + cover, ¾" NPT cable entry Plastic PP white ½" NPT cable entry Plastic PP white ¾" NPT cable entry SS316L (TA20J), ½" NPT SS316L (TA20J), LCD, ½" NPT AL Field Housing, 1 Input, ½" NPT, HART AL Field Housing, 1 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, HART AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, FF AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, FF, ½" NPT Special
Electrical connection: A C D E F G H I J K L M N O P R T Y 2 3
Programmable RTD TMT180 Programmable TMT181 NON Ex Programmable TMT181 FM IS Programmable TMT181 CSA IS Profibus PA TMT184, non Ex Profibus PA TMT184, FM IS Profibus PA TMT184, CSA IS TMT162, non Ex, Dual Compartment TMT162, FM IS, Dual Compartment TMT162, CSA IS, Dual Compartment HART TMT142 non Ex, Single Compartment HART TMT142, FM IS, Single Compartment HART TMT142, CSA IS, Single Compartment HART TMT182, FM IS Advanced Diagnostic HART TMT182 NON Ex HART TMT182 FM IS HART TMT182 CSA IS Special Flying Leads Terminal block
Additional option: 1 2 3 9
None Profibus PA Plug M12 Foundation Fieldbus Plug 7/8" special version
Test; Calibration: A B Y
None Sensor calibration certificate Special version
Model: K Y TH14-
18
Standard model, North American region Special version ← Order code (complete)
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Product structure, RTD assembly TH15
TH15-
RTD assembly, TH15
Immersion length XA 1 2 3 4 5 8 Y
4 inch 6 inch 9 inch 12 inch 14 inch .... inch (0.5" increments) Special version
Sheath diameter price per 2 inch: A Y
¼ inch 316SS Special
Extension: 1 2 3 4 5 6 9
Hex nipple 316SS, E=1" Nipple Union Nipple 316SS, E=4" Hex nipple steel, E=1" Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=4" Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=7" Nipple Union Nipple, 316SS, E=7" Special
Class; Type Sensor IEC751; Connection: A B C D E F G H J K L M Y
1 Pt100 class B, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class B, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 1 Pt100 class B, 4 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class B, 4 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 4 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 1 Pt100 class A, 4 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 2 Pt100 class B, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 2 Pt100 class B, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) 2 Pt100 class A, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) 2 Pt100 class A, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) Special
Enclosure; communication: A B C D E F G H I J K L M Y TH15-
Endress+Hauser
None E+H blue Al + cover, ½" NPT cable entry E+H blue Al + cover, ¾" NPT cable entry Plastic PP white ½" NPT cable entry Plastic PP white ¾" NPT cable entry SS316L (TA20J), ½" NPT SS316L (TA20J), LCD, ½" NPT AL Field Housing, 1 Input, ½" NPT, HART AL Field Housing, 1 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, HART AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, FF AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, FF, ½" NPT Special ← Order code (part 1)
19
TH13, TH14, TH15
Electrical connection: A C D E F G H I J K L M N O P R T Y 2 3
Programmable RTD TMT180 Programmable TMT181 NON Ex Programmable TMT181 FM IS Programmable TMT181 CSA IS Profibus PA TMT184, non Ex Profibus PA TMT184, FM IS Profibus PA TMT184, CSA IS TMT162, non Ex, Dual Compartment TMT162, FM IS, Dual Compartment TMT162, CSA IS, Dual Compartment HART TMT142 non Ex, Single Compartment HART TMT142, FM IS, Single Compartment HART TMT142, CSA IS, Single Compartment HART TMT182, FM IS Advanced Diagnostic HART TMT182 NON Ex HART TMT182 FM IS HART TMT182 CSA IS Special Flying Leads Terminal block
Documentation Requirement: 1 9
Standard Other
Test; Calibration: A B Y
None Sensor calibration certificate Other
Model: K Y
Standard model, North American region Other
Additional option: 1 2 3 9 TH15-
20
None Profibus PA Plug M12 Foundation Fieldbus Plug 7/8" special version ← Order code (complete)
Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Documentation • • • • • • • • •
Compact instructions TH13 RTD assembly in thermowell (KA190r/24/ae) Compact instructions TH14 RTD assembly in flanged thermowell (KA192r/24/ae) Compact instructions TH15 RTD assembly - spring loaded (KA195r/24/ae) Technical information Temperature field transmitter iTEMP® TMT162 (TI086r/24/ae) Technical information Temperature field transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT142 (TI107r/24/ae) Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® Pt TMT180 (TI088r/24/ae) Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PCP TMT181 (TI070r/24/ae) Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT182 (TI078r/24/ae) Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PA® TMT184 (TI079r/24/ae)
Application example: • Technical information Energy manager RMS621 (TI092r/24/ae) • Technical information Cerabar S (TI383r/24/ae) • Technical information Deltabar S (TI384r/24/ae)
Endress+Hauser
21
TH13, TH14, TH15
TH13, TH14, TH15
TH13, TH14, TH15
United States Endress+Hauser, Inc. 2350 Endress Place Greenwood, IN 46143 Tel: 317-535-7138 Sales: 888-ENDRESS Service: 800-642-8737 FAX: 317-535-8498 [email protected] www.us.endress.com
TI110R/24/ae/06.06 FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo
Canada Endress+Hauser Canada 1075 Sutton Drive Burlington, ON L7L 5Z8 Tel: 905-681-9292 800-668-3199 FAX: 905-681-9444 www.ca.endress.com
Mexico Endress+Hauser (Mexico) S.A. de C.V. Av. Gustavo Baz No. 43 Fracc. Bosques de Echegaray Naucalpan de Juárez, C.P. 53310, Estado de Mexico Mexico Tel: (52) 55 5371 1110 FAX: (52) 55 5371 1128 E-mail: [email protected]
Actuating elements
available also for Zone 21 and 22
Actuating elements
Features ■ easy installation ■ certified for zones 1 and 21 ■ high IP degree of protection
Technical data Impact resistance 7 Nm (lamp actuators 4 Nm) Enclosure material Enclosure thermoplast Seals EPDM (NBR)
Description BARTEC offers a variety of actuator versions and options for the local ComEx control and indicating units. All actuating elements are of high-quality thermoplast and correspond to protection class IP 66/IP 67. Useful accessories complete the actuating elements. For offshore applications special oil-resistant attachments are available.
Protection class IP 66/IP 67
Explosion protection Ex protection type II 2GD EEx e II Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1 Certification PTB 00 ATEX 3114 U UL E184198
03-0330-0191-02/06-BCS-A200865/1E
Ambient temperature (-55 °C to +70 °C) -20 °C to +70 °C for Zone 21 and 22
10
Actuating elements
available also for Zone 21 and 22
Selection chart Illustration
Dimensions
Order no.
Description Position selector switch black with protective collar, lockable* only for switch module (2-pole)
for ComEx enclosure 20.5
34
Ø 65
M30 x 1.5
26
0-I
for ComEx enclosure for control unit (flat)
05-0003-007101 05-0003-007001
I - II
for ComEx enclosure for control unit (flat)
05-0003-007102 05-0003-007002
I - 0 - II
for ComEx enclosure for control unit
05-0003-007303 05-0003-007203
HAND - 0 - AUTO
for ComEx enclosure for control unit (flat)
05-0003-007324 05-0003-007224
MAN - 0 - AUTO
for ComEx enclosure for control unit (flat)
05-0003-007325 05-0003-007225
for Control unit ComEx 316L 20.5
*In principle, there are 3 boreholes in the protective collar to fit padlocks. If no further details are given on which switching position is to be locked, the boreholes are provided in the switch position 0 (I), other to customer specifications.
Ø 65
M30 x 1.5
34 26
for ComEx enclosure 39
20
05-0003-007500
For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
05-0003-007500BN
Double push button actuator for control units with rubber membrane, supplied with five loose coloured centre discs: red, green, yellow, white, black
05-0003-007400
For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
05-0003-007400BN
Pushbutton with rubber membrane, supplied with five loose coloured centre discs: red, green, yellow, white, black Weight: 24 g
05-0003-000700
For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
05-0003-000700BN
Mushroom pushbutton black, Weight: 24 g
05-0003-001800
For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
05-0003-001800BN
75
M30 x 1.5
20
Double push button actuator for ComEx enclosures with rubber membrane, supplied with five loose coloured centre discs: red, green, yellow, white, black
1-6
for Control unit ComEx 316L 20
39
75
M30 x 1.5
20
1-6
20
1-6
6
38
M 30x1.5
20
ø 40 ø 38
03-0330-0191-02/06-BCS-A200865/2E
ø 38
M 30x1.5
13
1-6
6
11
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and Zone 22 Illustration
Dimensions
38
ø 40 ø 38
M30 x 1.5
20
Description
Order no.
Emergency Stop DIN EN 60204 T1/VDE 0113 T1 and EN 60947-5-1/DIN VDE 0660 T200, pushbutton marked "NOT-AUS EMERGENCY STOP" "Pull to Release"
05-0003-000800
6
1-6
Weight: 46 g
26 13
M 30x1.5
20
ø 38
20
6
For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
05-0003-000800BN
Locking mushroom pushbutton Push in without key, unlock with key; Lock (DOM) 4 A 185 Weight: 70 g
05-0003-001203
For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
05-0003-001203BN
Lock (DOM) lockable in both positions, key retractable in both positions, lock 4 A 185
05-0003-001200 *05-0003-001200BN
1-6
20
ø 38
M 30x1.5
26 13
6
1-6
lockable in the depressed position, key retractable in the depressed position, lock 4 A 185
05-0003-001201 *05-0003-001201BN
lockable in the initial position, key retractable in the initial position, lock 4 A 185 (tip lock)
05-0003-001202 *05-0003-001202BN
Weight: 69 g *For offshore applications (with NBR seal) 31
Lock (RONIS) Lock: 455 Lockable in both positions Key retractable in both positions
ø 38
M30 x 1.5
20
1-6
30
5
For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
90°
ø 45
M 30x1.5
20
1-6
20
6 M 30x1.5
ø 45
03-0330-0191-11/05-BCS-A200865/3E
30
1-6
0°
60
°
05-0003-006100BN
Position selector switch BS 2 positions 0 - I, black, for control unit 90° turned for ComEx
05-0003-000900BS 05-0003-000901BS
Position selector switch BS 3 positions I - 0 - II, black, I + II latchning; for control unit 90° turned for ComEx
05-0003-001000BS 05-0003-001100BS
I + II momentary contact; for control unit 90° turned for ComEx
05-0003-001001BS 05-0003-001101BS
I - latching, II - latching; for control unit 90° turned for ComEx
05-0003-001002BS 05-0003-001102BS
I - momentary contact; II - latching; for control unit 90° turned for ComEx
05-0003-001003BS 05-0003-001103BS
Weight: 33 g *For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
12
05-0003-006100
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and Zone 22 Illustration
Dimensions
20
6
60
0°
ø 38
°
Position selector switch 3 positions I - 0 - II, black, I + II latching; for control unit 90° turned for ComEx
M 30x1.5
28 13
Description
I + II momentary-contact; for control unit
6 1-6
90° turned for ComEx I - latching, II - momentary-contact; for control box, turned 90° for ComEx I - momentary-contact; II - latching; for control box, turned 90° for ComEx
Order no.
05-0003-001000 *05-0003-001000BN 05-0003-001100 *05-0003-001100BN 05-0003-001001 *05-0003-001001BN 05-0003-001101 *05-0003-001101BN 05-0003-001002 *05-0003-001002BN 05-0003-001102 *05-0003-001102BN 05-0003-001003 *05-0003-001003BN 05-0003-001103 *05-0003-001103BN
Weight: 33 g *For offshore applications (with NBR seal) 28 13
90°
ø 38
M 30x1.5
20
Position selector switch 2 positions 0 - I, black for control unit 90° turned for ComEx Weight: 33 g
6
*For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
1-6
Lamp Weight: 19 g red 22
green M 30x1.5
20
ø 38
05-0003-000900 *05-0003-000900BN 05-0003-000901 *05-0003-000901BN
1-6
yellow with blue
05-0003-001300 *05-0003-001300BN 05-0003-001400 *05-0003-001400BN 05-0003-001500 *05-0003-001500BN 05-0003-001600 *05-0003-001600BN 05-0003-001700 *05-0003-001700BN
*For offshore applications (with NBR seal) Illuminated button actuator Weight: 19 g red 14.5 20 13 ø 38
M 30x1.5
green yellow white
1-6
blue
05-0003-006500 *05-0003-006500BN 05-0003-006600 *05-0003-006600BN 05-0003-006700 *05-0003-006700BN 05-0003-006800 *05-0003-006800BN 05-0003-006900 *05-0003-006900BN
*For offshore applications (with NBR seal) 26
Potentiometer actuator with scale gradation 0-10 (durable and abrasion-resistant), black
05-0003-007600
Weight: 28 g *For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
05-0003-007600BN
Blanking plug to cover unused holes in the front panel
05-0003-001900
1-6
20
M 30x1.5
17 13 ø 38
03-0330-0191-11/05-BCS-A200865/4E
M30 x 1.5
20
Weight: 20 g For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
05-0003-001900BN
1-6
13
Actuating elements accessories Selection chart Illustration
Description
Order no.
Fixing nut
05-1138-0009
M 30 to fix the actuating elements in the mounting wall of enclosure resp. in the enclosure
Printed pushbutton labels
05-0091-0019
6 loose pushbutton labels 1 x green marked START, ON, I 1 x red marked STOP, OFF, O
Spanner
05-1191-0001
Label holder
05-0044-0001
Label holder for actuating elements with label insert
03-5412-0056
Contrast plate
03-5412-0057
for Emergency/Off impact switch yellow ∅ 90 mm
Label
03-3600-0021
unmarked, for device information
Marking tag
05-1105-0020
for an additional label,
03-0330-0191-11/05-BCS-A200865/5E
for all actuating elements
Label (without marking)
Examples I
II
HAND
AUTO
0
II
AUTO
MANU
DOWN
DROP
0
LIFT
AUTO
UP
0
DOWN
UP HAND
28
0
for marking tag Labelling to your specifications (see examples)
03-5412-0060
Actuating elements accessories Selection chart Illustration
Description
Order no.
ComEx flange set
05-0091-0046
for the connection of two ComEx enclosures includes 1 threaded sleeve, 1 lock nut and 1 O-ring
Locking device
05-0037-0007
(without padlock) for ComEx enclosure NIRO frame, transparent hood of high-quality thermoplast
Locking device
05-0037-0006
(without padlock) for control boxes NIRO frame, transparent hood of high-quality thermoplast
Protective metal shroud
05-0032-0009
for emergency stop actuating element to prevent accidental switching
External earth stud
05-0012-0124
for outside-connection
UL adapter
03-0330-0191-11/05-BCS-A200865/6E
tested adapter for ComEx enclosure with NPT internal thread Thread 1/2'' NPT
05-0004-0009
Thread 3/4'' NPT
05-0004-0010
Earth plate ComEx for earthing of metal cable glands Thread 1 x M20
05-0012-0114
Thread 2 x M20
05-0012-0115
Thread 1 x M25
05-0012-0116 29
Switch module for local control stations
Switch module for panel-mounted installation with terminals
Explosion protection
Protection class Switch module IP 66 in conjunction with actuator element and installed in an appropriate IP enclosure terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529) Rated insulation voltage 690 V Rated voltage 400 V
400 V
110 V
24 V
230 V
Dimensions
Ex protection type II 2G EEx de IIC I M2 EEx de I Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone1
37
46 57
Technical data
Certification PTB 99 ATEX 1043 U UL E184198
33.5
65
Ambient temperature -55 °C to +60 °C
Utilization category AC-12
AC-15
DC-13
DC-13
Selection chart
Rated operating currents 16 A
10 A
0.5 A
1A
10 A
Nominal currents Ithe 16 A/+40 °C, 11 A/+60 °C Contact options contacts with positive break operation (self cleaning) 1 NC and 1 NO or 2 NC or 2 NO
Type of contact
Code no.
2 NC
1
2 NO
Contact material AgSnO2
Mechanical life 106 switching cycles
1 NC + 1 NO 4
Storage-/transport temperature -55 °C to +70 °C
03-0330-0192-11/05-BCS-A200866/2E
Weight approx. 87 g Shock resistance DIN IEC 68 part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms
Code no.
Pushbutton
0700
Double push button actuator
7400
Emergency stop Not-Aus
0800
Selector switch 0 + I latching, 2 positions
0900
Selector switch I + II latching, 3 positions
1000
Selector switch I + II momentary-contact, 3 positions
1001
Selector switch I latching, II momentary-contact, 3 positions
1002
Selector switch I momentary-contact, II latching, 3 positions
1003
Mushroom pushbutton, black
1800
Lockable in both positions, DOM lock
1200
Lockable in the depressed position, DOM lock
1201
Lockable in the initial position, DOM lock
1202
Locking-type mushroom pushbutton
1203
Lockable in both positions, RONIS lock
6100
2
Enclosure material Thermoplastic Connection Terminals 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
Actuating element
Complete order no. Switch module without actuating element
07-3323-1
00
Actuating element Standard
05-0003-00
for Offshore
05-0003-00
Please enter code number.
36
BN
Switch module for installation on panel (front installation with connection cable)
Description As completely certified equipment, BARTEC modules with connection cable can be directly installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous areas. A high IP degree of protection can be maintained due to easy installation of the actuating elements in the control cabinet. The respective modules can be single-handedly installed to the actuating elements.
Features ■ self-cleaning contacts ■ positive break contacts ■ single-handed installation
Explosion protection
Technical data
Ex protection type II 2G EEx d IIC T6 Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1
Rated insulation voltage Ui = 690 V, only with corresponding core (e. g.: 750 V)
Certification PTB 00 ATEX 1092 X UL E184198
Ui = 400 V, If standard type corresponds with oelflex 100 Rated voltage 250 V 250 V
110 V
24 V
230 V
Utilization category AC-12
AC-15
DC-13
16 A
10 A
0.5 A
1A
Code no.
10 A
Nominal currents Ithe 16 A/+40 °C, 11 A/+60 °C Contact options contacts with positive break operation (self cleaning) 1 NC and 1 NO or 2 NC or 2 NO or 1 NC or 1 NO
1 GY
2 NO 2
1 NC + 1 NO
Pushbutton
0700
Double push button actuator
7400
Emergency stop NOT-AUS
0800
Selector switch 0 + I latching, 2 positions
0900
Selector switch I + II latching, 3 positions
1000
Selector switch I + II momentary-contact, 3 positions
1001
Selector switch I latching, II momentary-contact, 3 positions
1002
Selector switch I momentary-contact, II latching, 3 positions
1003
Mushroom pushbutton, black
1800
Lockable in both positions, DOM lock
1200
Lockable in the depressed position, DOM lock
1201
Lockable in the initial position, DOM lock
1202
Locking-type mushroom pushbutton
1203
Lockable in both positions, RONIS lock
6100
GY
1 NC 7
1 NO
Storage-/transport temperature -55 °C to +70 °C 03-0330-0192-11/05-BCS-A200866/3E
Code no.
4
Enclosure material Thermoplastic
Mechanical life 106 switching cycles
Actuating element
GY
Contact material AgSnO2
Connection flexible cord 4 x 1.5 mm² (∅ 9.1 mm) resp. 2 x 1.5 mm², (∅ 7.7 mm)
8
Weight approx. 160 g without cable Cable length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text
Complete order no.
Shock resistance DIN IEC 68 part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms
Actuating element Standard
Switch module without actuating element
Please enter code number.
07-3323-3
03*)
05-0003-00
for Offshore
6
104.5
Selection chart
2 NC
Rated operating currents
88
Ambient temperature -40 °C to +60 °C (-55 °C on request)
Type of contact
DC-13
37 35.5
46
Protection class Switch module IP 67 in conjunction with actuator element
Dimensions
05-0003-00 *)
Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
BN
Lamp module for local control stations
Lamp module for panel-mounted installation with terminals
Rated insulation voltage 300 V Rated operating voltage AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C) Power consumption 105 running hours
65
37
46 57
Protection class Lamp module IP 66/67 in conjunction with actuator and installation in an appropriate IP enclosure Terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529)
Dimensions
Explosion protection
ø 19
Technical data
37
Lamp module for installation on panel (front installation with connection cable)
Description As completely certified equipment, BARTEC modules with connection cable can be directly installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous areas. A high IP degree of protection can be maintained due to easy installation of the actuating elements in the control cabinet. The respective modules can be single-handedly installed to the actuating elements.
Features ■ long service life ■ illumination 180° ■ brilliant colours
Ex protection type II 2G EEx d IIC T6 Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1
Rated insulation voltage 300 V
Certification PTB 97 ATEX 1065 X UL E184198
120
37 35.5
88
ø 19
Protection class Lamp module IP 67 in conjunction with actuator element
Rated operating voltage AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C)
Dimensions
Explosion protection
46
Technical data
136.5
Ambient temperature -40 °C to +50 °C (-55 °C on request)
Power consumption 105 running hours Storage-/transport temperature -55 °C to +70 °C Weight approx. 180 g without cable Mounting by bayonet lock Cable length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text
Complete order no. Lamp module without actuating element Actuating element Standard
05-0003-0001
00
for Offshore
05-0003-0001
00BN
Please enter code number. *)
Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
03-0330-0192-11/05-BCS-A200866/6E
Shock resistance DIN IEC 68 part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms
Note The connection cable for lamp modules must be installed in a way which ensures that no capacitive influence (voltage transmission) is possible through lines routed in parallel.
7
Illuminated button for local control stations
Illuminated button for panel-mounted installation with terminals
Protection class Illuminated button IP 66/67 in conjunction with actuating element and installation in an appropriate enclosure Terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529)
Dimensions
Explosion protection Ex protection type II 2G EEx de IIC I M2 EEx de I Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1 Certification PTB 97 ATEX 1064 U UL E184198
Rated operating voltage AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C)
Ambient temperature -55 °C to +50 °C +60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V)
65
ø 19
Rated insulation voltage 300 V
37
46 57
Technical data
90
33.5
Power consumption 105 switching cycles
red 7
Nominal current AC 5 A
Electrical life >105 running hours
Code no.
1 NC
■ Contact element
Contacts 1 NC or 1 NO as snap switch element
Colour actuator Code no.
Colour LED
Complete order no. Illuminated button without actuating element
07-3363-1
0
Actuating element Standard
05-0003-006
00
for Offshore
05-0003-006
00BN
Please enter code number.
Illuminated button for installation on panel (front installation with connection cable)
Description As completely certified equipment, BARTEC modules with connection cable can be directly installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous areas. A high IP degree of protection can be maintained due to easy installation of the actuating elements in the control cabinet. The respective modules can be single-handedly installed to the actuating elements.
Features ■ high service life ■ brilliant colours ■ single-handed installation
Technical data
Ex protection type II 2G EEx d IIC T6 Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1
Rated insulation voltage 300 V
Certification PTB 97 ATEX 1065 X UL E184198
114
37 35.5
88
46
Protection class Illuminated button IP 66/67 in conjunction with actuating element
Rated operating voltage AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C)
Dimensions
Explosion protection
Ambient temperature -40 °C to +50 °C +60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V) -55 °C on request
131
Power consumption 105 running hours
red 7
Nominal current AC 5 A
Connection flexible cable 4 x 0.75 mm2 (ø 7.2 mm)
Code no.
1 NC
Nominal voltage AC 250 V
Contacts 1 NC or 1 NO as snap switch element
Colour actuator Code no.
Colour LED
GY
Complete order no. Illuminated button without actuating element
07-3363-3
3*)
Mechanical life >105 switching cycles
Actuating element Standard
05-0003-006
00
Storage and transport temperature -55 °C to +70 °C
for Offshore
05-0003-006
00BN
Weight approx. 200 g without cable
Please enter code number. *)
Cable length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text Mounting by bayonet lock Shock resistance DIN IEC 68 Part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms 8
Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
Note The connection cable for illuminated buttons must be installed in a way which ensures that no capacitive influence (voltage transmission) is possible through lines routed in parallel.
Potentiometer for installation on panel (front installation with connection cable)
Description
Features ■ high end stop torque ■ high IP degree of protection ■ single-handed installation
Protection class Potentiometer IP 66/67 in conjunction with actuating element Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V, only with corresponding cable Ui = 400 V, corresponds to standard version with oilflex 100 Max. rated operating voltage AC/DC 320 V
Explosion protection (with connection cable)
Dimensions 88
37 35.5
Ex protection type II 2G EEx d IIC T6 Certification PTB 05 ATEX 1065 X
46
Technical data
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC modules with connection cable can be directly installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous areas. A high IP degree of protection can be maintained due to easy installation of the actuating elements in the control cabinet. The respective modules can be single-handedly installed to the actuating elements.
Ambient temperature -40 °C to +60 °C (-55 °C on request)
104.5
Resistance 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ Characteristic curve linear Resistance tolerance ± 20 %
Selection chart Wiring diagram
Power consumption max. 1 W Resistance material carbon layer on ceramics Rotation range mech. 285° -5° electr. effective approx. 250° Torque (beginning) 0.5 to 1.5 Ncm Torque (end stop) > 100 Ncm Enclosure material Thermoplastic Connection flexible cable 3 x 0.75 mm²
Code no.
Resistance value
1 kΩ
4
2.2 kΩ
5
4.7 kΩ
6
10 kΩ
7
Other resistances on request.
Complete order no. Potentiometer without actuating element
07-3373-3D
3*)
Please enter code number. *) Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
Actuating element
Order no.
Standard (Scale 1-10)
05-0003-007600
for Offshore (Scale 1-10)
05-0003-007600BN
Mechanical life 25000 sinusoidal cycles Storage/transport temperature -55 °C to +70 °C
03-0330-0426-02/06-BCS-A240844E
Weight approx. 240 g with 1 m cable Cable length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text
Notes for installation and inspection: At rated voltage: < AC 40 V/< DC 120 V (protection low voltage in accordance with VDE 0100 T. 410) potentiometer drive shaft can be operated without actuating element. At rated voltage: > AC 40 V to max. AC/DC 320 V potentiometer drive shaft can only be operated with actuating element or has to be deenergized. 9
Potentiometer for local control stations
Potentiometer for panel-mounted installation with terminals
Protection class Potentiometer IP 66/67 in conjunction with actuator element and installed in an appropriate IP enclosure Terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529) Rated insulation voltage 500 V
Explosion protection
Dimensions
Ex protection type II 2G EEx de IIC I M2 EEx de I
37
Certification PTB 05 ATEX 1064 U
46 57
Technical data
Ambient temperature -55 °C to +60 °C
Max. rated voltage AC/DC 320 V
33.5
65
Resistance 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ Curve shape linear Resistance tolerance ± 20 %
Selection chart Wiring diagram
Rated output max. 1 W Resistor material carbon film on ceramics Rotation mech. 285° -5° electr. about 250°
1 kΩ
4
2.2 kΩ
5
4.7 kΩ
6
10 kΩ
7
Other resistances on request.
Torgue (beginning) 0.5 to 1.5 Ncm
Complete order no.
Torgue (end stop) > 100 Ncm
Potentiometer without actuating element
Enclosure material Thermoplastic Connection Double terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
Code no.
Resistance
07-3373-1D
0
Please enter code number.
Actuating element Standard (scale 1-10)
Order no. 05-0003-007600
For Offshore (scale 1-10)
Order no. 05-0003-007600BN
03-0330-0427-02/06-BCS-A240845E
Mechanical life 25000 sinusoidal cycles Storage/transport temperature -55 °C to +70 °C Weight approx. 88 g
Notes for installation and inspection: At rated voltage: < AC 40 V/< DC 120 V (protection low voltage in accordance with VDE 0100 T. 410) potentiometer drive shaft can be operated without actuating element. At rated voltage: > AC 40 V to max. AC/DC 320 V potentiometer drive shaft can only be operated with actuating element or has to be deenergized. 39
2:
5:
SYS19: BASE2
PDFINFO
50:
95:
98:
JOB: CRMAIN06-0428-6 Name: 5C-428
5C
100: DATE: JAN 19 2006
Time: 5:25:03 PM Operator: GK COLOR: CMYK
Dimensions Pg. 430 Factory sealed enclosures are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: ɀ to prevent arcing of enclosed device from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure ɀ in industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust ɀ in non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required ɀ in conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors Manual motor starting switch enclosures are used: ɀ for manual starting of small ac or dc motors ɀ to provide manual starting and stopping and, in the case of units with heaters, motor running protection
Features: Factory sealed devices have many distinct advantages: ɀ reduce installation problems ɀ eliminate external seals ɀ lower installation costs ɀ improve safety ɀ are used with general purpose snap and pushbutton type switches ɀ standard neoprene covers for front operated pushbuttons. Prevents accumulation of dirt and entrance of water around operating shafts ɀ mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings ɀ large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies ɀ lockout provisions on front operated push button (marked ‘‘STOP’’ and ‘‘OFF’’) and selector switch covers ɀ lockout hole for padlock having 1⁄4⍯ hasp is provided when used with covers for front lever and side rocker type operation ɀ close tolerances in machining of wide, mating flanges and journalled shafts and bearings for front button operation, produces flametightness of enclosure joints ɀ on enclosures with front lever and side rocker type operating handles, threaded type shafts and bushings are used to ensure flametightness ɀ dead end (EFS or EDS) or through feed (EFSC or EDSC) hubs – 1⁄2⍯ to 1⍯ sizes
ɀ Shafts – stainless steel ɀ Shaft bushings – stainless steel ɀ Rocker handle and pushbutton guards – type 6/6 nylon ɀ Sealing enclosures – copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes: Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint ɀ Copper-free aluminum – natural ɀ Type 6/6 nylon – black ɀ Stainless steel – natural
ɀ NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Class II, Division 1, Groups E,F,G Class II, Division 2, Groups F,G Class III ɀ NEMA/EEMAC: 3,7B*CD,9EFG ɀ UL Standard: 894, 698 ɀ CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Options: The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to Cat. No.
Suffix to be Added to Cat. #
Description
Emergency ‘‘Stop’’ button (momentary) – front operated red mushroom button . . . . . . . . . . S111 Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton cover (standard on buttons marked ‘‘OFF’’ and ‘‘STOP’’) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S153 For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S300 Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counter-clockwise operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S635 Bodies and covers (single and two gang units) – copper-free aluminum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA Where indicated in the catalog listings, EDS units suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group B usage can be supplied, add suffix - GB, EFS units are suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group B as standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GB Maintained contact mushroom head with lockout and guard. Maximum one per cover and cannot be used with a pilot light with a transformer or another standard pushbutton.. . S769
EDS bodies and factory sealed cover and device sub-assemblies are available for field assembly (see pages 394 to 396).
ɀ Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy; copper-free aluminum. ɀ Front operated pushbutton and pilot light covers – Feraloy iron alloy ɀ Side operated type pushbutton covers – copper-free aluminum
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:5C:428)) CH0 0 5 C- 0
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations
Certifications and Compliances:
Suffix S769
Standard Materials:
428
Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Cl. III NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG
EFS and EDS Factory Sealed Control Devices and Manual Motor Starting Switches
Application:
TCP: 15001
US: 1-866-764-5454
* See Options: suffix GB
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Copyright© 2006 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
Zoom: 100
2:
5:
SYS19: BASE2
PDFINFO
50:
95:
98:
100:
JOB: CRMAIN06-0439-3 Name: 5C-439
DATE: JAN 19 2006
Time: 5:25:16 PM Operator: RB
EDS Factory Sealed General Use Snap Switches Dimensions Pg. 430
EDSC2129
COLOR: CMYK
TCP: 15001
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Cl. III NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG
Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations
5C
EDS2229
General Use Snap Switch – Front Operated Single Gang 277VAC§ 20 20 20 20
Dead End Cat. # EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2130 EDS2140
20 20 20 20
EDS3129 EDS318 EDS3130 EDS3140
EDSC3129† EDSC318† EDSC3130 EDSC3140
Amperes
Hub Size 3⁄4 3⁄4 3⁄4 3⁄4
Style† 1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-way
120VAC§ 20 20 20 20
1 1 1 1
1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-way
20 20 20 20
Two Gang ‡
Through Feed Cat. # EDSC2129† EDSC218† EDSC2130 EDSC2140
Dead End Cat. # EDS2229 EDS2230 EDS3229 EDS328 EDS3230 EDS3240
Through Feed Cat. # EDSC2229† EDSC228† EDSC2230 EDSC2240 EDSC3229† EDSC328† EDSC3230 EDSC3240
† ON-OFF standard marking for 1-pole and 2-pole units. ‡ Combinations of switches can be furnished. § AC rated switches are tested for resistive, inductive and tungsten filament loads up to the full current rating and for motor loads up to 80% of the ampere rating. * Class I, Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11⁄2⍯ of each conduit opening in Division 1. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory.
US: 1-866-764-5454
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:5C:439)) CH0 0 5 C- 9
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Copyright© 2006 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
439
Zoom: 100
2:
5:
SYS19: BASE2
PDFINFO
50:
95:
98:
JOB: CRMAIN06-0556-1 Name: 2A-556
2A
100: DATE: JAN 19 2006
Time: 5:35:18 PM Operator: RB
with General Use Snap Switches Front Operated
EDS and EFD enclosures are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: ɀ to prevent arcing of enclosed switch from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure ɀ in industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust ɀ in non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required
Features: ɀ Small and compact in design. ɀ Used with snap switches. ɀ Mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings. ɀ Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies. ɀ Lockout hole for padlock having 1⁄4⍯ hasp is provided. ɀ Threaded type shafts and bushings are used to insure flametightness.
Standard Materials: ɀ Bodies and covers – Feraloy® iron alloy ɀ Shafts – stainless steel ɀ Shaft bushings – stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
TCP: 15001
Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*C,D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Cl. III NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG,12
EDS and EFD Enclosures
Application:
COLOR: CMYK
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations
Certifications and Compliances: ɀ NEC/CEC: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Class II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Class III ɀ NEMA/EEMAC: 3,7B*CD,9EFG,12 ɀ UL Standard: 894 ɀ CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
EDS Enclosed Snap Switch
Options: Suffix to be Added to Encl. Cat. #
Description ɀ Two or three gang bodies can be supplied with combinations of devices listed for one gang enclosures . . . . Refer to modular listing, section 4C ɀ Class I Group B, NEMA 7B – see listing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GB ɀ Flush wall mounting cover with 1⁄2⍯ overhang – single gang only – dull black instrument finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S173 Complies with U.L. snap switch test requirements as follows: Type of Test Overload
Non-Inductive Endurance Inductive Endurance Tungsten Filament Lamp Endurance Temperature Rise Dielectric Withstand
AC-Rated (only) Switch Rated Amp. +380% Power Factor .40-.50 100 cycles, 6-10 cycles per minute 10,000 cycles, 18-24 cycles per minute at rated current – .98 min. P.F. 10,000 cycles, 18-24 cycles per minute – .75-.80 P.F. 10,000 cycles, 6-10 cycles per minute at rated current and 120 volts Not to exceed 30°C 1500 volts
ɀ Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint ɀ Stainless steel – natural
Dimensions† (in inches) Hub Size 3⁄4 1
† Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. * See suffix GB.
556
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:2A:556)) CH0 0 2 A - 4
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Copyright© 2006 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
Dim. ‘‘h’’
Dim. ‘‘l’’
7⁄8
13⁄16
1
15⁄16
Zoom: 100
2:
5:
SYS19: BASE2
PDFINFO
50:
95:
98:
100:
JOB: CRMAIN06-0557-6 Name: 2A-557
DATE: JAN 19 2006
Time: 5:35:22 PM Operator: RB
EDS and EFD Enclosures with General Use Snap Switches Front Operated Single Gang and Two Gang
Amperes§
Through Feed Cat. #
Style
120VAC
277VAC
3⁄4
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 3-way 4-way
20 20 ‡ 20 20
20 20 ‡ 20 20
EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2123 EDS2130 EDS2140
EDSC2129† EDSC218† EDSC2123 EDSC2130 EDSC2140
1 1 1 1 1
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 3-way 4-way
20 20 ‡ 20 20
20 20 ‡ 20 20
EDS3129 EDS318 EDS3123 EDS3130 EDS3140
EDSC3129† EDSC318† EDSC3123 EDSC3130 EDSC3140
1 1 1
1-pole 2-pole 3-way
30 30 30
30 30 30
EFD3591 EFD3593 EFD3594
EFDC3591† EFDC3593† EFDC3594
3⁄4 3⁄4
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations
2A
Two Gangɍ
Dead End Cat. #
3⁄4
Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100
Through feed
Single Gang
3⁄4
TCP: 15001
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Cl. III NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG,12
Dead end
Hub Size
COLOR: CMYK
Dead End Cat. # EDS2229 EDS2230 EDS3229 EDS328 EDS3230 EDS3240 EFD3691 EFD3694
Through Feed Cat. # EDSC2229† EDSC228† EDSC2223 EDSC2230 EDSC2240 EDSC3229† EDSC328† EDSC3223 EDSC3230 EDSC3240 EFDC3691† EFDC3693† EFDC3694
*Class I, Group B: All units listed on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No.. Example: EDS2129-GB. Seals must be installed within 11⁄2⍯ of each conduit opening for Group B usage.
§ See table on page 556 for AC-rated switch information. † ON-OFF standard marking for 1-pole and 2-pole units ‡ 15A, 125 VAC; 10A, 250 VAC ɍ Combinations of switches can be furnished.
US: 1-866-764-5454
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:2A:557)) CH0 0 2 A - 5
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Copyright© 2006 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
557
Zoom: 100
078 9 54 4 3
6!74"96"23"8##$ !% 4" "4842$"&' ()*+)4 , - .4" ' 1/ ! &4"2##2 !0(1)%2)" 43 453678 9 :; "
